Test Bank & Solution Manual for Responsive Web Design with HTML 5 & CSS 9th Edition by Ace Test Banks

Test Bank & Solution Manual for Responsive Web Design with HTML 5 & CSS 9th Edition

richard@qwconsultancy.com

1|Pa ge

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 1 of 13

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design A Guide to this Instructor’s Manual: We have designed this Instructor’s Manual to supplement and enhance your teaching experience through classroom activities and a cohesive chapter summary. This document is organized chronologically, using the same heading in red that you see in the textbook. Under each heading, you will find (in order) Lecture Notes that summarize the section; Figures and Boxes found in the section, if any; Teacher Tips; Classroom Activities; and Lab Activities. Pay special attention to teaching tips and activities geared toward quizzing your students, enhancing their critical thinking skills, and encouraging experimentation within the software.

Table of Contents Chapter Objectives HTML 2: Introduction HTML 3: Exploring the Internet HTML 11: Planning a Website HTML 21: Understanding the Basics of HTML HTML 24: Understanding the Role of Other Web Programming Languages HTML 25: Using Web Authoring Tools HTML 30: Creating a Basic Webpage End of Chapter Material Glossary of Key Terms

1 2 2 4 6 8 9 10 11 12

Chapter Objectives Students will have mastered the material in Chapter 1 when they can: ⚫ Define the Internet and associated key ⚫ Design for accessibility terms ⚫ Design for multiplatform display ⚫ Recognize Internet protocols ⚫ Define Hypertext Markup Language ⚫ Discuss web browsers and identify their (HTML) and HTML elements main features ⚫ Recognize HTML versions and web ⚫ Describe the types and purposes of websites programming languages ⚫ Plan a website for a target audience ⚫ Identify web authoring tools ⚫ Define a wireframe and a site map ⚫ Download and use a web authoring tool ⚫ Explain how websites use graphics, ⚫ Create and view a basic HTML webpage navigation tools, typography, and color

HTML 2: Introduction LECTURE NOTES • Introduce the Internet as the world's largest network

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual • • •

Page 2 of 13

Introduce some basics about the Internet and web Mention that the Internet and web follow rules that allow computers to communicate Review the roadmap activities used to create a webpage

PROJECT: Create a Basic Webpage The project in this chapter follows general guidelines and uses a text editor to create the webpage shown in Figure 1–1. Explain that people and organizations create webpages to attract attention to information such as products, services, multimedia, news, and research. Although webpages display content including text, drawings, photos, animations, videos, and links to other webpages, they are created as documents containing only text. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Group Activity: Explain that the Internet is more than just the World Wide Web; it also includes FTP (File Transfer Protocol), texting, VoIP, and email technologies, among other things. Survey students about their use of the range of Internet technologies. 2. Quick Quiz: 1) How many webpages are currently available on the World Wide Web? (Answer: Billions of webpages) FIGURE: 1-1

HTML 3: Exploring the Internet LECTURE NOTES • Define the Internet and use Figure 1-2 to illustrate the connections that support the Internet • Define node, network, data lines, Internet of Things, Internet service provider (ISP), and Internet backbone • Define World Wide Web (WWW), webpages, website, and a home page using Figure 1-3 • Define hyperlink and use Figure 1-4 to illustrate various types of links • Define protocols and give an overview of the types of Internet protocols such as Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP), File Transfer Protocol (FTP), and Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) • Define a server and use Figure 1-5 to illustrate the communication between a server and a client • Explain the use of the Domain Name System (DNS) • Explain the purpose of a web browser • Use Table 1-1 to discuss the features of Google Chrome • Review the different types of websites, including Internet, intranet, and extranet FIGURES: 1-2, 1-3, 1-4, 1-5, 1-6, 1-7, 1-8, 1-9 TABLE: 1-1

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 3 of 13

BOXES: 1. BTW: WhatIsMyIPAddress.com. You can look up the IP address for any domain using WhatIsMyIPAddress.com. 2. BTW: Apple Safari. Apple Safari is only available for download on Apple devices, including iPhones and Mac computers. It previously ran on the Windows operating system, but as of 2018, Apple no longer offers Safari for Windows. 3. BTW: Browser Interface Updates. The user interface of a browser is updated regularly. If you are using Google Chrome, it may look slightly different from the figures due to recent updates. 4. Consider This: What is the difference between a website’s home page and a web browser’s home page? A website’s home page is the default page displayed when you enter a web address such as www.cengage.com into the address bar of a browser. As mentioned earlier, this type of home page is the introductory page of a website and provides links to access other parts of the site. A browser also has a home page, which appears when you open a browser or tap or click the Home button in the browser window. You can specify any webpage as the default home page of a browser. 4. Consider This: How do you use a subdomain within a URL? A subdomain further identifies an area of content. For example, the URL support.microsoft.com indicates that support is a subdomain name used in the microsoft.com domain or server. This subdomain contains helpful information to support Microsoft products. TEACHER TIPS Explain that the Internet is a worldwide collection of computers linked together for use by businesses, governments, educational institutions, other organizations, and individuals using modems, phone lines, television cables, satellite links, fiber-optic connections, radio waves, and other communications devices and media. The following background information may be of interest to your students: Developed in 1960s by the Department of Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (ARPA), the Internet was originally called the ARPANET. Explain how an Internet Service Provider (ISP) is related to the Internet backbone. As you explain this relationship, mention how a home Internet connection is generally provided and how people connect to the Internet. As you explain the Internet protocols, mention that HTTP is the set of rules for transferring text, sound, video, graphic images, and other multimedia files on the web; the sole purpose of FTP; and how the TCP/IP protocols use a working mechanism similar to that of the postal system. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Class Discussion: Ask students about their experience using networks, perhaps as part of a computer class. Do they have a user account assigned to them on their school network? Explore students’ experience with ISPs. Do they have accounts with ISPs? Which ISPs? 2. Assign a Project: Ask students to research three different major ISPs on the web and to compare the services they provide, their pricing, etc.

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 4 of 13

3. Quick Quiz: 1) What is the Internet backbone? (Answer: A collection of high-speed data lines that connect major computer systems located around the world) 2) What is a web browser? (Answer: A program that interprets and displays webpages so you can view and interact with them)

HTML 11: Planning a Website LECTURE NOTES • Discuss the importance of designing a clear navigation system when planning and building a website • Identify the purpose of a website using an organization’s mission statement • Explain the significance of knowing the audience for a website and use Figure 1-10 to illustrate how a website must be designed by keeping its audience in mind • Explain responsive design by using Figure 1-11 to show how the responsive design of a website looks at desktop, tablet, and mobile screen sizes • Define a wireframe, and use Figure 1-12 to show a wireframe with its elements • Define a site map • Define linear, hierarchical, and webbed website structures using Figures 1-13, 1-14, 1-15, and 116 • Use Figure 1-17 to discuss the importance of using graphics in a webpage • Use Figure 1-18 to discuss navigation in a website • Use Figure 1-19 to discuss the importance of typography in enhancing the visual appeal of a website • Use Figure 1-20 to show how a color scheme must be used in a website • Discuss the need to create a website for viewing by a diverse audience • Define the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C) • Use Table 1-3 to list the key questions to ask when planning a website FIGURES: 1-10, 1-11, 1-12, 1-13, 1-14, 1-15, 1-16, 1-17, 1-18, 1-19, 1-20 TABLE: 1-2, 1-3 BOXES 1. Consider This: Can I redesign a desktop-only website for multiplatform display? Yes. If your audience is accustomed to the desktop-only website, retrofitting the website for tablet and mobile display screens makes sense because the site remains familiar to users. You also avoid building a new site from scratch and you can take advantage of design decisions such as color scheme and use media you have already acquired. However, depending on the site content and number of pages, redesigning may be a time-consuming process. 2. Consider This: What tools can I use to create a wireframe? You can use one of several free tools to create a wireframe, including Pencil Project, Mockplus, and Wireframe CC. You can also use drawing tools in Microsoft Word or PowerPoint or a pen and paper.

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 5 of 13

3. BTW: W3C. The mission of the W3C is “to lead the World Wide Web to its full potential by developing protocols and guidelines that ensure the long-term growth of the Web.” Information about the membership process is available at www.w3.org/consortium/membership. TEACHER TIPS Explain that the purpose of a commercial business website is related to the goal of selling products or services. Discuss the two approaches a business can take to use a website: it can use a website to sell products and services through e-commerce or it can use a website to generate leads and raise the public profile of the business. Discuss how to identify who will use a website and design it appropriately. Knowing the information that your target audience is searching for means you can design the site to focus on that information, which enhances the shopping and purchasing experience of your audience. Explain that a responsive design allows one to create a website that provides an optimal viewing experience across a range of devices. As users can access a website with computing devices ranging from desktop computers to laptops, tablets, and smartphones, a website designed using responsive design responds and adapts to the size of the screen on the visitor’s device by itself. Discuss the types of structures a website can use. A linear website structure connects webpages in a straight line and is appropriate if visitors should view the webpages in a specific order. In a variation of a linear website structure, each page can include a link to the home page of the website. A hierarchical website connects webpages in a treelike structure and it works well on a site with a main index or table of contents page that links to all other webpages. A webbed website structure has no set organization and visitors can move easily between pages, even if the pages are located in different sections of the website. A webbed structure works best on sites with information that does not need to be read in a specific order and pages that provide many navigation options. Mention that graphics add visual appeal to a webpage and enhance the visitor’s perception of a website’s products and services. The graphic communicates to the user the look and feel of a product. The smaller graphics below the primary graphic offer additional visual stimulation and provide an aesthetically pleasing balance to the page. These graphics are simple, yet effective in catching the user’s attention. Mention that the navigation of a website should be clear and concise. Each webpage should have a designated navigation area with links to other pages in the site. Also, instruct that incorporating a search box near the navigation area provides another avenue for customers to find the item they want. Indicate that the use of effective typography, or fonts and font styles, enhances the visual appeal of a website. Above all, the text must be legible or the website is useless. Typography also should promote the purpose and goal of the website. Mention that a limited number of coordinated colors that help promote the purpose and brand of a website must be selected. Instruct students to avoid a color combination such as a primary red

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 6 of 13

background with yellow text, which is hard on the eyes. Aim to strike a balance among the background color, text color, and the color that represents your brand. Finally, address accessibility and localization issues. A web designer should create pages for viewing by a diverse audience, including people with physical impairments and global users. To support an international audience, use generic icons that can be understood globally, avoid slang expressions in the content, and build simple pages that load quickly over low-speed connections. Also, mention that web standards, language specifications, and accessibility recommendations are developed and maintained by World Wide Web Consortium (W3C). CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Assign a Project: Ask students to compare the graphics and color schemes used in any three of their favorite sites. Alternately, assign three sites to students for this comparative analysis. 2. Assign a Project: Ask students to find three websites that use linear, hierarchical, and webbed structures. 3. Assign a Project: Ask students to compare the features and content of any three e-commerce sites. Alternately, assign three sites to students for this comparative analysis. 4. Group Activity: If possible, show students examples of a few websites on a computer, a tablet, and a smartphone and ask them to identify which websites use a responsive design.

HTML 21: Understanding the Basics of HTML LECTURE NOTES • Define Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) • Define HTML tags • Discuss the three components—the start tag, the content, and the end tag—of the most used HTML elements and use Figure 1-21 to show the anatomy of HTML elements in Notepad++ • Define attributes • Discuss empty, or void, tags • Discuss the technologies related to HTML such as Extensible Markup Language (XML) and Extensible Hypertext Markup Language (XHTML) • Discuss the elements available in HTML 5 and the benefits of HTML 5 over HTML FIGURES: 1-21, 1-22, 1-23

BOXES 1. BTW: Lowercase HTML Tags. Encourage students to use lowercase HTML tags as the convention for HTML 5 is to use all lowercase tags and it also conforms to the current W3C standard. 2. Consider This: What does the hr in <hr> mean? Prior to HTML 5, the hr meant horizontal rule or reference. It is now called a thematic break and is used to distinguish between various topics on a single webpage.

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 7 of 13

TEACHER TIPS Define HTML as an authoring language used to create documents for the web. Define tags as a set of special instructions to define the structure and layout of content in a webpage. A browser reads the HTML tags to determine how to display the webpage content on a screen. Because the HTML tags define or “mark up” the content on the webpage, HTML is considered a markup language rather than a traditional programming language. Explain that XML was introduced by W3C in 1998 to exchange and transport data. It works along with HTML by transporting web data obtained through an HTML webpage. Explain that XHTML is a rewritten version of HTML using XML and mention its primary benefit: it is more widely accepted on mobile device platforms. Introduce HTML 5 as the most recent version of HTML. Discuss the new elements in HTML 5 such as header, nav, main, and footer, also called structural elements as they define the structure of a webpage, which serve to better define the areas of a webpage. These new elements also are considered semantic HTML elements because they provide meaning about the content of the tags. Also, it is possible to incorporate audio and video with the use of <audio> and <video> tags. These new features reduce the need for browser plugins, which are small programs that let webpages play sounds or videos, for example. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Group Activity: If possible, display the HTML code for a simple webpage and explain to the students its various HTML elements. 2. Group Activity: If possible, show how audio and video are added in HTML 5 using the <audio> and <video> tags. 3. Assign a Project: Ask students to research the different HTML versions on the web and read about new features that have been introduced with each subsequent version. 4. Assign a Project: Ask students to change the width and height of images in a webpage using HTML attributes. 5. Quick Quiz: 1) The _____ tag in HTML is used to insert a horizontal line in a webpage. (Answer: <hr>, or horizontal rule) 2) Which is a markup language that does not replace HTML but works with HTML by transporting web data obtained through an HTML webpage? a) CSS b) XML c) DHTML d) XHTML (Answer: b) LAB ACTIVITIES 1. Ask students to create HTML code to insert two images vertically and resize their height and width

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 8 of 13

to 250px using HTML attributes. Also, a horizontal rule must appear between the two images.

HTML 24: Understanding the Role of Other Web Programming Languages LECTURE NOTES • Discuss the need for programming languages other than HTML • Discuss JavaScript along with its common uses • Define jQuery and its mission • Discuss PHP (Hypertext Preprocessor) • Discuss ASP (Active Server Pages) TEACHER TIPS Describe JavaScript as a popular client-side scripting language that is used to create interactivity within a web browser. Mention the common uses of JavaScript including creating popup windows and alert messages, displaying the current date, and validating form data. Webpages that contain JavaScript are named with an .htm or .html extension, just like a webpage without JavaScript. Explain that jQuery is a library of JavaScript programs designed for easy integration onto a webpage, and it makes it easy for web developers to add JavaScript to a webpage. Mention that the mission of the jQuery Foundation is to improve the open web, making it accessible for everyone, through the development and support of open-source software, and collaboration with the development community. Mention that PHP is an open-source server-side scripting language often used for common tasks such as writing to or querying a database located on a central server. Also, make the students aware that the result of the PHP script is often an HTML webpage that is sent back to the client and the pages that contain PHP scripts must have file names that end with the file extension .php. Mention that ASP is a server-side scripting technology from Microsoft used to accomplish many of the same server-side processing tasks as PHP and the pages that contain ASP scripts must have file names that end with the file extension .asp. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Quick Quiz: 1) What are the common uses for JavaScript? (Answer: Common uses for JavaScript include creating popup windows and alert messages, displaying the current date, and validating form data.)

HTML 25: Using Web Authoring Tools LECTURE NOTES • Define a text editor and give a few examples using Figures 1-24, 1-25, 1-26, and 1-27 • Define HTML editor • Define platform independence • Explain how to download and install a text editor

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual • •

Page 9 of 13

Define WYSIWYG editors and give an example using Figure 1-28 Describe popular online code editors using Figures 1-29 and 1-30

FIGURES: 1-24, 1-25, 1-26, 1-27, 1-28, 1-29, 1-30 TEACHER TIP Define a text editor as a program that allows one to enter, change, save, and print text, which includes HTML tags. Text editors do not typically have many advanced features, but they do allow you to develop HTML documents easily. Define an HTML editor as a program that provides basic text-editing functions, as well as more advanced features such as color-coding for various HTML tags, menus to insert HTML tags, and a spelling checker. Also, mention that HTML is platform independent, meaning an HTML file can be created, or coded, in Windows or Mac and then be viewed on any browser. Mention that Notepad++ is a free, open-source text editor that runs on Windows computers, and it is used to create files in several markup, scripting, and programming languages, including HTML, CSS, JavaScript, PHP, Java, C#, and Visual Basic. Programmer’s Notepad, similar to Notepad++, is another free, open-source text editor that can be used to create webpages. Instruct the students on how to download and install a text editor. Begin with accessing the website of a text editor, navigate the website to locate the download link, and download it. Open the downloaded file to begin the installation, follow the instructions given in the setup wizard, and run the text editor when finished. Define WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You Get) editors as the editors that provide a graphical user interface to design a webpage, as opposed to the blank page provided in a text editor used to write code. Also, mention that the WYSIWYG editors allow one to drag HTML elements onto the page while the editor writes the code. Give examples of WYSIWYG editors such as Adobe Dreamweaver and Microsoft Expression Web 4. Discuss Adobe Dreamweaver, mentioning that several types of web file formats can be developed with Dreamweaver, including HTML, CSS, JavaScript, and PHP, and it can be installed on a computer running Windows or macOS. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Quick Quiz: 1)What is a text editor? (Answer: A program that allows a user to enter, change, save, and print text, which includes HTML tags) 2)What is an HTML editor? (Answer: A program that provides basic text-editing functions, as well as more advanced features such as color-coding for various HTML tags, menus to insert HTML tags, and a spelling checker)

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 10 of 13

3)What is a WYSIWYG editor? (Answer: A program that provides a graphical user interface to design a webpage, as opposed to the blank page provided in a text editor used to write code) LAB ACTIVITIES 1. Ask students to use a search engine to identify a free WYSIWYG HTML editor and, if possible, to download and install it and experiment with its use.

HTML 30: Creating a Basic Webpage LECTURE NOTES • Introduce DOCTYPE • Discuss the basic tags used in HTML using Figure 1-31 • Define meta tag • Define Unicode Transformation Format (UTF) • Review the steps provided to create a webpage; the text uses Notepad++ to create an HTML document • Using Figures 1-41, 1-42, and 1-43, explain how the results may appear using different text editors FIGURES: 1-31, 1-32, 1-33, 1-34, 1-35, 1-36, 1-37. 1-38, 1-39, 1-40, 1-41, 1-42, 1-43 BOXES 1. BTW: <!DOCTYPE> Statement. Because the web includes billions of documents, a browser refers to the HTML version and type in the <!DOCTYPE> statement to display a webpage correctly. Previous versions of HTML had complicated <!DOCTYPE> statements. 2. Consider This: Do I have to indent certain lines of HTML code? Indenting lines of code is not required, but it helps improve the readability of the webpage. In Figure 1–31, Lines 4 and 5 are indented to clearly show the elements contained in the <head> and </head> tags. If the code included elements between the <body> and </body> tags, those lines could also be indented to make them easier to read. Using indents is a good web design practice. 3. Consider This: How do I use the touch keyboard with a touch screen? To display the on-screen touch keyboard, tap the Touch Keyboard button on the Windows taskbar. When finished using the touch keyboard, tap the X button on the touch keyboard to close the keyboard. TEACHER TIPS Introduce DOCTYPE as the first line of HTML code for all HTML webpages. All HTML5 webpages must begin with the HTML element <!DOCTYPE html>. Discuss all the basic HTML tags and instruct the placement of the tags in a webpage. The basic opening tag that appears just below <!DOCTYPE html> is <html> and the closing tag is </html>, which always appears on the last line of the webpage. The lang="en" contained within the opening html tag is an attribute that defines the type of language used (English). The opening head tag is <head> and the closing tag is </head>, which appears after the <html> tag. The text contained between <title> and </title> tags is displayed within the web browser tab; this tag appears after the

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 11 of 13

<head> tag. All text, images, links, and other content displayed on the webpage are included within the <body> and </body> tags, which should be placed after the </head> tag and closed before the </html> tag. Define a meta tag as a tag that contains information about the data on the webpage. Define UTF as a compressed format that allows computers to display and manipulate text. UTF-8 is standard for HTML 5 pages and is the preferred encoding standard for email and other applications. The encoding chosen is also important when validating a webpage. Discuss with the students how to create and view a webpage in a browser. Start by opening an editor such as Notepad++ and add a complete set of basic HTML tags with a title, say “My First Webpage,” and some text in the body, say “Welcome.” Save the document as index.hml; the file name “index” is the standard name of a home page. Finally, open this document using any browser and the created webpage will appear on the browser. LAB ACTIVITIES 1. Give the students some content and ask them to display that content in a web browser by creating an HTML document for it.

End of Chapter Material ▪

Chapter Summary provides a general survey of the material in the chapter. Students can use these pages to reinforce their achievement of the chapter objectives.

▪

The Apply Your Knowledge section includes short exercises and review questions that reinforce concepts and provide opportunities to practice skills.

▪

Extend Your Knowledge exercises allow students to expand their knowledge by solving practical problems and experimenting with new skills, using Help.

▪

In the Analyze, Correct, Improve exercises, students take the necessary steps to correct all the errors in a document and/or improve its design.

▪

The In the Lab activities solidify the concepts presented in the chapter with practical application.

▪

Thought-provoking Consider This: Your Turn exercises in each chapter exercise students’ minds and challenge them to construct creative solutions. These exercises are constructed to allow students to work independently and collaboratively.

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual Glossary of Key Terms • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Active Server Pages (ASP) (HTML 25) active white space (HTML 14) Adobe Dreamweaver (HTML 28) Atom (HTML 26) attributes (HTML 21) Brackets (HTML 27) browser (HTML 7) client-side scripting language (HTML 24) code (HTML 2) data lines (HTML 4) domain (HTML 9) Domain Name System (DNS) (HTML 7) electronic commerce (e-commerce) (HTML 10) empty (HTML 23) Extensible Hypertext Markup Language (XHTML) (HTML 24) Extensible Markup Language (XML) (HTML 24) extranet (HTML 10) File Transfer Protocol (FTP) (HTML 6) hierarchical (HTML 15) home page (HTML 5) HTML element (HTML 21) hyperlink (HTML 5) Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) (HTML 21) Hypertext Preprocessor (PHP) (HTML 25) Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) (HTML 6) Internet (HTML 3) Internet backbone (HTML 4) Internet of Things (HTML 4) Internet Protocol (IP) (HTML 7) Internet service provider (ISP) (HTML 4) Internet site (HTML 9) intranet (HTML 9) JavaScript (HTML 24) jQuery (HTML 25) Learning Management System (LMS) (HTML 10) linear (HTML 15) link (HTML 5) markup language (HTML 21) meta (HTML 31) network (HTML 4) node (HTML 4) Notepad++ (HTML 25) operable (HTML 20)

Page 12 of 13

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

paired (HTML 23) passive white space (HTML 14) perceivable (HTML 20) platform independent (HTML 25) protocol (HTML 6) responsive design (HTML 13) robust (HTML 21) server (HTML 6) server-side scripting language (HTML 25) site map (HTML 14) syntax (HTML 23) tags (HTML 21) text editor (HTML 25) TextMate (HTML 27) Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) (HTML 6) understandable (HTML 20) Unicode Transformation Format (UTF) (HTML 31) Uniform Resource Locator (URL) (HTML 9) void (HTML 23) web browser (HTML 7) web content (HTML 20) webpages (HTML 4) website (HTML 5) webbed (HTML 16) wireframe (HTML 14) World Wide Web (web) (HTML 4) World Wide Web Consortium (W3C) (HTML 20) WYSIWYG (HTML 28)

Top of Document

Page 13 of 13

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 1 of 10

Responsive Web Design with HTML 5 and CSS, 9TH Edition Chapter 2: Building a Webpage Template with HTML 5 A Guide to this Instructor’s Manual: We have designed this Instructor’s Manual to supplement and enhance your teaching experience through classroom activities and a cohesive chapter summary. This document is organized chronologically, using the same heading in red that you see in the textbook. Under each heading you will find (in order): Lecture Notes that summarize the section, Figures and Boxes found in the section, if any, Teacher Tips, Classroom Activities, and Lab Activities. Pay special attention to teaching tips and activities geared toward quizzing your students, enhancing their critical thinking skills, and encouraging experimentation within the software.

Table of Contents Chapter Objectives HTML 48: Introduction HTML 48: Project – Plan and Build a Website HTML 50: Designing a Website HTML 54: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements HTML 56: Creating a Webpage Template HTML 63: Using Symbol Entities HTML 66: Validating HTML Documents HTML 69: Creating a Home Page Using a Webpage Template End of Chapter Material Glossary of Key Terms

Chapter Objectives Students will have mastered the material in Chapter 2 when they can: ⚫ Explain how to manage website files ⚫ Describe and use HTML 5 semantic elements ⚫ Determine the elements to use when setting the structure of a webpage ⚫ Design and build a semantic wireframe ⚫ Create a webpage template ⚫ Insert comments in an HTML document ⚫ Add static content to a webpage template ⚫ Insert symbol codes and other character entities ⚫ Describe and use heading elements

2 2 2 2 3 5 6 7 7 9 10

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual ⚫ ⚫ ⚫ ⚫

Page 2 of 10

Describe the benefits of validating web documents Validate an HTML template Create a home page from an HTML template Add unique content to a webpage

HTML 48: Introduction LECTURE NOTES • Discuss the process of building a website from scratch and how it involves time and planning • Explain that some web designers have their own business and provide their services on contract to clients • Discuss the roles of web designers and stakeholders who work in large organizations • Define a template

HTML 48: Project — Plan and Build a Website LECTURE NOTES • Review the steps to be taken in a project, from the creation of a webpage using HTML through the enhancement of the webpage’s appearance, to its printing from the browser • Discuss the guidelines for planning and building the webpage template in Figure 2–1a to produce the home page shown in Figure 2–1b • Discuss the contents of the template, which includes code and text including the document title, header, navigation area, and footer, which is repeated on each page of the website • Explain the use of a roadmap to create website folders and templates, enter HTML5 semantic elements, add comments and content, validate the document, and create and view the homepage FIGURES: 2–1a, 2–1b TEACHER TIP Ask the students how a roadmap is used to identify general activities to be performed. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Class Discussion: Ask the students to discuss the accepted guidelines used to plan and build a website template. LAB ACTIVITY 1. Ask the students to illustrate how the abbreviated roadmap uses colors to indicate chapter progress.

HTML 50: Designing a Website LECTURE NOTES • Discuss the activities involved in designing a webpage • Review the needs of a business and website as given in Table 2–1 • Discuss a site map and its contents • Explain what a wireframe depicts

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual • • • • •

Page 3 of 10

Discuss the importance of the header, navigation or page links, primary content area, and the footer Explain that the semantic element provides meaning about the content provided on a webpage Discuss semantic elements used within a semantic wireframe to define the structure of a webpage Discuss file management and the different types of files that are used in websites Explain the process used to create the root folder and subfolders

FIGURES: 2–2, 2–3, 2–4, 2–5, 2–6 TABLE: 2–1 BOXES 1. CONSIDER THIS: What is the difference between a site map and a wireframe? TEACHER TIP Explain to the student that designing a website includes planning, articulating the website’s purpose, identifying the target audience, creating a site map and wireframe, selecting graphics and colors to use in the site, and determining whether to design for an optimal viewing experience across a range of devices. Explain that a site map indicates how the pages in a website relate to each other, and when creating a site map, it is necessary to know how many pages are to be included in the website. Discuss with the students that a wireframe depicts the layout of a webpage, including its major content areas. Ensure that the students understand the different parts of the webpage, such as the header, navigation area, primary page content, and the footer, and what information is placed in them. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Class Discussion: Have the students recall that a site map indicates how the pages in a website relate to each other. LAB ACTIVITY 1. Ask the students to create a website folder and subfolders while also documenting the steps taken to create them.

HTML 54: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements LECTURE NOTES • Describe the creation of a new HTML document by including the basic required HTML elements such as the html, head, and body elements • Discuss the contents included in the body element • Discuss the div element and describe how it was introduced in HTML 4.01 to divide a page into separate sections • Discuss that each div element has a unique name to distinguish it from other div elements on the page • Use Table 2–2 to outline the common HTML 5 semantic elements such as <header>...</header>, <nav>...</nav>, <main>...</main>,

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

• •

Page 4 of 10

<footer>...</footer>, <section>...</section>, <article>...</article>, and <aside>...</aside> Discuss that many professional web designers favor using the main element over the div element Discuss the header, nav, main, and footer elements

FIGURE: 2–7 TABLE: 2–2 BOXES 1. CONSIDER THIS: How can I find out whether my browser supports the new HTML 5 elements? TEACHER TIP Explain how to begin a new HTML document by adding to it the basic required HTML elements, such as the html, head, and body elements. Explain how the name of each tag, such as header, nav, main, and footer, reflects the purpose of the element. Also, ensure that the students understand the importance of the type of information that is to be entered in each of the sections. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Class Discussion: Have the students discuss the common semantic elements in HTML 5 and how they are useful while creating a webpage. 2. Class Discussion: Use figure 2–7 to identify the relationship between a coded webpage template with header, nav, main, and footer elements and the conceptual wireframe design of a webpage. 3. Quick Quiz 1) What does the nav element generally include? (Answer: The nav element usually includes links to other pages within the website.) 2) What content is found within the footer of a webpage? (Answer: Common content that is found within a webpage footer includes copyright information, contact information, and page links.) LAB ACTIVITY 1. Ask the students to create a coded webpage template and identify the header, nav, main, and footer elements and the conceptual wireframe design of the webpage. 2. Have the students add a logo, navigational links and content, copyright information, and contact information in the template that is created.

HTML 56: Creating a Webpage Template

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 5 of 10

LECTURE NOTES • Discuss the significance of using the same layout and a consistent color scheme, typography, and style of graphics among the pages of a website • Discuss the process that is used to create a webpage template • Discuss the HTML 5 semantic elements that are added to a webpage template • Discuss the process of adding a title to a webpage template • Discuss the importance of comments and how helpful they are • Explain the syntax used to add a comment • Explain the importance of the word wrap feature in Notepad++ • Explain the steps used to add comments to a webpage template • Discuss the purpose of heading elements and static content • Discuss the process of adding content to the header section FIGURES: 2–8, 2–9, 2–10, 2–11, 2–12, 2–13, 2–14, 2–15, 2–16, 2–17, 2–18, 2-19, 2-20 BOXES 1. BTW: Saving Your Work 2. BTW: Auto-Fill and Highlighting Features 3. BTW: Turning on Word Wrap 4. Consider This: What is the difference between a head element, a header element, and a heading element, and how do I know when to use them? 5. BTW: Wrapping Content TEACHER TIP Explain to the students how comments provide additional information about the HTML elements used to define the areas within the webpage. Explain the type of information they include, which is helpful if a designer has stopped working on a partially completed page and then returns to it later. Explain to the students the difference between static content and the information or content that is to be displayed in a browser. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Class Discussion: Have the students discuss the hallmark of a well-designed website. 2. Quick Quiz 1) What does word wrap do? (Answer: Word wrap causes text lines to break at the right edge of the window and appear on a new line, so all entered text is visible in the window.) 2) Will a blank line in a webpage template be noticeable when the page is displayed in a browser? (Answer: No. Browsers ignore blank lines when interpreting the code on the page.) 3) Do blank lines affect the HTML elements? (Answer: No. Inserting blank lines before or after HTML elements does not affect the structure of the webpage.)

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 6 of 10

LAB ACTIVITY 1. Ask the students to create a webpage template document. 2. Ask the students to add HTML 5 semantic elements to a webpage template. 3. Ask the students to add a title to a webpage template. 4. Ask the students to add comments to a webpage template. 5. Ask the students to add content to the header section.

HTML 63: Using Symbol Entities LECTURE NOTES • Discuss how to insert symbols when adding content to a webpage • Explain how to insert a symbol on an HTML webpage by typing its HTML entity name or entity number • Explain entity names and entity numbers • Use Table 2–3 to discuss common symbol characters, descriptions, entity names, and entity numbers • Discuss the nonbreaking space &nbsp;, which forces browsers to display a blank space • Discuss the process of adding text and nonbreaking spaces to the nav section and the process of adding content and symbols to the footer section FIGURES: 2–21, 2–22, 2–23, 2-24, 2-25 TABLE: 2–3, 2-4 BOXES 1. BTW: More Symbol Entities 2. CONSIDER THIS: What is the purpose of the UTF-8 character set? TEACHER TIP Explain to the students the process of inserting symbols while adding content to a webpage. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Class Discussion: Discuss the common symbol entities that are used in designing a webpage template. LAB ACTIVITY 1. Have the students add text and nonbreaking spaces to the nav section. 2. Ask the students to add content and a symbol to the footer section.

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 7 of 10

HTML 66: Validating HTML Documents LECTURE NOTES • Discuss the process of validating a document to verify the validity of the HTML code • Discuss the W3C online validator and how it validates the code, checks for errors, and offers suggestions for corrections • Explain how to validate a website template and an HTML document with errors FIGURES: 2–26, 2–27, 2–28, 2-29 BOXES 1. BTW: Common Validation Errors 2. BTW: Byte-Order Mark (BOM) Warning TEACHER TIP Explain to the students the process of validating the documents to verify the validity of the HTML document. Discuss the different validation services that are available online. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Class Discussion: Ask the students to discuss the importance of validating an HTML document. 2. Class Discussion: Discuss the established rules set by the W3C for validating an HTML document. LAB ACTIVITY 1. Have the students validate the webpage template they created in the last lab.

HTML 69: Creating a Home Page Using a Webpage Template LECTURE NOTES • • • •

Discuss the advantage of creating a webpage template Discuss the creation of paragraphs using the <p>…</p> elements Discuss the creation of a home page using a webpage template and how contents are added to it Explain how to display a home page in a default browser

FIGURES: 2–30, 2–31, 2-32 BOXES 1. BTW: Default Browsers

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 8 of 10

TEACHER TIP Explain how using a template saves time in coding as the basic wireframe for the page is already established in the template. As a document for one of the main pages of the site, the home page belongs in the root folder. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Classroom discussion: Ask the students to create a home page using a webpage template and add content to it. 2. Classroom discussion: Demonstrate how to display a home page in the default browser. LAB ACTIVITY 1. Have the students create a home page by opening a webpage template and then saving the page with a new name in the root folder. 2. After the students have created the home page or any other page of the website and added content to it, have them display it in a browser to view the completed page.

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 9 of 10

End of Chapter Material ▪

Chapter Summary provides a general survey of the material in the chapter. Students can use these pages to reinforce their achievement of the chapter objectives.

▪

The Apply Your Knowledge section includes short exercises and review questions that reinforce concepts and provide opportunities to practice skills.

▪

Extend Your Knowledge exercises allow students to expand their knowledge by solving practical problems and experimenting with new skills, using Help.

▪

In the Analyze, Correct, Improve exercises, students take the necessary steps to correct all the errors in a document and/or improve its design.

▪

The In the Lab activities solidify the concepts presented in the chapter with practical application.

▪

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual Glossary of Key Terms • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

body element (HTML 54) div element (HTML 54) DOCTYPE (HTML 54) entity name (HTML 63) entity number (HTML 63) footer element (HTML 54) header element (HTML 55) heading elements (HTML 61) HTML character entity (HTML 63) main element (HTML 55) nav element (HTML 52) root folder (HTML 52) semantic wireframe (HTML 52) template (HTML 48) upload (HTML 67) validate (HTML 66) word wrap (HTML 59)

Top of Document

Page 10 of 10

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 1 of 9

Responsive Web Design with HTML 5 and CSS, 9TH Edition Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links A Guide to this Instructor’s Manual: We have designed this Instructor’s Manual to supplement and enhance your teaching experience through classroom activities and a cohesive chapter summary. This document is organized chronologically, using the same heading in red that you see in the textbook. Under each heading you will find (in order): Lecture Notes that summarize the section, Figures and Boxes found in the section, if any, Teacher Tips, Classroom Activities, and Lab Activities. Pay special attention to teaching tips and activities geared toward quizzing your students, enhancing their critical thinking skills, and encouraging experimentation within the software.

Table of Contents Chapter Objectives HTML 84: Introduction HTML 84: Project – Add Images and Links to a Website HTML 86: Adding Images to a Website HTML 98: Exploring Div Elements HTML 102: Adding Links to a Webpage HTML 110: Adding Lists End of Chapter Material Glossary of Key Terms

1 2 2 3 4 5 7 8 8

Chapter Objectives Students will have mastered the material in Chapter Three when they can: ⚫ Describe image file formats ⚫ Describe the types of lists in an HTML ⚫ Describe the image tag and its attributes document ⚫ Add images to a website ⚫ Create an unordered list and a description ⚫ Explain div elements and attributes list ⚫ Use a div element within a webpage ⚫ Embed a map within a webpage ⚫ Describe types of hyperlinks ⚫ Test and validate links on a webpage ⚫ Create relative links, absolute links, bookmark links, email links, and telephone links

HTML 84: Introduction

Responsive Web Design with HTML 5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 2 of 9

LECTURE NOTES • Discuss the importance of the web and its ability to connect one webpage to other webpages • Discuss the activities enabled by hyperlinks: a website visitor can move from one page to another, view a page on another website, start a new email message, download a file, or make a phone call from a mobile device • Review the types of webpage content, including text, graphics, and animations, that can serve as hyperlinks • Discuss that images enhance visual appeal, and that images used as business logos promote the company’s presence and brand TEACHER TIP Explain to the students how the web plays an important role in today’s world and how it allows users to connect from one webpage to multiple webpages. Explain several types of webpage content that act as hyperlinks to allow users to view pages, start a new email, and download files and media. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Class Discussion: Have the students discuss the importance of the web and how users can connect from one webpage to another as well as perform other tasks with the help of hyperlinks. 2. Class Discussion: Let the students carry out research on how images used as logos have helped companies build their presence and brand in the market. 3. Quick Quiz: 1) Images can be used as company logos in a webpage to enhance the company’s brand and presence. T/F? (Answer: True)

HTML 84: Project – Add Images and Links to a Website LECTURE NOTES • Discuss that hyperlinks are important in linking a webpage to another webpage, to a file other than a webpage, to an email address, to a phone number, or to a network server • Discuss the importance of using a nav element directly below the header element and then inserting the navigation links in the nav element ensuring that the links appear near the header, where visitors can access them easily • Discuss that a roadmap identifies general activities to be performed such as adding images to a template and to webpages, adding div elements to a template, adding hyperlinks and lists to webpages, embedding a map, viewing the website in a browser and testing the webpage links, and validating the new pages FIGURES: 3−1a, 3−1b, 3−1c

TEACHER TIP

Responsive Web Design with HTML 5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 3 of 9

Explain the importance of hyperlinks and how the different elements on the webpage help the visitor navigate the website. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Class Discussion: Have the students discuss the importance of hyperlinks in a webpage.

HTML 86: Adding Images to a Website LECTURE NOTES • Discuss the importance of adding images to websites and why not to use images that do not support the content in the webpages • Discuss the different image file formats such as GIF, PNG, JPG or JPEG, and SVG • Use Table 3−1 to discuss the image formats and their pros, cons, and uses • Define a pixel and discuss how pixels are arranged to compose an image • Discuss the file size of an image and the disadvantage of adding an image with a very high resolution to a webpage • Discuss the use of a photo or a graphics editor in optimizing large-file-size images for a webpage • Explain the importance of image file names • Explain that the image tag is an empty HTML tag used to add an image to a webpage and discuss its attributes such as the src (required file source attribute) • Use Table 3−2 to understand the different image element attributes, such as src, alt (specifies alternate text in case the image cannot be displayed in a browser), height, and width, and their functions • Explain that making the dimensions larger than the actual image can result in a blurry or distorted image; point out that making the dimensions smaller than the actual image does not improve the browser’s page load time because the image file size remains the same • Differentiate between a fixed and a fluid layout on a webpage

FIGURES: 3−2, 3−3, 3−4, 3−5, 3−6, 3−7a, 3-7b, 3−8, 3−9, 3−10, 3−11, 3−12, 3−13, 3−14, 3−15, 3−16, 3−17, 3−18, 3−19, 3−20 TABLES: 3−1, 3−2 BOXES 1. BTW: Overusing Images 2. BTW: Animate GIF 3. BTW: Inkscape 4. BTW: W3C SVG 5. BTW: Screen Resolution Statistics 6. Consider This: How do I find the dimensions and size of my image file? 7. BTW: Accessibility, Principle 1 8. Consider This: Why would a browser not display an image? 9. Consider This: What is the difference between the size of an image and the size of an image file? TEACHER TIP

Responsive Web Design with HTML 5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 4 of 9

Students will find it useful to see examples of the different types of images, and it will be helpful to discuss situations where the different image formats are used on webpages. Emphasize the importance of using the options available in photo editors, such as “Constrain proportions” or “Maintain aspect ratio,” to change each dimension in proportion to the other, which is called maintaining the aspect ratio. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Class Discussion: Have the students discuss the different image formats and the advantages of using them in webpages. 2. Class Discussion: Discuss the types of image formats supported by browsers. 3. Class Discussion: Discuss the photo or graphic editors that are commonly used in webpage creation to optimize the graphics for web use. 4. Critical Thinking: Discuss the students’ experiences with webpages that had large-sized images and their impressions of those websites. 5. Quick Quiz: 1) What is a pixel? (Answer: A pixel is the smallest element of light or color on a device displaying images.) LAB ACTIVITIES 1. Have the students perform the following activities to modify the website template they have created by following the instructions: o HTML 94 “To copy files into the images folder” o HTML 96 “To add an image to a website template” o HTML 97 “To add an image to the home page”

HTML 98: Exploring Div Elements LECTURE NOTES • Explain that a div element defines an area or a division in a webpage • Explain how the div elements are inserted • Discuss specific areas on a webpage defined by div elements prior to HTML 5 • Discuss Figure 3−21, which illustrates a wireframe with four div elements inside the main element • Explain that the purpose of the new div element is to contain all of the other webpage elements, including header, nav, main, and footer • Discuss the div attribute “id” that identifies a unique area on a webpage and distinguishes it from other page divisions FIGURES: 3−21, 3−22, 3−23, 3−24, 3−25, 3−26, 3−27, 3−28, 3-29

Responsive Web Design with HTML 5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 5 of 9

BOXES 1. CONSIDER THIS: Why is “container” the value of the id attribute? TEACHER TIP Discuss how web designers still use the div element on their websites; it is not an obsolete element. Emphasize that the purpose of the new div element is to contain all of the other webpage elements, including header, nav, main, and footer, and how containing these HTML 5 elements within a single div element prepares the template and future pages for CSS styles. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Class Discussion: Have the students use Figure 3−23 to discuss why the “container” is the value of the id attribute. LAB ACTIVITIES 1. Have the students perform the following activities to modify the website template they have created by following the instructions from each of the following sections: o HTML 100 “To add div elements to a website template” o HTML 101 “To add a div element to the home page”

HTML 102: Adding Links to a Webpage LECTURE NOTES • Explain hyperlinks and how they are the primary ways to navigate among websites and webpages • Explain that hyperlinks or links can be text, image, or other web content that users can click to instruct the browser to go to a location in a file or to request a file from a server • Discuss the default color of a hyperlink and its change in color when it is visited • Discuss the appearance of text and images on a webpage when they are hyperlinked • Explain the use of an anchor element and the use of starting and ending anchor tags in marking images, text, or other webpage content as a hyperlink • Explain that the href attribute (hypertext reference) is included in the starting anchor tag to identify a webpage, email address, file, telephone number, or other content to access • Discuss the different types of links, such as relative links, absolute links, bookmarks, image links, email links, and telephone links, that are used while creating webpages

FIGURES: 3−30, 3−31, 3-32, 3−33, 3−34, 3−35, 3−36, 3−37, 3−38, 3−39, 3−40, 3−41, 3−42, 3−43, 3−44, 3−45, 3−46, 3−47, 3−48, 3−49, 3−50 TABLES: 3−3, 3−4 BOXES 1. BTW: Anchor Element 2. BTW: Link Text 3. BTW: Nesting Elements 4. BTW: Email Links 5. BTW: Other Links

Responsive Web Design with HTML 5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 6 of 9

TEACHER TIP Explain to the students the importance of using links such as relative, absolute, bookmark, image, email, and telephone links, and how an anchor element must be used when creating them. Caution students that when using the attributes in HTML code, they need to insert the attribute name followed by an equals sign and then to insert the attribute value between quotation marks, as in name="value" where name is an attribute name such as href. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Class Discussion: Ask the students to name the different links that can be used to link to and navigate a website and move from one page to another or even to an external webpage. 2. Quick Quiz: 1) What is used to create a hyperlink on a webpage? (Answer: An anchor element is used to create a hyperlink on a webpage.) 2) What is a relative link? (Answer: Hyperlinks that link to other webpages within the same website are known as relative links.) 3) Absolute links are hyperlinks that link to other webpages within a website. True or False? (Answer: False) LAB ACTIVITIES 1. Ask the students to visit a variety of webpages to see which ones have varied the default link colors for the normal, visited, and active link states. 2. Ask the students to find three websites with links between pages on the same site (as opposed to links to external sites). 3. Ask the students to find three websites with links to pages on external sites (as opposed to links within the same site). 4. Ask the students to find three webpages with links within the webpage (as opposed to external links or links within the same site). 5. Ask the students to find three webpages with email links. 6. Have the students perform the following activities to modify the website template they have created by following the instructions from each of the following sections: o HTML 106 “To add relative links in a website template” o HTML 107 “To add an email link in a website template” o HTML 108 “To add relative links in the home page” o HTML 109 “To add an email link in the home page”

HTML 110: Adding Lists LECTURE NOTES • Discuss the types of lists supported by HTML, such as ordered lists, unordered lists, and description lists

Responsive Web Design with HTML 5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual • • • • •

Page 7 of 9

Describe the purpose and the general structure of ordered and unordered lists Define a description list and its structure Explain that many businesses include a location map embedded within their website so visitors have a clear view of the business location Describe the function of the Share button Review how to embed a map

FIGURES: 3−51, 3−52, 3−53, 3−54, 3−55, 3−56, 3−57, 3−58, 3−59, 3−60, 3−61, 3−62, 3−63, 3−64, 3−65, 3−66, 3-67, 3−68, 3−69, 3−70, 3−71, 3−72, 3−73, 3−74, 3−75 TABLES: 3−5, 3−6, 3−7 BOXES 1. BTW: Open Links in a New Tab 2. CONSIDER THIS: I visited maps.google.com and my screen looks different. Why? TEACHER TIP Students will find it useful to see a demonstration page displaying the different list types. Show examples of each list type and discuss situations where the different types of lists would be useful. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Class Discussion: Have the students go to various websites and guess the types of lists used in each instance. Later, refer to the source code and check if they are right. 2. Class Discussion: Discuss the user interface for pages with lists and without lists. Compare them and discuss the advantages of using lists in webpages. 3. Quick Quiz: 1) The div element groups text into paragraphs. True or False? (Answer: False) LAB ACTIVITIES 1. Have the students perform the following activities to modify the website template they have created by following the instructions from each of the following sections: o HTML 112 “To Create the About Us Webpage and Add Content” o HTML 114 “To Add Unordered Lists to the About Us Webpage” o HTML 116 “To Add a Description List and Absolute Link to the About Us Webpage” o HTML 118 “To Save the About Us Webpage and View It in a Browser” o HTML 120 “To Create the Contact Us Webpage and Add a Heading and Links” o HTML 123 “To Embed a Map within a Webpage o HTML 125 “To Preview a Website in a Browser and Test Page Links” o HTML 126 “To Validate the About Us and Contact Us Pages”

End of Chapter Material

Responsive Web Design with HTML 5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 8 of 9

▪

Chapter Summary provides a general survey of the material in the chapter. Students can use these pages to reinforce their achievement of the chapter objectives.

▪

The Apply Your Knowledge section includes short exercises and review questions that reinforce concepts and provide opportunities to practice skills.

▪

Extend Your Knowledge exercises allow students to expand their knowledge by solving practical problems and experimenting with new skills, using Help.

▪

In the Analyze, Correct, Improve exercises, students take the necessary steps to correct all the errors in a document and/or improve its design.

▪

The In the Lab activities solidify the concepts presented in the chapter with practical application.

Glossary of Key Terms absolute links (HTML 103) alt attribute (HTML 92) anchor element (HTML 103) description list (HTML 112) div element (HTML 98) email links (HTML 104) GIF (Graphics Interchange Format) (HTML 86) header element (HTML 84) height (HTML 93) href attribute (HTML 103) hyperlinks (HTML 102) id attribute (HTML 98) iframe (HTML 122) image tag (HTML 92) link (HTML 102) lossless compression (HTML 87) lossy compression (HTML 88) JPG or JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group) (HTML 88) main element (HTML 98) nav element (HTML 84) optimize (HTML 90) ordered list (HTML 110) pixel (HTML 90) PNG (Portable Network Graphics) (HTML 87) relative links (HTML 103) src attribute (HTML 92) style attribute (HTML 111)

Responsive Web Design with HTML 5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual SVG (Scalable Vector Graphics) (HTML 89) telephone links (HTML 105) unordered list (HTML 110) width (HTML 93) Top of Document

Page 9 of 9

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 1 of 12

Responsive Web Design with HTML 5 and CSS, 9th Edition Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS A Guide to this Instructor’s Manual: We have designed this Instructor’s Manual to supplement and enhance your teaching experience through classroom activities and a cohesive chapter summary. This document is organized chronologically, using the same heading in red that you see in the textbook. Under each heading you will find (in order): Lecture Notes that summarize the section, Figures and Boxes found in the section, if any, Teacher Tips, Classroom Activities, and Lab Activities. Pay special attention to teaching tips and activities geared toward quizzing your students, enhancing their critical thinking skills, and encouraging experimentation within the software.

Table of Contents Chapter Objectives HTML 144: Introduction HTML 144: Project – Format Webpages with CSS HTML 145: Using Cascading Style Sheets HTML 153: Understanding Inline Elements and Block Elements HTML 156: Creating an External Style Sheet HTML 159: Linking an HTML Document to a CSS File HTML 161: Creating a Webpage Layout HTML 165: Creating Style Rules for Structural Elements HTML 179: Creating Style Rules for ID Selectors HTML 183: Creating Class Attributes HTML 188: CSS Reset HTML 191: Improving the Appearance of the Forward Fitness Club Website HTML 193: Adding Comments to CSS Files HTML 195: Validating CSS Files End of Chapter Material Glossary of Key Terms

2 2 2 3 4 5 6 6 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 12

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual Chapter Objectives

Page 2 of 12

Students will have mastered the material in Chapter Four when they can: ⚫ Explain the importance of separating design ⚫ Describe and use the CSS box model to from content apply margins, padding, and borders ⚫ Describe Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) ⚫ Create an external style sheet and link it to ⚫ Define inline, embedded, and external an HTML page styles and their order of precedence ⚫ Create responsive images ⚫ Describe a CSS rule and its syntax ⚫ Use float and clear properties ⚫ Explain the difference between a selector, ⚫ Create and style id and class attributes property, and value ⚫ Use a span element ⚫ Create styles that use text and color ⚫ Add comments to an external style sheet properties and validate a CSS file ⚫ Explain the difference between inline and block content

HTML 144: Introduction LECTURE NOTES • Explain to the students how a well-designed website is vital in capturing the audience’s attention and how it helps in attracting and obtaining new customers • Clarify that the structural foundation of a webpage is provided by HTML, while the CSS styles determine the formatting required for a webpage • Discuss that defining CSS styles in a style sheet separate from the HTML code allows a webpage to be formatted in an unlimited number of ways TEACHER TIP Explain to the students the importance of a well-designed website and how it helps retain the existing customers, while attracting and obtaining new ones. Explain that while HTML provides the structural foundation of a webpage, the CSS styles are used to determine the formatting for a webpage. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Class Discussion: Discuss how HTML 5 and CSS (Cascading Style Sheets) are used in creating a well-designed webpage. 2. Class Discussion: Ask the students to browse the Internet and discuss the numerous ways a webpage of their choice can be formatted using CSS.

HTML 144: Project – Format Webpages with CSS LECTURE NOTES • Note that CSS enhances a website • Explain that after a style sheet is created it is linked to all of the pages in the website, including the template • Explain that after style sheets are added they format the attached webpages when the pages are opened or refreshed in a browser • Discuss the roadmap to create a CSS file, link the HTML pages to a CSS file, create style rules, add comments to the CSS file, and validate the CSS file FIGURES: 4−1a, 4-1b, 4-1c

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 3 of 12

CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Have the students discuss how they can use the CSS files to design websites and create their own style rules.

HTML 145: Using Cascading Style Sheets LECTURE NOTES • Define a style rule or rule-set • Discuss the importance of a style sheet while creating a website • Explain the importance of separating content from style when a large website is being maintained • Discuss the evolution and development of CSS • Explain how W3C developed CSS as the primary way to format webpages • Discuss the different styles that are supported by CSS such as inline, embedded, and external styles • Explain the general structure and function of an inline style • Discuss an embedded style sheet (internal style sheet) • Discuss an external style sheet • Discuss style sheet precedence, inheritance, and specificity • Use Figure 4-7 to explain the CSS basics • Use Table 4-1 to discuss common text properties and values • Explain the use of color and color values FIGURES: 4−2, 4−3, 4−4, 4−5, 4−6, 4−7 TABLES: 4−1, 4−2, 4−3 BOXES 1. BTW: Deprecated and Unsupported Elements 2. BTW: Style Rule Syntax 3. BTW: CSS Syntax Color Coding in Notepad++ 4. CONSIDER THIS: What is the difference between HTML attributes and CSS properties? 5. BTW: Font Names 6. CONSIDER THIS: Why would a browser not support certain fonts? 7. BTW: HWB Colors 8. BTW: CMYK Colors 9. BTW: Opacity 10. BTW: Quick Color Picker TEACHER TIP Explain to the students the evolution of CSS style sheets, CSS”s importance when designing a website, and the types of style sheets supported by it. CLASS ACTIVITIES

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 4 of 12

1. Class Discussion: Have the students visit the w3.org website and review the full list of CSS styles. 2. Class Discussion: Ask the students to use the browser of their choice and determine if it supports the new CSS features. Also, have the class check how different browsers vary in applying CSS styles and test and view the website they are creating in all the major browsers. 3. Quick Quiz: 1. True/False: An external style sheet takes precedence over an embedded style sheet. (Answer: False) 2. Fill in the Blank: An external style sheet is also known as a(n) _____. (Answer: An external style sheet is also known as a linked style sheet.) 3. What is changing the look of an entire website called? (Answer: Reskinning) 4. True/False: A channel contains the number of red, green, or blue pixels necessary to create a specified color. (Answer: True) LAB ACTIVITIES 1. Have the students experiment with the different style sheets supported by CSS and use them in the website they are creating.

HTML 153: Understanding Inline Elements and Block Elements LECTURE NOTES • Discuss the structure and function of a block element • Discuss inline elements and their functions • Discuss the different block and inline elements • Discuss the CSS box model, and use Table 4−4 to explain the importance of a margin, padding, border, border-style, border-width, border-color, border-radius, and box-shadow FIGURES: 4−8, 4−9 TABLES: 4−4 BOXES 1. BTW: CSS Box Properties TEACHER TIP Explain to the students the importance of using inline and block elements and the importance of using CSS box model properties for a well-designed website. Have the students open their favorite webpages and discuss the different CSS properties and styles used in them. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Class Discussion: Using Figure 4−9, have the students discuss the CSS box model.

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 5 of 12

2. Class Discussion: Have the students discuss the common CSS box model properties using Table 4−4. 3. Quick Quiz: 1) Give examples of inline elements. (Answer: Examples of inline elements are the span tag (<span>) and the anchor tag (<a>).) 2) What element is used to group inline elements? (Answer: Span element) 3) True/False: header, nav, main, and footer are all examples of inline elements. (Answer: False) LAB ACTIVITIES 1. Have the students use the CSS box model properties listed in the Table 4−4 in the website they are creating.

HTML 156: Creating an External Style Sheet LECTURE NOTES • Explain to the students the importance of creating and linking an external style sheet • Explain the importance of using selectors in CSS • Recall that a style rule begins with a selector, which specifies the element to style • Using Figure 4−10, discuss how a selector in a CSS file selects the content to be styled for an HTML element, an id attribute, and a class attribute for HTML elements in an HTML file • Discuss the importance of using a class selector and descendant selector FIGURES: 4−10, 4−11, 4−12 TEACHER TIP Discuss the importance of creating an external style sheet and the use of selectors in CSS when creating a website. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Class Discussion: Have the students use Figure 4−10 to discuss how a selector in a CSS file selects the content to be styled for an HTML element, an id attribute, and a class attribute for HTML elements in an HTML file. LAB ACTIVITIES 1. Have the students perform the following activities using the website template they have created by following the instructions from the given section: o HTML 157 “To Create a CSS File and a Style Rule for the Body Element”

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 6 of 12

HTML 159: Linking an HTML Document to a CSS File LECTURE NOTES • Point out that after a CSS file is created it has to be linked to all the webpages that will use its styles • Explain how to insert a link element on an HTML page within the <head> and </head> tags and describe the two attributes it uses: rel and href FIGURES: 4−13, 4−14 BOXES 1. CONSIDER THIS: How can I confirm that my styles have been correctly applied to a webpage? TEACHER TIP Explain the importance of linking a CSS file to all the webpages that use its styles after it has been created and what happens if the file is not linked to the webpages. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Class Discussion: Have the students discuss linking an HTML document to a CSS file. 2. Quick Quiz: 1) What are the two attributes used by the link element? (Answer: The link element uses two attributes, rel and href.) 2) True/False: The rel attribute uses the stylesheet value to indicate that the document is linked to a style sheet. (Answer: True) 3) True/False: The href attribute value specifies the file path or file name of the CSS file. (Answer: True) LAB ACTIVITIES 1. Have the students perform the following activities using the website template they have created by following the instructions from the given section: o HTML 159 “To Link HTML Pages to the CSS File”

HTML 161: Creating a Webpage Layout LECTURE NOTES • Discuss different ways elements are placed on a webpage • Mention that the float property allows you to position an element to the right or left of other elements, while remaining within its parent element • Discuss the valid values for the float property: left, right, inherit, and none • Explain how to align webpage content FIGURES: 4−15, 4−16, 4−17, 4-18, 4-19, 4-20

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 7 of 12

TEACHER TIP Explain to the students that webpage content can be aligned by using the text-align property, which applies to block content and uses one of these four values: left (the default), center, right, or justify. Discuss how the text can also be centered using the margin property. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Have the students browse different websites and discuss the alignment of the content in them. LAB ACTIVITIES 1. Have the students perform the following activities using the website template they have created by following the instructions from the given section: o HTML 163 “To Position Elements”

HTML 165: Creating Style Rules for Structural Elements LECTURE NOTES • Discuss style rules for creating HTML 5 structural elements • Discuss how CSS text properties and box model properties can be applied to the header section, nav element, main element, and to the footer element • Explain that to make the navigation links more appealing on the webpage, you can format them with CSS • Discuss the CSS list-style properties • Explain the features of a responsive image FIGURES: 4−21, 4−22, 4−23, 4−24, 4−25, 4−26, 4−27, 4−28, 4-29, 4-30, 4-31, 4-32, 4-33, 4-34, 4-35, 436, 4-37, 4-38, 4-39, 4-40, 4-41, 4-42, 4-43, 4-44 BOXES 1. BTW: CSS Style Rule Order 2. BTW: Lorem Ipsum 3. BTW: List Properties TEACHER TIP Discuss how to create style rules for the different structured elements in HTML. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Have the students discuss the importance of creating style rules for structural elements when creating a webpage. LAB ACTIVITIES 1. Have the students perform the following activities using the website template they have created by following the instructions from each of the following sections:

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual o o o o o o

Page 8 of 12

HTML 166 “To Code the Navigation Links as an Unordered List” HTML 169 “To Style the Navigation Using CSS” HTML 172 “To Add a Hero Image” HTML 174 “To Remove Height and Width Attributes from img Elements” HTML 176 “To Modify the Style Rule for the Main Element” HTML 177 “To Create a Style Rule for the Footer Element”

HTML 179: Creating Style Rules for ID Selectors LECTURE NOTES • Explain the creation of style rules for ID selectors • Explain that every page includes a primary div with an id attribute value of container, which holds all the webpage content FIGURES: 4-45, 4-46, 4-47, 4-48, 4-49, 4-50, 4−51, 4−52 TEACHER TIP Remind students that they can style an id attribute by using an id selector for a style rule.

CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Class Discussion: Have the students discuss the several div elements with id attribute values included on the About Us page. LAB ACTIVITIES 1. Have the students perform the following activities using the website template they have created by following the instructions from the given section: o HTML 179 “To Create Style Rules for IDs on the About Us Page” o HTML 182 “To Create Style Rules for IDs on the Contact Page”

HTML 183: Creating Class Attributes LECTURE NOTES • Introduce another commonly used attribute in HTML: the class attribute • Discuss how a class attribute name can be applied to more than one div or other HTML element on a webpage • Explain that the span element is used to group inline elements together on a webpage • Mention that if a class name is used as a selector, you must include a period (.) • Explain that any word can be used as a class name, as long as it does not contain spaces FIGURES: 4−53, 4−54, 4−55, 4−56, 4−57, 4-58, 4-59, 4-60, 4-61 TEACHER TIP Take time to explain to the students that classes provide another level of control over the styling or formatting of specific elements on a webpage.

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 9 of 12

CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Class Discussion: Have the students research websites using call-to-action words. LAB ACTIVITIES 1. Have the students perform the following activities using the website template they have created by following the instructions from each of the following sections: o HTML 184 “To Create and Style the action Class” o HTML 186 “To Create and Style the external-link Class” o HTML 187 “To Create and Style the map Class”

HTML 188: CSS Reset LECTURE NOTES • Discuss that all browsers do not use the same style rules within their style sheets • Explain that a CSS reset is a style rule that is applied to the webpage before any other style rule defined within the style sheet FIGURES: 4−62, 4−63, 4−64, 4-65 CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Have the students view the Forward Fitness Club home page in Google Chrome and Mozilla Firefox. Compare them and identify the subtle differences. LAB ACTIVITIES 1. Have the students perform the following activities using the website template they have created by following the instructions from each of the following sections: o HTML 190 “To Create a CSS Reset”

HTML 191: Improving the Appearance of the Forward Fitness Club Website LECTURE NOTES • Discuss other elements of the website that may be improved • Explain how heading elements and background color may be modified FIGURES: 4−66, 4−67, 4−68, 4-69, 4-70 CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Have the students visit various websites and discuss how the appearance might be improved. LAB ACTIVITIES 1. Have the students perform the following activities using the website template they have created by following the instructions from each of the following sections:

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual o o

Page 10 of 12

HTML 191 “To Remove the heading 1 Elements” HTML 192 “To Modify a Style Rule”

HTML 193: Adding Comments to CSS Files LECTURE NOTES • Discuss the importance of including comments while creating a CSS file • Define the general structure and syntax used while including comments in a CSS file FIGURES: 4−71, 4−72, 4−73, 4−74 BOXES 1. BTW: CSS Comments in Notepad++ TEACHER TIP Take time to help the students understand the importance of including comments in the CSS file. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Have the students include comments in the template they are creating and discuss whether they found the addition of comments useful. LAB ACTIVITIES 1. Have the students perform the following activities using the website template they have created by following the instructions from the given sections: o HTML 193 “To Add Comments to a CSS File”

HTML 195: Validating CSS Files LECTURE NOTES • Discuss the importance of validating the CSS code to verify its validity—i.e., to confirm that all of the code is correct and the established rules for CSS have been followed FIGURES: 4−75, 4−76, 4−77 TEACHER TIP Explain to the students the importance of validation and how they can use online validators to validate the code they have created for the website. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Have the students validate the code they have created for the project by using validation software available online.

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 11 of 12

LAB ACTIVITIES 1. Have the students perform the following activities using the website template they have created by following the instructions from each of the following sections: o HTML 195 “To Validate the CSS File” o HTML 197 “To Validate a CSS File with Errors”

End of Chapter Material ▪

Chapter Summary provides a general survey of the material in the chapter. Students can use these pages to reinforce their achievement of the chapter objectives.

▪

The Apply Your Knowledge section includes short exercises and review questions that reinforce concepts and provide opportunities to practice skills.

▪

Extend Your Knowledge exercises allow students to expand their knowledge by solving practical problems and experimenting with new skills, using Help.

▪

In the Analyze, Correct, Improve section, the students can analyze an external style sheet, correct all the errors, and improve it.

▪

The In the Lab activities solidify the concepts presented in the chapter with practical application.

▪

The Consider This: Your Turn section provides students the opportunity to apply their creative thinking and problem-solving skills to design and implement a solution.

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual Glossary of Key Terms • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

block element (HTML 153) border (HTML 154) channel (HTML (152) CSS (Cascading Style Sheets) (HTML 144) CSS box model (HTML 154) CSS overflow property (HTML 162) CSS reset (HTML 188) class selector (HTML 157) clear property (HTML 162) deprecated (HTML 147) descendant selector (HTML 157) embedded style sheet (HTML 147) external style sheet (HTML 148) fallback values (HTML 151) font stack (HTML 151) float property (HTML 161) hero image (HTML 171) hexadecimal values (HTML 152) id selector (HTML 157) img element (HTML 153) inheritance (HTML 149) inline elements (HTML 153) inline style (HTML 147) internal style sheet (HTML 147) linked style sheet (HTML 148) list-style properties (HTML 168) margin (HTML 154) padding (HTML 154) RGB (Red, Green, Blue) (HTML 152) reskinning (HTML 148) responsive image (HTML 171) rule-set (HTML 146) selector (HTML 149) span element (HTML 183) specificity (HTML 149) style attribute (HTML 147) style rule (HTML 146) style sheet (HTML 146) value (HTML 149)

Top of Document

Page 12 of 12

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 1 of 7

Responsive Web Design with HTML 5 and CSS, 9th Edition Chapter 5: Responsive Design Part 1: Designing for Mobile Devices A Guide to this Instructor’s Manual: We have designed this Instructor’s Manual to supplement and enhance your teaching experience through classroom activities and a cohesive chapter summary. This document is organized chronologically, using the same heading in red that you see in the textbook. Under each heading you will find (in order): Lecture Notes that summarize the section, Figures and Boxes found in the section, if any, Teacher Tips, Classroom Activities, and Lab Activities. Pay special attention to teaching tips and activities geared toward quizzing your students, enhancing their critical thinking skills, and encouraging experimentation within the software.

Table of Contents Chapter Objectives HTML 216: Introduction HTML 216: Project — Redesign a Website for Mobile Devices HTML 218: Exploring Responsive Design HTML 219: Designing for Mobile Devices HTML 222: Using Responsive Design HTML 223: Creating a Fluid Layout HTML 225: Following a Mobile-First Strategy HTML 263: Mobile-Friendly Test End of Chapter Material Glossary of Key Terms

1 2 2 2 3 3 4 4 6 6 7

Chapter Objectives Students will have mastered the material in Chapter 5 when they can: ⚫ Explain the principles of responsive design ⚫ Use a pseudo-class ⚫ Describe the pros and cons of a mobile ⚫ Create a mobile-friendly navigation system website ⚫ Add a telephone link ⚫ Explain the design principles of a mobile ⚫ Make rounded corners website ⚫ Describe a mobile-first strategy ⚫ Define a viewport ⚫ Insert a meta viewport element ⚫ Use a mobile simulator ⚫ Create a sticky element ⚫ Integrate custom fonts

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 2 of 7

HTML 216: Introduction LECTURE NOTES • Explain that prior to the era of mobile devices, websites were almost exclusively accessed by desktop computers • Discuss the mobile device trend • Review the concept of responsive design TEACHER TIP Prepare a few examples of mobile webpages that require users to zoom and scroll to read and navigate. Ask students their opinion of these pages. Now, prepare and show a few examples of websites with responsive design to illustrate the difference in these design techniques. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Class Discussion: Ask the students to view one webpage on different platforms and ask them to list the differences in design, if any.

HTML 216: Project — Redesign a Website for Mobile Devices LECTURE NOTES • Explain how HTML files are modified • Discuss the roadmap, explaining how to create the webpages shown in Figure 5-1 FIGURES: 5−1a, 5−1b, 5−1c CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Class Discussion: Have the students discuss how using a fluid layout and flexible images can enhance the experience for users of mobile devices.

HTML 218: Exploring Responsive Design LECTURE NOTES • Explain the concept of a fluid layout • Discuss the concept of viewports • Explain the reason for using the term viewport over window • Discuss the concept of responsive images • Discuss the role of media queries in responsive design FIGURES: 5−2a, 5−2b, 5−2c TEACHER TIP Remind the students that responsive web design is not a specific set of rules and it constantly changes with the evolution of HTML and CSS. Have the students research the latest functionalities included in HTML 5. CLASS ACTIVITIES 1. Quick Quiz: 1. True/False: Windows are always optimized for display on the browsers of mobile devices. (Answer: False)

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 3 of 7

2. True/False: Responsive images do not have height and width attributes in an HTML document. (Answer: True) LAB ACTIVITIES 1. Have the students experiment with the different style sheets supported by CSS and use them in the website they are creating.

HTML 219: Designing for Mobile Devices LECTURE NOTES • Discuss the concept of a mobile website • Explain the concept of a mobile-first strategy • Discuss the advantages of designing a website using the mobile-first strategy • Discuss the various factors affecting the development of a website FIGURES: 5−3a, 5−3b, 5−4a, 5−4b, 5−4c BOXES 1. Consider This: What is the Internet of Things? TEACHER TIP Explain to the students the major downside of managing one website on two separate platforms. Draw a comparison between two websites, one with responsive design and the other with unresponsive design. Show them the advantages of developing a website with responsive design. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Class Discussion: Using Figures 5−3a and 5−3b, have the students discuss which approach they think is preferable. 2. Quick Quiz: 1. True/False: Responsive design seeks to optimize the viewing experience for a wide range of devices using multiple websites. (Answer: False) 2. True/ False: Converting a large website of existing, nonresponsive pages to modern responsive designs can be much faster than developing a mobile website from scratch. (Answer: False)

HTML 222: Using Responsive Design LECTURE NOTES • Define a fluid layout • Discuss the concept of fixed layouts FIGURES: 5−5 TABLES: 5−1 BOXES 1. BTW: Web Analytics 2. BTW: Styles and Units of Measurement

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 4 of 7

TEACHER TIP Remind the students that responsive sites use relative units of measurement. Use Table 5−1 to discuss the common CSS units of measurement. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Class Discussion: Ask the students to compare fixed and fluid layouts. Ask them to list the advantages and disadvantages of both layouts.

HTML 223: Creating a Fluid Layout LECTURE NOTES • Discuss the procedure to create a fluid layout • Discuss the role of media queries in designing a fluid layout • Explain that responsive images grow and shrink with the viewport FIGURES: 5−6, 5−7 TEACHER TIP Prepare a few examples to clarify the concepts of ordered and unordered lists. Remind the students that if they use percentages to measure the width of each column, then irrespective of the browser size the content placeholder boxes on a page shrink and grow in response to the size of the viewport. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Quick Quiz: 1) True/False: A webpage cannot have a fluid layout without using media queries. (Answer: True) 2) True/False: A media query detects the media type and capabilities of the device that the browser is running on. (Answer: True)

HTML 225: Following a Mobile-First Strategy LECTURE NOTES • Discuss the goal in designing a webpage for mobile devices • Differentiate between styling content for mobile devices and for desktops • Discuss the steps to follow while designing for mobile viewports • Explain that when creating a website with a responsive design, you must include a meta viewport element within every HTML file • Mention that a mobile simulator displays an example of how a website would appear on a mobile device • Review the steps in implementing a mobile-first strategy • Explain how sticky elements are used and created • Mention that a navigation system for a website can look different in each viewport • Explain how effective use of typography enhances the visual look and appeal of a website • Discuss how many custom fonts can be used by downloading them onto a web server or by linking to them in HTML files • Mention that a pseudo-class can be used with a selector to specify the state of an element • Explain how to analyze webpages for mobile-first design

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual •

Page 5 of 7

Review how to implement rounded corners

FIGURES: 5-8a, 5-8b, 5-9, 5-10, 5-11, 5-12, 5-13, 5-14, 5-15, 5-16, 5-17, 5-18, 5-19, 5-20, 5-21, 5−22, 5−23, 5−24, 5−25, 5−26, 5−27, 5−28, 5−29, 5−30, 5−31, 5−32, 5−33, 5−34, 5−35, 5−36, 5−37, 5−38, 5−39, 5−40, 5−41, 5−42, 5−43, 5-44, 5-45, 5-46, 5-47, 5-48, 5-49, 5-50, 5-51, 5-52, 5-53, 5-54, 5-55, 5-56, 5-57, 5-58, 5-59, 5-60, 5-61 TABLES: 5-2, 5-3 BOXES 1. BTW: Device Emulators 2. CONSIDER THIS: When I open my Google Chrome developer tools, my screen looks different from Figure 5–12 through Figure 5–14. Why? 3. CONSIDER THIS: What other CSS properties require a prefix? TEACHER TIP Inform the students that it is recommended to use a single-column layout for a mobile display, as this prevents scrolling horizontally. Also, explain to the students the importance of commenting in a CSS file. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Quick Quiz: 1. True/False: An ideal webpage in a mobile viewport requires no scrolling. (Answer: True) 2. True/False: Styling content for a mobile device is the same as styling content for a desktop display. (Answer: False) LAB ACTIVITIES 1. Have the students perform the following activities using the website template they have created by following the instructions from each of the following sections: o HTML 228: “To Add the Meta Viewport Element for Responsive Design” o HTML 232: “To Add a Comment for Mobile Styles” o HTML 233: “To Create a Sticky Header” o HTML 238: “To Edit the nav Style Rule for Mobile Viewports” o HTML 238: “To Edit the nav ul Style Rule for Mobile Viewports” o HTML 239: “To Edit the nav li Style Rule for Mobile Viewports” o HTML 242: “To Integrate a Custom Google Font” o HTML 248: “To Remove the Top Border for the nav li Style Rule” o HTML 249: “To Edit the nav li a Style Rule” o HTML 249: “To Modify the Home Page” o HTML 252: “To Create a Style Rule for the mobile Class” o HTML 252: “To Add a Style Rule for the tablet-desktop Class” o HTML 254: “To Add Style Rules for the tel-link Class”

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual o o o o o o o

Page 6 of 7

HTML 255: “To Add a Style Rule for the hours Class” HTML 256: “To Modify the Style Rule for the main Element” HTML 258: “To Modify the About Us Page” HTML 259: “To Add a Style Rule for the round Class” HTML 260: “To Modify a Style Rule to Use a Single Column” HTML 262: “To Modify the Contact Us Page” HTML 262: “To Modify #contact a and .map Style Rules”

HTML 263: Mobile-Friendly Test LECTURE NOTES • Discuss the purpose of a mobile-friendly test • Review the mobile-friendly test checkers available through Google and Bing FIGURES: 5-62, 5-63, 5−64 TEACHER TIP Inform the students that Google Chrome’s device mode is helpful during the design process, but testing on an actual device is optimal. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Quick Quiz: 1. True/False: Once a design for a mobile viewport is completed, you should view and test it on as many smartphone devices as possible. (Answer: True) 2. True/False: You will need to publish your website before you can use Bing’s mobile-friendly test. (Answer: True) LAB ACTIVITIES 1. Have the students perform the following activities using the website template they have created by following the instructions from each of the following sections: o HTML 265: “To Validate the Style Sheet” o HTML 266: “To Validate the HTML Files”

End of Chapter Material •

Chapter Summary provides a general survey of the material in the chapter. Students can use these pages to reinforce their achievement of the chapter objectives.

•

The Apply Your Knowledge section includes short exercises and review questions that reinforce concepts and provide opportunities to practice skills.

•

Extend Your Knowledge exercises allow students to expand their knowledge by solving practical problems and experimenting with new skills, using Help.

•

In the Analyze, Correct, Improve section, the students can analyze an external style sheet, correct all the errors, and improve it.

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 7 of 7

•

The In the Lab activities solidify the concepts presented in the chapter with practical application.

•

The Consider This: Your Turn section provides students the opportunity to apply their creative thinking and problem-solving skills to design and implement a solution.

Glossary of Key Terms • • • • • • • • • • • •

fixed layouts (HTML 222) fluid layout (HTML 219) media queries (HTML 219) mobile simulator (HTML 229) mobile website (HTML 219) mobile-first strategy (HTML 220) pseudo-class (HTML 247) responsive design (HTML 216) responsive images (HTML 219) sticky element (HTML 233) viewport (HTML 219) web analytics (HTML 222)

Top of Document

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 1 of 10

Responsive Web Design with HTML 5 and CSS, 9th Edition Chapter 6: Responsive Design Part 2: Designing for Tablet and Desktop Devices A Guide to this Instructor’s Manual: We have designed this Instructor’s Manual to supplement and enhance your teaching experience through classroom activities and a cohesive chapter summary. This document is organized chronologically, using the same heading in red that you see in the textbook. Under each heading you will find (in order): Lecture Notes that summarize the section, Figures and Boxes found in the section, if any, Teacher Tips, Classroom Activities, and Lab Activities. Pay special attention to teaching tips and activities geared toward quizzing your students, enhancing their critical thinking skills, and encouraging experimentation within the software.

Table of Contents Chapter Objectives HTML 280: Introduction HTML 280: Project – Use Media Queries to Design for Tablet and Desktop Viewports HTML 281: Using Media Queries HTML 286: Designing for Tablet Viewports HTML 298: Designing for Desktop Viewports HTML 312: Modifying Breakpoints HTML 315: Using Dynamic Pseudo-Classes HTML 318: Using Gradients End of Chapter Material Glossary of Key Terms

2 2 3 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 2 of 10

Chapter Objectives Students will have mastered the material in Chapter 6 when they can: ⚫ Identify and use media query expressions ⚫ Insert a media query and create a style rule ⚫ Explain the design principles of a tablet for large desktop viewports website ⚫ Create a media query for print ⚫ Insert a media query to target tablet ⚫ Identify and modify breakpoints viewports ⚫ Describe and add dynamic pseudo-classes to ⚫ Create style rules for tablet viewports a website ⚫ Explain the design principles of a desktop ⚫ Explain linear and radial gradients website ⚫ Apply a linear gradient to a webpage for a ⚫ Insert a media query and create style rules desktop viewport to target desktop viewports

HTML 280: Introduction LECTURE NOTES • Explain that the mobile-first approach focuses on styling content appropriately for smaller, mobile devices • Explain that a mobile-first strategy uses a single-column layout to prevent horizontal scrolling and minimize vertical scrolling • Note that the design process for tablet and desktop displays allows more flexibility with the webpage layout • Mention that designing layouts for tablet and desktop displays is simplified through the use of media queries TEACHER TIP Explain to the students that the mobile-first approach uses a single-column layout and that this layout creates a more enjoyable experience for users of mobile devices. Explain that media queries are essential to responsive web design because they let you customize layouts for various viewport sizes. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Class Discussion: Have the students discuss the mobile-first approach and its focus. 2. Class Discussion: Let the students discuss how the approach followed for tablet design and for desktop design differs. 3. Quick Quiz: 1) True/False: Media queries are essential to responsive web design because they customize layouts for various viewport sizes. True or False? (Answer: True)

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 3 of 10

HTML 280: Project – Use Media Queries to Design for Tablet and Desktop Viewports LECTURE NOTES • Explain that responsive web design principles are applied to a website by editing the site’s style sheet to include media queries that will apply styles specific to tablet and desktop viewports • Explain that media queries are inserted to detect a tablet-sized viewport and a desktop-sized viewport • Discuss the addition of pseudo-classes to the style sheet to style links within the navigation area • Note that a roadmap identifies the general activities to be performed such as adding tablet media query and styles, adding desktop media query and styles, modifying viewport breakpoints, inserting and styling pseudo-classes, and adding a linear gradient FIGURES: 6–1a, 6–1b TEACHER TIP Explain the importance of using media queries to design tablet and desktop viewports. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Class Discussion: Have the students apply responsive web design principles to a website by editing the site’s style sheet to include media queries that will apply styles specific to tablet and desktop viewports.

HTML 281: Using Media Queries LECTURE NOTES • Explain that to add style rules that target tablet or desktop viewports in particular, a media query for each viewport needs to be created • Point out that media queries take responsiveness to an entirely new level by allowing application of different CSS styles • Explain that media queries can apply styles to move, hide, or display content on the page, change text or colors, or add any other styles to make the page easier to read in a particular situation • Note that media queries can be embedded in the link tag that connects an external style sheet to an HTML file, or that they can be inserted in the external style sheet itself • Explain that a breakpoint is set to understand the code and syntax of how a media query detects viewport size • Explain that a media query can use a logical expression to test whether a viewport has reached a particular breakpoint • Explain the usage of the @media rule • Mention that styles created for the smaller viewports apply to larger viewports by default FIGURES: 6–2a, 6–2b, 6–2c, 6–2d, 6–2e TABLES: 6–1, 6–2

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 4 of 10

BOXES 1. BTW: W3C Recommendation 2. BTW: Using the keyword "only" TEACHER TIP Give an example of a media query inserted into the link tag of an HTML page. Explain to the students that the logical expression used by a media query includes the name of a media query feature, a characteristic of the environment, and a breakpoint value to be tested. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Class Discussion: Ask the students to name and describe the common media query features that can be used in a logical expression. 2. Quick Quiz: 1) Where can one apply different styles to a webpage to cause it to change in a way that it is made easier to read and navigate for a particular situation, such as a user viewing the webpage on a phone? (Answer: Breakpoint) 2) Which keyword indicates that older browsers should ignore the media query's style rules? (Answer: only) LAB ACTIVITIES 1. Ask the students to resize a webpage and observe whether the navigation system changes or a multicolumn layout is reduced to one column as the viewport narrows to the size of a phone, which indicates that media queries are working behind the scenes. 2. Ask the students to find a website that uses responsive design with different customized layouts. 3. Ask the students to write a media query that includes a media type and a logical expression and add it to a website template they have created. 4. Ask the students to write code exemplifying the addition of media queries to an external style sheet.

HTML 286: Designing for Tablet Viewports LECTURE NOTES • Explain how responsive web design and media queries are used to overcome the difficulty faced while designing “one size fits all” layout for a tablet device • Use Figure 6–3 to explain the creation of a media query for a tablet viewport • Discuss how the tablet viewport is different from the mobile viewport and the desktop viewport • Discuss the importance of reviewing the website before determining the ideal layout for a tablet viewport • Mention that clear, simple, and easy website navigation is vital

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual • • •

Page 5 of 10

Explain how to create a style rule to display the navigation list items Review the About Us page design for a tablet viewport Review the Contact Us page design for a tablet viewport

FIGURES: 6–3, 6–4, 6–5, 6–6, 6–7, 6–8, 6–9, 6–10, 6–11, 6–12, 6–13, 6–14, 6–15, 6–16, 6–17, 6–18, 6– 19, 6–20, 6–21, 6-22, 6-23 BOXES 1. BTW: Tablet Navigation Tips TEACHER TIP Ask the students to create one layout to target tablet viewports. Explain to the students what happens when the mobile styles have already been completed and how to create a media query to target tablet devices. Explain to the students the need to maintain the same color scheme, typography, and general look of the website. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Assign a Project: Ask the students to create a page design for a tablet viewport such that the appearance of the website looks the same from viewport to viewport. The only thing that should change is layout and therefore the placement of content. 2. Assign a Project: Continuing with the project above, create a style rule to display the navigation list items as a single horizontal line.

HTML 298: Designing for Desktop Viewports LECTURE NOTES • Explain that designing a desktop viewport provides an opportunity for a multiple-column layout because desktop screens are often wider than those for other devices • Mention that today’s desktop monitors come in many shapes and sizes; as the viewport size increases, the layout of the website is degraded • Review how to create another media query that targets larger viewports and specify a width for the primary div element with the id attribute of container • Explain that media queries help make mobile-friendly webpages; they can also be used to create printer-friendly webpages FIGURES: 6–24, 6–25, 6–26, 6–27, 6–28, 6–29, 6–30, 6–31, 6–32, 6–33, 6–34, 6–35, 6–36, 6-37, 6-38, 6-39, 6-40, 6–41, 6–42, 6–43, 6–44, 6-45, 6-46, 6-47 BOXES 1. CONSIDER THIS: How do I begin designing for a desktop viewport? TEACHER TIPS

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 6 of 10

Explain to the students the desktop design principles of a simple style sheet that can be applied in the case of responsive design as well. Discuss how the same look and feel of a site can be maintained while changing some formatting to best accommodate the desktop viewport. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Quick Quiz: 1) True/False: 100% of the screen width should be used to display a website for a desktop viewport. True or False? (Answer: False) LAB ACTIVITIES 1. Have the students style a navigation area to appear as a single unified element with navigation links evenly distributed within the area for a webpage template. 2. Have the students correct the placement of the headings on a webpage by creating a new style rule to apply more bottom margin.

HTML 312: Modifying Breakpoints LECTURE NOTES • Recall that a breakpoint is the point at which you want to apply different styles to the webpage, usually depending on the viewport • Explain that developers set breakpoints as determined by the content on the page • Explain how breakpoints are set • Use Figure 6–49 to explain how to determine the viewport width for tablet and desktop viewports • Use Figure 6–52 to explain the new viewport widths for tablet and desktop media queries FIGURES: 6–48, 6–49, 6–50, 6–51, 6–52 BOXES 1. BTW: Browser Developer Tools TEACHER TIPS Explain to the students that even if the standard breakpoints for the tablet and desktop media queries are used, as the browser is resized to view the pages as they appear on a tablet or desktop device, various link texts can get wrapped to two lines. Point out that to keep the links on one line, the style sheet should be modified and the min-width size for the desktop and tablet media queries should be adjusted.

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 7 of 10

CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Class Discussion: Ask the students to recall how a breakpoint is used. 2. Class Discussion: Have the students discuss the usage of min-width size for the desktop and tablet media queries to prevent the link texts from wrapping to two lines. LAB ACTIVITIES 1. Have the students perform the following activities using the website template they have created by following the instructions from each of the following sections: o HTML 314 “To set a new breakpoint for the desktop media query"

HTML 315: Using Dynamic Pseudo-Classes LECTURE NOTES • Explain the use of pseudo-classes in a style sheet • Use Table 6–3 to explain different pseudo-classes and the kinds of styling that they are used for • Discuss the format used to construct a pseudo-class • Explain the order in which the pseudo-classes should be used • Use Figure 6–53 and Figure 6–54 to explain the addition of pseudo-classes to a style sheet FIGURES: 6–53, 6–54 TABLES: 6–3 BOXES 1. BTW: Another Dynamic Pseudo-Class TEACHER TIPS Explain to the students that the link color changes due to the use of pseudo-classes in the style sheet and that one can define a unique style for normal, visited, hover, and active links by creating four separate style rules with a:link, a:visited, a:hover, and a:active as the selectors. Discuss that a pseudo-class can be attached to a selector with a colon to specify a state or relation to the selector to give the web developer more control over that selector. Explain to the students that pseudo-classes are more often used in a desktop viewport because mobile and tablet devices are touch devices and do not have a hover option or an option to click. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Class Discussion: Have the students discuss the importance of pseudo-classes. 2. Assign a Project: Ask the students to make a list of ten websites using pseudo-classes that they have visited in which the links changed colors when they were pointed to (hovered over) or when a link was clicked.

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 8 of 10

3. Quick Quiz: 1) What allows one to change the style of a link based on four link states: link, visited, hover, and active? (Answer: Pseudo-class) 2) True/False: A pseudo-class is attached to a selector with a colon to specify a state or relation to the selector to give the web developer more control over that selector. (Answer: True) 3) What is part of the pseudo-class and is placed between the selector and the pseudo-class? (Answer: colon (:))

HTML 318: Using Gradients LECTURE NOTES • Explain the functioning of a gradient • Discuss the application of a linear gradient • Use Table 6–4 to provide an overview of linear gradients • Discuss the application a radial gradient • Use Figure 6–55 to explain the addition of a linear gradient • Discuss the importance of validation • Explain the steps involved in validating an HTML document FIGURES: 6–55, 6–56, 6-57, 6-58, 6-59 TABLES: 6–4 BOXES 1. BTW: CSS3 Gradients 2. CONSIDER THIS: Can multiple colors be used within a gradient? TEACHER TIPS Explain to the students that one of the new properties introduced with CSS3 is a gradient, which is a gradual transition from one color to another. CSS3 has two types of gradients: linear and radial. Explain that linear gradients can transition from several different angles. The default transition is from the top to the bottom. Linear gradients can also transition up, left, right, or diagonally. Explain that radial gradients are specified by their center. The color begins in the center and transitions in a radial direction to another color or colors. To create a radial gradient, you must specify at least two colors. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Class Discussion: Have the students observe various websites and identify the enhancements that have resulted from the upgrade from Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) to CSS3. 2. Critical Thinking: What is the difference between linear gradients and radial gradients?

3. Quick Quiz:

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 9 of 10

1) What is the gradual transition from one color to another called? (Answer: Gradient) 2) True/False: The default transition of linear gradients is from the left to the right. (Answer: False) 3) Identify an effective troubleshooting tool used during the development process that adds a valuable level of professionalism to one’s work. (Answer: Validation)

End of Chapter Material ▪

Chapter Summary provides a general survey of the material in the chapter. Students can use these pages to reinforce their achievement of the chapter objectives.

▪

The Apply Your Knowledge section includes short exercises and review questions that reinforce concepts and provide opportunities to practice skills.

▪

Extend Your Knowledge exercises allow students to expand their knowledge by solving practical problems and experimenting with new skills, using Help.

▪

Analyze, Correct, Improve section allows the students to analyze a webpage, correct the errors present in the code, and then improve it.

▪

The In the Lab activities solidify the concepts presented in the chapter with practical application.

▪

Consider This: Your Turn activities at the end of the chapter provide instructions to complete assignments given in the chapters and help students to create their own websites outside the class.

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual Glossary of Key Terms • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

481px (HTML 284) 768px (HTML 285) @media only screen (HTML 285) @media rule (HTML 284) .mobile (HTML 284) a:active (HTML 315) a:hover (HTML 315) a:link (HTML 315) a:visited (HTML 315) all (HTML 285) background-color (HTML 284) body (HTML 284) breakpoint (HTML 282) display: none; (HTML 287) display (HTML 285) div (HTML 287) dynamic pseudo-classes (HTML 315) gradient (HTML 318) inline (HTML 285) link (HTML 282) linear gradients (HTML 318) media query (HTML 281) media query feature (HTML 283) min-width (HTML 284) print (HTML 285) radial gradients (HTML 318) screen (HTML 285)

Top of Document

Page 10 of 10

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 1 of 7

Responsive Web Design with HTML 5 and CSS, 9th Edition Chapter 7: Improving Web Design with New Page Layouts A Guide to this Instructor’s Manual: We have designed this Instructor’s Manual to supplement and enhance your teaching experience through classroom activities and a cohesive chapter summary. This document is organized chronologically, using the same heading in red that you see in the textbook. Under each heading you will find (in order): Lecture Notes that summarize the section, Figures and Boxes found in the section, if any, Teacher Tips, Classroom Activities, and Lab Activities. Pay special attention to teaching tips and activities geared toward quizzing your students, enhancing their critical thinking skills, and encouraging experimentation within the software. In addition to this Instructor’s Manual, our Instructor’s Resources also include PowerPoint Presentations, Test Banks, and other supplements to aid in your teaching experience.

Table of Contents Chapter Objectives HTML 338: Introduction HTML 338: Project – Use HTML 5 Structural Elements to Redesign a Website HTML 340: Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements HTML 347: Improving Design with CSS HTML 350: Redesigning the Home Page HTML 364: Updating the About Us Page HTML 365: Creating the Nutrition Page HTML 378: Adding a Favicon End of Chapter Material Glossary of Key Terms

1 2 2 2 3 4 4 5 6 6 7

Chapter Objectives Students will have mastered the material in Chapter 7 when they can: ⚫ Describe and use article, aside, and section ⚫ Insert and style figure and figcaption elements elements ⚫ Describe and use figure and figcaption ⚫ Insert a section element elements ⚫ Insert and style an article element ⚫ Describe and use the CSS grid layout ⚫ Insert and style an aside element ⚫ Describe and use the opacity property ⚫ Describe and add a favicon to a webpage ⚫ Describe and use the box sizing property ⚫ Describe and use the text shadow property ⚫ Describe and use the box shadow property

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual Page 2 of 7 HTML 338: Introduction LECTURE NOTES • Discuss the changes that need to be made in a site to keep the audience engaged and the customers elated • Briefly discuss HTML 5 semantic elements TEACHER TIP Remind students of the purpose of the semantic elements header, nav, main, and footer. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Quick Quiz: 1) True/False: Web design involves a daily pursuit of perfection in layout, function, and efficiency. (Answer: True)

HTML 338: Project – Use HTML 5 Structural Elements to Redesign a Website LECTURE NOTES • Mention that the project in this chapter enhances a website with HTML 5 semantic elements to structure added content • Discuss the steps that must be carried out to implement the new website design for Forward Fitness Club • Discuss the roadmap for the chapter FIGURES: 7-1a, 7-1b, 7-1c, 7-2a, 7-2b, 7-2c, 7-3 TEACHER TIP Remind students that as styles are added to a stylesheet, they immediately format the attached webpages when the webpages are opened or refreshed in a browser.

HTML 340: Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements LECTURE NOTES • Review the definition of semantic elements • Discuss the uses of HTML 5 semantic elements • Describe the article element and discuss its syntax • List the contents the article element is used to denote • Point out the article element in Figure 7-4 and Figure 7-5 • Describe the aside element and discuss its syntax • List the contents the aside element is used to denote • Point out the aside element in Figure 7-6 and Figure 7-7 • Describe the section element • Discuss the role of a section element in a webpage • Discuss the syntax of and the general rule for the section element • Point out the section element in Figures 7-8 and 7-9 • Discuss the use of a figure element • List the visuals a figure element can display • Discuss the figure caption element and its syntax • Use Figures 7-10 and 7-11 to distinguish between figure and figure caption elements

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual Page 3 of 7 FIGURES: 7-4, 7-5, 7-6, 7-7, 7-8, 7-9, 7-10, 7-11 TABLE: 7-1 BOXES 1. Consider This: Can I use figure and figure caption elements to wrap image elements separately? TEACHER TIP Inform students that articles may be nested within other HTML elements, such as the main, section, or other article elements. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Quick Quiz: 1) True/False: You can wrap each image element within separate figure and figure caption elements. (Answer: True) 2) True/False: The W3C states that the section element “is a generic container element.” (Answer: False)

HTML 347: Improving Design with CSS LECTURE NOTES • Discuss the CSS grid layout and mention that web developers can use the CSS grid layout to design a multiple-column layout with better accuracy than when using float, width, and clear properties • List the CSS grid layout properties provided in Table 7-2 • Point out the CSS grid-template-columns property values using Table 7-3 • Describe how and why to use opacity • Describe the box-shadow property as another CSS property that applies a shadow to an element, such as a div or an img element • Point out that the text-shadow property is another CSS property that applies a shadow to text • Describe the CSS box-sizing property TABLES: 7-2, 7-3 BOXES 1. BTW: W3C Working Group 2. BTW: CSS Flexbox Layout TEACHER TIP Inform students that the CSS grid layout is a newer webpage design model used to create a single or multiple-column layout by controlling the size and position of boxes of content on a webpage. The CSS grid layout was created by the W3C Working Group to lay out boxes of content into rows and columns, making a more reliable pattern of responsive element-sizing behaviors.

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual Page 4 of 7

CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Quick Quiz: 1) True/False: An opacity value of 0.50 makes an element 50 percent transparent and an opacity value of 0 makes an element completely transparent. (Answer: True) 2) True/False: When you specify opacity for the background of an element, any nested elements will inherit the transparency. (Answer: True)

HTML 350: Redesigning the Home Page LECTURE NOTES • Discuss the steps to modify a home page by adding a new div element • Explain the purpose for inserting a figure element • Discuss the purpose of updating the style sheet for a mobile viewport • Explain how to use the CSS grid in a tablet viewport • Discuss the need to create new style rules for the fitness website • Review how to apply a text shadow FIGURES: , 7-12, 7-13, 7-14, 7-15, 7-16, 7-17, 7-18, 7-19, 7-20, 7-21, 7-22, 7-23, 7-24, 7-25, 7-26, 7-27, 7-28, 7-29, 7-30, 7-31, 7-32, 7-33, 7-34, 7-35, 7-36, 7-37, 7-38 BOXES 1. BTW: Web Content Strategist TEACHER TIP Prepare a few examples of color values and discuss them with students. LAB ACTIVITIES 1. Have students perform the following activities using the website template they have created by following the instructions from each of the following sections: o HTML 351 "To Add a New div Element to the Home Page" o HTML 352 “To Add figure Elements to the Home Page” o HTML 354 “To Update the Style Sheet for the New Design in a Mobile Viewport” o HTML 357 “To Use the CSS Grid in a Tablet Viewport” o HTML 360 “To Add New Style Rules in the Desktop Viewport” o HTML 362 “To Apply a Text Shadow”

HTML 364: Updating the About Us Page LECTURE NOTES • Discuss the steps that are to be followed to update the About Us page in the Forward Fitness Club website • Explain the purpose of adding section elements to the About Us page FIGURES: 7-39, 7-40, 7-41

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual Page 5 of 7

LAB ACTIVITIES 1. Have students perform the following activities using the website template they have created by following the instructions from each of the following sections: o HTML 364 “To Add Section Elements to the About Us Page”

HTML 365: Creating the Nutrition Page LECTURE NOTES • Briefly discuss the steps to create the nutrition page for the Forward Fitness Club • Explain how to use the CSS grid layout to create the three-column layout for tablet and desktop viewports • Discuss the process to create a three-column layout • Explain the steps in creating the Nutrition page • Discuss the reason for adding article and aside elements to the nutrition page • Explain that the nth-of-type() selector is another kind of structural pseudo-class that is used to select specific elements within a parent element • Explain how to style the nutrition page for mobile, tablet, and desktop viewports FIGURES: 7-42, 7-43, 7-44, 7-45, 7-46, 7-47, 7-48, 7-49, 7-50, 7-51, 7-52, 7-53, 7-54, 7-55, 7-56, 7-57, 758, 7-59, 7-60, 7-61, 7-62, 7-63, 7-64 BOXES 1. BTW: CSS Multiple Column Layout 2. BTW: Modern Website Design TEACHER TIP Explain that web developers sometimes want certain elements to span several grid columns. This task can be completed with the grid-column property in CSS. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Class Discussion: Have students discuss the importance of modern website design. LAB ACTIVITIES 1. Have students perform the following activities using the website template they have created by following the instructions from each of the following sections: o HTML 367 “To Create the Nutrition Page” o HTML 368 “To Add article and aside Elements to the Nutrition Page” o HTML 372 “To Style the Nutrition Page for a Mobile Viewport” o HTML 375 “To Style the Nutrition Page for a Tablet Viewport” o HTML 378 “To Style the Nutrition Page for a Desktop Viewport”

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual Page 6 of 7

HTML 378: Adding a Favicon LECTURE NOTES • • • • • •

Explain that most websites use a favicon, a small image that appears on the browser tab that represents the business Review why favicons are used Mention that favicons can be PNG, GIF, or ICO files Explain how to add a favicon to a website Review the importance of validating the style sheet Explain how to validate HTML files

FIGURES: 7-65, 7-66, 7-67, 7-68, 7-69, 7-70, 7-71, 7-72 BOXES 1. CONSIDER THIS: How can I make my own favicon? CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Class Discussion: Discuss the importance of validating style sheets and HTML files. LAB ACTIVITIES 1. Have students perform the following activities using the website template they have created by following the instructions from each of the following sections: o HTML 380 “To Add a Favicon to a Website” o HTML 383 “To Validate the Style Sheet” o HTML 383 “To Validate the HTML Files”

End of Chapter Material ▪

Chapter Summary provides a general survey of the material in the chapter. Students can use these pages to reinforce their achievement of the chapter objectives.

▪

The Apply Your Knowledge section includes short exercises and review questions that reinforce concepts and provide opportunities to practice skills.

▪

Extend Your Knowledge exercises allow students to expand their knowledge by solving practical problems and experimenting with new skills, using Help.

▪

Analyze, Correct, Improve section allows the students to analyze a webpage, correct the errors present in the code, and then improve it.

▪

The In the Lab activities solidify the concepts presented in the chapter with practical applications.

▪

Consider This: Your Turn activities at the end of the chapter provide instructions to complete assignments given in the chapters and help students to create their own websites outside the class.

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual Page 7 of 7 Glossary of Key Terms • • • • • • • • • • •

article element (HTML 341) aside element (HTML 343) box-shadow (HTML 349) box-sizing (HTML 350) CSS grid layout (HTML 347) favicon (HTML 378) figure caption (HTML 346) figure element (HTML 346) opacity (HTML 348) section element (HTML 344) text-shadow (HTML 349)

Top of Document

Responsive Web Design with HTML 5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 1 of 7

Responsive Web Design with HTML 5 and CSS, 9TH Edition Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms A Guide to this Instructor’s Manual: We have designed this Instructor’s Manual to supplement and enhance your teaching experience through classroom activities and a cohesive chapter summary. This document is organized chronologically, using the same heading in red that you see in the textbook. Under each heading you will find (in order): Lecture Notes that summarize the section, Figures and Boxes found in the section, if any, Teacher Tips, Classroom Activities, and Lab Activities. Pay special attention to teaching tips and activities geared toward quizzing your students, enhancing their critical thinking skills, and encouraging experimentation within the software. In addition to this Instructor’s Manual, our Instructor’s Resources also include PowerPoint Presentations, Test Banks, and other supplements to aid in your teaching experience.

Table of Contents Chapter Objectives HTML 400: Introduction HTML 400: Project – Create a Table and a Form HTML 402: Discovering Tables HTML 415: Styling Table Elements HTML 423: Creating Webpage Forms HTML 438: Styling Forms End of Chapter Material Glossary of Key Terms

1 2 2 2 3 4 5 6 7

Chapter Objectives Students will have mastered the material in Chapter 8 when they can: ⚫ Define table elements ⚫ Use the form and input elements ⚫ Describe the steps used to plan, design, and ⚫ Create text input controls, labels, and check code a table boxes ⚫ Create a table with rows and data ⚫ Create a selection menu with multiple ⚫ Insert a table caption options ⚫ Style a table for tablet and desktop ⚫ Use the textarea element viewports ⚫ Create a Submit button ⚫ Describe form controls and their uses

Responsive Web Design with HTML 5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual Page 2 of 7 HTML 400: Introduction LECTURE NOTES • Discuss the uses of a table • Discuss the use of forms by businesses • List the common information collected by forms for businesses • Briefly discuss the topics that will be covered in the chapter CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Quick Quiz: 1) True/False: Forms are seldom used for business purposes. (Answer: False)

HTML 400: Project – Create a Table and a Form LECTURE NOTES • Mention that a Classes page, which contains information about the classes offered at the Forward Fitness Club, will be created in this chapter using a table • Discuss the steps that must be taken to improve a website using tables and forms • Discuss the roadmap for the chapter FIGURES: 8-1a, 8-1b, 8-1c, 8-2a, 8-2b, 8-2c TEACHER TIP Inform students that the main objective of creating forms in a website is to collect information from website visitors. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Class Discussion: Have students discuss how forms are utilized in everyday life. Have they filled out any forms today? This week? If so, what was the purpose of the form?

HTML 402: Discovering Tables LECTURE NOTES • Introduce tables as a resource for comparing data or outlining a topic • Define the following: row, column, cell, header cell, and data cell • Discuss the syntax to create a table on a webpage, including table row and table data elements • Use Figure 8-5 to discuss a table with no applied styles • Define a table border • Discuss a table header with its syntax • Discuss a table caption with its syntax • Use Figure 8-6 to discuss a table with a table caption, header, and border • Discuss the way in which table elements were misused in the late 1990s • Discuss the general rule for when to use a table and a table’s usefulness in a webpage • Discuss the process of planning and creating effective tables • Explain the reason for giving careful consideration to the mobile viewport when planning a table for responsive web design

Responsive Web Design with HTML 5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual Page 3 of 7 FIGURES: 8-3, 8-4, 8-5, 8-6, 8-7, 8-8, 8-9a, 8-9b, 8-10, 8-11, 8-12, 8-13, 8-14, 8-15, 8-16, 8-17, 8-18, 819, 8-20, 8-21 TABLE: 8-1 BOXES 1. BTW: WCAG and Tables 2. Consider This: What is the difference between the <th> and the <thead> tags? 3. BTW: Avoid Using Tables for Layout 4. BTW: HTML Entities in Tables TEACHER TIP Explain that tables are used to present information in a clear and concise way as students will be less familiar with the use of tables in creating special HTML design effects. Prepare a few examples to clearly illustrate the difference among table row, heading cell, and data cell elements. Remind students that headers are typically used to identify row or column content. Remind them that a table caption is to be inserted after the starting <table> tag. Inform students that conceptualizing the table first saves time when determining the HTML table elements needed to create the table. Remind them that a table can include headers and captions individually or in combination. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Quick Quiz: 1) True/False: A table caption is left-aligned by default. (Answer: False) 2) What is the maximum number of captions a table can have? (Answer: One) LAB ACTIVITIES 1. Have students perform the following activities using the website template they have created by following the instructions from each of the following sections: o HTML 408 "To Create the Classes Page" o HTML 409 “To Add a div Element to the Classes Page” o HTML 411 “To Add a Table to the Classes Page”

HTML 415: Styling Table Elements LECTURE NOTES • Using Table 8-2, discuss the common CSS properties for styling tables, including examples • Explain the concept of separated border using Figure 8-22 as a reference • Using Figure 8-23, discuss the collapsed border type and its syntax • Discuss the complications involved in styling tables for a mobile viewport • Explain the reason for creating new style rules to style a table for tablet and desktop viewports FIGURES: 8-22, 8-23, 8-24, 8-25, 8-26, 8-27, 8-28, 8-29, 8-30, 8-31, 8-32, 8-33, 8-34, 8-35 TABLE: 8-2

Responsive Web Design with HTML 5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual Page 4 of 7 BOXES 1. BTW: Converting a Table to a Chart CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Class Discussion: Ask students to discuss experiences they’ve had with websites not optimized for a given viewport. Have they attempted to navigate a desktop website on a mobile device (and vice versa)? LAB ACTIVITIES 1. Have students perform the following activities using the website template they have created by following the instructions from each of the following sections: o HTML 417 "To Style a Table for a Tablet Viewport" o HTML 422 “To Style a Table for a Large Desktop Viewport”

HTML 423: Creating Webpage Forms LECTURE NOTES • List the different information that can be collected using forms • Discuss the use of forms in businesses • Explain the purposes of input controls and labels • Discuss the types of input controls with examples • Using Table 8-3, discuss the different input types • Discuss the frequently used input control attributes: name, id, and value • Discuss text input controls and attributes • Explain the concept of a password control • Discuss the concept of an email control, tel control, and date control • Discuss the textarea control along with its two attributes, rows and cols • Discuss the use of a checkbox control in a form • Discuss the radio control and explain the functionality of a radio button • Point out the role of a select control in a form • Discuss the submit control and reset control in a form • Explain the functions of submit and reset buttons • Use Figure 8-42 to point out different types of input controls • Discuss the use of form labels and syntax • Using Table 8-4, discuss the common form attributes • Discuss the role of the action attribute in form processing • Differentiate between the get method and post method with their respective syntax FIGURES: 8-36, 8-37, 8-38, 8-39, 8-40, 8-41, 8-42, 8-43, 8-44, 8-45, 8-46, 8-47, 8-48, 8-49, 8-50, 8-51, 852, 8-53, 8-54, 8-55, 8-56, 8-57 TABLES: 8-3, 8-4 BOXES 1. BTW: HTML Forms and JavaScript 2. BTW: Radio Buttons

Responsive Web Design with HTML 5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual Page 5 of 7 3. BTW: Customer Feedback 4. BTW: Security 5. Consider This: How do I send the form data to my email address? TEACHER TIPS Inform the students that although CGI programs are a common way for web servers to interact dynamically with users, webpages are increasingly implementing scripts that run on the user's machine rather than the web server. Examples of these client-side solutions include Java applets and ActiveX controls (in contrast, the use of CGI is a server-side solution because the web server performs the processing). Prepare a few examples clearly illustrating the difference between the get and post methods. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Class Discussion: Ask students to express their views on using input controls within a form. LAB ACTIVITIES 1. Have students perform the following activities using the website template they have created by following the instructions from each of the following sections: o HTML 432 “To Add a Form, Fieldset, Legend Labels, and Text Input Controls to the Contact Us page” o HTML 433 “To Add email and tel Input Controls to a Form” o HTML 434 “To Add Checkbox Controls to a Form” o HTML 435 “To Add a select Element to a Form” o HTML 437 “To Add a textarea Element to a Form” o HTML 438 “To Add Submit Button to a Form”

HTML 438: Styling Forms LECTURE NOTES • Explain the reason for applying CSS styles to forms • Discuss how to modify the appearance and the content of the form for the tablet and desktop viewports • Mention that controls can be included to collect optional information, such as product feedback, in tablet and desktop viewports FIGURES: 8-58, 8-59, 8-60, 8-61, 8-62, 8-63, 8-64, 8-65, 8-66 CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Class Discussion: Working in pairs, ask students create a form that may be used to collect product feedback from customers. LAB ACTIVITIES 1. Have students perform the following activities using the website template they have created by following the instructions from each of the following sections: o HTML 439 “To Style a Form for a Mobile Viewport”

Responsive Web Design with HTML 5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual Page 6 of 7 o o o o

HTML 442 “To Style a Form for a Tablet Viewport” HTML 443 “To Style a Form for a Desktop Viewport” HTML 444 “To Validate the Style Sheet” HTML 445 “To Validate the HTML Files”

End of Chapter Material ▪

Chapter Summary provides a general survey of the material in the chapter. Students can use these pages to reinforce their achievement of the chapter objectives.

▪

The Apply Your Knowledge section includes short exercises and review questions that reinforce concepts and provide opportunities to practice skills.

▪

Extend Your Knowledge exercises allow students to expand their knowledge by solving practical problems and experimenting with new skills, using Help.

▪

Analyze, Correct, Improve section allows students to analyze a webpage, correct the errors present in the code, and then improve it.

▪

The In the Lab activities solidify the concepts presented in the chapter with practical applications.

▪

Consider This: Your Turn activities at the end of the chapter provide instructions to complete assignments given in the chapters and help students to create their own websites outside the class.

Responsive Web Design with HTML 5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual Page 7 of 7 Glossary of Key Terms • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

cell (HTML 402) checkbox control (HTML 426) cols (HTML 426) column (HTML 402)ata cell (HTML 403) data input control (HTML 424) date control (HTML 426) date text box (HTML 424) email control (HTML 426) email text box (HTML 424) fieldset element (HTML 429) forms (HTML 400) get method (HTML 431) header cell (HTML 403) id (HTML 424) input control (HTML 424) label (HTML 424) legend (HTML 429) maxlength (HTML 424) name (HTML 424) password control (HTML 426) password text box (HTML 424)

Top of Document

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

post method (HTML 431) radio button (HTML 427) radio control (HTML 427)Reset button (HTML 429) reset control (HTML 428) row (HTML 402) rows (HTML 426) script (HTML 424) select control (HTML 428) size (HTML 424) Submit button (HTML 428) submit control (HTML 428) table (HTML 400) table border (HTML 404) table caption (HTML 404) table header (HTML 404) text area box (HTML 424) textarea control (HTML 426) text box (HTML 424) text input control (HTML 424) tel control (HTML 426) telephone text box (HTML 424) value (HTML 424)

Responsive Web Design with HTML 5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 1 of 7

Responsive Web Design with HTML 5 and CSS, 9TH Edition Chapter 9: Integrating Audio and Video A Guide to this Instructor’s Manual: We have designed this Instructor’s Manual to supplement and enhance your teaching experience through classroom activities and a cohesive chapter summary. This document is organized chronologically, using the same heading in red that you see in the textbook. Under each heading you will find (in order): Lecture Notes that summarize the section, Figures and Boxes found in the section, if any, Teacher Tips, Classroom Activities, and Lab Activities. Pay special attention to teaching tips and activities geared toward quizzing your students, enhancing their critical thinking skills, and encouraging experimentation within the software. In addition to this Instructor’s Manual, our Instructor’s Resources also include PowerPoint Presentations, Test Banks, and other supplements to aid in your teaching experience.

Table of Contents Chapter Objectives HTML 466: Introduction HTML 466: Project – Add Audio and Video to a Webpage HTML 468: Using Multimedia HTML 474: Integrating Audio HTML 480: Integrating Video End of Chapter Material Glossary of Key Terms

2 2 2 2 3 4 6 7

Chapter Objectives Students will have mastered the material in Chapter 9 when they can: ⚫ Describe the benefits and limitations of ⚫ Understand and create video elements multimedia in websites ⚫ Identify common audio attributes ⚫ Identify audio formats ⚫ Identify common video attributes ⚫ Identify video formats ⚫ Understand the source element ⚫ Describe a plug-in ⚫ Test audio elements ⚫ Understand codecs ⚫ Test video elements ⚫ Understand and create audio elements ⚫ Make videos accessible

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 2 of 7

HTML 466: Introduction LECTURE NOTES • Point out the benefits of adding multimedia to a website • List the advantages of using videos in a website • Discuss the role of audio in enhancing a website TEACHER TIP Inform the students that videos and audio are normally preferable to text. Videos are considered to be more memorable while audio provides a lot of information more quickly and effectively than text. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Assign a Project: Ask the students to find three websites that are enhanced by the use of multimedia.

HTML 466: Project – Add Audio and Video to a Webpage LECTURE NOTES • Use Figures 9-1 and 9-2 to discuss the steps required to implement the new website design for Forward Fitness Club by integrating multimedia into the website • Discuss the roadmap for the chapter FIGURES: 9-1, 9-2 TEACHER TIP Students who have always known multimedia on the web as an ever-present part of their life may find it interesting to know that multimedia has not always been a given on the web. In the mid- to late 1990s, many experts were advocating against the use of video on the web, mainly because of bandwidth constraints. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Class Discussion: Back in 1995, many experts were recommending that web developers avoid video on the web because of bandwidth constraints. Ask students what changes in bandwidth capacity they anticipate in the next 15 years.

HTML 468: Using Multimedia LECTURE NOTES • Discuss the significance of adding graphic images, audio, and video to a website • Explain how to decide whether or not to add multimedia content to a website • Define multimedia using Figure 9-3 • Using Figure 9-4, describe podcasts • Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of creating a multimedia file • Describe the software that can aid in creating audio and video files • Point out the way to find multimedia resources on the web • Explain the concept of embedded media

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual • • • • • • • •

Page 3 of 7

Explain the procedure to access external media files and draw a comparison between external media and embedded media Define a media player and discuss the different media players available Describe a plug-in and list the common plug-ins Discuss how built-in media support was introduced by HTML 5 Discuss the role of Adobe Flash within websites Discuss the reason for Flash being sparingly used in designing modern-day websites Define a Java applet and discuss a way to embed it within a webpage Discuss the object and param elements

FIGURES: 9-3, 9-4, 9-5, 9-6, 9-7, 9-8, 9-9, 9-10 BOXES 1. BTW: Online Resources 2. Consider This: Can I use any images, audio, or video I find on the Internet to create a multimedia file? 3. BTW: Chrome Extensions 4. BTW: Parameters TEACHER TIP Remind the students that many audio and video editing applications offer a free trial period. Inform them that they should search for “public domain audio or video” to find multimedia resources on the web. These resources are available free of copyright restrictions. Inform the students that it is a good practice to use media files in common formats such as .wmv, .mp4, .flv, and .mp3, as these plug-ins can be accessed easily. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Class Discussion: Survey the students about their experience with the media players and plugins listed in the text. LAB ACTIVITIES 1. Have the students find a library of podcasts on the web that is relevant to their interests.

HTML 474: Integrating Audio LECTURE NOTES • Discuss the importance of selecting the appropriate audio for a website • Point out the considerations when integrating audio within a website • Use Table 9-1 to discuss the most commonly used audio file formats • Discuss the reason for using compression techniques for audio files embedded in webpages • Describe a codec • Discuss the function and syntax of the audio element • Use Table 9-2 to discuss the attributes and values that can be used with the audio element • Explain the code for enabling the audio element to work in all browsers

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual • •

Page 4 of 7

Explain the purpose of adding an audio element on the Classes page of the Forward Fitness Club website Use Table 9-3 to list the audio file formats supported by the HTML 5 audio element across the five major browsers

FIGURES: 9-11, 9-12, 9-13, 9-14, 9-15 TABLES: 9-1, 9-2, 9-3 BOXES 1. BTW: Online Converters 2. BTW: Audio Clip TEACHER TIPS The development of rich media tags such as audio and video is one of the most anticipated and promising offerings of HTML 5. Fully programmable with JavaScript, these tags offer great ease of use and, at the same time, provide flexibility via access to media elements through programming. However, with browser support for HTML 5 still evolving with regard to the <audio> tags, it may be useful for students to test how far their browser support for the <audio> tag extends by searching on the web for a support tester. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Quick Quiz: 1) True/False: .mp3 is an uncompressed audio format. (Answer: False) 2) How many data attributes can be specified within one object element? (Answer: One) LAB ACTIVITIES 1. Have the students perform the following activity using the website template they have created by following the instructions from the section given below. o HTML 478: "To Add Audio to the Classes Page"

HTML 480: Integrating Video LECTURE NOTES • Point out the importance of including appropriate videos in a website • Use Table 9-4 to list the most commonly used video formats for websites • Point out the reason that video file formats use codec compression techniques • Discuss the shortcomings of plug-ins while handling video files • List the HTML elements used to incorporate videos • Discuss the use and syntax of the video element • Use Table 9-5 to discuss the attributes and values that can be used with the video element • Explain the reason for inserting and formatting a video on the About Us page of the Forward Fitness Club website • Use Table 9-6 to list the video file formats supported by the HTML 5 video element across the five major browsers

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual • • • • • • •

Page 5 of 7

Explain the importance of accessibility Explain how captions are used in a video Review how captions are inserted Discuss the purpose of running a file through W3C’s validator Discuss the benefits of validating a style sheet List the steps to validate a CSS document List the steps to validate an HTML document

FIGURES: 9-16, 9-17, 9-18, 9-19, 9-20, 9-21, 9-22, 9-23, 9-24, 9-25, 9-26, 9-27, 9-28, 9-29, 9-30, 9-31, 932, 9-33, 9-34, 9-35, 9-36 TABLES: 9-4, 9-5, 9-6, 9-7 BOXES 1. BTW: Aligning Videos on a Webpage 2. BTW: Video Clips TEACHER TIPS Remind the students that the three HTML elements embed, object, and video all need to be added to make sure that all browsers and browser versions can play a video. Discuss with the students how design techniques change for a responsive website. Inform the students to set the height attribute to auto and the max-width attribute to 100% to achieve a responsive design. Tell them that specifying width and height attributes is more suitable for a website that is not responsive because the browser will not know the size of the video and cannot reserve the appropriate space for it without these attributes. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Quick Quiz: 1) True/False: The video element does not work in legacy browsers. (Answer: True) 2) True/False: The video element allows just one source element. (Answer: False) LAB ACTIVITIES 1. Have the students perform the following activities with the website template they have created. o HTML 483: “To Add Video to the About Us Page” o HTML 484: “To Style the Video” o HTML 488: “To Create a Captions File” o HTML 490: “To Add a Track Element” o HTML 491: “To View Video Captions Using Web Server for Chrome” o HTML 495: “To Validate the Style Sheet” o HTML 495: “To Validate the HTML Files”

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 6 of 7

End of Chapter Material ▪

Chapter Summary provides a general survey of the material in the chapter. Students can use these pages to reinforce their achievement of the chapter objectives.

▪

The Apply Your Knowledge section includes short exercises and review questions that reinforce concepts and provide opportunities to practice skills.

▪

Extend Your Knowledge exercises allow students to expand their knowledge by solving practical problems and experimenting with new skills, using Help.

▪

The Analyze, Correct, Improve section allows students to analyze a webpage, correct the errors present in the code, and then improve it.

▪

The In the Lab activities solidify the concepts presented in the chapter with practical application.

▪

Consider This: Your Turn activities at the end of the chapter provide instructions to complete assignments given in the chapters and help students to create their own websites outside the class.

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual Glossary of Key Terms • • • • • • • • • • •

browser extension (HTML 472) captions (HTML 486) codec (HTML 475) cue text (HTML 487) descriptions file (HTML 487) Java applet (HTML 473) media player (HTML 472) multimedia (HTML 468) podcasts (HTML 469) track element (HTML 487) WebVTT (HTML 487)

Top of Document

Page 7 of 7

Responsive Web Design with HTML 5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 1 of 6

Responsive Web Design with HTML 5 and CSS, 9TH Edition Chapter 10: Creating Interactivity with CSS and JavaScript A Guide to this Instructor’s Manual: We have designed this Instructor’s Manual to supplement and enhance your teaching experience through classroom activities and a cohesive chapter summary. This document is organized chronologically, using the same heading in red that you see in the textbook. Under each heading you will find (in order): Lecture Notes that summarize the section, Figures and Boxes found in the section, if any, Teacher Tips, Classroom Activities, and Lab Activities. Pay special attention to teaching tips and activities geared toward quizzing your students, enhancing their critical thinking skills, and encouraging experimentation within the software. In addition to this Instructor’s Manual, our Instructor’s Resources also include PowerPoint Presentations, Test Banks, and other supplements to aid in your teaching experience.

Table of Contents Chapter Objectives HTML 508: Introduction HTML 508: Project – Add Interactivity to a Webpage HTML 510: Using CSS to Create Interactivity HTML 517: Incorporating JavaScript End of Chapter Material Glossary of Key Terms

1 2 2 2 3 5 6

Chapter Objectives Students will have mastered the material in Chapter 10 when they can: ⚫ Use the CSS transform property ⚫ Understand where JavaScript code may be ⚫ Create animations with CSS keyframes written ⚫ Understand JavaScript ⚫ Create an external JavaScript file ⚫ Describe JavaScript code ⚫ Create JavaScript functions ⚫ Understand and use the script element ⚫ Understand events ⚫ Use an onclick event handler

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual Page 2 of 6 HTML 508: Introduction LECTURE NOTES • Discuss the importance of having interactive webpage features • Explain that CSS and JavaScript are web programming languages used to enhance a website and create interactivity • Discuss the use of JavaScript to make a website more dynamic and interactive CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Critical Thinking: Ask students to visit several websites to look for examples of interactive features. Have them discuss how they create interest on these webpages. How might additional features be added?

HTML 508: Project — Add Interactivity to a Webpage LECTURE NOTES • Discuss the steps to implement the new website design for Forward Fitness Club by adding interactivity within the website • Discuss the roadmap for the chapter FIGURES: 10-1, 10-2, 10-3, 10-4 CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Critical Thinking: In what ways does JavaScript enhance the design of websites?

HTML 510: Using CSS to Create Interactivity LECTURE NOTES • Discuss how CSS has evolved • Describe the various uses of CSS such as moving elements on a webpage, changing the color of an element, or changing the appearance of an element • Discuss the transform property • Review the transform property values listed in Table 10-1 FIGURES: 10-5, 10-6, 10-7, 10-8, 10-9, 10-10, 10-11, 10-12, 10-13, 10-14, 10-15 TABLES: 10-1, 10-2 BOXES 1. BTW: Experimenting with Transforms 2. BTW: GitHub TEACHER TIP Remind the students that the translate method moves the element from its original position. The scale method increases the size of the original element. The rotate method rotates the element a specified number of degrees clockwise or counter-clockwise. The skew method skews the sides of the element.

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual Page 3 of 6 CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Quick Quiz: 1) What is the transform property value used to rotate an element a specified number of degrees clockwise or counter-clockwise? (Answer: rotate( )) 2) True/False: The transform property allows block elements to be transformed or changed within two-dimensional or three-dimensional space. (Answer: True) LAB ACTIVITIES 1. Have the students perform the following activity using the website template they have created by following the instructions from the sections given below. o HTML 512: "To Apply a CSS Transform to a Webpage " o HTML 515: “To Add Animation to a Webpage”

HTML 517: Incorporating JavaScript LECTURE NOTES • Define JavaScript • Discuss the uses of a scripting language • Point out that JavaScript is a client-side scripting language • Discuss the inception of JavaScript and explain the difference between Java and JavaScript • Use Figure 10-16 to discuss the way in which JavaScript is used to create a slideshow • Using Figure 10-17, explain the hamburger icon • Discuss the basic terminology of JavaScript • Use Table 10-3 to discuss the common JavaScript event handlers • Discuss the syntax rules and guidelines to be followed when writing JavaScript code • Point out that JavaScript can be written within an HTML page or as a separate JavaScript file with the filename extension .js • Explain that DOM stands for Document Object Model • Use Figure 10–42 to explain an HTML DOM tree • Use Table 10-4 to list common DOM methods • Discuss the if/else statement • Explain the use of jQuery, a JavaScript library that can significantly reduce the amount of code (and time) needed to complete a web project FIGURES: 10-16, 10-17, 10-18, 10-19, 10-20, 10-21, 10-22, 10-23, 10-24, 10-25, 10-26, 10-27, 10-28, 1029, 10-30, 10-31, 10-32, 10-33, 10-34, 10-35, 10-36, 10-37, 10-38, 10-39, 10-40, 10-41, 10-42, 10-43, 1044, 10-45, 10-46, 10-47, 10-48, 10-49, 10-50, 10-51, 10-52, 10-53, 10-54, 10-55, 10-56, 10-57, 10-58, 1059, 10-60, 10-61, 10-62, 10-63, 10-64, 10-65, 10-66, 10-67, 10-68, 10-69, 10-70, 10-71 TABLES: 10-3, 10-4 BOXES 1. BTW: Server-Side Scripting 2. Consider This: How do I find errors in my JavaScript code? 3. BTW: jQuery Animations 4. BTW: AngularJS

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual Page 4 of 6 5. BTW: JavaScript Help 6. BTW: Node.js 7. BTW: camelCase 8. BTW: JSON 9. BTW: React 10. BTW: Hide and Show with jQuery 11. BTW: Vue.js 12. BTW: The jQuery css( ) Method 13. Consider This: How will you use interactivity within your website? 14. Consider This: How should you submit solutions to questions in the assignments identified with a symbol? TEACHER TIPS Remind the students that Java and JavaScript have nearly nothing in common save for the name. Although Java is technically an interpreted programming language, it is coded in a similar fashion as C++, with separate header and class files compiled together prior to execution. It is powerful enough to write major applications and insert them on a webpage as a special object called an applet. Java has the unique ability to run the same program on PC, Macintosh, and Unix computers; it is not, however, considered an easy-to-use language for non-programmers. Inform the students that an object is basically a black box that contains information. It might possess a way for you to read that information and a way for you to modify that information. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Class Discussion: Ask students to discuss server-side and client-side scripting. 2. Class Discussion: Ask students to discuss how JavaScript may be integrated into webpages. LAB ACTIVITIES 1. Have the students perform the following activities using the website template they have created by following the instructions from the sections given below. o HTML 519: “To Create a New Nav Element for a Mobile Viewport” o HTML 523: “To Style the New Nav Element for a Mobile Viewport” o HTML 527: “To Modify Previous Navigation Style Rules for a Mobile Viewport” o HTML 536: "To Create a JavaScript File " o HTML 537: “To Create the hamburger( ) Function” o HTML 540: “To Call the hamburger( ) Function” o HTML 541: “To Add and Style a Video Element on the About Us Page” o HTML 543: “To Create and Call the burpees( ) Function” o HTML 546: “To Create and Call the plank( ) Function” o HTML 548: “To Create and Call the mountain( ) Function” o HTML 549: “To Create and Call the discount( ) Function” o HTML 552: “To Validate the Style Sheet” o HTML 552: “To Validate the HTML Files”

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual Page 5 of 6 End of Chapter Material ▪

Chapter Summary provides a general survey of the material in the chapter. Students can use these pages to reinforce their achievement of the chapter objectives.

▪

The Apply Your Knowledge section includes short exercises and review questions that reinforce concepts and provide opportunities to practice skills.

▪

Extend Your Knowledge exercises allow students to expand their knowledge by solving practical problems and experimenting with new skills, using Help.

▪

The Analyze, Correct, Improve section allows students to analyze a webpage, correct the errors present in the code, and then improve it.

▪

The In the Lab activities solidify the concepts presented in the chapter with practical application.

▪

Consider This: Your Turn activities at the end of the chapter provide instructions to complete assignments given in the chapters and help students to create their own websites outside the class.

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual Page 6 of 6 Glossary of Key Terms • • • • • • • • • • • •

argument (HTML 532) client-side scripting (HTML 517) event (HTML 532) event handler (HTML 532) function (HTML 532) JavaScript (HTML 517) methods (HTML 532) object (HTML 531) properties (HTML 531) statement (HTML 531) transform property (HTML 510) variable (HTML 532)

Top of Document

Responsive Web Design with HTML 5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 1 of 11

Responsive Web Design with HTML 5 and CSS, 9th Edition Chapter 11: Publish, Promote, and Maintain a Website A Guide to this Instructor’s Manual: We have designed this Instructor’s Manual to supplement and enhance your teaching experience through classroom activities and a cohesive chapter summary. This document is organized chronologically, using the same heading in red that you see in the textbook. Under each heading you will find (in order): Lecture Notes that summarize the section, Figures and Boxes found in the section, if any, Teacher Tips, Classroom Activities, and Lab Activities. Pay special attention to teaching tips and activities geared toward quizzing your students, enhancing their critical thinking skills, and encouraging experimentation within the software. In addition to this Instructor’s Manual, our Instructor’s Resources also include PowerPoint Presentations, Test Banks, and other supplements to aid in your teaching experience.

Table of Contents Chapter Objectives HTML 570: Introduction HTML 570: Project — Publish and Promote a Website HTML 572: Using Social Media HTML 589: Finding a Website HTML 595: Publishing a Website HTML 603: Promoting a Website HTML 604: Website Development Life Cycle HTML 617: Project Management HTML 619: E-Commerce End of Chapter Material Glossary of Key Terms

2 2 2

3 4 5 7

7 8 9 10 11

Responsive Web Design with HTML 5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 2 of 11

Chapter Objectives Students will have mastered the material in Chapter 11 when they can: ⚫ Define, identify, and describe forms of ⚫ Describe a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) social media client ⚫ Describe a blog ⚫ Publish a website with an FTP client ⚫ Describe search engines ⚫ Explain how to register a website with a ⚫ Explain search engine optimization (SEO) search engine ⚫ Create description meta tags ⚫ Describe a website development life cycle ⚫ Create a sitemap file ⚫ Add a Skip to Content Link ⚫ Describe a domain name and top-level ⚫ Minify a CSS file domains ⚫ Explain project management for a website ⚫ Explain the role of a web hosting service ⚫ Define copyright and e-commerce

HTML 570: Introduction LECTURE NOTES • Point out that the next step after creating, validating, and testing a website is publishing it • Discuss the need to promote a website • Explain that after a website is designed, developed, and launched, the next phase of the website begins: maintenance • Explain that a well-polished website involves a continuous maintenance process CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Class Discussion: Ask students to share different techniques for website promotion that they have experienced.

HTML 570: Project — Publish and Promote a Website LECTURE NOTES • Discuss the steps that must be carried out to publish and promote the Forward Fitness Club website • Discuss the roadmap for the chapter FIGURES: 11-1, 11-2a, 11-2b, 11-2c, 11-3 CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Class Activity: Ask the students to research three FTP clients. Ask them to point out the similarities among the three.

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 3 of 11

HTML 572: Using Social Media LECTURE NOTES • Define a social network and list the different forms of social media content • Discuss the features of a social networking site • Describe the social networking site Facebook • Discuss the role of Facebook as an advertiser for businesses • Discuss the key items that are to be considered when creating a Facebook post • List the steps required to create a Facebook page for a local business • Describe the social networking site Twitter • Discuss the business-related uses of Twitter • Point out the key items that must be considered when creating a tweet • List the steps required to create a Twitter account for a local business • Describe the social media website YouTube • Point out how creating a YouTube channel can benefit a business • Discuss the key items that are to be considered when creating and uploading a video to YouTube for a business • List the steps required to create a YouTube channel • Describe the social networking site Instagram and discuss the motive of the creators of the site • Discuss the function of the Instagram app • Describe the social networking site Pinterest and discuss its uses • List the other social media options that businesses can explore • Define a blog • Discuss the uses of blogs for businesses • Point out the interaction between customers and business owners in a blog • Discuss the role of social media icons in connecting customers with businesses FIGURES: 11-4, 11-5, 11-6, 11-7, 11-8, 11-9, 11-10, 11-11, 11-12, 11-13, 11-14, 11-15, 11-16, 11-17, 1118, 11-19, 11-20, 11-21, 11-22, 11-23, 11-24, 11-25, 11-26, 11-27, 11-28, 11-29 BOXES 1. Consider This: Who can view my business Facebook page? 2. Consider This: Where do I obtain Facebook icon logos to use within my website? 3. Consider This: How can I incorporate a Facebook Like button into my webpage? 4. BTW: Bitly.com 5. Consider This: Do I need to have followers before potential customers can see my tweets? 6. Consider This: How can I embed tweets within my webpage? 7. BTW: YouTube Founders 8. Consider This: What file format do I need to use for my YouTube video? 9. Consider This: How do I post a photograph or video to Instagram? 10. BTW: Privacy Policy 11. Consider This: Are photographs required for Pinterest? 12. BTW: Social Media Banned in Certain Countries 13. Consider This: How can I start my own blog? 14. Consider This: Where do I obtain social media icons to use on my website? 15. Consider This: I downloaded social media brand assets, but the image dimensions are too large. How do I change them?

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 4 of 11

TEACHER TIP Remind the students that Instagram can be used by businesses to promote brand awareness. Inform the students that the key is to determine the most suitable social media outlet, among the many options available, for attracting new customers. Mention to the students that social media links are typically included near the top or bottom of a webpage. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Quick Quiz: 1) What is the total number of characters a tweet is limited to? (Answer: 280) 2) True/False: The term blog is short for a combination of the words web and log. (Answer: True) LAB ACTIVITIES 1. Have the students perform the following activities with the website template they have created. o HTML 582: "To Add Social Media Icons and Links to the Home Page" o HTML 584: “To Add Social Media Icons and Links to Webpages” o HTML 585: “To Style the Copyright Class” o HTML 586: “To Style the Social Class”

HTML 589: Finding a Website LECTURE NOTES • Point out the role of a search engine in finding a website • Explain the concept of the search engine and discuss its use • Define robots and explain their role in search engines • Using Figure 11-30, point out the popular search engines • Discuss the process of search engine optimization (SEO) and point out the concept of rank in search engine results pages (SERPs) • Explain the concept of impressions • Discuss the process of optimizing a website • Explain the key tasks involved in an effective SEO • Define metadata • Discuss the uses of meta tag and the Unicode Transformation Format (UTF) • Discuss the function and syntax of a description meta tag • Explain the syntax and role of a keywords meta tag FIGURES: 11-30a, 11-30b, 11-30c, 11-30d, 11-31, 11-32, 11-33, 11-34, 11-35, 11-36, 11-37 BOXES 1. BTW: Baidu Search Engine 2. BTW: Google Webmaster Guidelines 3. BTW: Search Engines 4. Consider This: How does Google generate its results page?

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 5 of 11

5. BTW: Schema Microdata 6. BTW: Google Search Engine TEACHER TIP Mention to the students that search engine optimizers may offer SEO as a stand-alone service or as a part of a broader marketing campaign. SEO work is often incorporated into the website development and design phases because good SEO practice may well require changes to the site's source code. The term "search engine friendly" may be used to describe website designs, images, videos, shopping carts, menus, content management systems, and any other elements that have been optimized for the purpose of heightening their exposure to search engines. Inform the students that search engine companies discovered that many websites used keywords that did not pertain to the websites. As a result, many search engines, including Google, have stopped using the keywords meta tag in their search algorithms.

CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Quick Quiz: 1) Which is the most popular search engine in the world? (Answer: Google) 2) True/False: Robots can read text on images. (Answer: False) 2. Assign a Project: Ask students to find two websites that use meta tags and analyze the instances where the meta tags are used. Are they being used effectively or not? 3. Critical Thinking: What kind of sites do not lend themselves to search engine optimization? LAB ACTIVITIES 1. Have the students perform some activities using the website template they have created by following the instructions from the following sections: o HTML 592: “To Modify Titles and Add a Description Meta Tag to a Webpage” o HTML 594: “To Create a Sitemap File” 2. Ask the students to find an Internet marketing firm that offers search engine optimization as a service and then read about what is included in the service.

HTML 595: Publishing a Website LECTURE NOTES • Discuss the steps required to make a website accessible to everyone • Define a domain name and discuss its uses • Discuss the benefit of registering a unique domain name • Point out the factors to keep in mind while selecting a domain name • Discuss the significance of using a top-level domain (TLD) name like .com • Explain the concept of an open TLD • Use Table 11-1 to describe the common TLDs and their original purpose • Discuss InterNIC and the role it plays in determining the availability of domain names

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual • • • • • • •

Page 6 of 11

Describe the options available for website hosting List the questions that need to be considered while selecting a hosting service Discuss the process to publish a website Describe a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) client Using Figure 11-39, describe the FileZilla FTP client software Point out the different FTP clients available List the steps to download and install the FileZilla FTP client

FIGURES: 11-38, 11-39, 11-40, 11-41, 11-42, 11-43, 11-44, 11-45, 11-46 TABLE: 11-1 BOXES 1. BTW: InterNIC 2. BTW: Brand Top-Level Domains 3. Consider This: Do domain names expire? 4. BTW: Free Web Hosting Services 5. BTW: SSH and SFTP TEACHER TIP Inform the students that virtual web hosting is a method for hosting more than one domain name on a computer using a single IP address, which enables a single machine to share its memory and processing resources in order to use its resources more efficiently. Shared web hosting prices are lower than those of dedicated web servers. Virtual web hosting is often used on a large scale in companies whose business model is to provide low-cost website hosting for customers. Barring any security concerns in the architectures of these respective websites, they can be hosted on a single server using virtual hosting technology, reducing the number of separate servers required to support the business while also reducing administrative and management overhead. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Critical Thinking: Cybersquatting is defined as the registration of, trafficking in, or use of a domain name with a bad intent to profit from the goodwill of a trademark belonging to someone else. Once a cybersquatter has acquired a domain, he or she then offers to sell the domain to the person or company who owns a trademark contained within the name at an inflated price. On one side of the issue, it is clearly unfriendly to the trademark owners; on the other side, some posit that the practice is consistent with the free market ethos of capitalism. Invite students to debate cybersquatting as a class. 2. Group Activity: Encourage students to search the web for two or three hosting services. Ask them to prepare a brief summary of the features offered by each service as well as the costs of each.

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 7 of 11

LAB ACTIVITIES 1. Have the students perform some activities using the website template they have created by following the instructions from the following sections: o HTML 599: "To Start FileZilla and Connect to a Remote Server" o HTML 600: “To Upload Folders and Files to a Remote Server” o HTML 602: “To View and Test a Published Website”

HTML 603: Promoting a Website LECTURE NOTES • List the ways to promote and market websites • Point out that once you have published a website, you can register it with the two most popular search engines, Google and Yahoo! • Explain that it is a good idea to register sites with search engines that specialize in subject matter related to your website • Discuss using Google Analytics, a free tool from Google, to learn more about the users that access your website BOXES 1. BTW: Website Marketing Services TEACHER TIP Mention to the students that one of the marketing strategies for a website is the purchase of banner ads. Ideally, a visitor to the website that posts the banner ad will click on the banner ad and go to the marketer's website, which brings the marketer a visitor it would not have had otherwise (the best-case scenario, of course, is if the visitor not only comes to the site but also buys something). The marketers hope that site visitors will see the banner ad and will somehow register it in their heads, either consciously noting the content of a banner ad and deciding to visit the marketer's site sometime in the future or noticing the ad only peripherally but being made aware of the marketer's product or service, in a phenomenon called branding.

CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Assign a Project: Services are available on the web for designing banner ads for websites. Encourage the students to find one of these and learn more about the service.

HTML 604: Website Development Life Cycle LECTURE NOTES • Define the web development life cycle • Discuss the different phases of the web development life cycle using Figure 11-47 • Point out that website planning is the first phase of the web development life cycle • List the two key questions that need to be asked during the website planning phase • Discuss the website analysis phase • List the key considerations in website design

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual • • • • • • • • • •

Page 8 of 11

Use Table 11-3 to discuss some organizational standards for creating a webpage that is easy to read and navigate Discuss accessibility issues and internationalization Discuss the need for website testing Point out the basic steps to test the content and functionality of websites Define usability Discuss usability testing, compatibility testing, and stress testing Discuss the implementation of a website, which involves publishing the webpages to a web server Discuss the process of maintaining a website Define a log Discuss how to be an observant web user

FIGURES: 11-47, 11-48, 11-49, 11-50, 11-51, 11-52, 11-53, 11-54, 11-55, 11-56, 11-57, 11-58, 11-59 TABLES: 11-2, 11-3, 11-4 BOXES 1. Consider This: How can I test my website on multiple browsers? TEACHER TIP Mention to the students that testing a website at various stages is important to avoid major issues at the final stages. Usually, the same website is tested on different browsers to ensure the expected functionality on all browsers. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Class Discussion: Ask students to describe their experiences when using a website on various browsers. 2. Quick Quiz: Which test determines what happens to a website when many users access the site? (Answer: Stress testing) LAB ACTIVITIES 1. Have the students perform some activities using the website template they have created by following the instructions from the following sections: o HTML 612: "To Create a Skip to Content Link" o HTML 612: "To Style the Skip to Content Link” o HTML 615: "To Minify a CSS File" o HTML 616: "To Link HTML Files to the Minified CSS File"

HTML 617: Project Management LECTURE NOTES • Explain the need for project management to manage websites • Define the role of a project manager • Discuss the various people involved in a project • Point out the list of tips for keeping a website's content updated and fresh

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual • •

Page 9 of 11

Discuss the copyright issues involved in copying content from other websites Describe fair use and Creative Commons licenses

BOXES 1. Consider This: Who puts a website project team together? 2. BTW: U.S. Copyright Law 3. Consider This: Can I purchase media for use on my website? TEACHER TIPS Inform the students that a project manager will be responsible for delegating all the website tasks. Remind the students that using a Creative Commons license allows media content authors to share their work with others while maintaining their ownership. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Class Discussion: Survey students about their experience with the Creative Commons license. 2. Quick Quiz: Who takes the mock-up webpage concepts and creates the actual webpages? (Answer: A website developer)

HTML 619: E-Commerce LECTURE NOTES • Define e-commerce • Point out the drawbacks of e-commerce • Discuss business-to-consumer (B2C), business-to-business (B2B), consumer-to-consumer (C2C), and business-to-government (B2G) business models FIGURE: 11-60 BOXES 1. BTW: Transport Layer Security 2. Consider This: How will you promote your website? CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Group Activity: Survey students about their experience with e-commerce sites. LAB ACTIVITIES 1. Have the students perform some activities using the website template they have created by following the instructions from the following section: o HTML 620: "To Validate the HTML Files”

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 10 of 11

End of Chapter Material ▪

Chapter Summary provides a general survey of the material in the chapter. Students can use these pages to reinforce their achievement of the chapter objectives.

▪

The Apply Your Knowledge section includes short exercises and review questions that reinforce concepts and provide opportunities to practice skills.

▪

The Extend Your Knowledge exercises allow students to expand their knowledge by solving practical problems and experimenting with new skills, using Help.

▪

The Analyze, Correct, Improve section allows the students to analyze a webpage, correct the errors present in the code, and then improve it.

▪

The In the Lab activities solidify the concepts presented in the chapter with practical application.

▪

The Consider This: Your Turn activities at the end of the chapter provide instructions to complete assignments given in the chapters and help students to create their own websites outside the class.

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual Glossary of Key Terms • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

blog (HTML 579) compatibility testing (HTML 609) content specialist (HTML 618) domain name (HTML 595) e-commerce (HTML 619) Facebook (HTML 573) fair use (HTML 619) FTP client (HTML 597) impression (HTML 590) Instagram (HTML 578) log (HTML 611) marketing professional (HTML 618) metadata (HTML 591) Pinterest (HTML 578) project management (HTML 617) project manager (HTML 617) publish (HTML 597) rank (HTML 589) robots (HTML 589) search engine (HTML 589) search engine optimization (SEO) (HTML 589) server administrator (HTML 618) social media (HTML 572) social network (HTML 572) stress testing (HTML 609) Twitter (HTML 574) usability (HTML 608) usability testing (HTML 608) web development life cycle (HTML 604) website designer (HTML 617) website developer (HTML 618) YouTube (HTML 576)

Top of Document

Page 11 of 11

Responsive Web Design with HTML 5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 1 of 6

Web Design with HTML 5 and CSS, 9TH Edition Chapter 12: Getting Started with Bootstrap A Guide to this Instructor’s Manual: We have designed this Instructor’s Manual to supplement and enhance your teaching experience through classroom activities and a cohesive chapter summary. This document is organized chronologically, using the same heading in red that you see in the textbook. Under each heading you will find (in order): Lecture Notes that summarize the section, Figures and Boxes found in the section, if any, Teacher Tips, Classroom Activities, and Lab Activities. Pay special attention to teaching tips and activities geared toward quizzing your students, enhancing their critical thinking skills, and encouraging experimentation within the software. In addition to this Instructor’s Manual, our Instructor’s Resources also include PowerPoint Presentations, Test Banks, and other supplements to aid in your teaching experience.

Table of Contents Chapter Objectives HTML 634: Introduction HTML 634: Project –Create a Website Using Bootstrap HTML 636: Exploring Bootstrap HTML 679: Content Management Systems End of Chapter Material Glossary of Key Terms

1 2 2 2 4 5 6

Chapter Objectives Students will have mastered the material in Chapter 12 when they can: ⚫ Describe the Bootstrap framework ⚫ Explain how to style text using Bootstrap ⚫ Create a webpage using Bootstrap’s starter ⚫ Write a jQuery document ready event template ⚫ Describe and use the Bootstrap grid system ⚫ Create a Bootstrap navbar ⚫ Explain how to style images using Bootstrap ⚫ Integrate a Bootstrap hamburger menu ⚫ Style a table using Bootstrap ⚫ Style navigation links using Bootstrap ⚫ Describe a content management system ⚫ Define and create a jumbotron

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 2 of 6

HTML 634: Introduction LECTURE NOTES • Point out that many of today’s modern websites use some type of content management system or web framework • Mention that both content management systems and web frameworks provide a means to create beautiful, responsive webpages more quickly than a standard text editor • Explain that Bootstrap is a popular front-end web framework used to create responsive webpages TEACHER TIP Remind students of the purpose of using a content management system or web framework.

CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Quick Quiz: 1.) True/False: Content management systems provide a means to create beautiful, responsive webpages more quickly than a standard text editor. (Answer: True)

HTML 634: Project – Project –Create a Website Using Bootstrap LECTURE NOTES • Discuss the steps that must be carried out to use the Bootstrap framework to create a website • Discuss the roadmap for the chapter FIGURES: 12-1a, 12-1b, 12-1c, 12-2, 12-3 CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Quick Quiz: 1.) True/False: Bootstrap framework can be used to create a website. (Answer: True)

HTML 636: Exploring Bootstrap LECTURE NOTES • Define a web framework as a development tool that consists of HTML, CSS, and JavaScript • Discuss content delivery networks • Discuss how the Bootstrap framework provides several options to integrate a navigation bar, or navbar, within a website • Review the Bootstrap navbar classes using Table 12-1 and the Bootstrap background color classes in Table 12–2 • Discuss the Bootstrap responsive containers and the container and container-fluid class values • Define a jumbotron as a large, responsive box used to contain webpage information • Point out that Bootstrap makes it easy to add responsive margins and padding to any element using the margin and padding classes listed in Table 12–3 • Discuss how creating responsive or fluid images is essential for a responsive website

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual • • • • • • • • •

Page 3 of 6

Mention that the Bootstrap framework uses eight colors to represent specific meanings Referring to Table 12–4, review each color and its meaning Discuss how the Bootstrap framework provides many options for styling buttons Point out that Bootstrap allows customization of page elements Describe the uses of several jQuery methods, referring to Table 12–6 Discuss the Bootstrap grid system Mention that text can be styled many ways using Bootstrap classes and review them using Table 12–8 Explain that Bootstrap provides many class value options with which to style a table Refer to Table 12-9 and review the Bootstrap table classes

FIGURES: 12-4, 12-5, 12-6, 12-7, 12-8, 12-9, 12-10, 12-11, 12-12, 12-13, 12-14, 12-15, 12-16, 12-17, 1218, 12-19, 12-20, 12-21, 12-22, 12-23, 12-24, 12-25, 12-26, 12-27, 12-28, 12-29, 12-30, 12-31, 12-32, 1233, 12-34, 12-35, 12-36, 12-37, 12-38, 12-39, 12-40, 12-41, 12-42, 12-43, 12-44, 12-45, 12-46, 12-47, 1248, 12-49, 12-50, 12-51, 12-52, 12-53, 12-54, 12-55, 12-56, 12-57, 12-58, 12-59, 12-60 TABLES: 12-1, 12-2, 12-3, 12-4, 12-5, 12-6, 12-7, 12-8, 12-9 BOXES 1. BTW: Internet Explorer and Bootstrap 4 2. Consider This: How many media queries does Bootstrap use and what breakpoints are used for each media query? 3. BTW: ARIA 4. BTW: Using the # Symbol for Links 5. BTW: Sass 6. BTW: Bootstrap Typography TEACHER TIP Inform the students that as of this publication date, Bootstrap 4 is the latest version of Bootstrap. To get started with Bootstrap, you must either download Bootstrap’s CSS and script files, or link to the BootstrapCDN. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Class Discussion: Ask students to describe their experience when coding using predefined style sheets. What are some advantages and disadvantages? 2. Quick Quiz: What are the three elements of a web framework? (Answer: HTML, CSS, and JavaScript) LAB ACTIVITIES 1. Have the students perform some activities using the website template they have created by following the instructions from the following sections: o HTML 638: “To Create a Bootstrap Webpage” o HTML 644: “To Create a Bootstrap Navigation Bar” o HTML 652: “To Create a Bootstrap Jumbotron” o HTML 654: “To Create Custom Style Rules”

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual o o o o o o o o

Page 4 of 6

HTML 657: “Add jQuery Code” HTML 661: “Add Columns Using Bootstrap” HTML 665: “To Create a Footer Element” HTML 668: “Add Bootstrap Classes to the About Us Page” HTML 675: “Add Bootstrap Table Classes to the Classes Page” HTML 677: “To View the Website in a Mobile Viewport” HTML 677: “To View the Website in a Tablet Viewport” HTML 678: “To View the Website in a Desktop Viewport”

HTML 679: Content Management Systems LECTURE NOTES • Define a content management system as an online system used to manage website content • Explain that a typical CMS consists of a content management application (CMA) and a content delivery application (CDA) • Discuss how a CMA provides a webpage author with the ability to add, remove, and modify content without knowing HTML • Discuss popular content management systems including WordPress, Joomla, and Drupal FIGURES: 12-61, 12-62, 12-63, 12-64 TEACHER TIP Inform the students that many businesses use WordPress for their websites and their blogs. In fact, nearly 35% of all websites use WordPress. It has quickly become one of the top-ranked content management systems, with over 60% market share, according to w3techs.com Web Technology Surveys. CLASSROOM ACTIVITIES 1. Quick Quiz: 1. What does a typical content management system consist of? (Answer: A typical CMS consists of a content management application (CMA) and a content delivery application.) 2. True/False: Content management systems provide web developers with the means to create a website design and then “lock it down” so that webpage authors can only update content and not modify the webpage design. (Answer: True) LAB ACTIVITIES 1. Have the students perform some activities using the website template they have created by following the instructions from the following section: o HTML 681: “To Validate the HTML Files”

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual

Page 5 of 6

End of Chapter Material ▪

Chapter Summary provides a general survey of the material in the chapter. Students can use these pages to reinforce their achievement of the chapter objectives.

▪

The Apply Your Knowledge section includes short exercises and review questions that reinforce concepts and provide opportunities to practice skills.

▪

Extend Your Knowledge exercises allow students to expand their knowledge by solving practical problems and experimenting with new skills, using Help.

▪

The Analyze, Correct, Improve section allows students to analyze a webpage, correct the errors present in the code, and then improve it.

▪

The In the Lab activities solidify the concepts presented in the chapter with practical application.

▪

Consider This: Your Turn activities at the end of the chapter provide instructions to complete assignments given in the chapters and help students to create their own websites outside the class.

Responsive Web Design with HTML5 and CSS, 9th Edition Instructor’s Manual Glossary of Key Terms • • • •

CDN (content delivery network) (HTML 637) CMS (content management systems) (HTML 679) jumbotron (HTML 648) web framework (HTML 636)

Top of Document

Page 6 of 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design 1. The _____ is a term used to describe the ever-growing number of devices connecting to a network, including televisions and appliances. a. Internet of Things b. World Wide Web c. Internet backbone d. Domain Name System (DNS) ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. The Internet of Things is a term used to describe the ever-growing number of devices connecting to a network, including televisions and appliances. b. The Internet of Things is a term used to describe the ever-growing number of devices connecting to a network, including televisions and appliances. c. The Internet of Things is a term used to describe the ever-growing number of devices connecting to a network, including televisions and appliances. d. The Internet of Things is a term used to describe the ever-growing number of devices connecting to a network, including televisions and appliances.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring the Internet QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.01 - Define the Internet and associated key terms NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Exploring the Internet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/3/2019 1:53 PM 2. The world’s largest network is the _____. a. Internet b. Internet of Things c. intranet d. extranet ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. Today, millions of people worldwide have access to the Internet, the world’s largest network. b. Today, millions of people worldwide have access to the Internet, the world’s largest network. c. Today, millions of people worldwide have access to the Internet, the world’s largest network. d. Today, millions of people worldwide have access to the Internet, the world’s largest network.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES:

1 Easy Introduction

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.01 - Define the Internet and associated key terms NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Introduction KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/3/2019 1:53 PM 3. A(n) _____ is any device, such as a computer, tablet, or smartphone, connected to a network. a. data packet b. Uniform Resource Locator (URL) c. wireframe d. node ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. A node is any device, such as a computer, tablet, or smartphone, connected to a network, which is a collection of two or more computers linked together to share resources and information. b. A node is any device, such as a computer, tablet, or smartphone, connected to a network, which is a collection of two or more computers linked together to share resources and information. c. A node is any device, such as a computer, tablet, or smartphone, connected to a network, which is a collection of two or more computers linked together to share resources and information. d. A node is any device, such as a computer, tablet, or smartphone, connected to a network, which is a collection of two or more computers linked together to share resources and information.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design c. tools d. server ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

a a. The home page typically provides information about the website’s purpose and content, often by including a list of links to other webpages on the website.

b. The home page typically provides information about the website’s purpose and content, often by including a list of links to other webpages on the website. c. The home page typically provides information about the website’s purpose and content, often by including a list of links to other webpages on the website. d. The home page typically provides information about the website’s purpose and content, often by including a list of links to other webpages on the website.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring the Internet QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.01 - Define the Internet and associated key terms NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Exploring the Internet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/3/2019 1:53 PM 5. Each website contains a _____ page, which is the first document users see when they access the site. a. home b. documents c. tools d. server ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. Each website contains a home page, which is the main page and the first document users see when they access the website.

b. Each website contains a home page, which is the main page and the first document users see when they access the website. c. Each website contains a home page, which is the main page and the first document users see when they access the website. d. Each website contains a home page, which is the main page and the first document users see when they access the website.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Exploring the Internet DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/3/2019 1:53 PM 6. A _____ is a host computer that stores resources and files for websites. a. client b. server c. modulator d. demodulator ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. The server is the host computer that stores resources and files for websites. b. The server is the host computer that stores resources and files for websites. c. The server is the host computer that stores resources and files for websites. d. The server is the host computer that stores resources and files for websites. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring the Internet QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.02 - Recognize Internet protocols NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Exploring the Internet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/3/2019 1:53 PM 7. A _____ is a set of rules that defines how a client workstation can communicate with a server. a. proxy b. jQuery c. wireframe d. protocol ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. A protocol is a set of rules that defines how a client workstation can communicate with a server. b. A protocol is a set of rules that defines how a client workstation can communicate with a server. c. A protocol is a set of rules that defines how a client workstation can communicate with a server. d. A protocol is a set of rules that defines how a client workstation can communicate with a server.

POINTS:

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring the Internet QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.02 - Recognize Internet protocols NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Exploring the Internet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/3/2019 1:53 PM 8. _____ is a set of rules for exchanging text, graphic, sound, video, and other multimedia files on the web. a. Network Time Protocol (NTP) b. Gross Data Transfer Protocol (GDTP) c. Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) d. Uniform Resources Protocol (USP) ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) is the fundamental protocol used on the web to exchange and transfer webpages. b. Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) is the fundamental protocol used on the web to exchange and transfer webpages. c. Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) is the fundamental protocol used on the web to exchange and transfer webpages. d. Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) is the fundamental protocol used on the web to exchange and transfer webpages.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring the Internet QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.02 - Recognize Internet protocols NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Exploring the Internet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/3/2019 1:53 PM 9. _____ oversees the network connection between the data source and destination and micromanages the data. a. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) b. Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) c. Internet Protocol (IP) d. Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

d a. Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) is a pair of protocols used to transfer data efficiently over the Internet by properly routing it to its destination. b. Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) is a pair of protocols used to transfer data efficiently over the Internet by properly routing it to its destination. c. Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) is a pair of protocols used to transfer data efficiently over the Internet by properly routing it to its destination. d. Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) is a pair of protocols used to transfer data efficiently over the Internet by properly routing it to its destination.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring the Internet QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.02 - Recognize Internet protocols NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Exploring the Internet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/3/2019 1:53 PM 10. 192.168.1.5 is an example of a(n) _____. a. Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) address b. Internet Protocol (IP) address c. Domain Name Number (DNN) d. Internet Access Control (IAC) address ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. An example of an IP address is 192.168.1.5. b. An example of an IP address is 192.168.1.5. c. An example of an IP address is 192.168.1.5. d. An example of an IP address is 192.168.1.5. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring the Internet QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.02 - Recognize Internet protocols NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Exploring the Internet Bloom’s: Understand 10/8/2019 3:00 PM 12/3/2019 1:53 PM

11. The _____ was created to resolve the difficulty in remembering and using Internet Protocol (IP) addresses to access websites. a. Domain Name System (DNS) b. Machine Access Control (MAC) system c. Computer Stack System (CSS) d. Shared Network Storage (SNS) system ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. The Domain Name System (DNS) was created to resolve this issue. b. The Domain Name System (DNS) was created to resolve this issue. c. The Domain Name System (DNS) was created to resolve this issue. d. The Domain Name System (DNS) was created to resolve this issue. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring the Internet QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.02 - Recognize Internet protocols NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Exploring the Internet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/3/2019 1:53 PM 12. In order to view a webpage on any type of website, a device needs to have a web _____ installed. a. browser b. client c. manager d. server ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. To access a website and display a webpage, a computer, tablet, or mobile device must have a web browser. b. To access a website and display a webpage, a computer, tablet, or mobile device must have a web browser. c. To access a website and display a webpage, a computer, tablet, or mobile device must have a web browser. d. To access a website and display a webpage, a computer, tablet, or mobile device must have a web browser.

POINTS:

Page 7

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring the Internet QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.03 - Discuss web browsers and identify their main features NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Exploring the Internet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/3/2019 1:53 PM 13. A web _____ is a program that interprets and displays webpages so that users can view and interact with a webpage. a. server b. browser c. resource locator d. client ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. A web browser, also called a browser, is a program that interprets and displays webpages so you can view and interact with them. b. A web browser, also called a browser, is a program that interprets and displays webpages so you can view and interact with them. c. A web browser, also called a browser, is a program that interprets and displays webpages so you can view and interact with them. d. A web browser, also called a browser, is a program that interprets and displays webpages so you can view and interact with them.

Page 8

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

c a. A domain is an area of the Internet a particular organization or person manages. b. A domain is an area of the Internet a particular organization or person manages. c. A domain is an area of the Internet a particular organization or person manages. d. A domain is an area of the Internet a particular organization or person manages.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring the Internet QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.03 - Discuss web browsers and identify their main features NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Exploring the Internet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/3/2019 1:53 PM 15. A(n) _____ is a private network that uses Internet technologies to share company information among employees. a. newsnet b. ethernet c. extranet d. intranet ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. An intranet is a private network that uses Internet technologies to share company information among employees. b. An intranet is a private network that uses Internet technologies to share company information among employees. c. An intranet is a private network that uses Internet technologies to share company information among employees. d. An intranet is a private network that uses Internet technologies to share company information among employees.

Page 9

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design DATE MODIFIED:

12/3/2019 1:53 PM

16. A(n) _____ is contained within a company or organization's network, which makes it private and available only to those who need access. a. extranet b. component network c. intranet d. newsnet ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. An intranet is contained within an organization’s network, which makes it private and available only to those who need access. b. An intranet is contained within an organization’s network, which makes it private and available only to those who need access. c. An intranet is contained within an organization’s network, which makes it private and available only to those who need access. d. An intranet is contained within an organization’s network, which makes it private and available only to those who need access.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring the Internet QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.04 - Describe the types and purposes of websites NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Exploring the Internet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/3/2019 1:53 PM 17. A(n) _____ is the address of a document or other file accessible on the Internet. a. client tag b. Uniform Resource Locator (URL) c. explorer link d. Digital Resource Identifier (DRI) ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. A web address, or Uniform Resource Locator (URL), is the address of a document or other file accessible on the Internet and identifies the network location of a website, such as www.w3.org.com. b. A web address, or Uniform Resource Locator (URL), is the address of a document or other file accessible on the Internet and identifies the network location of a website, such as www.w3.org.com. c. A web address, or Uniform Resource Locator (URL), is the address of a document or other file accessible on the Internet and identifies the network location of a website, such as www.w3.org.com. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 10

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design d. A web address, or Uniform Resource Locator (URL), is the address of a document or other file accessible on the Internet and identifies the network location of a website, such as www.w3.org.com.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring the Internet QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.03 - Discuss web browsers and identify their main features NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Exploring the Internet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/3/2019 1:53 PM 18. To access a website using a browser, one must type the webpage’s _____ in the browser’s address bar. a. tag b. Uniform Resource Locator (URL) c. header d. Digital Resource Identifier (DRI) ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. To access a website using a browser, you type the webpage’s URL in the browser’s address bar. b. To access a website using a browser, you type the webpage’s URL in the browser’s address bar. c. To access a website using a browser, you type the webpage’s URL in the browser’s address bar. d. To access a website using a browser, you type the webpage’s URL in the browser’s address bar.

Page 11

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design a. Uniform Resource Locator (URL) b. tag c. header d. Digital Resource Identifier (DRI) ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. A web address, or Uniform Resource Locator (URL), is the address of a document or other file accessible on the Internet and identifies the network location of a website, such as www.w3.org.com. b. A web address, or Uniform Resource Locator (URL), is the address of a document or other file accessible on the Internet and identifies the network location of a website, such as www.w3.org.com. c. A web address, or Uniform Resource Locator (URL), is the address of a document or other file accessible on the Internet and identifies the network location of a website, such as www.w3.org.com. d. A web address, or Uniform Resource Locator (URL), is the address of a document or other file accessible on the Internet and identifies the network location of a website, such as www.w3.org.com.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring the Internet QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.03 - Discuss web browsers and identify their main features NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Exploring the Internet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/3/2019 1:53 PM 20. Instructors use a _____ to communicate announcements, post questions on reading material, list contact information, and provide access to lecture slides and videos. a. Continuous Assessment System (CAS) b. Learning Management System (LMS) c. Learning Information System (LIS) d. Subject Scheduling System (SSS) ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. Instructors use a Learning Management System (LMS) to communicate announcements, post questions on reading material, list contact information, and provide access to lecture slides and videos. b. Instructors use a Learning Management System (LMS) to communicate announcements, post questions on reading material, list contact information, and provide access to lecture slides and videos. c. Instructors use a Learning Management System (LMS) to communicate announcements, post questions on reading material, list contact information, and provide access to lecture slides and videos. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 12

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design d. Instructors use a Learning Management System (LMS) to communicate announcements, post questions on reading material, list contact information, and provide access to lecture slides and videos.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring the Internet QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.04 - Describe the types and purposes of websites NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Exploring the Internet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/3/2019 1:53 PM 21. A(n) _____ is a private network that uses Internet technologies to share business information with selected corporate partners or key customers. a. extranet b. intranet c. newsnet d. ethernet ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. An extranet is a private network that uses Internet technologies to share business information with select corporate partners or key customers. b. An extranet is a private network that uses Internet technologies to share business information with select corporate partners or key customers. c. An extranet is a private network that uses Internet technologies to share business information with select corporate partners or key customers. d. An extranet is a private network that uses Internet technologies to share business information with select corporate partners or key customers.

Page 13

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design 22. A(n) _____ can allow retailers to purchase inventory directly from their suppliers or to pay bills online. a. ethernet b. extranet c. access point network d. newsnet ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. An extranet allows retailers to purchase inventory directly from their suppliers or to pay bills online.

b. An extranet allows retailers to purchase inventory directly from their suppliers or to pay bills online. c. An extranet allows retailers to purchase inventory directly from their suppliers or to pay bills online. d. An extranet allows retailers to purchase inventory directly from their suppliers or to pay bills online.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring the Internet QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.04 - Describe the types and purposes of websites NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Exploring the Internet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/3/2019 1:53 PM 23. Using _____ technologies, many websites allow customers to browse product catalogs, compare products and services, and order goods online. a. search engine optimization b. control assistive c. e-commerce d. intranet ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. Using e-commerce technologies, these websites allow customers to browse product catalogs, compare products and services, and order goods online. b. Using e-commerce technologies, these websites allow customers to browse product catalogs, compare products and services, and order goods online. c. Using e-commerce technologies, these websites allow customers to browse product catalogs, compare products and services, and order goods online. d. Using e-commerce technologies, these websites allow customers to browse product catalogs, compare products and services, and order goods online.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES:

1 Easy Exploring the Internet

Page 14

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.04 - Describe the types and purposes of websites NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Exploring the Internet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/3/2019 1:53 PM 24. _____ allows developers to create one website that provides an optimal viewing experience across a range of devices. a. Adaptive design b. Topographic design c. Responsive design d. Geographic design ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. Responsive design allows you to create one website that provides an optimal viewing experience across a range of devices. b. Responsive design allows you to create one website that provides an optimal viewing experience across a range of devices. c. Responsive design allows you to create one website that provides an optimal viewing experience across a range of devices. d. Responsive design allows you to create one website that provides an optimal viewing experience across a range of devices.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Planning a Website QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.05 - Plan a website for a target audience NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Planning a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/11/2019 2:32 PM 25. A _____ is a simple, visual guide that clearly identifies the location of main webpage elements, such as the navigation area, organization logo, content areas, and images. a. proxy b. prototype c. wireframe d. singleton ANSWER: c Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 15

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design FEEDBACK:

a. A wireframe is a simple, visual guide that clearly identifies the location of main webpage elements, such as the navigation area, organization logo, content areas, and images. b. A wireframe is a simple, visual guide that clearly identifies the location of main webpage elements, such as the navigation area, organization logo, content areas, and images. c. A wireframe is a simple, visual guide that clearly identifies the location of main webpage elements, such as the navigation area, organization logo, content areas, and images. d. A wireframe is a simple, visual guide that clearly identifies the location of main webpage elements, such as the navigation area, organization logo, content areas, and images.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Planning a Website QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.06 - Define a wireframe and a site map NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Planning a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/3/2019 1:53 PM 26. _____ in a wireframe is an area on the page that is intentionally left blank. a. Passive white space b. An active blue line c. A passive blue line d. Active white space ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. Active white space is an area on the page that is intentionally left blank. b. Active white space is an area on the page that is intentionally left blank. c. Active white space is an area on the page that is intentionally left blank. d. Active white space is an area on the page that is intentionally left blank. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Planning a Website QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.06 - Define a wireframe and a site map NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Planning a Website Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 16

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Bloom’s: Remember 10/8/2019 3:00 PM 12/11/2019 2:35 PM

27. _____ in a wireframe is the space between content areas. a. Active white space b. A passive blue line c. Passive white space d. An active blue line ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. Passive white space is the space between content areas. b. Passive white space is the space between content areas. c. Passive white space is the space between content areas. d. Passive white space is the space between content areas. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Planning a Website QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.06 - Define a wireframe and a site map NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Planning a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/11/2019 2:36 PM 28. A _____ is a planning tool that lists or displays all the pages on a website and indicates how they are related to each other. a. Search Engine Optimizer (SEO) b. site map c. wireframe d. Document Object Model (DOM) ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. A site map is a planning tool that lists or displays all the pages on a website and indicates how they are related to each other. b. A site map is a planning tool that lists or displays all the pages on a website and indicates how they are related to each other. c. A site map is a planning tool that lists or displays all the pages on a website and indicates how they are related to each other. d. A site map is a planning tool that lists or displays all the pages on a website and indicates how they are related to each other.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY:

1 Easy

Page 17

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design REFERENCES: Planning a Website QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.06 - Define a wireframe and a site map NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Planning a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/3/2019 1:53 PM 29. A _____ website structure is appropriate if visitors should view the webpages in a specific order, as in the case of training material in which users need to complete Training module 1 before attempting Training module 2. a. hierarchical b. linear c. webbed d. ruffled ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. A linear website structure is appropriate if visitors should view the webpages in a specific order. b. A linear website structure is appropriate if visitors should view the webpages in a specific order. c. A linear website structure is appropriate if visitors should view the webpages in a specific order. d. A linear website structure is appropriate if visitors should view the webpages in a specific order.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Planning a Website QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.06 - Define a wireframe and a site map NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Planning a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/3/2019 1:53 PM 30. A _____ website structure connects webpages in a treelike structure. a. hierarchical b. partitional c. webbed Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 18

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design d. nested ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

a a. A hierarchical website connects webpages in a treelike structure. b. A hierarchical website connects webpages in a treelike structure. c. A hierarchical website connects webpages in a treelike structure. d. A hierarchical website connects webpages in a treelike structure.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Planning a Website QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.06 - Define a wireframe and a site map NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Planning a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/3/2019 1:53 PM 31. A _____ website structure has no set organization. a. hierarchical b. partitioned c. cascaded d. webbed ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. A webbed website structure has no set organization. b. A webbed website structure has no set organization. c. A webbed website structure has no set organization. d. A webbed website structure has no set organization. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Planning a Website QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.06 - Define a wireframe and a site map NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Planning a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/3/2019 1:53 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 19

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design 32. The _____ develops and maintains web standards, language specifications, and accessibility recommendations. a. Bureau of Labor Statistics b. Division of Professional Regulation c. U.S. Congress d. World Wide Web Consortium ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. The World Wide Web Consortium (W3C) develops and maintains web standards, language specifications, and accessibility recommendations.

b. The World Wide Web Consortium (W3C) develops and maintains web standards, language specifications, and accessibility recommendations. c. The World Wide Web Consortium (W3C) develops and maintains web standards, language specifications, and accessibility recommendations. d. The World Wide Web Consortium (W3C) develops and maintains web standards, language specifications, and accessibility recommendations.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Planning a Website QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.08 - Design for accessibility NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Planning a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/9/2019 9:04 AM 33. _____ is an authoring language used to create documents for the web. a. Structured Query Language (SQL) b. Extensible Stylesheet Language (XSL) c. Unified Modeling Language (UML) d. Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. Webpages are created using Hypertext Markup Language (HTML), which is an authoring language used to create documents for the web.

b. Webpages are created using Hypertext Markup Language (HTML), which is an authoring language used to create documents for the web. c. Webpages are created using Hypertext Markup Language (HTML), which is an authoring language used to create documents for the web. d. Webpages are created using Hypertext Markup Language (HTML), which is an authoring language used to create documents for the web.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES:

1 Easy Understanding the Basics of HTML

Page 20

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.11 - Recognize HTML versions and web programming languages NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Understanding the Basics of HTML KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/3/2019 1:53 PM 34. _____ define additional characteristics, or properties, of Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) elements such as the width and height of an image. a. Parameters b. Cells c. Wireframes d. Attributes ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. You can enhance HTML elements by using attributes, which define additional characteristics, or properties, of the element such as the width and height of an image. b. You can enhance HTML elements by using attributes, which define additional characteristics, or properties, of the element such as the width and height of an image. c. You can enhance HTML elements by using attributes, which define additional characteristics, or properties, of the element such as the width and height of an image. d. You can enhance HTML elements by using attributes, which define additional characteristics, or properties, of the element such as the width and height of an image.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Understanding the Basics of HTML QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.11 - Recognize HTML versions and web programming languages NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Understanding the Basics of HTML KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/12/2019 12:02 PM 35. Prior to HTML 5, the _____ tag meant horizontal rule or reference. It is now called a thematic break and is used to distinguish between various topics on a single webpage. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 21

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design a. line b. across c. rule d. hr ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

d a. Prior to HTML 5, the hr meant horizontal rule or reference. It is now called a thematic break and is used to distinguish between various topics on a single webpage. b. Prior to HTML 5, the hr meant horizontal rule or reference. It is now called a thematic break and is used to distinguish between various topics on a single webpage. c. Prior to HTML 5, the hr meant horizontal rule or reference. It is now called a thematic break and is used to distinguish between various topics on a single webpage. d. Prior to HTML 5, the hr meant horizontal rule or reference. It is now called a thematic break and is used to distinguish between various topics on a single webpage.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Understanding the Basics of HTML QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.11 - Recognize HTML versions and web programming languages NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Understanding the Basics of HTML KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/9/2019 4:51 PM 36. _____ is a popular language used to create interactivity within a web browser. a. Linux b. Structured Query language (SQL) c. JavaScript d. C++ ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. JavaScript is a popular scripting language used to create interactivity within a web browser. b. JavaScript is a popular scripting language used to create interactivity within a web browser. c. JavaScript is a popular scripting language used to create interactivity within a web browser. d. JavaScript is a popular scripting language used to create interactivity within a web browser.

POINTS:

Page 22

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Understanding the Role of Other Web Programming Languages QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.11 - Recognize HTML versions and web programming languages NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Understanding the Role of Other Web Programming Languages KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/9/2019 4:53 PM 37. _____ is designed to exchange and transport data. a. Extensible Markup Language (XML) b. JavaScript c. Unified Modeling Language (UML) d. Practical Extraction and Report Language (PERL) ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. The W3C introduced XML (Extensible Markup Language) in 1998 to exchange and transport data. b. The W3C introduced XML (Extensible Markup Language) in 1998 to exchange and transport data. c. The W3C introduced XML (Extensible Markup Language) in 1998 to exchange and transport data. d. The W3C introduced XML (Extensible Markup Language) in 1998 to exchange and transport data.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Understanding the Basics of HTML QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.11 - Recognize HTML versions and web programming languages NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Understanding the Basics of HTML KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/9/2019 4:55 PM 38. _____ is an open-source, server-side scripting language used for performing common tasks such as writing to or querying a database located on a central server. a. PHP (Hypertext Preprocessor) b. JavaScript c. Python Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 23

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design d. ActionScript ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

a a. PHP (Hypertext Preprocessor) is an open-source scripting language often used for common tasks such as writing to or querying a database located on a central server. b. PHP (Hypertext Preprocessor) is an open-source scripting language often used for common tasks such as writing to or querying a database located on a central server. c. PHP (Hypertext Preprocessor) is an open-source scripting language often used for common tasks such as writing to or querying a database located on a central server. d. PHP (Hypertext Preprocessor) is an open-source scripting language often used for common tasks such as writing to or querying a database located on a central server.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Understanding the Role of Other Web Programming Languages QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.11 - Recognize HTML versions and web programming languages NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Understanding the Role of Other Web Programming Languages KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/11/2019 3:29 PM 39. _____ is a server-side scripting technology from Microsoft used to accomplish server-side processing tasks, similar to PHP. a. Dart b. ASP (Active Server Pages) c. ActionScript d. Python ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. ASP (Active Server Pages) is a server-side scripting technology from Microsoft used to accomplish many of the same server-side processing tasks as PHP. b. ASP (Active Server Pages) is a server-side scripting technology from Microsoft used to accomplish many of the same server-side processing tasks as PHP. c. ASP (Active Server Pages) is a server-side scripting technology from Microsoft used to accomplish many of the same server-side processing tasks as PHP. d. ASP (Active Server Pages) is a server-side scripting technology from Microsoft used to accomplish many of the same server-side processing tasks as PHP.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE:

1 Easy Understanding the Role of Other Web Programming Languages Multiple Choice

Page 24

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.11 - Recognize HTML versions and web programming languages NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Understanding the Role of Other Web Programming Languages KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/11/2019 3:30 PM 40. _____ is a popular WYSIWYG editor used by many people and businesses around the world for web development. a. Adobe Dreamweaver b. Notepad c. Notepad++ d. TextWrangler ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. Adobe Dreamweaver is a popular WYSIWYG editor used by many people and businesses around the world for web development. b. Adobe Dreamweaver is a popular WYSIWYG editor used by many people and businesses around the world for web development. c. Adobe Dreamweaver is a popular WYSIWYG editor used by many people and businesses around the world for web development. d. Adobe Dreamweaver is a popular WYSIWYG editor used by many people and businesses around the world for web development.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Web Authoring Tools QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.13 - Download and use a web authoring tool NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Web Authoring Tools KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/9/2019 5:02 PM 41. All HTML5 webpages must begin with the HTML element _____. a. <meta charset = “UTF-8”> b. <!DOCTYPE html> c. <HTML LANG=”en”> d. <html itemscope> ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. All HTML 5 webpages must begin with the HTML element <!DOCTYPE html>. b. All HTML 5 webpages must begin with the HTML element <!DOCTYPE html>. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 25

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design c. All HTML 5 webpages must begin with the HTML element <!DOCTYPE html>. d. All HTML 5 webpages must begin with the HTML element <!DOCTYPE html>. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating a Basic Webpage QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.14 - Create and view a basic HTML webpage NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Creating a Basic Webpage KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/9/2019 5:04 PM 42. The _____ is a compressed format that allows computers to display and manipulate text. a. Universal Character Format (UCF) b. American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII) c. United Binary Format (UBF) d. Unicode Transformation Format (UTF) ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. The Unicode Transformation Format (UTF) is a compressed format that allows computers to display and manipulate text.

b. The Unicode Transformation Format (UTF) is a compressed format that allows computers to display and manipulate text. c. The Unicode Transformation Format (UTF) is a compressed format that allows computers to display and manipulate text. d. The Unicode Transformation Format (UTF) is a compressed format that allows computers to display and manipulate text.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating a Basic Webpage QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.14 - Create and view a basic HTML webpage NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Creating a Basic Webpage KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/9/2019 5:05 PM 43. _____ are popular browsers in use today. a. Microsoft Edge Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 26

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design b. Mozilla Firefox c. Apple Safari d. Mosaic ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

a, b, c a. Microsoft Edge, Mozilla Firefox, Google Chrome, Apple Safari, and Opera are popular browsers.

b. Microsoft Edge, Mozilla Firefox, Google Chrome, Apple Safari, and Opera are popular browsers. c. Microsoft Edge, Mozilla Firefox, Google Chrome, Apple Safari, and Opera are popular browsers. d. Microsoft Edge, Mozilla Firefox, Google Chrome, Apple Safari, and Opera are popular browsers.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring the Internet QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Response HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.03 - Discuss web browsers and identify their main features NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Exploring the Internet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/9/2019 5:37 PM 44. The factors associated with a target audience that help to design a website appropriate to all users are _____. a. age b. gender c. income level d. level of computer literacy ANSWER: a, b, d FEEDBACK: a. Knowing the makeup of your target audience — including age, gender, general demographic background, and level of computer literacy — helps you design a website appropriate for them. b. Knowing the makeup of your target audience — including age, gender, general demographic background, and level of computer literacy — helps you design a website appropriate for them. c. Knowing the makeup of your target audience — including age, gender, general demographic background, and level of computer literacy — helps you design a website appropriate for them. d. Knowing the makeup of your target audience — including age, gender, general demographic background, and level of computer literacy — helps you design a website appropriate for them.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY:

1 Easy

Page 27

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design REFERENCES: Planning a Website QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Response HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.05 - Plan a website for a target audience NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Planning a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/11/2019 3:39 PM 45. Companies and organizations can use extranets to share _____. a. product manuals b. inventory status c. employee directories d. order information ANSWER: a, b, d FEEDBACK: a. Companies and other organizations can use an extranet to share product manuals, training modules, inventory status, and order information. b. Companies and other organizations can use an extranet to share product manuals, training modules, inventory status, and order information. c. Companies and other organizations can use an extranet to share product manuals, training modules, inventory status, and order information. d. Companies and other organizations can use an extranet to share product manuals, training modules, inventory status, and order information.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring the Internet QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Response HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.04 - Describe the types and purposes of websites NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Exploring the Internet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/9/2019 8:59 PM 46. Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) elements consist of _____. a. a start tag b. a sub tag c. an end tag d. content ANSWER: a, c, d Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 28

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design FEEDBACK:

a. An HTML element consists of everything from the start tag to the end tag, including content, and represents a distinct part of a webpage such as a paragraph or heading. b. An HTML element consists of everything from the start tag to the end tag, including content, and represents a distinct part of a webpage such as a paragraph or heading. c. An HTML element consists of everything from the start tag to the end tag, including content, and represents a distinct part of a webpage such as a paragraph or heading. d. An HTML element consists of everything from the start tag to the end tag, including content, and represents a distinct part of a webpage such as a paragraph or heading.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Understanding the Basics of HTML QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Response HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.11 - Recognize HTML versions and web programming languages NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Understanding the Basics of HTML KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/9/2019 9:14 PM 47. _____ are server-side scripting languages. a. PHP (Hypertext Preprocessor) b. ASP (Active Server Pages) c. Practical Extraction and Report Language (PERL) d. TypeScript (TS) ANSWER: a, b FEEDBACK: a. PHP and ASP are server-side scripting languages. b. PHP and ASP are server-side scripting languages. c. PHP and ASP are server-side scripting languages. d. PHP and ASP are server-side scripting languages. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Understanding the Role of Other Web Programming Languages QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Response HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.11 - Recognize HTML versions and web programming languages NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Understanding the Role of Other Web Programming Languages Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 29

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Bloom’s: Remember 10/8/2019 3:00 PM 12/9/2019 9:19 PM

48. The File Transfer Protocol (FTP) associates an Internet Protocol (IP) address with a domain name. ANSWER: False - Domain Name System (DNS) FEEDBACK: Correct The Domain Name System (DNS) was created to resolve this issue. The DNS associates an IP address with a domain name. Incorrect The Domain Name System (DNS) was created to resolve this issue. The DNS associates an IP address with a domain name.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring the Internet QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.02 - Recognize Internet protocols NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Exploring the Internet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/11/2019 4:28 PM 49. A Learning Management System is a web-based software application designed to facilitate online learning. ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct Many educational institutions use a Learning Management System (LMS) to simplify course management. An LMS is a web-based software application designed to facilitate online learning. Incorrect Many educational institutions use a Learning Management System (LMS) to simplify course management. An LMS is a web-based software application designed to facilitate online learning.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring the Internet QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.04 - Describe the types and purposes of websites NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Exploring the Internet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 30

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design DATE MODIFIED:

12/11/2019 4:29 PM

50. A webbed website structure connects webpages in a straight line. ANSWER: False - linear FEEDBACK: Correct A linear website structure connects webpages in a straight line. Incorrect A linear website structure connects webpages in a straight line.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Planning a Website QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.06 - Define a wireframe and a site map NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Planning a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/10/2019 11:36 AM 51. The web itself uses a hierarchical structure so that users can navigate among webpages in any order they choose. ANSWER: False - webbed FEEDBACK: Correct The web itself uses a webbed structure, so users can navigate among webpages in any order they choose. Incorrect The web itself uses a webbed structure, so users can navigate among webpages in any order they choose.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Planning a Website QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.06 - Define a wireframe and a site map NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Planning a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/11/2019 4:31 PM 52. The convention for HTML 5 is to use all uppercase tags to conform to the current World Wide Web Consortium (W3C) standard. ANSWER: False - lowercase Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 31

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design FEEDBACK:

Correct

The convention for HTML 5 is to use all lowercase tags to conform to the current World Wide Web Consortium (W3C) standard. Incorrect The convention for HTML 5 is to use all lowercase tags to conform to the current World Wide Web Consortium (W3C) standard.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Understanding the Basics of HTML QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.08 - Design for accessibility NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Planning a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/11/2019 4:33 PM 53. The Internet backbone is a collection of high-speed data lines that link major computer systems located around the world. a. True b. False ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

True Correct

The Internet backbone is a collection of high-speed data lines that link major computer systems located around the world. Incorrect The Internet backbone is a collection of high-speed data lines that link major computer systems located around the world.

Page 32

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design b. False ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

False Correct

The Internet of Things is a term used to describe the ever-growing number of devices connecting to a network, including televisions and appliances. Incorrect The Internet of Things is a term used to describe the ever-growing number of devices connecting to a network, including televisions and appliances.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring the Internet QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.01 - Define the Internet and associated key terms NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Exploring the Internet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/10/2019 11:44 AM 55. A webpage is a related collection of websites created and maintained by a person, company, educational institution, or other organizations. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct A website, or site for short, is a related collection of webpages created and maintained by a person, company, educational institution, or other organization, such as the U.S. Department of Education. Incorrect A website, or site for short, is a related collection of webpages created and maintained by a person, company, educational institution, or other organization, such as the U.S. Department of Education.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring the Internet QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.01 - Define the Internet and associated key terms NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Exploring the Internet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/10/2019 11:47 AM 56. Only images can serve as links. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 33

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design a. True b. False ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

False Correct

Many webpage components, including text, graphics, and animations, can serve as links. Incorrect Many webpage components, including text, graphics, and animations, can serve as links.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring the Internet QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.01 - Define the Internet and associated key terms NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Exploring the Internet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/10/2019 11:51 AM 57. A hyperlink, more commonly called a link, is an element that connects one webpage to another webpage on the same server or to any other web server in the world. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct A hyperlink, more commonly called a link, is an element that connects one webpage to another webpage on the same server or to any other web server in the world. Incorrect A hyperlink, more commonly called a link, is an element that connects one webpage to another webpage on the same server or to any other web server in the world.

Page 34

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design 58. A File Transfer Protocol (FTP) provides certain mechanisms to view a webpage. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct The sole purpose of FTP is to exchange files; this protocol does not provide a way to view a webpage. Incorrect The sole purpose of FTP is to exchange files; this protocol does not provide a way to view a webpage.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring the Internet QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.02 - Recognize Internet protocols NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Exploring the Internet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/11/2019 4:36 PM 59. The tasks Internet Protocol (IP) performs are similar to those workers or machines perform when handling a bundle of packages in a post office. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct The tasks Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) performs are similar to those workers or machines perform when handling a bundle of packages in a post office. Incorrect The tasks Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) performs are similar to those workers or machines perform when handling a bundle of packages in a post office.

Page 35

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design other multimedia files on the web. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct

Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) is the fundamental protocol used on the web to exchange and transfer webpages. HTTP is a set of rules for exchanging text, graphics, audio, video, and other multimedia files on the web. Incorrect Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) is the fundamental protocol used on the web to exchange and transfer webpages. HTTP is a set of rules for exchanging text, graphics, audio, video, and other multimedia files on the web.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring the Internet QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.03 - Discuss web browsers and identify their main features NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Exploring the Internet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/10/2019 12:05 PM 62. The Internet is contained within a company's or an organization’s network. a. True Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 36

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design b. False ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

False An intranet is contained within an organization’s network, which makes it private and available only to those who need access. Incorrect An intranet is contained within an organization’s network, which makes it private and available only to those who need access. Correct

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring the Internet QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.04 - Describe the types and purposes of websites NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Exploring the Internet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/11/2019 4:41 PM 63. To create a website that provides an optimal viewing experience across a range of devices, an adaptive design must be used. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct Responsive design allows you to create one website that provides an optimal viewing experience across a range of devices. Incorrect Responsive design allows you to create one website that provides an optimal viewing experience across a range of devices.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Planning a Website QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.05 - Plan a website for a target audience NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Planning a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/10/2019 12:10 PM 64. A wireframe is a planning tool that shows the structure of a website. a. True b. False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 37

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

False Correct

A site map is a planning tool that lists or displays all the pages on a website and indicates how they are related to each other. Incorrect A site map is a planning tool that lists or displays all the pages on a website and indicates how they are related to each other.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Planning a Website QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.06 - Define a wireframe and a site map NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Planning a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/10/2019 12:13 PM 65. The goal of active white space in a wireframe is to help balance the design of an asymmetrical page. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct Typically, the goal of active white space is to help balance the design of an asymmetrical page. Incorrect Typically, the goal of active white space is to help balance the design of an asymmetrical page.

Page 38

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design FEEDBACK:

Correct Passive white space helps a user focus on one part of the page. Incorrect Passive white space helps a user focus on one part of the page.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Planning a Website QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.06 - Define a wireframe and a site map NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Planning a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/10/2019 12:15 PM 67. A hierarchical structure works well on a site with a main index or table of contents page that links to all other webpages. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct A hierarchical structure works well on a site with a main index or table of contents page that links to all other webpages. Incorrect A hierarchical structure works well on a site with a main index or table of contents page that links to all other webpages.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Planning a Website QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.06 - Define a wireframe and a site map NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Planning a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/10/2019 12:16 PM 68. Most websites use a combination of linear, hierarchical, and webbed structures. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct Most websites use a combination of linear, hierarchical, and webbed structures. Incorrect Most websites use a combination of linear, hierarchical, and webbed structures. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 39

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Planning a Website QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.06 - Define a wireframe and a site map NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Planning a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/10/2019 12:17 PM 69. A web designer should always create pages for viewing by a diverse audience, including physically impaired and global users. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct A web designer should create pages for viewing by a diverse audience, including people with physical impairments and global users. Incorrect A web designer should create pages for viewing by a diverse audience, including people with physical impairments and global users.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Planning a Website QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.08 - Design for accessibility NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Planning a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/10/2019 12:18 PM 70. Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) combines tags and descriptive attributes that define how a document should appear in a web browser. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) combines tags and descriptive attributes that define how a document should appear in a web browser. Incorrect Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) combines tags and descriptive attributes that define how a document should appear in a web browser. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 40

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Understanding the Basics of HTML QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.11 - Recognize HTML versions and web programming languages NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Understanding the Basics of HTML KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/10/2019 12:19 PM 71. Extensible Hypertext Markup Language (XHTML) was created to work with XML-based user agents. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct Extensible Hypertext Markup Language (XHTML) was created to work with XMLbased user agents. Incorrect Extensible Hypertext Markup Language (XHTML) was created to work with XMLbased user agents.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Understanding the Basics of HTML QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.11 - Recognize HTML versions and web programming languages NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Understanding the Basics of HTML KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/10/2019 12:23 PM 72. A PHP (Hypertext Preprocessor) script, which is processed at the server, results in an HTML webpage that is sent back to the client. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct The PHP (Hypertext Preprocessor) script, which is processed at the server, results in an HTML webpage that is sent back to the client. Incorrect The PHP (Hypertext Preprocessor) script, which is processed at the server, results in an HTML webpage that is sent back to the client.

POINTS:

Page 41

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Understanding the Role of Other Web Programming Languages QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.11 - Recognize HTML versions and web programming languages NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Understanding the Role of Other Web Programming Languages KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/11/2019 5:02 PM 73. The mission of jQuery is to “drive broad adoption and ongoing development of key JavaScript solutions and related technologies.” a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct The mission of jQuery is to “drive broad adoption and ongoing development of key JavaScript solutions and related technologies.” Incorrect The mission of jQuery is to “drive broad adoption and ongoing development of key JavaScript solutions and related technologies.”

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Understanding the Role of Other Web Programming Languages QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.11 - Recognize HTML versions and web programming languages NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Understanding the Role of Other Web Programming Languages KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/10/2019 12:27 PM 74. A text editor allows dragging HTML elements onto a page while the code is being written in the editor. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct A text editor is a program that allows you to enter, change, save, and print text, which includes HTML tags. Incorrect A text editor is a program that allows you to enter, change, save, and print text, which includes HTML tags.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY:

1 Easy

Page 42

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design REFERENCES: Using Web Authoring Tools QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.13 - Download and use a web authoring tool NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Web Authoring Tools KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/10/2019 12:39 PM 75. Microsoft Word has a Save As Web Page option that converts a document into a Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) file by automatically adding HTML tags to the document. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct Microsoft Word has a Save As Web Page option that converts a document into a Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) file by automatically adding HTML tags to the document. Incorrect Microsoft Word has a Save As Web Page option that converts a document into a Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) file by automatically adding HTML tags to the document.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Web Authoring Tools QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.13 - Download and use a web authoring tool NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Web Authoring Tools KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/10/2019 12:37 PM 76. WYSIWYG editors provide a graphical user interface to design a webpage, as opposed to the blank page provided in a text editor used to write code. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct WYSIWYG editors provide a graphical user interface to design a webpage, as opposed to the blank page provided in a text editor used to write code. Incorrect WYSIWYG editors provide a graphical user interface to design a webpage, as opposed to the blank page provided in a text editor used to write code. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 43

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Web Authoring Tools QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:01.12 - Identify web authoring tools NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Web Authoring Tools KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/10/2019 12:40 PM 77. Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) browsers ignore spaces that exist between the tags in a HTML document. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) browsers ignore spaces that exist between the tags in a HTML document. Incorrect Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) browsers ignore spaces that exist between the tags in a HTML document.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating a Basic Webpage QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.14 - Create and view a basic HTML webpage NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Creating a Basic Webpage KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/10/2019 12:42 PM 78. The _________ is a worldwide collection of computers linked together for use by businesses, governments, educational institutions, other organizations, and individuals using communications devices and media. ANSWER: Internet POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring the Internet QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 44

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.01 - Define the Internet and associated key terms NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Exploring the Internet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/10/2019 12:47 PM 79. A(n) _________ is a collection of two or more computers that are linked together to share resources and information. ANSWER: network POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring the Internet QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.01 - Define the Internet and associated key terms NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Exploring the Internet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/10/2019 12:44 PM 80. The _________ is the service that provides access to information stored on web servers and consists of a collection of linked files. ANSWER: web World Wide Web POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring the Internet QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.01 - Define the Internet and associated key terms NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Exploring the Internet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/10/2019 12:46 PM 81. Tapping or clicking a _________ allows one to move quickly from one webpage to another without being concerned about where the webpages reside. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 45

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design ANSWER:

link hyperlink POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring the Internet QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.01 - Define the Internet and associated key terms NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Exploring the Internet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/10/2019 12:45 PM 82. The collection of linked files on the web is known as _________. ANSWER: pages webpages POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring the Internet QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.01 - Define the Internet and associated key terms NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Exploring the Internet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/10/2019 12:46 PM 83. A(n) _________ is an element that connects one webpage to another webpage on the same server or any other web server in the world. ANSWER: hyperlink link POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring the Internet QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 46

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.01 - Define the Internet and associated key terms NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Exploring the Internet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/10/2019 12:48 PM 84. _________ is a pair of protocols used to transfer data efficiently over the Internet by properly routing it to its destination. ANSWER: Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol TCP/IP TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring the Internet QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.02 - Recognize Internet protocols NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Exploring the Internet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/10/2019 12:49 PM 85. A(n) _________ is another term for a website that is generally available to anyone with an Internet connection. ANSWER: Internet site POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring the Internet QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.04 - Describe the types and purposes of websites NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Exploring the Internet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/10/2019 12:49 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 47

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design 86. The buying and selling of goods and services on the Internet is called _________. ANSWER: e-commerce electronic commerce electronic commerce (e-commerce) e-commerce (electronic commerce) POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring the Internet QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.04 - Describe the types and purposes of websites NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Exploring the Internet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/10/2019 12:50 PM 87. A(n) _________ website structure connects webpages in a straight line. ANSWER: linear POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Planning a Website QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.06 - Define a wireframe and a site map NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Planning a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/10/2019 12:51 PM 88. With a _________ website structure, the main index page displays general information and secondary pages include more detailed information. ANSWER: POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE:

hierarchical 1 Easy Planning a Website Completion

Page 48

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.06 - Define a wireframe and a site map NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Planning a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/3/2019 1:53 PM 89. A(n) _________ website structure works best on sites with information that does not need to be read in a specific order and pages that provide many navigation options. ANSWER: webbed POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Planning a Website QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.06 - Define a wireframe and a site map NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Planning a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/10/2019 12:53 PM 90. Several companies that use web technologies participate in work groups with the _________ to develop standards and guidelines for the web. ANSWER: World Wide Web Consortium (W3C) World Wide Web Consortium W3C

W3C (World Wide Web Consortium) POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Planning a Website QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.08 - Design for accessibility NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Planning a Website Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 49

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Bloom’s: Remember 10/8/2019 3:00 PM 12/3/2019 1:53 PM

91. Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) _________ define additional characteristics, or properties, of the element such as the width and height of an image. ANSWER: attributes POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Understanding the Basics of HTML QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.11 - Recognize HTML versions and web programming languages NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Understanding the Basics of HTML KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/10/2019 12:55 PM 92. <title> Webpage Example </title> is an example of a Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) _________. ANSWER: element POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Understanding the Basics of HTML QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.11 - Recognize HTML versions and web programming languages NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Understanding the Basics of HTML KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/10/2019 12:56 PM 93. _________ is a rewritten version of Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) using Extensible Markup Language (XML) and was developed in 2000. ANSWER: Extensible Hypertext Markup Language (XHTML) Extensible Hypertext Markup Language XHTML

XHTML (Extensible Hypertext Markup Language) Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 50

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Understanding the Basics of HTML QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.11 - Recognize HTML versions and web programming languages NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Understanding the Basics of HTML KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/3/2019 1:53 PM 94. _________ is a library of JavaScript programs designed for easy integration onto a webpage. ANSWER: jQuery POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Understanding the Role of Other Web Programming Languages QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.11 - Recognize HTML versions and web programming languages NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Understanding the Role of Other Web Programming Languages KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/3/2019 1:53 PM 95. A(n) _________ is a program that allows a user to enter, change, save, and print text, which includes Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) tags. ANSWER: text editor POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Web Authoring Tools QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.13 - Download and use a web authoring tool NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Web Authoring Tools Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 51

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Bloom’s: Remember 10/8/2019 3:00 PM 12/10/2019 12:58 PM

96. Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) is _________, meaning one can create, or code, an HTML file on one type of operating system and then use a browser on another type of operating system to view that file as a webpage. ANSWER: platform independent POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Web Authoring Tools QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.13 - Download and use a web authoring tool NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Web Authoring Tools KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/3/2019 1:53 PM 97. A(n) _________ editor is a program that provides a graphical user interface that allows a developer to preview the webpage during its development. ANSWER: WYSIWYG What You See Is What You Get What You See Is What You Get (WYSIWYG)

WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You Get) POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Web Authoring Tools QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.13 - Download and use a web authoring tool NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Web Authoring Tools KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/3/2019 1:53 PM 98. Explain the working of Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP). ANSWER: Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) is a pair of protocols used to Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 52

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design transfer data efficiently over the Internet by properly routing it to its destination. TCP oversees the network connection between the data source and destination and micromanages the data. When data is sent over the Internet, TCP breaks the data into packets. Each packet contains addressing information, which the IP manages. IP ensures that the data is sent to the correct location. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring the Internet QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.02 - Recognize Internet protocols NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Critical Thinking Exploring the Internet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/3/2019 1:53 PM 99. Define Learning Management System (LMS) and discuss its purpose. ANSWER: A Learning Management System (LMS) is a web-based software application designed to facilitate online learning. Instructors use the LMS to communicate announcements, post questions on reading material, list contact information, and provide access to lecture slides and videos. Students use the LMS to find information related to their courses, including project instructions and grades. Many LMS tools allow instructors to write their own webpage content that provides further information for their students. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring the Internet QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.04 - Describe the types and purposes of websites NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Critical Thinking Exploring the Internet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/11/2019 5:23 PM 100. What is the difference between a text editor and a Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) text editor? ANSWER: A text editor is a program that allows a user to enter, change, save, and print text, which includes HTML tags. Text editors do not typically have many advanced features, but they do Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 53

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design allow one to develop HTML documents easily. You can also create Web pages using an HTML text editor, such as EditPlus or BBEdit (MacOS). An HTML text editor is a program that provides basic text-editing functions, as well as more advanced features such as colorcoding for various HTML tags, menus to insert HTML tags, and a spelling checker. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Web Authoring Tools QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:01.12 - Identify web authoring tools NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Critical Thinking Using Web Authoring Tools KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/3/2019 1:53 PM Critical Thinking Questions Case 1-1 Mark is given the responsibility of setting up a method for distributing information at the university where he works. 101. The content that needs to be distributed will include course lists with student data, lecture notes, and slides that should be available only to the students in a given course. Which of the following technologies is the best choice for Mark? a. A wireframe because it provides a visual guide of the contents of a webpage b. An extranet because it is contained within an organization’s network c. An intranet because it is a private network that can be limited to sharing information among members of a particular group d. A sitemap because it indicates how webpages are related to each other ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. An intranet is a private network that can be limited to sharing information among members of a particular group. b. An intranet is a private network that can be limited to sharing information among members of a particular group. c. An intranet is a private network that can be limited to sharing information among members of a particular group. d. An intranet is a private network that can be limited to sharing information among members of a particular group.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE:

1 Challenging Exploring the Internet Multiple Choice

Page 54

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Minnick Chapter 01 Case 1-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.04 - Describe the types and purposes of websites NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Critical Thinking Exploring the Internet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/10/2019 1:06 PM 102. Mark’s assignment changes and he needs to develop a solution for the finance office at the university. He will need to allow vendors to submit their bills online and to check if the university has paid their bills. Which of the following technologies is the best choice for him? a. Intranet b. Extranet c. Internet d. Vendornet ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. An extranet allows retailers to purchase inventory directly from their suppliers or to pay bills online. b. An extranet allows retailers to purchase inventory directly from their suppliers or to pay bills online. c. An extranet allows retailers to purchase inventory directly from their suppliers or to pay bills online. d. An extranet allows retailers to purchase inventory directly from their suppliers or to pay bills online.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: Exploring the Internet QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Minnick Chapter 01 Case 1-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.04 - Describe the types and purposes of websites NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Critical Thinking Exploring the Internet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/10/2019 1:09 PM Critical Thinking Questions Case 1-2 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 55

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design Mark and Sebastian are building a new e-commerce site. Their goal is to focus on customers’ needs and to gain popularity among their competitors. 103. They built a website that provides an optimal viewing experience across a wide range of devices. Identify the website design that has been used by Mark and Sebastian. a. Responsive design b. Asynchronous design c. Adaptive design d. Reactive design ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. Responsive design allows you to create one website that provides an optimal viewing experience across a range of devices. b. Responsive design allows you to create one website that provides an optimal viewing experience across a range of devices. c. Responsive design allows you to create one website that provides an optimal viewing experience across a range of devices. d. Responsive design allows you to create one website that provides an optimal viewing experience across a range of devices.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Planning a Website QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Minnick Chapter 01 Case 1-2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.08 - Design for accessibility NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Critical Thinking Planning a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/12/2019 12:03 PM 104. Before creating their website, Mark and Sebastian identify the location of main webpage elements using wireframe. They leave a few areas of the website intentionally blank to help balance the design of an asymmetrical page. What are these intentionally left blank spaces called? a. Passive white space b. Active white space c. Active dark space d. Passive dark space ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. Active white space is an area on the page that is intentionally left blank. b. Active white space is an area on the page that is intentionally left blank. c. Active white space is an area on the page that is intentionally left blank. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 56

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design d. Active white space is an area on the page that is intentionally left blank. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Planning a Website QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Minnick Chapter 01 Case 1-2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.06 - Define a wireframe and a site map NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Critical Thinking Planning a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/10/2019 1:10 PM Identify the letter of the choice that best matches the phrase or definition. a. server b. Internet c. Domain Name System (DNS) d. webbed e. hyperlinks f. Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) g. hierarchical h. Active white space i. Unicode Transformation Format (UTF) j. World Wide Web Consortium (W3C) DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating a Basic Webpage Exploring the Internet Exploring the Internet Exploring the Internet Exploring the Internet Planning a Website Planning a Website Planning a Website Planning a Website Planning a Website QUESTION TYPE: Matching HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 01.01 - Define the Internet and associated key terms LO: 01.02 - Recognize Internet protocols LO: 01.06 - Define a wireframe and a site map LO: 01.08 - Design for accessibility Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 57

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design LO: 01.11 - Recognize HTML versions and web programming languages LO: 01.14 - Create and view a basic HTML webpage NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Creating a Website Exploring the Internet Planning a Website Understanding the Basics of HTML KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/23/2020 1:08 PM 105. It is the host computer that stores resources and files for websites. ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 106. With these, a website user does not have to view information linearly. ANSWER: e POINTS: 1 107. It is an authoring language used to create documents for the web. ANSWER: f POINTS: 1 108. It is a worldwide collection of computers linked together for use by organizations and individuals using communications devices and media. ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 109. This website structure has no set organization. ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 110. This website structure connects webpages in a treelike structure. ANSWER: g POINTS: 1 111. This develops and maintains web standards, language specifications, and accessibility recommendations. ANSWER: j POINTS: 1 112. It eliminates the difficulty in remembering the Internet Protocol (IP) addresses to access websites. ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 113. It helps to balance the design of an asymmetrical page. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 58

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Internet and Web Design ANSWER: h POINTS: 1 114. This is standard for HTML 5 pages and is the preferred encoding standard for email and other applications. ANSWER: i POINTS: 1

Page 59

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 2: Building a Webpage Template with HTML 5 1. _____ appear below the header in the navigation area of a webpage. a. Copyright labels b. Ordered lists c. Page links d. Bulleted lists ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. Page links appear below the header in the navigation area of a webpage. b. Page links appear below the header in the navigation area of a webpage. c. Page links appear below the header in the navigation area of a webpage. d. Page links appear below the header in the navigation area of a webpage. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Designing a Website QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.02 - Describe and use HTML 5 semantic elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Designing a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/12/2019 12:35 PM 2. A _____ is located at the top of a webpage and identifies the site, often by displaying the business name or logo. a. footer b. copyright label c. header d. navigation pane ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. The header is located at the top of a webpage and identifies the site, often by displaying the business name or logo. b. The header is located at the top of a webpage and identifies the site, often by displaying the business name or logo. c. The header is located at the top of a webpage and identifies the site, often by displaying the business name or logo. d. The header is located at the top of a webpage and identifies the site, often by displaying the business name or logo.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Designing a Website QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.02 - Describe and use HTML 5 semantic elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 2: Building a Webpage Template with HTML 5 TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Designing a Website Bloom's: Remember 10/8/2019 3:03 PM 12/12/2019 12:39 PM

3. The _____ area of a webpage contains the copyright and contact information. a. header b. navigation c. footer d. section ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. The footer area of a webpage contains the copyright and contact information. b. The footer area of a webpage contains the copyright and contact information. c. The footer area of a webpage contains the copyright and contact information. d. The footer area of a webpage contains the copyright and contact information. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.05 - Create a webpage template NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Designing a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/12/2019 12:43 PM 4. A _____ identifies the number of pages in a website and shows how each page is linked to other pages. a. wireframe b. prototype c. mock-up d. site map ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. A site map identifies the number of pages in a website and shows how each page is linked to other pages. b. A site map identifies the number of pages in a website and shows how each page is linked to other pages. c. A site map identifies the number of pages in a website and shows how each page is linked to other pages. d. A site map identifies the number of pages in a website and shows how each page is linked to other pages.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY:

1 Easy

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 2: Building a Webpage Template with HTML 5 REFERENCES: Designing a Website QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.04 - Design and build a semantic wireframe NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Designing a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/12/2019 12:46 PM 5. A _____ shows the visual layout of a webpage to indicate where elements should appear. a. site map b. site index c. wireframe d. data architecture ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. A wireframe shows the visual layout of a webpage to indicate where elements should appear. b. A wireframe shows the visual layout of a webpage to indicate where elements should appear. c. A wireframe shows the visual layout of a webpage to indicate where elements should appear. d. A wireframe shows the visual layout of a webpage to indicate where elements should appear.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Designing a Website QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.04 - Design and build a semantic wireframe NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Designing a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/12/2019 12:48 PM 6. A _____ element provides meaning about the content of the element. a. bootstrap b. lexical c. pragmatic d. semantic ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. A semantic element provides meaning about the content of the element. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 2: Building a Webpage Template with HTML 5 b. A semantic element provides meaning about the content of the element. c. A semantic element provides meaning about the content of the element. d. A semantic element provides meaning about the content of the element. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Designing a Website QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.04 - Design and build a semantic wireframe NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Designing a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/12/2019 12:51 PM 7. The Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) elements that define the structure of a webpage must be within a(n) _____ element. a. div b. nav c. body d. img ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. The Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) elements that define the structure of a webpage must be within a body element.

b. The Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) elements that define the structure of a webpage must be within a body element. c. The Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) elements that define the structure of a webpage must be within a body element. d. The Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) elements that define the structure of a webpage must be within a body element.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 2: Building a Webpage Template with HTML 5 a. nav b. body c. div d. img ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

c a. HTML 4.01 introduced the div element to divide a page into separate sections. b. HTML 4.01 introduced the div element to divide a page into separate sections. c. HTML 4.01 introduced the div element to divide a page into separate sections. d. HTML 4.01 introduced the div element to divide a page into separate sections.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.02 - Describe and use HTML 5 semantic elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/12/2019 12:56 PM 9. A _____ element contains hyperlinks to other webpages within a website. a. head b. title c. nav d. footer ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. The nav element contains hyperlinks to other webpages within a website. b. The nav element contains hyperlinks to other webpages within a website. c. The nav element contains hyperlinks to other webpages within a website. d. The nav element contains hyperlinks to other webpages within a website. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.02 - Describe and use HTML 5 semantic elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 2: Building a Webpage Template with HTML 5 DATE MODIFIED:

12/12/2019 2:37 PM

10. The World Wide Web Consortium (W3C) introduced a _____ element after other semantic elements, and not all browsers or text editors recognize it yet. a. div b. section c. nav d. main ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. The W3C introduced the main element after other semantic elements, and not all browsers or text editors recognize it yet. b. The W3C introduced the main element after other semantic elements, and not all browsers or text editors recognize it yet. c. The W3C introduced the main element after other semantic elements, and not all browsers or text editors recognize it yet. d. The W3C introduced the main element after other semantic elements, and not all browsers or text editors recognize it yet.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.03 - Determine the elements to use when setting the structure of a webpage NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/12/2019 2:38 PM 11. Each page can have only one _____ element because its content should be unique to each page. a. nav b. main c. li d. div ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. Each page can have only one main element because its content should be unique to each page.

b. Each page can have only one main element because its content should be unique to each page. c. Each page can have only one main element because its content should be unique to each page. d. Each page can have only one main element because its content should be unique to each page.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY:

1 Easy

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 2: Building a Webpage Template with HTML 5 REFERENCES: Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.03 - Determine the elements to use when setting the structure of a webpage NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/12/2019 2:39 PM 12. A _____ ensures that the webpages in a website share a standard layout. a. site index b. template c. flowchart d. wireframe ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. To make sure the webpages in a site share a standard layout, you can create a template, an HTML document that contains elements that should appear on each page. b. To make sure the webpages in a site share a standard layout, you can create a template, an HTML document that contains elements that should appear on each page. c. To make sure the webpages in a site share a standard layout, you can create a template, an HTML document that contains elements that should appear on each page. d. To make sure the webpages in a site share a standard layout, you can create a template, an HTML document that contains elements that should appear on each page.

Page 7

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 2: Building a Webpage Template with HTML 5 d. main ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

b a. The title is a basic required Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) element. b. The title is a basic required Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) element. c. The title is a basic required Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) element. d. The title is a basic required Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) element.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating a Webpage Template QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.02 - Describe and use HTML 5 semantic elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Webpage Template KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/12/2019 2:45 PM 14. Which is a Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) structural semantic element? a. meta b. nav c. body d. title ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. The nav element is a Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) structural semantic element. b. The nav element is a Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) structural semantic element. c. The nav element is a Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) structural semantic element. d. The nav element is a Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) structural semantic element.

Page 8

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 2: Building a Webpage Template with HTML 5 15. The _____ keys must be used to stop indenting the lines of a document in text editors. a. CTRL+TAB b. ALT+TAB c. SHIFT+TAB d. CTRL+SHIFT+TAB ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. The SHIFT+TAB keys must be used to stop indenting the lines of a document in text editors. b. The SHIFT+TAB keys must be used to stop indenting the lines of a document in text editors. c. The SHIFT+TAB keys must be used to stop indenting the lines of a document in text editors. d. The SHIFT+TAB keys must be used to stop indenting the lines of a document in text editors.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Creating a Webpage Template QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.05 - Create a webpage template NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Webpage Template KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/13/2019 1:49 PM 16. When a webpage is displayed in a browser, the browser tab displays the _____. a. document title b. file location c. copyright information d. html version ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. When a webpage is displayed in a browser, the browser tab displays the document title.

b. When a webpage is displayed in a browser, the browser tab displays the document title. c. When a webpage is displayed in a browser, the browser tab displays the document title. d. When a webpage is displayed in a browser, the browser tab displays the document title.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES:

1 Easy Creating a Webpage Template

Page 9

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 2: Building a Webpage Template with HTML 5 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.05 - Create a webpage template NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Webpage Template KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/12/2019 2:51 PM 17. _____ are used to give instructions on how to use a template or to identify the author of a website. a. Comments b. Headings c. Word wraps d. Whitespaces ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. Comments are used to give instructions on how to use a template or to identify the author of a website. b. Comments are used to give instructions on how to use a template or to identify the author of a website. c. Comments are used to give instructions on how to use a template or to identify the author of a website. d. Comments are used to give instructions on how to use a template or to identify the author of a website.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating a Webpage Template QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.06 - Insert comments in an HTML document NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Webpage Template KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/12/2019 2:52 PM 18. When _____ is enabled, a paragraph of the text is assigned a single logical line number even though it may be displayed on multiple physical lines in Notepad++. a. word wrap b. word align c. white-space d. DOCTYPE ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. When word wrap is enabled, a paragraph of the text is assigned a single logical line number even though it may be displayed on multiple physical lines in Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 10

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 2: Building a Webpage Template with HTML 5 Notepad++. b. When word wrap is enabled, a paragraph of the text is assigned a single logical line number even though it may be displayed on multiple physical lines in Notepad++. c. When word wrap is enabled, a paragraph of the text is assigned a single logical line number even though it may be displayed on multiple physical lines in Notepad++. d. When word wrap is enabled, a paragraph of the text is assigned a single logical line number even though it may be displayed on multiple physical lines in Notepad++.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating a Webpage Template QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.05 - Create a webpage template NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Webpage Template KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/12/2019 2:54 PM 19. In Notepad++, the text entered scrolls continuously to the right unless the _____ feature is turned on. a. word align b. DOCTYPE c. white-space d. word wrap ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. If you are using Notepad++, the text you enter scrolls continuously to the right unless you turn on the word wrap feature. b. If you are using Notepad++, the text you enter scrolls continuously to the right unless you turn on the word wrap feature. c. If you are using Notepad++, the text you enter scrolls continuously to the right unless you turn on the word wrap feature. d. If you are using Notepad++, the text you enter scrolls continuously to the right unless you turn on the word wrap feature.

Page 11

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 2: Building a Webpage Template with HTML 5 DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

10/8/2019 3:03 PM 12/12/2019 2:56 PM

20. When creating a webpage template, including _____ provides additional information about how to use the sections of the webpage. a. headings b. white-spaces c. word wraps d. comments ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. When creating a webpage template, including comments provides additional information about how to use the sections of the webpage. b. When creating a webpage template, including comments provides additional information about how to use the sections of the webpage. c. When creating a webpage template, including comments provides additional information about how to use the sections of the webpage. d. When creating a webpage template, including comments provides additional information about how to use the sections of the webpage.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating a Webpage Template QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.06 - Insert comments in an HTML document NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Webpage Template KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/12/2019 2:57 PM 21. Adding _____ content to a template saves time. a. wavering b. dynamic c. progressive d. static ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. Adding static content to a template saves time. b. Adding static content to a template saves time. c. Adding static content to a template saves time. d. Adding static content to a template saves time. POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES:

1 Easy Creating a Webpage Template

Page 12

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 2: Building a Webpage Template with HTML 5 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.07 - Add static content to a webpage template NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Webpage Template KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/12/2019 2:59 PM 22. Inserting a Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) _____ in some HTML code displays a reserved HTML character on the webpage. a. character name b. character vector c. character array d. character entity ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. Inserting an HTML character entity in the code displays a reserved HTML character on the webpage. b. Inserting an HTML character entity in the code displays a reserved HTML character on the webpage. c. Inserting an HTML character entity in the code displays a reserved HTML character on the webpage. d. Inserting an HTML character entity in the code displays a reserved HTML character on the webpage.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Symbol Entities QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.08 - Insert symbol codes and other character entities NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Symbol Entities KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/13/2019 2:23 PM 23. All character entities start with _____. a. & b. ; c. ! d. << ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. All character entities start with an ampersand (&). Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 13

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 2: Building a Webpage Template with HTML 5 b. All character entities start with an ampersand (&). c. All character entities start with an ampersand (&). d. All character entities start with an ampersand (&). POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Symbol Entities QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.08 - Insert symbol codes and other character entities NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Symbol Entities KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/12/2019 3:01 PM 24. All character entities end with _____ to signal the browser that everything in between is an entity representing a symbol. a. ; b. ! c. << d. & ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. All character entities end with a semicolon (;). b. All character entities end with a semicolon (;). c. All character entities end with a semicolon (;). d. All character entities end with a semicolon (;). POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Symbol Entities QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.08 - Insert symbol codes and other character entities NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Symbol Entities KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/12/2019 3:02 PM 25. An _____ is a combination of the pound sign (#) and a numeric code. a. entity number b. entity name c. entity type Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 14

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 2: Building a Webpage Template with HTML 5 d. entity framework ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

a a. An entity number is a combination of the pound sign (#) and a numeric code. b. An entity number is a combination of the pound sign (#) and a numeric code. c. An entity number is a combination of the pound sign (#) and a numeric code. d. An entity number is a combination of the pound sign (#) and a numeric code.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Symbol Entities QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.08 - Insert symbol codes and other character entities NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Symbol Entities KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/12/2019 3:03 PM 26. The entity number for the copyright symbol is _____. a. &169#; b. 169#&; c. &#169; d. #169&; ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. The entity number for the copyright symbol is & #169;. b. The entity number for the copyright symbol is & #169;. c. The entity number for the copyright symbol is & #169;. d. The entity number for the copyright symbol is & #169;. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Symbol Entities QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.08 - Insert symbol codes and other character entities NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Symbol Entities KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/12/2019 3:05 PM 27. _____ forces browsers to display a nonbreaking blank space. a. &bspn; Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 15

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 2: Building a Webpage Template with HTML 5 b. &nbsp; c. &emsp; d. &mspe; ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

b a. A nonbreaking space, & nbsp;, forces browsers to display a nonbreaking blank space.

b. A nonbreaking space, & nbsp;, forces browsers to display a nonbreaking blank space. c. A nonbreaking space, & nbsp;, forces browsers to display a nonbreaking blank space. d. A nonbreaking space, & nbsp;, forces browsers to display a nonbreaking blank space.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Symbol Entities QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.08 - Insert symbol codes and other character entities NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Symbol Entities KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/13/2019 2:29 PM 28. The _____ is the preferred character set for several types of web programming languages, such as HTML, JavaScript, and XML. a. American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII) b. Unicode Transformation Format (UTF)-8 c. Extended Binary Coded Decimal Interchange Code (EBCDIC) d. Binary Transformation Format (BTF)-8 ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. The UTF-8 has been widely accepted and is the preferred character set for several types of web programming languages, such as HTML, JavaScript, and XML. b. The UTF-8 has been widely accepted and is the preferred character set for several types of web programming languages, such as HTML, JavaScript, and XML. c. The UTF-8 has been widely accepted and is the preferred character set for several types of web programming languages, such as HTML, JavaScript, and XML. d. The UTF-8 has been widely accepted and is the preferred character set for several types of web programming languages, such as HTML, JavaScript, and XML.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY:

1 Easy

Page 16

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 2: Building a Webpage Template with HTML 5 REFERENCES: Using Symbol Entities QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.08 - Insert symbol codes and other character entities NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Symbol Entities KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/12/2019 3:09 PM 29. The World Wide Web Consortium (W3C) recommends _____ all Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) documents and making it a part of webpage testing. a. validating b. authoring c. orienting d. repudiating ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. The W3C recommends validating all HTML documents and making validation part of your webpage testing. b. The W3C recommends validating all HTML documents and making validation part of your webpage testing. c. The W3C recommends validating all HTML documents and making validation part of your webpage testing. d. The W3C recommends validating all HTML documents and making validation part of your webpage testing.

Page 17

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 2: Building a Webpage Template with HTML 5 FEEDBACK:

a. When you validate an HTML document, you confirm that all of the code is correct and follows the established rules set by the W3C, the organization that sets the standards for HTML. b. When you validate an HTML document, you confirm that all of the code is correct and follows the established rules set by the W3C, the organization that sets the standards for HTML. c. When you validate an HTML document, you confirm that all of the code is correct and follows the established rules set by the W3C, the organization that sets the standards for HTML. d. When you validate an HTML document, you confirm that all of the code is correct and follows the established rules set by the W3C, the organization that sets the standards for HTML.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Validating HTML Documents QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.10 - Describe the benefits of validating web documents NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Validating HTML Documents KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/12/2019 3:11 PM 31. A _____ for a website ensures consistency across the website, saves the user’s time, and eliminates the re-creation of repeating elements such as navigation bars. a. template b. site map c. report d. checklist ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. A template for a website ensures consistency across the website, saves the user’s time, and eliminates the re-creation of repeating elements such as navigation bars. b. A template for a website ensures consistency across the website, saves the user’s time, and eliminates the re-creation of repeating elements such as navigation bars. c. A template for a website ensures consistency across the website, saves the user’s time, and eliminates the re-creation of repeating elements such as navigation bars. d. A template for a website ensures consistency across the website, saves the user’s time, and eliminates the re-creation of repeating elements such as navigation bars.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES:

1 Moderate Creating a Home Page Using a Webpage Template

Page 18

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 2: Building a Webpage Template with HTML 5 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.12 - Create a home page from an HTML template NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Validating HTML Documents KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/13/2019 2:34 PM 32. Browsers add space before and after each _____ element. a. break b. paragraph c. navigation d. anchor ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. Browsers add space before and after each paragraph element to separate paragraphs. b. Browsers add space before and after each paragraph element to separate paragraphs. c. Browsers add space before and after each paragraph element to separate paragraphs. d. Browsers add space before and after each paragraph element to separate paragraphs.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating a Home Page Using a Webpage Template QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.12 - Create a home page from an HTML template NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Home Page Using a Webpage Template KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/12/2019 3:14 PM 33. Semantic elements are also called _____ elements. a. structural b. horizontal c. layout d. navigational ANSWER: a, c FEEDBACK: a. Because many of the semantic elements help to structure the layout of the page, they are also called structural elements or layout elements. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 19

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 2: Building a Webpage Template with HTML 5 b. Because many of the semantic elements help to structure the layout of the page, they are also called structural elements or layout elements. c. Because many of the semantic elements help to structure the layout of the page, they are also called structural elements or layout elements. d. Because many of the semantic elements help to structure the layout of the page, they are also called structural elements or layout elements.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Response HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.02 - Describe and use HTML 5 semantic elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/12/2019 3:16 PM 34. Common content found within a webpage header includes _____. a. the business logo b. the business name c. business contacts information d. page links ANSWER: a, b FEEDBACK: a. Web designers often place a business name or logo within the header element. b. Web designers often place a business name or logo within the header element. c. Web designers often place a business name or logo within the header element. d. Web designers often place a business name or logo within the header element. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Response HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.02 - Describe and use HTML 5 semantic elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/12/2019 3:18 PM 35. Which are considered to be basic required Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) elements? a. meta b. header Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 20

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 2: Building a Webpage Template with HTML 5 c. main d. head ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

a, d a. The basic required HTML elements include the DOCTYPE declaration and the html, head, title, meta, and body elements.

b. The basic required HTML elements include the DOCTYPE declaration and the html, head, title, meta, and body elements. c. The basic required HTML elements include the DOCTYPE declaration and the html, head, title, meta, and body elements. d. The basic required HTML elements include the DOCTYPE declaration and the html, head, title, meta, and body elements.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Creating a Webpage Template QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Response HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.03 - Determine the elements to use when setting the structure of a webpage NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/12/2019 3:21 PM 36. Which are included as Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) structural semantic elements? a. head b. header c. nav d. main ANSWER: b, c, d FEEDBACK: a. The HTML structural semantic elements are header, nav, main, and footer. b. The HTML structural semantic elements are header, nav, main, and footer. c. The HTML structural semantic elements are header, nav, main, and footer. d. The HTML structural semantic elements are header, nav, main, and footer. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Creating a Webpage Template QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Response HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.02 - Describe and use HTML 5 semantic elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 21

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 2: Building a Webpage Template with HTML 5 DATE MODIFIED:

12/12/2019 3:24 PM

37. An entity number consists of a _____. a. pound sign b. euro sign c. number code d. dollar sign ANSWER: a, c FEEDBACK: a. An entity number is a combination of the pound sign and a numeric code. b. An entity number is a combination of the pound sign and a numeric code. c. An entity number is a combination of the pound sign and a numeric code. d. An entity number is a combination of the pound sign and a numeric code. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Symbol Entities QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Response HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.08 - Insert symbol codes and other character entities NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Symbol Entities KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/12/2019 3:25 PM 38. To create a site map for a website, one must know how many pages to include in the website. ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct To create a site map for a website, one must know how many pages to include in the website. Incorrect To create a site map for a website, one must know how many pages to include in the website.

Page 22

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 2: Building a Webpage Template with HTML 5 39. A wireframe indicates how the pages in a website relate to each other. ANSWER: False - site map FEEDBACK: Correct A site map indicates how the pages in a website relate to each other. Incorrect A site map indicates how the pages in a website relate to each other.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Designing a Website QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.01 - Explain how to manage website files NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Designing a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/12/2019 3:27 PM 40. A semantic site map uses semantic elements to define the structure of a webpage. ANSWER: False - wireframe FEEDBACK: Correct A semantic wireframe uses semantic elements to define the structure of a webpage. Incorrect A semantic wireframe uses semantic elements to define the structure of a webpage.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Designing a Website QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.04 - Design and build a semantic wireframe NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Designing a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/12/2019 3:29 PM 41. The nav element includes copyright information and page links. ANSWER: False - footer FEEDBACK: Correct The footer element includes copyright information. Incorrect The footer element includes copyright information.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES:

1 Easy Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements

Page 23

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 2: Building a Webpage Template with HTML 5 QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.02 - Describe and use HTML 5 semantic elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/12/2019 3:33 PM 42. The header element includes links to other pages within a website. ANSWER: False - nav FEEDBACK: Correct The nav element usually includes links to other pages within the website. Incorrect The nav element usually includes links to other pages within the website.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.02 - Describe and use HTML 5 semantic elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/12/2019 3:34 PM 43. A wireframe is a predefined webpage that contains a specific Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) structure to be used by all pages within the website. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct A template is a predefined webpage that contains a specific HTML structure to be used by all pages within the website. Incorrect A template is a predefined webpage that contains a specific HTML structure to be used by all pages within the website.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Introduction QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.05 - Create a webpage template NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 24

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 2: Building a Webpage Template with HTML 5 TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Introduction Bloom's: Remember 10/8/2019 3:03 PM 12/12/2019 3:35 PM

44. The page links of a webpage will appear below the header in the navigation area. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct The page links of a webpage will appear below the header in the navigation area. Incorrect The page links of a webpage will appear below the header in the navigation area.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Designing a Website QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.02 - Describe and use HTML 5 semantic elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Designing a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/12/2019 9:38 PM 45. The Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) 5 semantic element tag names reflect the purpose of their elements. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct The name of each Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) 5 semantic element tag reflects the purpose of the element. Incorrect The name of each Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) 5 semantic element tag reflects the purpose of the element.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.02 - Describe and use HTML 5 semantic elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/13/2019 4:08 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 25

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 2: Building a Webpage Template with HTML 5 46. Semantic elements are also known as structural elements. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct Semantic elements are also known as structural elements. Incorrect Semantic elements are also known as structural elements.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.02 - Describe and use HTML 5 semantic elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/12/2019 3:38 PM 47. The div element is a semantic element, while the main element is not. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct The main element is a semantic element. Incorrect The main element is a semantic element.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.02 - Describe and use HTML 5 semantic elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/12/2019 3:40 PM 48. The nav element is a basic required Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) element. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct The nav element is not a basic required Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) element. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 26

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 2: Building a Webpage Template with HTML 5 Incorrect The nav element is not a basic required Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) element.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.02 - Describe and use HTML 5 semantic elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/12/2019 3:42 PM 49. To create a webpage template, a Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) document with the HTML elements that define the webpage structure must be created. a. True b. False ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

True Correct

To create a webpage template, a Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) document with the HTML elements that define the webpage structure must be created. Incorrect To create a webpage template, a Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) document with the HTML elements that define the webpage structure must be created.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating a Webpage Template QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.05 - Create a webpage template NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Webpage Template KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/13/2019 4:11 PM 50. The navigation bar appears in the same position on each page and uses the same colors, fonts, and font styles. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct The navigation bar appears in the same position on each page and uses the same colors, fonts, and font styles. Incorrect The navigation bar appears in the same position on each page and uses the same colors, fonts, and font styles. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 27

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 2: Building a Webpage Template with HTML 5 POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating a Webpage Template QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.05 - Create a webpage template NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Webpage Template KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/14/2019 1:36 PM 51. Using blank lines between Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) elements is a bad design practice. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct Using blank lines between HTML elements is a good design practice. Incorrect Using blank lines between HTML elements is a good design practice.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating a Webpage Template QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.05 - Create a webpage template NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Webpage Template KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/12/2019 8:29 PM 52. In Notepad++, the text entered in the text area scrolls continuously to the right unless the word wrap feature is enabled. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct If you are using Notepad++, the text you enter scrolls continuously to the right unless you turn on the word wrap feature. Incorrect If you are using Notepad++, the text you enter scrolls continuously to the right unless you turn on the word wrap feature.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE:

1 Easy Creating a Webpage Template True / False

Page 28

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 2: Building a Webpage Template with HTML 5 HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.06 - Insert comments in an HTML document NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Webpage Template KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/12/2019 8:31 PM 53. The comment syntax uses the angle brackets, similar to the Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) tags. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct The comment syntax uses the angle brackets, similar to the Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) tags. Incorrect The comment syntax uses the angle brackets, similar to the Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) tags.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating a Webpage Template QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.06 - Insert comments in an HTML document NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Webpage Template KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/12/2019 8:32 PM 54. A comment is closed by adding two dashes followed by an exclamation mark and a closing angle bracket. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct Commenta are closed by adding two dashes, followed by a closing angle bracket. Incorrect Commenta are closed by adding two dashes, followed by a closing angle bracket.

Page 29

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 2: Building a Webpage Template with HTML 5 DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

10/8/2019 3:03 PM 12/12/2019 8:34 PM

55. Word wrap affects the way a text prints. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct Word wrap does not affect the way a text prints. Incorrect Word wrap does not affect the way a text prints.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Creating a Webpage Template QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.06 - Insert comments in an HTML document NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Webpage Template KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/12/2019 8:36 PM 56. To add a document title, the title text must be typed between the starting and ending header tags. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct To add a document title, type the title text between the starting and ending title tags. Incorrect To add a document title, type the title text between the starting and ending title tags.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Creating a Webpage Template QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.05 - Create a webpage template NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Webpage Template KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/12/2019 8:37 PM 57. Inserting blank lines before or after HTML elements does not affect the structure of a webpage. a. True Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 30

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 2: Building a Webpage Template with HTML 5 b. False ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

True Correct

Inserting blank lines before or after HTML elements does not affect the structure of the webpage. Incorrect Inserting blank lines before or after HTML elements does not affect the structure of the webpage.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Creating a Webpage Template QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.06 - Insert comments in an HTML document NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Webpage Template KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/12/2019 8:39 PM 58. Content is the text or other item that is displayed in a browser. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct Content is the text or other item that is displayed in a browser. Incorrect Content is the text or other item that is displayed in a browser.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating a Webpage Template QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.07 - Add static content to a webpage template NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Webpage Template KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/12/2019 8:43 PM 59. An entity number is a combination of the dollar sign ($) and a numeric code. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct An entity number is a combination of the pound sign (#) and a numeric code. Incorrect An entity number is a combination of the pound sign (#) and a numeric code.

POINTS:

Page 31

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 2: Building a Webpage Template with HTML 5 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Symbol Entities QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.08 - Insert symbol codes and other character entities NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Symbol Entities KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/12/2019 8:44 PM 60. The entity name for the copyright symbol is &cprt. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct The entity name for the copyright symbol is & copy;. Incorrect The entity name for the copyright symbol is & copy;.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Symbol Entities QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.08 - Insert symbol codes and other character entities NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Symbol Entities KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/12/2019 8:46 PM 61. A reserved symbol can be added in a Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) webpage by inserting its HTML entity name. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct A reserved symbol can be added in a Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) webpage by inserting its HTML entity name. Incorrect A reserved symbol can be added in a Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) webpage by inserting its HTML entity name.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE: HAS VARIABLES:

1 Easy Using Symbol Entities True / False False

Page 32

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 2: Building a Webpage Template with HTML 5 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.08 - Insert symbol codes and other character entities NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Symbol Entities KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/12/2019 8:47 PM 62. When a browser displays a webpage, it ignores extra white spaces, treating multiple spaces, indents, and paragraph breaks as a single space. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct When a browser displays a webpage, it ignores extra white spaces, treating multiple spaces, indents, and paragraph breaks as a single space. Incorrect When a browser displays a webpage, it ignores extra white spaces, treating multiple spaces, indents, and paragraph breaks as a single space.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Symbol Entities QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.08 - Insert symbol codes and other character entities NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Symbol Entities KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/12/2019 8:51 PM 63. After creating a template for a website, one can save time by using the template to create webpages in the site. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct After creating a template for a website, you can save time by using the template to create the webpages in the site. Incorrect After creating a template for a website, you can save time by using the template to create the webpages in the site.

Page 33

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 2: Building a Webpage Template with HTML 5 TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Creating a Home Page Using a Webpage Template Bloom's: Understand 10/8/2019 3:03 PM 12/12/2019 8:54 PM

64. Browsers add space before and after each line break. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct For a line break, browsers do not add space before and after the < br> tag. Incorrect For a line break, browsers do not add space before and after the < br> tag.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating a Home Page Using a Webpage Template QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.12 - Create a home page from an HTML template NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Home Page Using a Webpage Template KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/13/2019 4:24 PM 65. After creating the home page or any other page of a website and adding content to it, one must display it in a browser to view the completed page. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct After creating the home page or any other page of a website and adding content to it, display it in a browser to view the completed page. Incorrect After creating the home page or any other page of a website and adding content to it, display it in a browser to view the completed page.

Page 34

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 2: Building a Webpage Template with HTML 5 66. A _________ uses semantic elements to define the structure of a webpage. ANSWER: semantic wireframe POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Designing a Website QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.04 - Design and build a semantic wireframe NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Designing a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/12/2019 8:57 PM 67. Web designers place a business name or logo within the _________ element. ANSWER: header POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.02 - Describe and use HTML 5 semantic elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/12/2019 8:58 PM 68. The _________ element includes links to other pages within a website. ANSWER: nav POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.02 - Describe and use HTML 5 semantic elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 35

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 2: Building a Webpage Template with HTML 5 DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

10/8/2019 3:03 PM 10/8/2019 3:03 PM

69. To ensure that the webpages in a site share a standard layout, a _________ must be created. ANSWER: template POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating a Webpage Template QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.05 - Create a webpage template NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Webpage Template KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM 70. The basic required Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) elements are the DOCTYPE declaration and the html, head, title, meta, and _________ elements. ANSWER: body POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating a Webpage Template QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.05 - Create a webpage template NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Webpage Template KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM 71. A(n) _________ element defines the navigation area of a webpage. ANSWER: nav POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.02 - Describe and use HTML 5 semantic elements Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 36

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 2: Building a Webpage Template with HTML 5 NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Creating a Webpage Template Bloom's: Remember 10/8/2019 3:03 PM 10/8/2019 3:03 PM

72. The _________ of a webpage is the text that appears on the browser tab when the webpage is displayed in a browser. ANSWER: title POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating a Webpage Template QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.05 - Create a webpage template NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Webpage Template KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM 73. A(n) _________ is closed by adding two dashes, followed by a closing angle bracket. ANSWER: comment POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating a Webpage Template QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.06 - Insert comments in an HTML document NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Webpage Template KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM 74. _________ causes text lines to break at the right edge of a window and appear on a new line. Therefore, all the entered text is visible in the Notepad++ window. ANSWER: Word wrap POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating a Webpage Template QUESTION TYPE: Completion Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 37

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 2: Building a Webpage Template with HTML 5 HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.06 - Insert comments in an HTML document NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Webpage Template KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM 75. When one is creating a new webpage from a template, _________ provide insight on the type of information to include. ANSWER: comments POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating a Webpage Template QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.06 - Insert comments in an HTML document NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Webpage Template KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/13/2019 4:32 PM 76. _________ is the text or other item that is displayed in a browser. ANSWER: Content POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Creating a Webpage Template QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.07 - Add static content to a webpage template NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Webpage Template KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM 77. All character entities in a source code start with an ampersand (&) and end with a(n) _________. ANSWER: semicolon Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 38

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 2: Building a Webpage Template with HTML 5 ; POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Symbol Entities QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.08 - Insert symbol codes and other character entities NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Webpage Template KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM 78. Inserting a Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) _________ in the source code displays a reserved HTML character on the webpage. ANSWER: character entity POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Symbol Entities QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.08 - Insert symbol codes and other character entities NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Symbol Entities KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/13/2019 4:35 PM 79. The entity name for a copyright symbol is _________. ANSWER: &copy; POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Symbol Entities QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.08 - Insert symbol codes and other character entities NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Symbol Entities KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 39

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 2: Building a Webpage Template with HTML 5 DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

10/8/2019 3:03 PM 10/8/2019 3:03 PM

80. To insert two spaces between each page name, the _________ entity must be used. ANSWER: &nbsp; nonbreaking space character POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Symbol Entities QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.08 - Insert symbol codes and other character entities NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Symbol Entities KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM 81. Legal notices included in a website usually appear in the _________ of a webpage. ANSWER: footer POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Symbol Entities QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.08 - Insert symbol codes and other character entities NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Symbol Entities KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/13/2019 4:40 PM 82. A validator scans the _________ statement to see which version of HTML or XHTML is being used, and then checks to see if the code is valid for that version. ANSWER: DOCTYPE <!DOCTYPE> <!DOCTYPE html> POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Validating HTML Documents QUESTION TYPE: Completion Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 40

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 2: Building a Webpage Template with HTML 5 HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.11 - Validate an HTML template NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Validating HTML Documents KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM 83. If a document has any errors, _________ gives the developer a chance to identify and correct them before using the template to create a webpage. ANSWER: validating validation POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Validating HTML Documents QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.10 - Describe the benefits of validating web documents NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Validating HTML Documents KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/13/2019 4:44 PM 84. Using a _________ saves time in coding because the basic wireframe for a page is already established in it. ANSWER: template POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating a Home Page Using a Webpage Template QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.12 - Create a home page from an HTML template NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Home Page Using a Webpage Template KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM 85. Discuss the following Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) 5 structural elements. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 41

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 2: Building a Webpage Template with HTML 5 o o o o

header nav main footer

ANSWER:

• Header Element. The header element structurally defines the header area of a webpage. The header element starts with a <header> tag and ends with a </header> tag. Content placed between these tags appears on the webpage as part of the header element. Web designers often place a business name or logo within the header element. • Nav Element. The nav element structurally defines the navigation area of a webpage. The nav element starts with a <nav> tag and ends with a </nav> tag. The nav element usually includes links to other pages within the website. • Main Element. The main element structurally defines the main content area of a webpage. The main element starts with a <main> tag and ends with a </main> tag. Each page can have only one main element because its content should be unique to each page. At the time this book was written, all major browsers supported the main element, with the exception of Internet Explorer 11 and earlier versions. While Internet Explorer 11 will display content within the main element, it does not fully support the element. For example, Internet Explorer 11 might not correctly display formatting applied to the main element. • Footer Element. The footer element structurally defines the bottom, or footer area, of a webpage. The footer element starts with a <footer> tag and ends with a </footer> tag. Common content found within a webpage footer includes copyright information, contact information, and page links.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.02 - Describe and use HTML 5 semantic elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/12/2019 9:27 PM 86. Explain the functions of comments in Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) along with their general syntax. ANSWER: As a webpage template is created, comments about the Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) elements used to define the areas within the webpage must be included. Comments provide additional information about these areas and the type of information they include, which is especially helpful if work is stopped on a partially completed page and then returned to later. Add a comment before a tag using the following syntax:  Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 42

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 2: Building a Webpage Template with HTML 5 The comment syntax uses the angle brackets, similar to the HTML tags. The next character is an exclamation mark followed by two dashes (--). The comment text is added after the first set of dashes. For example, comments can be used to give instructions on how to use the template or to identify the author of the website. Comments can be closed by adding two dashes, followed by a closing angle bracket. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Creating a Webpage Template QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.06 - Insert comments in an HTML document NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Webpage Template KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/13/2019 4:48 PM 87. Discuss the purpose of using Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) character entities. Also, define the terms entity name and entity number with an example for each. ANSWER: When adding content to a webpage, often symbols need to be inserted, such as a copyright symbol, ©. Some symbols such as less than (<) or greater than (>) are reserved for other uses, such as signifying the start and end of Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) tags. Other symbols such as © or € are not included on standard keyboards. Rather than inserting reserved symbols directly or avoiding other special symbols, a symbol can be inserted on an HTML webpage by typing its HTML entity name or entity number. Inserting an HTML character entity in the code displays a reserved HTML character on the webpage. All character entities start with an ampersand (&) and end with a semicolon (;) to signal to the browser that everything in between is an entity representing a symbol. An entity name is an abbreviated name, and an entity number is a combination of the pound sign (#) and a numeric code. For example, the entity name for the copyright symbol is &copy; and the entity number for the copyright symbol is &#169;. Either an entity’s name or number can be used in an HTML code. An entity name is easier to remember than an entity number, though more browsers support entity numbers than names. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Symbol Entities QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.08 - Insert symbol codes and other character entities NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Symbol Entities KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 43

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 2: Building a Webpage Template with HTML 5 DATE MODIFIED:

12/13/2019 4:50 PM

Critical Thinking Questions Case 2-1 Steve is new to web development, and he has been asked to create a website with a minimum of 10 webpages for one of his high school events using Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) 5. 88. Steve wants to insert the copyright information in the webpages for the images used in the website. Where would you recommend him to place this information? a. <header>…</header> b. <nav>…</nav> c. <main>…</main> d. <footer>…</footer> ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. The footer element starts with a tag and ends with a tag. Common content found within a webpage footer includes copyright information, contact information, social media links, and policy links. b. The footer element starts with a tag and ends with a tag. Common content found within a webpage footer includes copyright information, contact information, social media links, and policy links. c. The footer element starts with a tag and ends with a tag. Common content found within a webpage footer includes copyright information, contact information, social media links, and policy links. d. The footer element starts with a tag and ends with a tag. Common content found within a webpage footer includes copyright information, contact information, social media links, and policy links.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: case 2-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.02 - Describe and use HTML 5 semantic elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/12/2019 9:34 PM Critical Thinking Questions Case 2-2 Gigano Mobiles, a smartphone manufacturer, is going to release its new flagship device next month. The Chief Executive Officer (CEO) of Gigano Mobiles asks Maeve, a website developer, to develop an exclusive website for the flagship device. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 44

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 2: Building a Webpage Template with HTML 5 89. Maeve has created the website, but she is not able to include more than one blank space at a time. Even if she hits the SPACE button twice, the browser displays it as a single space. Which of the following would you suggest Maeve to use to overcome this problem? a. &nbsp; b. &lt; c. &reg; d. &reg; ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. A commonly used character is a nonbreaking space, which forces browsers to display a blank space. b. A commonly used character is a nonbreaking space, which forces browsers to display a blank space. c. A commonly used character is a nonbreaking space, which forces browsers to display a blank space. d. A commonly used character is a nonbreaking space, which forces browsers to display a blank space.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: Using Symbol Entities QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: case 2-2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 02.08 - Insert symbol codes and other character entities NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Symbol Entities KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/13/2019 4:55 PM

Page 45

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links 1. To allow a user to navigate a website and move from one page to another, web designers must add ______ to a webpage. a. indices b. key values c. attributes d. hyperlinks ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. To allow a user to navigate a website and move from one page to another, web designers must add hyperlinks, or links, to a webpage. b. To allow a user to navigate a website and move from one page to another, web designers must add hyperlinks, or links, to a webpage. c. To allow a user to navigate a website and move from one page to another, web designers must add hyperlinks, or links, to a webpage. d. To allow a user to navigate a website and move from one page to another, web designers must add hyperlinks, or links, to a webpage.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Links to a Webpage QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.06 - Describe types of hyperlinks NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introduction KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/15/2019 1:52 PM 2. Using a _____ element directly below the header element and then inserting the navigation links in this element ensures that the links appear near the header, where visitors can access them easily. a. nav b. class c. div d. lnk ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. Using a nav element directly below the header element and then inserting the navigation links in the nav element ensures that the links appear near the header, where visitors can access them easily. b. Using a nav element directly below the header element and then inserting the navigation links in the nav element ensures that the links appear near the header, where visitors can access them easily. c. Using a nav element directly below the header element and then inserting the navigation links in the nav element ensures that the links appear near the header, where visitors can access them easily. d. Using a nav element directly below the header element and then inserting the navigation links in the nav element ensures that the links appear near the header, where visitors can access them easily. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Project — Add Images and Links to a Website QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.07 - Create relative links, absolute links, email links, and telephone links NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Project — Add Links and Images to a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/15/2019 1:54 PM 3. To create a link to a webpage, one inserts a code in a(n) _____ document that references the webpage by its name and location. a. CSS b. CLASS c. HTML d. DIV ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. To create a link to a webpage, one inserts a code in a HTML document that references the webpage by its name and location. b. To create a link to a webpage, one inserts a code in a HTML document that references the webpage by its name and location. c. To create a link to a webpage, one inserts a code in a HTML document that references the webpage by its name and location. d. To create a link to a webpage, one inserts a code in a HTML document that references the webpage by its name and location.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

c a. Text links, also called hypertext links, are the most common type of hyperlink. b. Text links, also called hypertext links, are the most common type of hyperlink. c. Text links, also called hypertext links, are the most common type of hyperlink. d. Text links, also called hypertext links, are the most common type of hyperlink.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links 6. Include the _____ attribute in a starting anchor tag to identify the webpage, email address, file, telephone number, or other content to access. a. dt b. ol c. img d. href ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. Include the href attribute (short for “hypertext reference”) in the starting anchor tag to identify the webpage, email address, file, telephone number, or other content to access. b. Include the href attribute (short for “hypertext reference”) in the starting anchor tag to identify the webpage, email address, file, telephone number, or other content to access. c. Include the href attribute (short for “hypertext reference”) in the starting anchor tag to identify the webpage, email address, file, telephone number, or other content to access. d. Include the href attribute (short for “hypertext reference”) in the starting anchor tag to identify the webpage, email address, file, telephone number, or other content to access.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Links to a Webpage QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.07 - Create relative links, absolute links, email links, and telephone links NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Links to a Webpage KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/15/2019 2:25 PM 7. Hyperlinks that link to other webpages within the same website are known as _____. a. relative links b. image links c. absolute links d. email links ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. Hyperlinks that link to other webpages within the same website are known as relative links. b. Hyperlinks that link to other webpages within the same website are known as relative links. c. Hyperlinks that link to other webpages within the same website are known as relative links. d. Hyperlinks that link to other webpages within the same website are known as relative links. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Links to a Webpage QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.07 - Create relative links, absolute links, email links, and telephone links NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Links to a Webpage KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/15/2019 2:27 PM 8. When assigning the attribute for an absolute link, begin with the _____ text. a. index.html b. mailto c. http:// d. home<a> ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. When assigning the attribute for the absolute link, begin with the http:// text, which references the HTTP protocol and indicates the webpage or other resource is located somewhere on the Internet. b. When assigning the attribute for the absolute link, begin with the http:// text, which references the HTTP protocol and indicates the webpage or other resource is located somewhere on the Internet. c. When assigning the attribute for the absolute link, begin with the http:// text, which references the HTTP protocol and indicates the webpage or other resource is located somewhere on the Internet. d. When assigning the attribute for the absolute link, begin with the http:// text, which references the HTTP protocol and indicates the webpage or other resource is located somewhere on the Internet.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links b. <img src="index.html"><a href="image.png"></a> c. <a href="index.html"><img src="image.png"></a> d. <img src="image.png"><a href="index.html"></a> ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. The "<a href="index.html"> <img src="image.png"> </a>" code means a browser should create a link to the index.html file for a website using the image file named image.png as the link object. b. The "<a href="index.html"> <img src="image.png"> </a>" code means a browser should create a link to the index.html file for a website using the image file named image.png as the link object. c. The "<a href="index.html"> <img src="image.png"> </a>" code means a browser should create a link to the index.html file for a website using the image file named image.png as the link object. d. The "<a href="index.html"> <img src="image.png"> </a>" code means a browser should create a link to the index.html file for a website using the image file named image.png as the link object.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Adding Links to a Webpage QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.03 - Add images to a website LO:03.07 - Create relative links, absolute links, email links, and telephone links NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Links to a Webpage KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/18/2019 3:45 PM 10. For email links, use anchor elements to link to an email address by including the href attribute followed by _____ and then the email address. a. sendto: b. mailto: c. copyto: d. referto: ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. Use anchor elements to link to an email address by including the href attribute followed by "mailto:" and then the email address. b. Use anchor elements to link to an email address by including the href attribute followed by "mailto:" and then the email address. c. Use anchor elements to link to an email address by including the href attribute followed by "mailto:" and then the email address. d. Use anchor elements to link to an email address by including the href attribute followed by "mailto:" and then the email address.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY:

1 Easy

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links REFERENCES: Adding Links to a Webpage QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.07 - Create relative links, absolute links, email links, and telephone links NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Links to a Webpage KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/15/2019 2:41 PM 11. _____ are hyperlinks that primarily work on smartphones. a. Telephone links b. Absolute links c. Image links d. Itinerant links ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. Hyperlinks that link to a telephone number are called telephone links and work primarily on smartphones. b. Hyperlinks that link to a telephone number are called telephone links and work primarily on smartphones. c. Hyperlinks that link to a telephone number are called telephone links and work primarily on smartphones. d. Hyperlinks that link to a telephone number are called telephone links and work primarily on smartphones.

Page 7

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links FEEDBACK:

a. Use an anchor element to link to a telephone number by including the href attribute, followed by "tel:+1number" where +1 is the international dialing prefix. b. Use an anchor element to link to a telephone number by including the href attribute, followed by "tel:+1number" where +1 is the international dialing prefix. c. Use an anchor element to link to a telephone number by including the href attribute, followed by "tel:+1number" where +1 is the international dialing prefix. d. Use an anchor element to link to a telephone number by including the href attribute, followed by "tel:+1number" where +1 is the international dialing prefix.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Links to a Webpage QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.07 - Create relative links, absolute links, email links, and telephone links NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Links to a Webpage KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/15/2019 2:45 PM 13. The _____ image file format is used to create images that do not display a background color but have a transparent, or clear, background instead. a. PNG b. GIF c. JPG d. SVG ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. To create images that do not display a background color but have a transparent, or clear, background instead, you use a file format that supports transparency, such as GIF. b. To create images that do not display a background color but have a transparent, or clear, background instead, you use a file format that supports transparency, such as GIF. c. To create images that do not display a background color but have a transparent, or clear, background instead, you use a file format that supports transparency, such as GIF. d. To create images that do not display a background color but have a transparent, or clear, background instead, you use a file format that supports transparency, such as GIF.

Page 8

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Adding Images to a Website Bloom's: Understand 10/8/2019 3:06 PM 12/15/2019 2:53 PM

14. To reduce an image’s file size, the GIF format uses a technique called _____ that maintains the file’s color information. a. lossless compression b. sizing c. image reformation d. enhancement ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. To compress an image, or reduce its file size, the GIF format uses a technique called lossless compression that maintains the file’s color information.

b. To compress an image, or reduce its file size, the GIF format uses a technique called lossless compression that maintains the file’s color information. c. To compress an image, or reduce its file size, the GIF format uses a technique called lossless compression that maintains the file’s color information. d. To compress an image, or reduce its file size, the GIF format uses a technique called lossless compression that maintains the file’s color information.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Images to a Website QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.03 - Add images to a website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Images to a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/15/2019 2:55 PM 15. _____ files are not suitable for high-quality pictures or photos because of the small color palette in them. a. JPEG b. GIF c. SVG d. PNG ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. Because of the small color palette in GIF files, they are suitable for icons and line drawings, but not for high-quality pictures or photos. b. Because of the small color palette in GIF files, they are suitable for icons and line drawings, but not for high-quality pictures or photos. c. Because of the small color palette in GIF files, they are suitable for icons and line Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 9

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links drawings, but not for high-quality pictures or photos. d. Because of the small color palette in GIF files, they are suitable for icons and line drawings, but not for high-quality pictures or photos.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Adding Images to a Website QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.03 - Add images to a website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Images to a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/15/2019 3:14 PM 16. The _____ image format is not ideal for photographic images, as its lossless compression is not as efficient as that of the JPG format. a. TIF b. GIF c. SVG d. PNG ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. The PNG image format is not ideal for photographic images, as its lossless compression is not as efficient as that of the JPG format. b. The PNG image format is not ideal for photographic images, as its lossless compression is not as efficient as that of the JPG format. c. The PNG image format is not ideal for photographic images, as its lossless compression is not as efficient as that of the JPG format. d. The PNG image format is not ideal for photographic images, as its lossless compression is not as efficient as that of the JPG format.

Page 10

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links a. JPG b. GIF c. SVG d. PNG ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

a a. The JPG format is a 24-bit image that supports 16.7 million colors, which is why it is used for digital photos and other pictures with a high level of detail or color complexity, such as shadows. b. The JPG format is a 24-bit image that supports 16.7 million colors, which is why it is used for digital photos and other pictures with a high level of detail or color complexity, such as shadows. c. The JPG format is a 24-bit image that supports 16.7 million colors, which is why it is used for digital photos and other pictures with a high level of detail or color complexity, such as shadows. d. The JPG format is a 24-bit image that supports 16.7 million colors, which is why it is used for digital photos and other pictures with a high level of detail or color complexity, such as shadows.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Images to a Website QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.03 - Add images to a website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Images to a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/15/2019 3:18 PM 18. JPG uses a(n) _____, made exclusively for digital photos, to reduce file size. a. lossy compression b. minimized compression c. adjustable compression d. reduction compression ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. JPG uses a lossy compression made exclusively for digital photos. b. JPG uses a lossy compression made exclusively for digital photos. c. JPG uses a lossy compression made exclusively for digital photos. d. JPG uses a lossy compression made exclusively for digital photos. POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE: HAS VARIABLES:

1 Easy Adding Images to a Website Multiple Choice False

Page 11

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.03 - Add images to a website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Images to a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/15/2019 3:19 PM 19. The _____ image format is used to create shapes such as circles, squares, rectangles, and lines. a. JPG b. GIF c. SVG d. PNG ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. The SVG image format is used to create shapes such as circles, squares, rectangles, and lines. b. The SVG image format is used to create shapes such as circles, squares, rectangles, and lines. c. The SVG image format is used to create shapes such as circles, squares, rectangles, and lines. d. The SVG image format is used to create shapes such as circles, squares, rectangles, and lines.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Images to a Website QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.03 - Add images to a website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Images to a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/15/2019 3:20 PM 20. A _____ is the smallest element of light or color on a device displaying images. a. src b. tag c. pixel d. mark ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. A pixel, a term coined from “picture element,” is the smallest element of light or color on a device displaying images. b. A pixel, a term coined from “picture element,” is the smallest element of light or color on a device displaying images. c. A pixel, a term coined from “picture element,” is the smallest element of light or Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 12

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links color on a device displaying images. d. A pixel, a term coined from “picture element,” is the smallest element of light or color on a device displaying images.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Images to a Website QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.03 - Add images to a website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Images to a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/15/2019 3:22 PM 21. When using images with large file sizes, a photo or graphics editor should be used to _____ the graphic for web use. a. diminish b. tag c. optimize d. replace ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. If you are using images with large file sizes, use a photo or graphics editor, such as Adobe Photoshop, to optimize the graphic for web use. b. If you are using images with large file sizes, use a photo or graphics editor, such as Adobe Photoshop, to optimize the graphic for web use. c. If you are using images with large file sizes, use a photo or graphics editor, such as Adobe Photoshop, to optimize the graphic for web use. d. If you are using images with large file sizes, use a photo or graphics editor, such as Adobe Photoshop, to optimize the graphic for web use.

Page 13

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links c. div tag d. class tag ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

a a. The image tag is an empty HTML element used to add an image to a webpage. b. The image tag is an empty HTML element used to add an image to a webpage. c. The image tag is an empty HTML element used to add an image to a webpage. d. The image tag is an empty HTML element used to add an image to a webpage.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Images to a Website QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.02 - Describe the image tag and its attributes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Images to a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/15/2019 3:28 PM 23. The _____ attribute is used to identify the image file being inserted in a webpage. a. src b. url c. loc d. load ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. The src attribute is used to identify the image file being inserted in a webpage. b. The src attribute is used to identify the image file being inserted in a webpage. c. The src attribute is used to identify the image file being inserted in a webpage. d. The src attribute is used to identify the image file being inserted in a webpage. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Images to a Website QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.02 - Describe the image tag and its attributes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Images to a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/15/2019 3:39 PM 24. An image’s ____ text should be a brief description of the purpose of the image. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 14

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links a. alternate b. descriptive c. standard d. link ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

a a. The alternate text briefly describes the image. b. The alternate text briefly describes the image. c. The alternate text briefly describes the image. d. The alternate text briefly describes the image.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Images to a Website QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.02 - Describe the image tag and its attributes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Images to a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/15/2019 3:41 PM 25. A webpage with a _____ does not change when the browser window is resized or the page is displayed at varying resolutions. a. fluid layout b. responsive layout c. receptive layout d. fixed layout ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. A webpage with a fixed layout does not change when the browser window is resized or the page is displayed at varying resolutions. b. A webpage with a fixed layout does not change when the browser window is resized or the page is displayed at varying resolutions. c. A webpage with a fixed layout does not change when the browser window is resized or the page is displayed at varying resolutions. d. A webpage with a fixed layout does not change when the browser window is resized or the page is displayed at varying resolutions.

Page 15

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Adding Images to a Website Bloom's: Remember 10/8/2019 3:06 PM 12/15/2019 3:42 PM

26. A _____ element is used to define an area or division in a webpage. a. desc b. div c. part d. nav ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. Use a div element to define an area or a division in a webpage. b. Use a div element to define an area or a division in a webpage. c. Use a div element to define an area or a division in a webpage. d. Use a div element to define an area or a division in a webpage. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring Div Elements QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.04 - Explain div elements and attributes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Div Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/15/2019 3:53 PM 27. The div attribute that identifies a unique area on a webpage and distinguishes it from other page divisions is the _____ attribute. a. class b. style c. id d. type ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. One div attribute is id, which identifies a unique area on a webpage and distinguishes it from other page divisions. b. One div attribute is id, which identifies a unique area on a webpage and distinguishes it from other page divisions. c. One div attribute is id, which identifies a unique area on a webpage and distinguishes it from other page divisions. d. One div attribute is id, which identifies a unique area on a webpage and distinguishes it from other page divisions.

POINTS:

Page 16

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring Div Elements QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.04 - Explain div elements and attributes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Div Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/16/2019 12:22 PM 28. _____ is a starting div tag with an id attribute that has a value of menu. a. <div “id”=menu> b. <html div id=”menu”> c. <div “menu”=id> d. <div id="menu"> ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. <div id="menu"> is a starting div tag with an id attribute that has a value of menu. b. <div id="menu"> is a starting div tag with an id attribute that has a value of menu. c. <div id="menu"> is a starting div tag with an id attribute that has a value of menu. d. <div id="menu"> is a starting div tag with an id attribute that has a value of menu. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring Div Elements QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.05 - Use a div element within a webpage NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Div Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/16/2019 12:25 PM 29. <div id="container"> is used to insert a div element with an id attribute value of container to a website template. The ending div tag here should be _____. a. </div> b. </div “id”=container> c. </div id="container"> d. </div ="id"> ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. <div id="container"> is used to insert a div element with an id attribute value of container to a website template. The ending div tag here should be </div>. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 17

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links b. <div id="container"> is used to insert a div element with an id attribute value of container to a website template. The ending div tag here should be </div>. c. <div id="container"> is used to insert a div element with an id attribute value of container to a website template. The ending div tag here should be </div>. d. <div id="container"> is used to insert a div element with an id attribute value of container to a website template. The ending div tag here should be </div>.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring Div Elements QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.05 - Use a div element within a webpage NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Div Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/16/2019 12:29 PM 30. To follow proper syntax with ______ elements, close each tag in the reverse order as you opened them. a. absolute b. stacked c. nested d. indexed ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. To follow proper syntax with nested elements, close each tag in the reverse order as you opened them. b. To follow proper syntax with nested elements, close each tag in the reverse order as you opened them. c. To follow proper syntax with nested elements, close each tag in the reverse order as you opened them. d. To follow proper syntax with nested elements, close each tag in the reverse order as you opened them.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Adding Links to a Webpage QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.07 - Create relative links, absolute links, email links, and telephone links NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Div Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/16/2019 12:42 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 18

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links 31. When the _____ element will contain all of the webpage elements, it is commonly referred to as the container or the wrapper because it contains or wraps around all of the webpage elements. a. href b. ref c. id d. div ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. Because the div element with its id attribute value defined as container will contain all of the webpage elements, it is commonly referred to as the container or the wrapper because it contains or wraps around all of the webpage elements. b. Because the div element with its id attribute value defined as container will contain all of the webpage elements, it is commonly referred to as the container or the wrapper because it contains or wraps around all of the webpage elements. c. Because the div element with its id attribute value defined as container will contain all of the webpage elements, it is commonly referred to as the container or the wrapper because it contains or wraps around all of the webpage elements. d. Because the div element with its id attribute value defined as container will contain all of the webpage elements, it is commonly referred to as the container or the wrapper because it contains or wraps around all of the webpage elements.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring Div Elements QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.04 - Explain div elements and attributes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Div Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/18/2019 4:32 PM 32. Using a nav element directly below the _____ element and then inserting the navigation links in the nav element ensures that the links appear near the header, where visitors can access them easily. a. header b. footer c. class name d. main ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. Using a nav element directly below the header element and then inserting the navigation links in the nav element ensures that the links appear near the header, where visitors can access them easily. b. Using a nav element directly below the header element and then inserting the navigation links in the nav element ensures that the links appear near the header, where visitors can access them easily. c. Using a nav element directly below the header element and then inserting the navigation links in the nav element ensures that the links appear near the header, Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 19

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links where visitors can access them easily. d. Using a nav element directly below the header element and then inserting the navigation links in the nav element ensures that the links appear near the header, where visitors can access them easily.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Project — Add Images and Links to a Website QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.07 - Create relative links, absolute links, email links, and telephone links NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Headings and Lists KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/16/2019 12:57 PM 33. The _____ tags must be at the start and end of heading level 1. a. <h1> and <h2> b. <h1> and </h2> c. <h1> and </h1> d. <h0> and </h1> ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. The < h1 > and < / h1 > tags must be at the start and end of heading level 1. b. The < h1 > and < / h1 > tags must be at the start and end of heading level 1. c. The < h1 > and < / h1 > tags must be at the start and end of heading level 1. d. The < h1 > and < / h1 > tags must be at the start and end of heading level 1. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Lists QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.08 - Describe the types of lists in an HTML document NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Headings and Lists KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/18/2019 4:39 PM 34. A(n) ______ element begins with an <a> tag and ends with an </a> tag. a. header b. absolute c. relative Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 20

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links d. anchor ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

d a. An anchor element begins with an < a > tag and ends with an < /a > tag. b. An anchor element begins with an < a > tag and ends with an < /a > tag. c. An anchor element begins with an < a > tag and ends with an < /a > tag. d. An anchor element begins with an < a > tag and ends with an < /a > tag.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Links to a Webpage QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.07 - Create relative links, absolute links, email links, and telephone links NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Headings and Lists KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/18/2019 4:43 PM 35. An unordered list displays a small graphic called a(n) _____ before each item of information. a. int b. bullet c. tag d. head ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. An unordered list, also called a bulleted list, displays a small graphic called a bullet before each item of information. b. An unordered list, also called a bulleted list, displays a small graphic called a bullet before each item of information. c. An unordered list, also called a bulleted list, displays a small graphic called a bullet before each item of information. d. An unordered list, also called a bulleted list, displays a small graphic called a bullet before each item of information.

Page 21

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links 36. The _____ tags must be at the start and end of an unordered list. a. <uoli> and </uoli> b. <ol> and </ol> c. <ul> and </ul> d. <dl> and </dl> ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. To mark an unordered list, insert the < ul > tag at the start of the list and the < /ul > tag at the end of the list. b. To mark an unordered list, insert the < ul > tag at the start of the list and the < /ul > tag at the end of the list. c. To mark an unordered list, insert the < ul > tag at the start of the list and the < /ul > tag at the end of the list. d. To mark an unordered list, insert the < ul > tag at the start of the list and the < /ul > tag at the end of the list.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Lists QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.09 - Create an unordered list and a description list NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Headings and Lists KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/16/2019 1:29 PM 37. The _____ tags must be at the start and end of an ordered list. a. <ol> and </ol> b. <ul> and </ul> c. <orli> and </orli> d. <dl> and </dl> ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. To mark an ordered list, insert the < ol > and < /ol > tags at the start and end of the list.

b. To mark an ordered list, insert the < ol > and < /ol > tags at the start and end of the list. c. To mark an ordered list, insert the < ol > and < /ol > tags at the start and end of the list. d. To mark an ordered list, insert the < ol > and < /ol > tags at the start and end of the list.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES:

1 Easy Adding Lists

Page 22

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.09 - Create an unordered list and a description list NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Headings and Lists KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/16/2019 1:40 PM 38. A description list should be defined between a pair of _____ tags. a. <dl> and </dl> b. <dd> and </dd> c. <dt> and </dt> d. <ld> and </ld> ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. Define a description list between a pair of < dl > and < /dl > tags. b. Define a description list between a pair of < dl > and < /dl > tags. c. Define a description list between a pair of < dl > and < /dl > tags. d. Define a description list between a pair of < dl > and < /dl > tags. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Lists QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.09 - Create an unordered list and a description list NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Headings and Lists KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/16/2019 1:41 PM 39. For a description list, each term should be marked between a pair of _____ tags. a. <dl> and </dl> b. <dd> and </dd> c. <dt> and </dt> d. <ld> and </ld> ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. Mark each term within a pair of < dt > and < /dt > tags. b. Mark each term within a pair of < dt > and < /dt > tags. c. Mark each term within a pair of < dt > and < /dt > tags. d. Mark each term within a pair of < dt > and < /dt > tags. POINTS:

Page 23

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Lists QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.09 - Create an unordered list and a description list NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Headings and Lists KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/18/2019 4:51 PM 40. A website template already contains the basic Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) code for the website. Using the template saves time _____. a. debugging b. analyzing c. coding d. testing ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. Using the template saves time coding. b. Using the template saves time coding. c. Using the template saves time coding. d. Using the template saves time coding. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Lists QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.09 - Create an unordered list and a description list NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Headings and Lists KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/16/2019 1:45 PM 41. _____ can serve as hyperlinks. a. Text b. Graphics c. Animations d. Portals ANSWER: a, b, c FEEDBACK: a. Many types of webpage content, including text, graphics, and animations, can serve as hyperlinks. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 24

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links b. Many types of webpage content, including text, graphics, and animations, can serve as hyperlinks. c. Many types of webpage content, including text, graphics, and animations, can serve as hyperlinks. d. Many types of webpage content, including text, graphics, and animations, can serve as hyperlinks.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Introduction QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Response HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.06 - Describe types of hyperlinks NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introduction KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/16/2019 1:47 PM 42. When incorporating images into a website, web designers need to consider the _____. a. file format b. file size c. website popularity d. image dimensions ANSWER: a, b, d FEEDBACK: a. When incorporating images into a website, web designers need to consider the file format, image dimensions, and file size. b. When incorporating images into a website, web designers need to consider the file format, image dimensions, and file size. c. When incorporating images into a website, web designers need to consider the file format, image dimensions, and file size. d. When incorporating images into a website, web designers need to consider the file format, image dimensions, and file size.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Images to a Website QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Response HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.03 - Add images to a website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Images to a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/16/2019 1:48 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 25

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links 43. The _____ image file format(s) supports more than a million colors. a. GIF b. JPG c. PNG d. SVG ANSWER: b, c FEEDBACK: a. The JPG and PNG image file formats supports more than a million colors. b. The JPG and PNG image file formats supports more than a million colors. c. The JPG and PNG image file formats supports more than a million colors. d. The JPG and PNG image file formats supports more than a million colors. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Images to a Website QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Response HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.03 - Add images to a website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Images to a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/18/2019 4:56 PM 44. An unordered list can use _____. a. alphabets b. discs c. squares d. numbers ANSWER: b, c FEEDBACK: a. An unordered list can use one of three bullet options: disc, square, or circle. b. An unordered list can use one of three bullet options: disc, square, or circle. c. An unordered list can use one of three bullet options: disc, square, or circle. d. An unordered list can use one of three bullet options: disc, square, or circle. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Lists QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Response HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.09 - Create an unordered list and a description list NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Headings and Lists KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 26

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links DATE MODIFIED:

12/16/2019 1:52 PM

45. An ordered list can use _____. a. bullets b. Arabic numbers c. Roman numerals d. letters ANSWER: b, c, d FEEDBACK: a. An ordered list can use numbers, letters, or Roman numerals. The default option is to use Arabic numbers, such as 1, 2, and 3. b. An ordered list can use numbers, letters, or Roman numerals. The default option is to use Arabic numbers, such as 1, 2, and 3. c. An ordered list can use numbers, letters, or Roman numerals. The default option is to use Arabic numbers, such as 1, 2, and 3. d. An ordered list can use numbers, letters, or Roman numerals. The default option is to use Arabic numbers, such as 1, 2, and 3.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Lists QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Response HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.09 - Create an unordered list and a description list NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Headings and Lists KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/16/2019 1:53 PM 46. When text is coded as a hyperlink, it usually appears as highlighted text in a color different from the rest of the webpage text. ANSWER: False - underlined FEEDBACK: Correct When you code text as a hyperlink, it usually appears as underlined text in a color different from the rest of the webpage text. Incorrect When you code text as a hyperlink, it usually appears as underlined text in a color different from the rest of the webpage text.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Links to a Webpage QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.07 - Create relative links, absolute links, email links, and telephone links NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Links to a Webpage Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 27

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Bloom's: Remember 10/8/2019 3:06 PM 12/16/2019 1:54 PM

47. The PNG file format was designed to replace the GIF file format for web graphics. ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct The PNG file format was designed to replace the GIF file format for web graphics. Incorrect The PNG file format was designed to replace the GIF file format for web graphics.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Adding Images to a Website QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.03 - Add images to a website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Images to a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/16/2019 1:55 PM 48. When specifying values for the height and width attributes of an image, the relative dimensions of the image must be used. ANSWER: False - actual FEEDBACK: Correct When specifying values for the height and width attributes of an image, use the actual dimensions of the image. Incorrect When specifying values for the height and width attributes of an image, use the actual dimensions of the image.

False - unique

Page 28

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links FEEDBACK:

Correct

One div attribute is id, which identifies a unique area on a webpage and distinguishes it from other page divisions. Incorrect One div attribute is id, which identifies a unique area on a webpage and distinguishes it from other page divisions.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring Div Elements QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.04 - Explain div elements and attributes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Div Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/16/2019 1:58 PM 50. You should always use the alt attribute in an image tag to specify alternate text in case the image cannot be displayed in a browser. ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct You should always use the alt attribute in an image tag to specify alternate text in case the image cannot be displayed in a browser. Incorrect You should always use the alt attribute in an image tag to specify alternate text in case the image cannot be displayed in a browser.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Images to a Website QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.02 - Describe the image tag and its attributes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Headings and Lists KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/18/2019 1:31 PM 51. Business logos are the images that promote a company’s presence and brand. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct Business logos are the images that promote a company’s presence and brand. Incorrect Business logos are the images that promote a company’s presence and brand. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 29

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Introduction QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.01 - Describe image file formats NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introduction KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/16/2019 10:27 PM 52. On the web, links are the ancillary way to navigate among webpages and websites. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct On the web, links are the primary way to navigate among webpages and websites. Incorrect On the web, links are the primary way to navigate among webpages and websites.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Links to a Webpage QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.07 - Create relative links, absolute links, email links, and telephone links NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Links to a Webpage KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/16/2019 10:31 PM 53. By default, the font color of link text changes to red when a visitor taps or clicks a link. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct By default, the font color of link text changes to purple when a visitor taps or clicks the link. Incorrect By default, the font color of link text changes to purple when a visitor taps or clicks the link.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE: HAS VARIABLES:

1 Easy Adding Links to a Webpage True / False False

Page 30

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.07 - Create relative links, absolute links, email links, and telephone links NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Links to a Webpage KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/16/2019 10:32 PM 54. To configure an image with a link, the starting anchor tag should be placed after the image element and the ending anchor tag should be placed before the image element. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct To configure an image with a link, place the starting anchor tag before the image element and place the ending anchor tag after the image element. Incorrect To configure an image with a link, place the starting anchor tag before the image element and place the ending anchor tag after the image element.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Links to a Webpage QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.07 - Create relative links, absolute links, email links, and telephone links NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Links to a Webpage KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/16/2019 10:35 PM 55. Images help break up text and contribute to the design and aesthetics of a website. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct Images help break up text and contribute to the design and aesthetics of a website. Incorrect Images help break up text and contribute to the design and aesthetics of a website.

Page 31

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

10/8/2019 3:06 PM 12/16/2019 10:36 PM

56. GIF files can support over 16 million colors. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct GIF files are 8-bit images that can display up to 256 colors, making the file sizes relatively small. Incorrect GIF files are 8-bit images that can display up to 256 colors, making the file sizes relatively small.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Images to a Website QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.03 - Add images to a website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Images to a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/16/2019 10:37 PM 57. The JPEG image format is the oldest web file format and supports transparency and frame animation. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct GIF is the oldest web file format and supports transparency and frame animation. Incorrect GIF is the oldest web file format and supports transparency and frame animation.

Page 32

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links b. False ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

True Correct PNG supports transparency, but not animation. Incorrect PNG supports transparency, but not animation.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Images to a Website QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.03 - Add images to a website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Images to a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/16/2019 10:40 PM 59. To reduce file size, a lossy compression discards some of the color information in the image, which reduces its original quality. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct To reduce file size, a lossy compression discards some of the color information in the image, which reduces its original quality. Incorrect To reduce file size, a lossy compression discards some of the color information in the image, which reduces its original quality.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Images to a Website QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.03 - Add images to a website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Images to a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/18/2019 5:21 PM 60. The SVG image file format is used for shapes, lines, text, and gradients. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct The SVG image file format is used for shapes, lines, text, and gradients. Incorrect The SVG image file format is used for shapes, lines, text, and gradients. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 33

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Images to a Website QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.03 - Add images to a website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Images to a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/16/2019 10:42 PM 61. The JPG image file format is used for images that are not digital photos. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct JPG is the standard file format for a digital photo, such as one taken with a digital camera. Incorrect JPG is the standard file format for a digital photo, such as one taken with a digital camera.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Images to a Website QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.03 - Add images to a website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Images to a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/16/2019 10:43 PM 62. The PNG file format was designed to replace the GIF file format for web graphics. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct The PNG file format was designed to replace the GIF file format for web graphics. Incorrect The PNG file format was designed to replace the GIF file format for web graphics.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE: HAS VARIABLES:

1 Moderate Adding Images to a Website True / False False

Page 34

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.03 - Add images to a website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Images to a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/16/2019 10:46 PM 63. The lower the screen resolution, the sharper the text and images appear on a monitor. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct The higher the screen resolution, the sharper text and images appear. Incorrect The higher the screen resolution, the sharper text and images appear.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Images to a Website QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.03 - Add images to a website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Images to a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/16/2019 10:48 PM 64. While optimizing an image, too much compression can degrade the quality of the image. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct While optimizing an image, too much compression can degrade the quality of the image. Incorrect While optimizing an image, too much compression can degrade the quality of the image.

Page 35

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links DATE MODIFIED:

12/16/2019 10:49 PM

65. The image tag, <img>, is an empty tag that does not have a beginning tag. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct As an empty element, the image tag does not have an ending tag. Incorrect As an empty element, the image tag does not have an ending tag.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Images to a Website QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.02 - Describe the image tag and its attributes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Images to a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/16/2019 10:50 PM 66. The alt attribute provides information about the purpose of an image for assistive technology such as screen readers. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct The alt attribute provides information about the purpose of an image for assistive technology such as screen readers. Incorrect The alt attribute provides information about the purpose of an image for assistive technology such as screen readers.

Page 36

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

False Correct Optimizing an image reduces its file size and load time. Incorrect Optimizing an image reduces its file size and load time.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Images to a Website QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.03 - Add images to a website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Images to a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/18/2019 5:26 PM 68. The div element can be added only outside the main element of a webpage. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct You can use div elements within the main element to further divide the primary content area into separate sections, such as the introduction, a long quotation, a list of “See Also” links, and a conclusion. Incorrect You can use div elements within the main element to further divide the primary content area into separate sections, such as the introduction, a long quotation, a list of “See Also” links, and a conclusion.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring Div Elements QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.04 - Explain div elements and attributes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Div Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/16/2019 10:59 PM 69. Prior to HTML 5, div elements defined specific areas on a webpage, such as the header, navigation area, main content area, and footer. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct Prior to HTML 5, div elements defined specific areas on a webpage, such as the Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 37

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links header, navigation area, main content area, and footer. Incorrect Prior to HTML 5, div elements defined specific areas on a webpage, such as the header, navigation area, main content area, and footer.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring Div Elements QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.04 - Explain div elements and attributes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Div Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/16/2019 11:05 PM 70. An ordered list is also known as a bulleted list. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct An ordered list, also called a numbered list, displays information in a series using numbers or letters. Incorrect An ordered list, also called a numbered list, displays information in a series using numbers or letters.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Lists QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.08 - Describe the types of lists in an HTML document NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Headings and Lists KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/16/2019 11:06 PM 71. In an unordered list, the bulleted items can appear in any sequence. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct In an unordered list, the bulleted items can appear in any sequence. Incorrect In an unordered list, the bulleted items can appear in any sequence.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY:

1 Easy

Page 38

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links REFERENCES: Adding Lists QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.09 - Create an unordered list and a description list NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Headings and Lists KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/17/2019 1:10 PM 72. An unordered list can use one of four different list options: disc, square, circle, or triangle. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct An unordered list, also called a bulleted list, displays a small graphic called a bullet before each item of information. Incorrect An unordered list, also called a bulleted list, displays a small graphic called a bullet before each item of information.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Lists QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.09 - Create an unordered list and a description list NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Headings and Lists KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/17/2019 1:16 PM 73. If one uses the <ul> start tag without specifying any type, the browser displays the default type, a square. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct If no type is identified, the browser displays the default type, a disc. Incorrect If no type is identified, the browser displays the default type, a disc.

Page 39

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Adding Headings and Lists Bloom's: Remember 10/8/2019 3:06 PM 12/17/2019 1:27 PM

74. Definition lists are useful to create a glossary-like list of terms. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct A description list contains terms and descriptions. Use a description list to create a glossary or to list questions and answers, for example. Incorrect A description list contains terms and descriptions. Use a description list to create a glossary or to list questions and answers, for example.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Lists QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.09 - Create an unordered list and a description list NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Headings and Lists KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/17/2019 1:31 PM 75. In a description list, for each item, the dt element must come before the dd element. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct In a description list, for each item, the dt element must come before the dd element. Incorrect In a description list, for each item, the dt element must come before the dd element.

Page 40

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links DATE MODIFIED:

12/17/2019 1:33 PM

76. A(n) _________ is text, an image, or other webpage content that visitors tap or click to instruct the browser to go to a location in a file or to request a file from a server. ANSWER: link hyperlink POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Links to a Webpage QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.07 - Create relative links, absolute links, email links, and telephone links NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Links to a Webpage KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/17/2019 1:35 PM 77. The default hyperlink color is _________. ANSWER: blue POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Links to a Webpage QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.07 - Create relative links, absolute links, email links, and telephone links NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Links to a Webpage KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/17/2019 1:35 PM 78. _________ elements can be used to link to an email address by including the href attribute followed by "mailto:" and then the email address. ANSWER: <a> anchor POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Links to a Webpage QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 41

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.07 - Create relative links, absolute links, email links, and telephone links NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Links to a Webpage KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM 79. To create a(n) _________ link, one must use an anchor tag with an href attribute that designates the file name of the webpage or the path and the file name of the webpage. ANSWER: relative POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Links to a Webpage QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.07 - Create relative links, absolute links, email links, and telephone links NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Links to a Webpage KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/23/2020 1:28 PM 80. Hyperlinks that link to other webpages outside of the parent website are known as _________ links. ANSWER: absolute POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Links to a Webpage QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.07 - Create relative links, absolute links, email links, and telephone links NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Links to a Webpage KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/17/2019 1:38 PM 81. When users tap or click an email link, their default email program runs and opens a new message with the designated email address in the _________ text box. ANSWER: To POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 42

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Links to a Webpage QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.07 - Create relative links, absolute links, email links, and telephone links NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Links to a Webpage KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM 82. The code <a href=mailto:newtechnology@education.net>newtechnology@education.net</a> means the browser should create an email message addressed to _________ when someone taps or clicks the email link text. ANSWER: newtechnology@education.net POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Adding Links to a Webpage QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.07 - Create relative links, absolute links, email links, and telephone links NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Links to a Webpage KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/17/2019 1:44 PM 83. _________ is the oldest web file format that is suitable for icons and line drawings, but not for high-quality pictures or photos. ANSWER: Graphics Interchange Format GIF POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Images to a Website QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.03 - Add images to a website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Images to a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 43

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links DATE MODIFIED:

10/8/2019 3:06 PM

84. The _________ format is a 24-bit image that supports 16.7 million colors, which is why it is used for digital photos and other pictures with a high level of detail or color complexity, such as shadows. ANSWER: JPEG JPG

Joint Photographic Experts Group POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Images to a Website QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.03 - Add images to a website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Images to a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM 85. _________ is a royalty-free graphic format that uses markup language to create two-dimensional graphics, images, and animations. ANSWER: SVG Scalable Vector Graphics POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Images to a Website QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.03 - Add images to a website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Images to a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM 86. While adjusting the width and the height of an image in a graphics editor, one should maintain the _________ to avoid distortion of the image. ANSWER: aspect ratio POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Adding Images to a Website QUESTION TYPE: Completion Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 44

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.02 - Describe the image tag and its attributes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Images to a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM 87. _________ images adjust their size for optimal display on a desktop, tablet, and mobile device. ANSWER: Fluid Flexible Responsive POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Images to a Website QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.03 - Add images to a website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Images to a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM 88. Web designers use _________ elements to structure parts of a webpage to which a Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) 5 element does not apply. ANSWER: div POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring Div Elements QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.04 - Explain div elements and attributes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Div Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/18/2019 12:45 PM 89. Although a hyperlinked image looks the same as other images on the page, some websites display a border Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 45

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links around an image to indicate it is a(n) ________. ANSWER: link hyperlink POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Links to a Webpage QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.06 - Describe types of hyperlinks NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Div Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/18/2019 12:49 PM 90. An image tag with a class attribute that has a value of product should be defined as _________. ANSWER: <img class="product"> POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Adding Images to a Website QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.02 - Describe the image tag and its attributes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Div Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/18/2019 12:51 PM 91. In a(n) ________ layout, every element has a predefined height and width. ANSWER: fixed POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Adding Images to a Website QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.03 - Add images to a website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Headings and Lists Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 46

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Bloom's: Understand 10/8/2019 3:06 PM 12/18/2019 12:55 PM

92. _________ structure text into an itemized format. ANSWER: Lists POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Lists QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.08 - Describe the types of lists in an HTML document NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Headings and Lists KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/18/2019 12:56 PM 93. Numbered lists are also called _________ lists. ANSWER: ordered POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Lists QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.08 - Describe the types of lists in an HTML document NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Headings and Lists KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/18/2019 12:57 PM 94. The _________ tags are used to define a list item in an ordered or unordered list. ANSWER: <li> and </li> POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Lists QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.09 - Create an unordered list and a description list Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 47

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Adding Headings and Lists Bloom's: Remember 10/8/2019 3:06 PM 12/18/2019 12:58 PM

95. A(n) _________ list includes terms and definitions. ANSWER: description POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Lists QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.08 - Describe the types of lists in an HTML document NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Headings and Lists KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/18/2019 12:59 PM Identify the letters of the choices that best match the phrases or definitions. a. Relative link b. Email links c. Pixels d. GIF e. Images f. JPEG g. Link h. alt i. PNG j. p DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Images to a Website Adding Links to a Webpage Introduction Adding Lists QUESTION TYPE: Matching HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.01 - Describe image file formats LO:03.03 - Add images to a website LO:03.06 - Describe types of hyperlinks LO:03.07 - Create relative links, absolute links, email links, and telephone links Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 48

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links LO:03.08 - Describe the types of lists in an HTML document NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Headings and Lists Adding Images to a Website Adding Links to a Webpage Introduction KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 8:45 AM 96. Adding these to a website enhances visual appeal and provides visitors with additional information about a product or service. ANSWER: e POINTS: 1 97. It can link to other webpages within the same website. ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 98. It can reference webpages and other content, including graphics, sound, video, and program files; email addresses; and parts of the same webpage. ANSWER: g POINTS: 1 99. It was designed to replace the GIF file format for web graphics. ANSWER: i POINTS: 1 100. These are hyperlinks that link to an email address. ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 101. It uses a lossless compression technique to reduce the size of image files. ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 102. This format is a 24-bit image that supports 16.7 million colors. ANSWER: f POINTS: 1 103. These are arranged in rows and columns to compose an image, but are usually so small that one cannot see them, making the image appear smooth and fluid. ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 104. This attribute is used in an image tag to specify different text in case the image cannot be displayed in a browser. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 49

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links ANSWER: h POINTS: 1 105. This element groups text into a paragraph. ANSWER: j POINTS: 1 106. Discuss the pros and cons of the various image file formats. Also, give examples of how these formats are used. ANSWER: GIF stands for Graphics Interchange Format and is pronounced “jiff.” GIF is the oldest web file format and supports transparency and frame animation. Pros: Small file size; supports transparency and animation Cons: Limited to 256 colors Used for: Line drawings PNG stands for Portable Network Graphics and is pronounced as “ping.” The PNG file format was designed to replace the GIF file format for web graphics. Pros: Small file size; supports transparency and more than a million colors Cons: Does not support animation Used for: Images that are not digital photos JPG or JPEG stands for Joint Photographic Experts Group and is pronounced “jay-peg.” This is the standard file format for a digital photo, such as one taken with a digital camera. Pros: Supports more than a million colors Cons: Larger file size Used for: Digital photos SVG stands for Scalable Vector Graphics, a format that uses markup language to create twodimensional graphics, images, and animations. Pros: Flexible; scalable; no files needed because graphics are created with code Cons: Not supported by older browsers and not all modern browsers support it 100 percent Used for: Shapes, lines, text, and gradients POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Adding Images to a Website QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.01 - Describe image file formats NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Images to a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 8:46 AM 107. Explain the different types of lists. ANSWER: Lists structure text into an itemized format. An unordered list, also called a bulleted list, displays a small graphic called a bullet before Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 50

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links each item of information. In an unordered list, the bulleted items can appear in any sequence. To mark an unordered list, insert the <ul> tag at the start of the list and the </ul> tag at the end of the list. Mark each item in an unordered list with a set of list item tags (<li> and </li>). The following code creates a bulleted list of two items: <ul> <li>First item</li> <li>Second item</li> </ul> An ordered list, also called a numbered list, displays information in a series using numbers or letters. An ordered list works well to organize items where sequence matters, such as in a series of steps. To mark an ordered list, insert the <ol> and </ol> tags at the start and end of the list. As with unordered lists, you mark each item in an ordered list with a set of <li> and </li> tags. The following code creates a numbered list of two items: <ol> <li>First item</li> <li>Second item</li> </ol> Unordered and ordered lists have optional bullet and number types. An unordered list can use one of three bullet options: disc, square, or circle. If no type is identified, the browser displays the default type, a disc. You can also specify an image to use as a bullet. An ordered list can use numbers, letters, or Roman numerals. The default option is to use Arabic numbers, such as 1, 2, and 3. A description list contains terms and descriptions. Use a description list to create a glossary or to list questions and answers, for example. A description list includes terms and descriptions or definitions. Define a description list between a pair of <dl> and </dl> tags. Mark each term within a pair of <dt> and </dt> tags. Mark each description or definition between a pair of <dd> and </dd> tags. For each item, the dt element must come before the dd element. More than one dd element can follow a dt element. The following code creates a description list of two terms and definitions: <dl> <dt>First term</dt> <dd>First definition</dd> <dt>Second term</dt> <dd>Second definition – part 1</dd> <dd>Second definition – part 2</dd> </dl> POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Adding Lists QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.08 - Describe the types of lists in an HTML document NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Headings and Lists KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/18/2019 1:15 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 51

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links Critical Thinking Questions Case 3-1 Steve is new to image file formats, particularly for the web, and he is unsure about which format he should use for different kinds of image files. 108. Steve has recently purchased his first digital camera. Since he has started capturing and using digital photos instead of non-digital ones, which image file format will be best suited for his use? a. GIF b. PNG c. JPEG d. SVG ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. JPG or JPEG is the standard file format for a digital photo, such as one taken with a digital camera. b. JPG or JPEG is the standard file format for a digital photo, such as one taken with a digital camera. c. JPG or JPEG is the standard file format for a digital photo, such as one taken with a digital camera. d. JPG or JPEG is the standard file format for a digital photo, such as one taken with a digital camera.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: Adding Images to a Website QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: case 3-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.03 - Add images to a website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Images to a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/18/2019 1:17 PM 109. While dealing with high-resolution digital photos, Steve realizes that all of them have a very large file size. In order to reduce the file size, Steve must use a photo editor to _____ the image files. a. tag b. optimize c. replace d. restructure ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. Optimizing an image reduces its file size and load time. To optimize an image file for web use, you can crop the image, modify its dimensions to make it smaller, adjust the quality, or convert the image file format. b. Optimizing an image reduces its file size and load time. To optimize an image file for web use, you can crop the image, modify its dimensions to make it smaller, Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 52

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links adjust the quality, or convert the image file format. c. Optimizing an image reduces its file size and load time. To optimize an image file for web use, you can crop the image, modify its dimensions to make it smaller, adjust the quality, or convert the image file format. d. Optimizing an image reduces its file size and load time. To optimize an image file for web use, you can crop the image, modify its dimensions to make it smaller, adjust the quality, or convert the image file format.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: Adding Images to a Website QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: case 3-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.03 - Add images to a website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Images to a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Apply DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 8:50 AM Critical Thinking Questions Case 3-2 Javier develops sophisticated fashion websites. He has been asked by the owner of a leading fashion brand to create web content that boosts the overall look of the site and attracts more customers. 110. Javier wants to enhance the look of the website by adding animation. What file format uses markup language and supports two-dimensional graphics, images, and animations? a. SVG b. JPEG c. PNG d. GIF ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. SVG stands for Scalable Vector Graphics, a format that uses markup language to create two-dimensional graphics, images, and animations. b. SVG stands for Scalable Vector Graphics, a format that uses markup language to create two-dimensional graphics, images, and animations. c. SVG stands for Scalable Vector Graphics, a format that uses markup language to create two-dimensional graphics, images, and animations. d. SVG stands for Scalable Vector Graphics, a format that uses markup language to create two-dimensional graphics, images, and animations.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE: HAS VARIABLES:

1 Challenging Adding Images to a Website Multiple Choice False

Page 53

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 3: Enhancing a Website with Images and Links PREFACE NAME: case 3-2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.01 - Describe image file formats NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Div Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 8:53 AM 111. The fashion website for which Javier is creating content does not require a specific sequence to be followed when the fashion items are displayed to the viewers. In such a scenario, Javier can use _____ lists to structure the items that should be displayed on the website. a. ordered b. methodical c. numbered d. bulleted ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. In an unordered list, the bulleted items can appear in any sequence. b. In an unordered list, the bulleted items can appear in any sequence. c. In an unordered list, the bulleted items can appear in any sequence. d. In an unordered list, the bulleted items can appear in any sequence. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: Adding Lists QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:03.08 - Describe the types of lists in an HTML document NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Headings and Lists KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/18/2019 1:26 PM

Page 54

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS 1. _____ is a language used to describe the formatting of a document written in a markup language such as Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) 5. a. Designing Style Sheets b. Cascading Style Sheets c. Segregation Style Sheets d. Web paging Style sheets ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) is a language you use to describe the formatting of a document written in a markup language such as HTML 5. b. Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) is a language you use to describe the formatting of a document written in a markup language such as HTML 5. c. Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) is a language you use to describe the formatting of a document written in a markup language such as HTML 5. d. Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) is a language you use to describe the formatting of a document written in a markup language such as HTML 5.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Introduction QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.01 - Explain the importance of separating design from content NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introduction KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 12:11 PM 2. A _____ rule is a rule that defines the appearance of an element on a webpage. a. cascade b. syntax c. semantic d. style ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. A style rule, or rule-set, is a rule that defines the appearance of an element on a webpage.

b. A style rule, or rule-set, is a rule that defines the appearance of an element on a webpage. c. A style rule, or rule-set, is a rule that defines the appearance of an element on a webpage. d. A style rule, or rule-set, is a rule that defines the appearance of an element on a webpage.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES:

1 Easy Using Cascading Style Sheets

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.02 - Describe Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Cascading Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 12:14 PM 3. With a(n) _____ style, one adds a style to the start tag for an element. a. embedded b. inline c. semantic d. external ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. With an inline style, you add a style to the start tag for an element, such as a heading or paragraph, using the style attribute. b. With an inline style, you add a style to the start tag for an element, such as a heading or paragraph, using the style attribute. c. With an inline style, you add a style to the start tag for an element, such as a heading or paragraph, using the style attribute. d. With an inline style, you add a style to the start tag for an element, such as a heading or paragraph, using the style attribute.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS c. An inline style takes precedence over other styles defined in a style sheet. d. An inline style takes precedence over other styles defined in a style sheet. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Cascading Style Sheets QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.03 - Define inline, embedded, and external styles and their order of precedence NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Cascading Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 12:21 PM 5. In <h1 style="font-color: navy">Special Note</h1>, the _____ is everything between the quotation marks. a. tagging note b. embedded style tag c. style rule d. marked-up text ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. In < h1 style="font-color: navy"> Special Note </h1 >, the style rule is everything between the quotation marks. b. In < h1 style="font-color: navy"> Special Note </h1 >, the style rule is everything between the quotation marks. c. In < h1 style="font-color: navy"> Special Note </h1 >, the style rule is everything between the quotation marks. d. In < h1 style="font-color: navy"> Special Note </h1 >, the style rule is everything between the quotation marks.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS c. inline d. insync ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

a a. An embedded style sheet is also called an internal style sheet. b. An embedded style sheet is also called an internal style sheet. c. An embedded style sheet is also called an internal style sheet. d. An embedded style sheet is also called an internal style sheet.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Cascading Style Sheets QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.03 - Define inline, embedded, and external styles and their order of precedence NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Cascading Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/1/2020 3:25 PM 7. An embedded style sheet includes the style sheet within the _____ tags of the HTML document. a. <body> and </body> b. <head> and </head> c. <html> and </html> d. <style> and </style> ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. An embedded style sheet, also called an internal style sheet, includes the style sheet within the opening < head> and closing < /head > tags of the HTML document. b. An embedded style sheet, also called an internal style sheet, includes the style sheet within the opening < head > and closing < /head > tags of the HTML document. c. An embedded style sheet, also called an internal style sheet, includes the style sheet within the opening < head > and closing < /head > tags of the HTML document. d. An embedded style sheet, also called an internal style sheet, includes the style sheet within the opening < head > and closing < /head > tags of the HTML document.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Using Cascading Style Sheets Bloom’s: Remember 10/8/2019 3:07 PM 12/19/2019 12:26 PM

8. The code: <head> <title>My Website</title> <style> body { background-color: green; } </style> </head> exemplifies a(n) _____ style sheet where the style rule is placed between the opening <style> and closing </style> tags. a. embedded b. external c. inline d. linked ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. The code exemplifies an embedded style sheet, where the style rule is placed between the opening < style > and closing < /style > tags. b. The code exemplifies an embedded style sheet, where the style rule is placed between the opening < style > and closing < /style > tags. c. The code exemplifies an embedded style sheet, where the style rule is placed between the opening < style > and closing < /style > tags. d. The code exemplifies an embedded style sheet, where the style rule is placed between the opening < style > and closing < /style > tags.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Cascading Style Sheets QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.03 - Define inline, embedded, and external styles and their order of precedence NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Cascading Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 12:28 PM 9. An external style sheet is also called a(n) _____ style sheet. a. embedded b. insync Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS c. inline d. linked ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

d a. An external style sheet is also called a linked style sheet. b. An external style sheet is also called a linked style sheet. c. An external style sheet is also called a linked style sheet. d. An external style sheet is also called a linked style sheet.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Cascading Style Sheets QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.03 - Define inline, embedded, and external styles and their order of precedence NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Cascading Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/1/2020 3:28 PM 10. A(n) _____ style sheet is a CSS file that contains all of the styles you want to apply to more than one page in the website. a. embedded b. disc c. inline d. external ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. An external style sheet is a CSS file that contains all of the styles you want to apply to more than one page in the website. b. An external style sheet is a CSS file that contains all of the styles you want to apply to more than one page in the website. c. An external style sheet is a CSS file that contains all of the styles you want to apply to more than one page in the website. d. An external style sheet is a CSS file that contains all of the styles you want to apply to more than one page in the website.

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

10/8/2019 3:07 PM 12/19/2019 12:33 PM

11. Style sheets are said to _____ because each type of style has a specified level of precedence in relationship to the others. a. embed b. cascade c. merge d. unite ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. Style sheets are said to “cascade” because each type of style has a specified level of precedence (or priority) in relationship to the others. b. Style sheets are said to “cascade” because each type of style has a specified level of precedence (or priority) in relationship to the others. c. Style sheets are said to “cascade” because each type of style has a specified level of precedence (or priority) in relationship to the others. d. Style sheets are said to “cascade” because each type of style has a specified level of precedence (or priority) in relationship to the others.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Cascading Style Sheets QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.03 - Define inline, embedded, and external styles and their order of precedence NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Cascading Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 12:34 PM 12. A feature of the Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) properties is that paragraphs and headings can _____ the font and color rules for the body selector. a. inherit b. cascade c. generate d. create ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. Paragraphs and headings inherit the font and color rules for the body selector. b. Paragraphs and headings inherit the font and color rules for the body selector. c. Paragraphs and headings inherit the font and color rules for the body selector. d. Paragraphs and headings inherit the font and color rules for the body selector. POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES:

1 Easy Using Cascading Style Sheets

Page 7

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.03 - Define inline, embedded, and external styles and their order of precedence NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Cascading Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 12:36 PM 13. The best practice is to apply _____ styles when one wants to control the style of content within one pair of Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) tags. a. embedded b. disc c. inline d. external ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. The best practice is to apply inline styles when you want to control the style of content within one pair of HTML tags. b. The best practice is to apply inline styles when you want to control the style of content within one pair of HTML tags. c. The best practice is to apply inline styles when you want to control the style of content within one pair of HTML tags. d. The best practice is to apply inline styles when you want to control the style of content within one pair of HTML tags.

Page 8

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS b. If one wants to format the content in the div id="container" section, then #container should be used as a selector. c. If one wants to format the content in the div id="container" section, then #container should be used as a selector. d. If one wants to format the content in the div id="container" section, then #container should be used as a selector.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Cascading Style Sheets QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.05 - Explain the difference between a selector, property, and value NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Cascading Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 12:40 PM 15. In the context of a style rule including a selector and a declaration, _____ formats h1 elements using blue text. a. <h1>color=blue</h1> b. h1 {color: blue;} c. {color: blue}<h1> d. h1 (color=blue;) ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. In the context of a style rule including a selector and a declaration, h1 {color: blue;} formats h1 elements using blue text. b. In the context of a style rule including a selector and a declaration, h1 {color: blue;} formats h1 elements using blue text. c. In the context of a style rule including a selector and a declaration, h1 {color: blue;} formats h1 elements using blue text. d. In the context of a style rule including a selector and a declaration, h1 {color: blue;} formats h1 elements using blue text.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Cascading Style Sheets QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.04 - Describe a CSS rule and its syntax NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Cascading Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 12:43 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 9

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS 16. The _____ property describes specific and general font names. a. font-text b. font-style c. font-names d. font-family ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. The font-family property describes specific and general font names. b. The font-family property describes specific and general font names. c. The font-family property describes specific and general font names. d. The font-family property describes specific and general font names. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Cascading Style Sheets QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.05 - Explain the difference between a selector, property, and value NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Cascading Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 12:44 PM 17. The font-weight property takes the value _____. a. oblique b. normal c. bolder d. justify ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. The font-weight property takes the value bolder. b. The font-weight property takes the value bolder. c. The font-weight property takes the value bolder. d. The font-weight property takes the value bolder. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Cascading Style Sheets QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.05 - Explain the difference between a selector, property, and value NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Cascading Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 10

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS DATE MODIFIED:

12/19/2019 12:45 PM

18. When more than one value is provided for the font-family property, the additional values are called _____ values. a. fallback b. supplementary c. rollover d. add-on ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. The additional values are called fallback values. b. The additional values are called fallback values. c. The additional values are called fallback values. d. The additional values are called fallback values. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Cascading Style Sheets QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.05 - Explain the difference between a selector, property, and value NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Cascading Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 12:46 PM 19. The declaration _____ indicates that the primary font that the browser tries to use is the Cambria font. a. font-family: <"Times New Roman", "serif"> Cambria; b. font-family: "serif", Times New Roman, Cambria; c. font-family: Cambria, "Times New Roman", serif; d. font-family: <Cambria>pr, "Times New Roman", serif; ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. The declaration "font-family: Cambria, "Times New Roman", serif;" indicates that the primary font that the browser tries to use is the Cambria font. b. The declaration "font-family: Cambria, "Times New Roman", serif;" indicates that the primary font that the browser tries to use is the Cambria font. c. The declaration "font-family: Cambria, "Times New Roman", serif;" indicates that the primary font that the browser tries to use is the Cambria font. d. The declaration "font-family: Cambria, "Times New Roman", serif;" indicates that the primary font that the browser tries to use is the Cambria font.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE: HAS VARIABLES:

1 Easy Using Cascading Style Sheets Multiple Choice False

Page 11

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.06 - Create styles that use text and color properties NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Cascading Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 12:48 PM 20. The hexadecimal value 0000FF specifies a _____. a. color that is a mixture of red and green b. pure blue color c. color that is a mixture of blue and green d. pure green color ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. The hexadecimal value 0000FF specifies a pure blue color. b. The hexadecimal value 0000FF specifies a pure blue color. c. The hexadecimal value 0000FF specifies a pure blue color. d. The hexadecimal value 0000FF specifies a pure blue color. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Cascading Style Sheets QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.06 - Create styles that use text and color properties NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Cascading Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/1/2020 3:38 PM 21. _____ elements are displayed without line breaks so they flow within the same line. a. Inline b. Header c. Block d. Nav ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. Inline elements are displayed without line breaks, so they flow within the same line. b. Inline elements are displayed without line breaks, so they flow within the same line. c. Inline elements are displayed without line breaks, so they flow within the same line. d. Inline elements are displayed without line breaks, so they flow within the same line. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 12

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Understanding Inline Elements and Block Elements QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.07 - Explain the difference between inline and block content NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Understanding Inline Elements and Block Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 12:51 PM 22. The span tag (<span>) and the anchor tag (<a>) are examples of _____ elements. a. header b. inline c. block d. nav ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. Examples of inline elements include the span element (<span> </span>) and the anchor element (<a> </a>). b. Examples of inline elements include the span element (<span> </span>) and the anchor element (<a> </a>). c. Examples of inline elements include the span element (<span> </span>) and the anchor element (<a> </a>). d. Examples of inline elements include the span element (<span> </span>) and the anchor element (<a> </a>).

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Understanding Inline Elements and Block Elements QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.07 - Explain the difference between inline and block content NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Understanding Inline Elements and Block Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 12:52 PM 23. The _____ separates the padding and the margin of a block element. a. header b. footer c. separator d. border Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 13

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

d a. The border separates the padding and the margin of the block element. b. The border separates the padding and the margin of the block element. c. The border separates the padding and the margin of the block element. d. The border separates the padding and the margin of the block element.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Understanding Inline Elements and Block Elements QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.08 - Describe the CSS box model and how to apply margins, padding, and borders NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Understanding Inline Elements and Block Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 12:53 PM 24. The _____ property rounds the corners of a block element’s border. a. border b. border-style c. border-radius d. box-shadow ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. The border-radius property rounds the corners of a block element’s border. b. The border-radius property rounds the corners of a block element’s border. c. The border-radius property rounds the corners of a block element’s border. d. The border-radius property rounds the corners of a block element’s border. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Understanding Inline Elements and Block Elements QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.08 - Describe the CSS box model and how to apply margins, padding, and borders NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Understanding Inline Elements and Block Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 12:55 PM 25. An _____ style sheet is used to create styles that apply to more than one webpage in a website. a. embedded b. external Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 14

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS c. internal d. inline ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

b a. To create style rules that apply to more than one webpage in a website, use an external style sheet.

b. To create style rules that apply to more than one webpage in a website, use an external style sheet. c. To create style rules that apply to more than one webpage in a website, use an external style sheet. d. To create style rules that apply to more than one webpage in a website, use an external style sheet.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating an External Style Sheet QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.09 - Create an external style sheet and link it to an HTML page NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating an External Style Sheet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 12:56 PM 26. The first step while using an _____ style sheet is to use a text editor to create and save a document with a .css extension. a. external b. embedded c. internal d. inline ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. First, use a text editor to create and save a document with a .css extension. b. First, use a text editor to create and save a document with a .css extension. c. First, use a text editor to create and save a document with a .css extension. d. First, use a text editor to create and save a document with a .css extension. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating an External Style Sheet QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.09 - Create an external style sheet and link it to an HTML page NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating an External Style Sheet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 15

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

10/8/2019 3:07 PM 12/19/2019 12:57 PM

27. To style the div id="container" element, _____ is used as the selector. a. .container b. #container c. :container d. %container ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. To style the div id="container" element, use #container as the selector. b. To style the div id="container" element, use #container as the selector. c. To style the div id="container" element, use #container as the selector. d. To style the div id="container" element, use #container as the selector. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating an External Style Sheet QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.09 - Create an external style sheet and link it to an HTML page NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating an External Style Sheet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 12:58 PM 28. To create a class selector, the style rule should begin with a _____ followed by the class attribute value. a. semicolon b. comma c. period d. hash tag ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. To create a class selector, you begin the style rule with a period (.) followed by the class attribute value. b. To create a class selector, you begin the style rule with a period (.) followed by the class attribute value. c. To create a class selector, you begin the style rule with a period (.) followed by the class attribute value. d. To create a class selector, you begin the style rule with a period (.) followed by the class attribute value.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE:

1 Easy Creating an External Style Sheet Multiple Choice

Page 16

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.09 - Create an external style sheet and link it to an HTML page NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating an External Style Sheet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/1/2020 3:44 PM 29. The _____ attribute of a link element uses the stylesheet value to indicate that a document is linked to a style sheet. a. rel b. lnk c. href d. span ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. The rel attribute uses the stylesheet value to indicate that the document is linked to a style sheet.

b. The rel attribute uses the stylesheet value to indicate that the document is linked to a style sheet. c. The rel attribute uses the stylesheet value to indicate that the document is linked to a style sheet. d. The rel attribute uses the stylesheet value to indicate that the document is linked to a style sheet.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Linking an HTML Document to a CSS File QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.09 - Create an external style sheet and link it to an HTML page NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Linking an HTML Document to a CSS File KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 1:03 PM 30. The style rule used to set the same font family property and values for the header, nav, and footer elements is _____. header, nav, footer <font-family/>Calibri, Arial, sans-serif; a. <header/><nav/>< footer/> { font-family: Calibri, Arial, sans-serif; } b. header, nav, footer <font-family/>Calibri, Arial, sans-serif; c. header, nav, footer { font-family: Calibri, Arial, sans-serif; Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 17

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS } d. {header, nav, footer}<font-family: Calibri, Arial, sans-serif/> ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. The style rule used to set the same font family property and values for the header, nav, and footer elements is header, nav, footer { font-family: Calibri, Arial, sans-serif; }. b. The style rule used to set the same font family property and values for the header, nav, and footer elements is header, nav, footer { font-family: Calibri, Arial, sans-serif; }. c. The style rule used to set the same font family property and values for the header, nav, and footer elements is header, nav, footer { font-family: Calibri, Arial, sans-serif; }. d. The style rule used to set the same font family property and values for the header, nav, and footer elements is header, nav, footer { font-family: Calibri, Arial, sans-serif; }.

c a. The text-align property can use one of four values: left (the default), center, right, or justify. b. The text-align property can use one of four values: left (the default), center, right, or justify. c. The text-align property can use one of four values: left (the default), center, right, or justify. d. The text-align property can use one of four values: left (the default), center, right, or justify.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE:

1 Easy Creating a Webpage Layout Multiple Choice

Page 18

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.06 - Create styles that use text and color properties NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Aligning Webpage Content KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/1/2020 3:57 PM 32. Identify the rule that centers an h1 element. a. h1 { text-align: center; } b. <h1> text-align: center</h1>; c. <h1/> { align: center; } d. h1 { align: center; } ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. The following rule centers an h1 element: h1 { text-align: center; }. b. The following rule centers an h1 element: h1 { text-align: center; }. c. The following rule centers an h1 element: h1 { text-align: center; }. d. The following rule centers an h1 element: h1 { text-align: center; }. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Creating a Webpage Layout QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.06 - Create styles that use text and color properties NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Aligning Webpage Content KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/1/2020 4:00 PM 33. Using the _____ property, to center all of the elements so that a page appears centered within a browser window, one should create styles to set the left and right margins to auto. a. display b. margin c. text-align d. box-shadow ANSWER: b Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 19

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS FEEDBACK:

a. Another way to center webpage content is to use the margin property. To center all of the elements so that the page appears centered within a browser window, you create styles to set the left and right margins to auto. b. Another way to center webpage content is to use the margin property. To center all of the elements so that the page appears centered within a browser window, you create styles to set the left and right margins to auto. c. Another way to center webpage content is to use the margin property. To center all of the elements so that the page appears centered within a browser window, you create styles to set the left and right margins to auto. d. Another way to center webpage content is to use the margin property. To center all of the elements so that the page appears centered within a browser window, you create styles to set the left and right margins to auto.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating a Webpage Layout QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.08 - Describe the CSS box model and how to apply margins, padding, and borders NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Aligning Webpage Content KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/1/2020 4:06 PM 34. The _____ property allows the positioning of an element to the right or left of other elements. a. display b. margin c. text-align d. float ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. The float property allows you to position an element to the right or left of other elements, while remaining within its parent element. b. The float property allows you to position an element to the right or left of other elements, while remaining within its parent element. c. The float property allows you to position an element to the right or left of other elements, while remaining within its parent element. d. The float property allows you to position an element to the right or left of other elements, while remaining within its parent element.

Page 20

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Creating Style Rules for Classes Bloom’s: Remember 10/8/2019 3:07 PM 12/19/2019 1:18 PM

35. The _____ property can be used to remove the float effect if one does not want text to wrap around an image. a. display b. padding c. text-align d. clear ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. The clear property can be used to remove the float effect if one does not want text to wrap around an image. b. The clear property can be used to remove the float effect if one does not want text to wrap around an image. c. The clear property can be used to remove the float effect if one does not want text to wrap around an image. d. The clear property can be used to remove the float effect if one does not want text to wrap around an image.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating a Webpage Layout QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.11 - Use float and clear properties NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Style Rules for Classes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 1:20 PM 36. Using _____ as the value for the list-style-position property displays the bullet or number within the list’s content block. a. inside b. padded c. parallel d. composed ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

a a. Using inside as the value displays the bullet or number inside the list’s content block. b. Using inside as the value displays the bullet or number inside the list’s content block. c. Using inside as the value displays the bullet or number inside the list’s content block.

Page 21

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS d. Using inside as the value displays the bullet or number inside the list’s content block.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating Style Rules for Structural Elements QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.12 - Create and style id and class attributes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using CSS List Properties KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 1:23 PM 37. _____ can provide additional information about the area where styles are applied or other helpful explanations, such as what the styles do. a. Header notes b. Comments c. Wraps d. Footer notes ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. Comments can provide additional information about the area where the styles are applied or other helpful explanations, such as what the styles do. b. Comments can provide additional information about the area where the styles are applied or other helpful explanations, such as what the styles do. c. Comments can provide additional information about the area where the styles are applied or other helpful explanations, such as what the styles do. d. Comments can provide additional information about the area where the styles are applied or other helpful explanations, such as what the styles do.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Comments to CSS Files QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.14 - Add comments to an external style sheet and validate a CSS file NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Comments to CSS Files KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 1:28 PM 38. The correct representation of a Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) comment is _____. a. //* Place your comment here *// b. <*/ Place your comment here /*> Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 22

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS c. /* Place your comment here */ d. */ Place your comment here /* ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. The correct representation of a Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) comment is /* Place your comment here */.

b. The correct representation of a Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) comment is /* Place your comment here */. c. The correct representation of a Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) comment is /* Place your comment here */. d. The correct representation of a Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) comment is /* Place your comment here */.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Comments to CSS Files QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.14 - Add comments to an external style sheet and validate a CSS file NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Comments to CSS Files KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 1:29 PM 39. When a Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) document is _____, it confirms that all of the code is correct and follows the established rules for CSS. a. authenticated b. compiled c. pipelined d. validated ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. When you validate a CSS document, you confirm that all of the code is correct and follows the established rules for CSS.

b. When you validate a CSS document, you confirm that all of the code is correct and follows the established rules for CSS. c. When you validate a CSS document, you confirm that all of the code is correct and follows the established rules for CSS. d. When you validate a CSS document, you confirm that all of the code is correct and follows the established rules for CSS.

Page 23

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Validating CSS Files Bloom’s: Remember 10/8/2019 3:07 PM 12/19/2019 1:36 PM

40. When errors are detected in a Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) file, the _____ provides information about the location of each error so that one can identify and correct them. a. validator b. evaluator c. compiler d. decoder ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. When errors are detected in a CSS file, the validator provides information about the location of each error so you can identify and correct them.

b. When errors are detected in a CSS file, the validator provides information about the location of each error so you can identify and correct them. c. When errors are detected in a CSS file, the validator provides information about the location of each error so you can identify and correct them. d. When errors are detected in a CSS file, the validator provides information about the location of each error so you can identify and correct them.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Validating CSS Files QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.14 - Add comments to an external style sheet and validate a CSS file NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Validating CSS Files KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 1:37 PM 41. By defining Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) styles in a style sheet separate from the Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) code, one can format a webpage in multiple ways such as _____. a. changing the background color of the webpage b. increasing the size of text c. segregating paragraphs in a text d. adding borders to elements ANSWER: a, b, d FEEDBACK: a. By defining CSS styles in a style sheet separate from the HTML code, you can format a webpage in an unlimited number of ways, such as changing the background color of the webpage, increasing the size of text or bolding it, applying margins to a section, and adding borders to elements. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 24

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS b. By defining CSS styles in a style sheet separate from the HTML code, you can format a webpage in an unlimited number of ways, such as changing the background color of the webpage, increasing the size of text or bolding it, applying margins to a section, and adding borders to elements. c. By defining CSS styles in a style sheet separate from the HTML code, you can format a webpage in an unlimited number of ways, such as changing the background color of the webpage, increasing the size of text or bolding it, applying margins to a section, and adding borders to elements. d. By defining CSS styles in a style sheet separate from the HTML code, you can format a webpage in an unlimited number of ways, such as changing the background color of the webpage, increasing the size of text or bolding it, applying margins to a section, and adding borders to elements.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Introduction QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Response HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.01 - Explain the importance of separating design from content NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introduction KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 1:38 PM 42. Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) supports _____ styles. a. virtual b. inline c. embedded d. external ANSWER: b, c, d FEEDBACK: a. CSS supports inline, embedded (or internal), and external styles. b. CSS supports inline, embedded (or internal), and external styles. c. CSS supports inline, embedded (or internal), and external styles. d. CSS supports inline, embedded (or internal), and external styles. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Cascading Style Sheets QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Response HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.03 - Define inline, embedded, and external styles and their order of precedence NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Cascading Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 25

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS DATE MODIFIED:

12/19/2019 1:40 PM

43. Each Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) rule consists of a _____. a. semantic b. selector c. declaration d. definition ANSWER: b, c FEEDBACK: a. Each CSS style rule consists of a selector and a declaration block. b. Each CSS style rule consists of a selector and a declaration block. c. Each CSS style rule consists of a selector and a declaration block. d. Each CSS style rule consists of a selector and a declaration block. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Cascading Style Sheets QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Response HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.05 - Explain the difference between a selector, property, and value NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Cascading Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 1:42 PM 44. A valid unit of measurement for the font size property in CSS is _____. a. pixels b. value oblique c. percentage d. hexadecimal value ANSWER: a, c FEEDBACK: a. CSS measures font size using many measurement units, including pixels, points, and ems, and by keyword or percentage. b. CSS measures font size using many measurement units, including pixels, points, and ems, and by keyword or percentage. c. CSS measures font size using many measurement units, including pixels, points, and ems, and by keyword or percentage. d. CSS measures font size using many measurement units, including pixels, points, and ems, and by keyword or percentage.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE: HAS VARIABLES:

1 Easy Using Cascading Style Sheets Multiple Response False

Page 26

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.06 - Create styles that use text and color properties NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Cascading Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/1/2020 4:20 PM 45. The _____ is an example of a block element. a. header b. span c. main d. footer ANSWER: a, c, d FEEDBACK: a. Header, nav, main, and footer are all examples of block elements. b. Header, nav, main, and footer are all examples of block elements. c. Header, nav, main, and footer are all examples of block elements. d. Header, nav, main, and footer are all examples of block elements. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Understanding Inline Elements and Block Elements QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Response HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.07 - Explain the difference between inline and block content NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Understanding Inline Elements and Block Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/1/2020 4:21 PM 46. The first version of Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) included styles to control the positioning of elements. ANSWER: False - second FEEDBACK: Correct The second version of CSS, CSS 2, was released in 1998 and included new styles to control the positioning of elements. Incorrect The second version of CSS, CSS 2, was released in 1998 and included new styles to control the positioning of elements.

Page 27

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Using Cascading Style Sheets Bloom’s: Remember 10/8/2019 3:07 PM 12/19/2019 1:49 PM

47. External styles defeat the purpose and advantages of separating style from content, so they should be used sparingly. ANSWER: False - Inline styles FEEDBACK: Correct Inline styles defeat the purpose and advantages of separating style from content, so they should be used sparingly. Incorrect Inline styles defeat the purpose and advantages of separating style from content, so they should be used sparingly.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Cascading Style Sheets QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.03 - Define inline, embedded, and external styles and their order of precedence NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Cascading Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 1:51 PM 48. The best practice is to apply an inline style sheet when one wants to change the style of one page. ANSWER: False - embedded style sheet FEEDBACK: Correct Use an embedded style sheet when you want to create styles for a single webpage that are different from the rest of the website. Incorrect Use an embedded style sheet when you want to create styles for a single webpage that are different from the rest of the website.

Page 28

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS 49. The declaration of a Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) rule includes at least one property to apply to the selected element. ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct A declaration includes at least one property to apply to the selected element. Incorrect A declaration includes at least one property to apply to the selected element.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Cascading Style Sheets QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.04 - Describe a CSS rule and its syntax NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Cascading Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 1:54 PM 50. The nav element is used to group inline elements. ANSWER: False - span FEEDBACK: Correct You use a span element to group inline elements together on a webpage. Incorrect You use a span element to group inline elements together on a webpage.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating Class Attributes QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.07 - Explain the difference between inline and block content NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Understanding Inline Elements and Block Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 1:55 PM 51. Websites developed with Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) 5 alone can be functional, but they lack the important element of visual appeal. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct Websites developed with Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) 5 alone can be functional, but they lack the important element of visual appeal. Incorrect Websites developed with Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) 5 alone can be functional, but they lack the important element of visual appeal. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 29

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Introduction QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.01 - Explain the importance of separating design from content NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introduction KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 1:58 PM 52. Style sheets restrict a web designer from easily rebranding a website. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct Style sheets provide a means to separate style from content. This is ideal for you as a web designer because it gives you the flexibility to easily redesign or rebrand a website. Incorrect Style sheets provide a means to separate style from content. This is ideal for you as a web designer because it gives you the flexibility to easily redesign or rebrand a website.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Cascading Style Sheets QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.02 - Describe Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Cascading Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 1:57 PM 53. An external style sheet is used when one wants to create styles for a single webpage that are different from the rest of the website. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct Use an embedded style sheet when you want to create styles for a single webpage that are different from the rest of the website. Incorrect Use an embedded style sheet when you want to create styles for a single webpage that are different from the rest of the website.

POINTS:

Page 30

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Cascading Style Sheets QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.03 - Define inline, embedded, and external styles and their order of precedence NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Cascading Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/1/2020 4:28 PM 54. An embedded style sheet takes precedence over an external style sheet. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct An embedded style sheet takes precedence over an external style sheet. Incorrect An embedded style sheet takes precedence over an external style sheet.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Cascading Style Sheets QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.03 - Define inline, embedded, and external styles and their order of precedence NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Cascading Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 2:00 PM 55. External style sheets do not contain any Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) tags. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct External style sheets do not contain any Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) tags. Incorrect External style sheets do not contain any Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) tags.

Page 31

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Using Cascading Style Sheets Bloom’s: Remember 10/8/2019 3:07 PM 12/19/2019 2:03 PM

56. When a style is changed in an embedded stylesheet, it automatically applies the change to every page linked to that style sheet. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct Use an embedded style sheet when you want to create styles for a single webpage that are different from the rest of the website. Incorrect Use an embedded style sheet when you want to create styles for a single webpage that are different from the rest of the website.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Cascading Style Sheets QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.03 - Define inline, embedded, and external styles and their order of precedence NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Cascading Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 2:04 PM 57. In the context of style sheet precedence, external styles beat embedded styles and embedded styles beat inline styles. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct Inline styles beat embedded styles, and embedded styles beat external styles. Incorrect Inline styles beat embedded styles, and embedded styles beat external styles.

Page 32

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS 58. The selector of a Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) rule defines the exact formatting of a style. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct The selector is the part of the statement that identifies what to style. Incorrect The selector is the part of the statement that identifies what to style.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Cascading Style Sheets QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.04 - Describe a CSS rule and its syntax NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Cascading Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 2:09 PM 59. The color code for white in the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) notation is rgb(0,0,0). a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct The color code for white in the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) notation is rgb(255,255,255). Incorrect The color code for white in the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) notation is rgb(255,255,255).

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Cascading Style Sheets QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.06 - Create styles that use text and color properties NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Cascading Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 2:14 PM 60. Block elements can contain inline elements. a. True b. False ANSWER: True Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 33

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS FEEDBACK:

Correct Block elements can contain content, other block elements, and inline elements. Incorrect Block elements can contain content, other block elements, and inline elements.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Understanding Inline Elements and Block Elements QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.07 - Explain the difference between inline and block content NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Understanding Inline Elements and Block Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 4:50 PM 61. The sides of the Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) box model are referred to in counterclockwise order: left, right, bottom, and top. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct You refer to the sides of a box in clockwise order: top, right, bottom, and left. Incorrect You refer to the sides of a box in clockwise order: top, right, bottom, and left.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Understanding Inline Elements and Block Elements QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.08 - Describe the CSS box model and how to apply margins, padding, and borders NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Understanding Inline Elements and Block Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/1/2020 5:16 PM 62. For the border-style property, the horizontal and vertical offset measurements must be specified. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct For the box-shadow property, the horizontal and vertical offset measurements must be specified. Incorrect For the box-shadow property, the horizontal and vertical offset measurements must be specified.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY:

1 Easy

Page 34

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS REFERENCES: Understanding Inline Elements and Block Elements QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.08 - Describe the CSS box model and how to apply margins, padding, and borders NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Understanding Inline Elements and Block Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/1/2020 5:17 PM 63. An id descriptor uses the id attribute value of a Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) element to select a single element. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct An id selector uses the id attribute value of an HTML element to select a single element. Incorrect An id selector uses the id attribute value of an HTML element to select a single element.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating an External Style Sheet QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.09 - Create an external style sheet and link it to an HTML page NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating an External Style Sheet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 2:29 PM 64. To style class="mobile", #mobile must be used as the selector. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct To style class="mobile", use .mobile as the selector. Incorrect To style class="mobile", use .mobile as the selector.

Page 35

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Creating an External Style Sheet Bloom’s: Remember 10/8/2019 3:07 PM 12/19/2019 6:17 PM

65. After a Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) file is created, it must be linked to all the webpages that will use its styles. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct After creating a CSS file, link it to all the webpages that will use its styles. Otherwise, the browser will not find and apply the styles in the external style sheet. Incorrect After creating a CSS file, link it to all the webpages that will use its styles. Otherwise, the browser will not find and apply the styles in the external style sheet.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Linking an HTML Document to a CSS File QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.09 - Create an external style sheet and link it to an HTML page NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Linking an HTML Document to a CSS File KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/1/2020 5:19 PM 66. According to the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C), with Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) 5, using the type attribute within a link element is essential. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct With HTML 5, the type attribute is not necessary. The W3C says that the use of the type attribute within the link element is “purely advisory.” Incorrect With HTML 5, the type attribute is not necessary. The W3C says that the use of the type attribute within the link element is “purely advisory.”

Page 36

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Bloom’s: Remember 10/8/2019 3:07 PM 1/1/2020 5:21 PM

67. If a website template is linked to a style sheet file, then any new pages created from the template will already be linked to the style sheet. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct If a website template is linked to a style sheet file, then any new pages created from the template will already be linked to the style sheet. Incorrect If a website template is linked to a style sheet file, then any new pages created from the template will already be linked to the style sheet.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Linking an HTML Document to a CSS File QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.09 - Create an external style sheet and link it to an HTML page NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Linking an HTML Document to a CSS File KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 4:48 PM 68. The justify value of the text-align property is used to center content within an element. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct Use the center value to center content within an element. Incorrect Use the center value to center content within an element.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating a Webpage Layout QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.06 - Create styles that use text and color properties NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Aligning Webpage Content KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 4:52 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 37

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS 69. While creating style rules for Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) 5 structural elements, all the structural sections should be formatted using the display property. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct The nav section should be prominent and easy to find on the webpage, so you should format it differently from the other structural elements. Incorrect The nav section should be prominent and easy to find on the webpage, so you should format it differently from the other structural elements.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating Style Rules for Structural Elements QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.08 - Describe the CSS box model and how to apply margins, padding, and borders NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Style Rules for Structural Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 4:57 PM 70. Applying a shadow to website elements diminishes design quality. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct Applying a shadow to website elements improves design quality. Incorrect Applying a shadow to website elements improves design quality.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Introduction QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.01 - Explain the importance of separating design from content NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Style Rules for Structural Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 5:03 PM 71. Header, nav, main, and footer are all examples of block elements. a. True b. False ANSWER: True Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 38

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS FEEDBACK:

Correct Header, nav, main, and footer are all examples of block elements. Incorrect Header, nav, main, and footer are all examples of block elements.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Understanding Inline Elements and Block Elements QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.07 - Explain the difference between inline and block content NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Style Rules for Structural Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 5:05 PM 72. The valid values for the float property are top and bottom, indicating where to display (or float) the element. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct The float property has four valid values: left, right, inherit, and none. Incorrect The float property has four valid values: left, right, inherit, and none.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating a Webpage Layout QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.11 - Use float and clear properties NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Style Rules for Classes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 5:11 PM 73. If you float an element, neighboring elements will also be affected by the float. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct If you float an element, neighboring elements will also be affected by the float. Incorrect If you float an element, neighboring elements will also be affected by the float.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE:

1 Easy Creating a Webpage Layout True / False

Page 39

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.11 - Use float and clear properties NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Style Rules for Classes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 5:13 PM 74. The default value for the list-style-position property is inside, which displays the list item with a bullet or number inside the list’s content block. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct The default value for this property is outside, which displays the list item with a bullet or number outside of the list’s content block. Incorrect The default value for this property is outside, which displays the list item with a bullet or number outside of the list’s content block.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating Style Rules for Structural Elements QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.12 - Create and style id and class attributes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using CSS List Properties KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 5:16 PM 75. _________ provide a means to separate style from content. ANSWER: Style sheets POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Cascading Style Sheets QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.02 - Describe Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Cascading Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 5:18 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 40

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS 76. Changing the look of an entire website is sometimes called _________ the website. ANSWER: reskinning POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Cascading Style Sheets QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.03 - Define inline, embedded, and external styles and their order of precedence NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Cascading Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 5:19 PM 77. A(n) _________ style sheet is a text file with the .css file extension. ANSWER: external linked POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Cascading Style Sheets QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.03 - Define inline, embedded, and external styles and their order of precedence NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Cascading Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 5:20 PM 78. If a selector has more than one Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) rule, _________ determines which CSS rule to apply. ANSWER: specificity POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Cascading Style Sheets QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.03 - Define inline, embedded, and external styles and their order of precedence NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Cascading Style Sheets Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 41

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Bloom’s: Remember 10/8/2019 3:07 PM 12/19/2019 5:21 PM

79. Each Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) rule includes a _________, which is the part of the statement that identifies what to style. ANSWER: selector POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Cascading Style Sheets QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.05 - Explain the difference between a selector, property, and value NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Cascading Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/1/2020 5:30 PM 80. In the declaration part of the Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) rule, the _________ identifies the style quality or characteristic to apply, such as color (text color), background-color, text-indent, border-width, or font-style. ANSWER: property POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Cascading Style Sheets QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.04 - Describe a CSS rule and its syntax NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Cascading Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 5:22 PM 81. In the context of font size measurement units, the unit _________ is used for printing webpages. ANSWER: pt POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Cascading Style Sheets QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 42

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.06 - Create styles that use text and color properties NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Cascading Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 5:24 PM 82. The color blue is expressed as _________ in the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) notation. ANSWER: rgb(0,0,255) POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Cascading Style Sheets QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.06 - Create styles that use text and color properties NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Cascading Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 5:25 PM 83. The color red has the hexadecimal code _________. ANSWER: #ff0000 POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Cascading Style Sheets QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.06 - Create styles that use text and color properties NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Cascading Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/1/2020 5:32 PM 84. A(n) _________ element starts and ends with a new line, such as the main element or a paragraph element. ANSWER: block POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Understanding Inline Elements and Block Elements Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 43

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.07 - Explain the difference between inline and block content NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Understanding Inline Elements and Block Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM 85. The _________ describes the boxes of content on a webpage. ANSWER: CSS box model Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) box model Cascading Style Sheets box model POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Understanding Inline Elements and Block Elements QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.08 - Describe the CSS box model and how to apply margins, padding, and borders NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Understanding Inline Elements and Block Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 5:27 PM 86. The _________ declaration sets the left border of a block element to a width of 2 pixels. ANSWER: border-left-width: 2px; POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Understanding Inline Elements and Block Elements QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.08 - Describe the CSS box model and how to apply margins, padding, and borders NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Understanding Inline Elements and Block Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 5:28 PM 87. A(n) _________ can be a Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) element name, an id attribute value, or a class Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 44

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS attribute value. ANSWER: selector POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating an External Style Sheet QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.09 - Create an external style sheet and link it to an HTML page NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating an External Style Sheet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM 88. A(n) _________ selector is used when one wants to create a style that applies to an element contained within another element. ANSWER: descendant POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating an External Style Sheet QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.09 - Create an external style sheet and link it to an HTML page NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating an External Style Sheet KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM 89. The _________ attribute value of the link element specifies the file path or file name of the Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) file. ANSWER: href POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Linking an HTML Document to a CSS File QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.09 - Create an external style sheet and link it to an HTML page NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 45

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Linking an HTML Document to a CSS File Bloom’s: Remember 10/8/2019 3:07 PM 10/8/2019 3:07 PM

90. To align webpage content, the _________ property is set to a percentage to specify how much of the page to use for content. ANSWER: width POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating a Webpage Layout QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.10 - Create styles that use padding, border, and margin properties NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Aligning Webpage Content KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM 91. The _________ section of a webpage provides supplemental information, so its text should be smaller than the other text on the page. ANSWER: footer POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating Style Rules for Structural Elements QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.06 - Create styles that use text and color properties NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Style Rules for Structural Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM 92. To specify the position of bullets or numbers in a list, the _________ property must be used. ANSWER: list-style-position POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating Style Rules for Structural Elements QUESTION TYPE: Completion Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 46

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.12 - Create and style id and class attributes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using CSS List Properties KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 5:35 PM 93. As a Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) file is created, _________ should be included about each rule to identify its purpose. ANSWER: comments POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding Comments to CSS Files QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.14 - Add comments to an external style sheet and validate a CSS file NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Comments to CSS Files KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 5:36 PM 94. If _________ detects an error in the Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) code, a warning such as “Sorry! We found the following error(s)!” appears in the header bar. ANSWER: validation validator POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Validating CSS Files QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.14 - Add comments to an external style sheet and validate a CSS file NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Validating CSS Files KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 5:38 PM Identify the letters of the choices that best match the phrases or definitions. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 47

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS a. Style attribute b. Style sheet c. Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) d. Hexadecimal e. Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) f. em g. Declaration h. Padding i. Link j. External style sheet DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Introduction Using Cascading Style Sheets Understanding Inline Elements and Block Elements Linking an HTML Document to a CSS File QUESTION TYPE: Matching HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.01 - Explain the importance of separating design from content LO: 04.02 - Describe Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) LO: 04.03 - Define inline, embedded, and external styles and their order of precedence LO: 04.04 - Describe a CSS rule and its syntax LO: 04.06 - Create styles that use text and color properties LO: 04.08 - Describe the CSS box model and how to apply margins, padding, and borders LO: 04.09 - Create an external style sheet and link it to an HTML page NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introduction KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 7:17 PM 95. It provides the structural foundation of a webpage. ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 96. It is used to determine the formatting for a webpage. ANSWER: e POINTS: 1 97. It is the set of style rules included in a section of an HTML document or in a separate file. ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 98. In an inline style, it is used to add a style to the start tag for an element, such as a heading or paragraph. ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 48

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS 99. It is a text file with the .css file extension. ANSWER: j POINTS: 1 100. It consists of a property and a value, separated by a colon and followed by a semicolon. ANSWER: g POINTS: 1 101. This unit is relative to the default font size of an element. ANSWER: f POINTS: 1 102. It is a combination of the base-16 numbering system, which includes letters A through F. ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 103. It is the passive white space between the content and the border of a block element. ANSWER: h POINTS: 1 104. This element uses the attributes rel and href. ANSWER: i POINTS: 1 105. Explain why style sheets were created. Include in your response definitions of the following terms: style, Cascading Style Sheets, inline style, embedded style sheet, and external style sheet. ANSWER: Although Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) allows web developers to make changes to the structure, design, and content of a webpage, HTML is limited in its ability to define the appearance, or style, across one or more webpages. As a result, style sheets were created. A style is a rule that defines the appearance of an element on a webpage. Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) are series of rules that define the style for a webpage or an entire website. With a style sheet, one can alter the appearance of a webpage or pages by changing characteristics such as font family, font size, margins, and link specifications. CSS supports three types of style sheets: inline, embedded (or internal), and external (or linked). With an inline style, one adds a style to an individual HTML tag, such as a heading or paragraph. The style changes that specific tag, but does not affect other tags in the document. With an embedded style sheet, or internal style sheet, one adds the style sheet within the <head> tags of the HTML document to define the style for an entire webpage. With an external style sheet, or linked style sheet, one creates a text file that contains all of the styles one wants to apply and saves the text file with the file extension .css. One can then add a link to this external style sheet on any webpage in the website. External style sheets provide the most flexibility and are ideal for applying the same formats to all of the webpages in a website. External style sheets also make it easy to change formats quickly Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 49

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS across webpages. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Cascading Style Sheets QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.03 - Define inline, embedded, and external styles and their order of precedence NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Cascading Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/2/2020 7:34 AM 106. Explain the Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) box model. Include descriptions of the margin, border, and padding along with examples in the explanation. ANSWER: Each block element such as a header, nav, main, and footer element has a top, right, bottom, and left side. In other words, the element is displayed in a browser as a box with content. The CSS box model describes these boxes of content on a webpage. Each content box can have margins, borders, and padding. The sides of a box are referred to in clockwise order: top, right, bottom, and left. The margin provides passive white space between block elements or between the top or bottom of a webpage. One can define margins at the top, right, bottom, and left of a block element. Margins are transparent and are measured in pixels (px), ems (em), or percentages (%). The border separates the padding and the margin of the block element. A border can vary in thickness and color and can be defined at the top, right, bottom, and left sides of a block element. A border can also have a style such as solid, dashed, or dotted. Padding is the passive white space between the content and the border of a block element. Padding is typically measured in pixels (px), ems (em), or percentages (%). By default, padding is set to 0px, so paragraph text, for example, appears at the edges of the block element. The padding can be increased to improve legibility. The background color for the padding and content is always the same. Using CSS, one can set the margin, border, or padding properties for all four sides of a block element using a single declaration. For example, the following declaration sets the top, right, bottom, and left margins of a block element to 2em: margin: 2em; One can use a similar shorthand notation to set the style, width, and color for all four sides of a block element’s border. The property values can appear in any order. The following declaration sets the top, right, bottom, and left borders of a block element to a solid line using a width of 1 pixel and a color of black: border: solid 1px #000000; Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 50

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS Writing the declaration using shorthand notation is helpful when all four sides of the block element use the same property values. If one needs to use different property values on one or more sides of the block element, then a declaration should be included for each side of the block element. To have a border appear around the content in a block element, a border style in a CSS statement must be specified. One can include the style value with the border property or use the border-style property with an assigned value. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Understanding Inline Elements and Block Elements QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.08 - Describe the CSS box model and how to apply margins, padding, and borders NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Understanding Inline Elements and Block Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/2/2020 7:41 AM 107. Explain the formatting task involving the creation of style rules for Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) 5 structural elements. ANSWER: The header section appears at the top of the webpage so it needs formatting that makes the header contents stand out and attract visitors to the page. To achieve this effect, one can use Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) text properties and box model properties to adjust the margins, add a border and background color, and center the contents of the header section. The nav section should also be prominent and easy to find on the webpage, so one should format it differently from the other structural elements. Because the nav section contains only text, one should use CSS text properties to determine the text’s appearance. The CSS box model properties are used to specify the padding, margins, and borders of the nav element. The appearance of the main section, which contains the primary content of the webpage, can be enhanced by adding style declarations to specify characteristics such as background color and padding and font size. Finally, a style rule is created that formats the footer section by defining the font size, text alignment, and top margin of the footer element. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Creating Style Rules for Structural Elements QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.08 - Describe the CSS box model and how to apply margins, padding, and borders Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 51

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Creating Style Rules for Structural Elements Bloom’s: Understand 10/8/2019 3:07 PM 1/2/2020 7:50 AM

Critical Thinking Questions Case 4-1 Jenny is a freelance web designer and uses style sheets that give her the flexibility to easily redesign or rebrand a website. Recently, Jenny has been contracted for a project wherein she needs to maintain a website for a leading orthopedic appliance manufacturer. 108. Jenny wants to enhance the look of the webpage by formatting individual sections of the webpage. Which of the following Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) styles should Jenny use so that the style changes the content marked up by a specific pair of tags but does not affect other content in the document? a. external b. internal c. embedded d. inline ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. With an inline style, you add a style to the start tag for an element, such as a heading or paragraph, using the style attribute. The style changes the content marked up by a specific pair of tags, but does not affect other content in the document. b. With an inline style, you add a style to the start tag for an element, such as a heading or paragraph, using the style attribute. The style changes the content marked up by a specific pair of tags, but does not affect other content in the document. c. With an inline style, you add a style to the start tag for an element, such as a heading or paragraph, using the style attribute. The style changes the content marked up by a specific pair of tags, but does not affect other content in the document. d. With an inline style, you add a style to the start tag for an element, such as a heading or paragraph, using the style attribute. The style changes the content marked up by a specific pair of tags, but does not affect other content in the document.

Page 52

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

10/8/2019 3:07 PM 1/2/2020 1:24 PM

109. Jenny decides to create an individual webpage for displaying the types of appliances manufactured by the company. She wants to give this webpage a style that is different from the rest of the website. Which of the following Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) styles should Jenny use if she wants to set the background color for the body section to green for the current webpage alone? a. external b. inline c. embedded d. linked ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. Use an embedded style sheet when you want to create styles for a single webpage that are different from the rest of the website. b. Use an embedded style sheet when you want to create styles for a single webpage that are different from the rest of the website. c. Use an embedded style sheet when you want to create styles for a single webpage that are different from the rest of the website. d. Use an embedded style sheet when you want to create styles for a single webpage that are different from the rest of the website.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: Using Cascading Style Sheets QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: CASE 4-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.03 - Define inline, embedded, and external styles and their order of precedence NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Cascading Style Sheets KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/2/2020 1:27 PM Critical Thinking Questions Case 4-2 Mike is working on the development of a webpage for FreshGroceries. He has been asked to create a list of all the essential daily household goods that people can purchase easily through this online grocery store. 110. Mike decides to use the Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) list-style properties to create the list of all the grocery goods offered by the online store. Which of the following style rules is accurate if Mike wants to define a filled square bullet for an unordered list of all the grocery items? a. uli { style-rule: square bullet type; } b. ul { Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 53

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS list-style-type: square; } ol c. ul { list-style-type: square; } d. <uli/> { list-style-type: square; } ANSWER: c FEEDBACK:

a. The following style rule defines a filled square bullet for an unordered list: ul { liststyle-type: square; }. b. The following style rule defines a filled square bullet for an unordered list: ul { liststyle-type: square; }. c. The following style rule defines a filled square bullet for an unordered list: ul { liststyle-type: square; }. d. The following style rule defines a filled square bullet for an unordered list: ul { liststyle-type: square; }.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: Creating Style Rules for Structural Elements QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: CASE 4-2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 04.12 - Create and style id and class attributes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using CSS List Properties KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 7:15 PM 111. Mike wants to further enhance the look of the webpage. He decides to display an image of some of the highly rated products beside the grocery list items instead of a standard bullet. On acquiring the required image from the owner of FreshGroceries, Mike saves it as a file named grocery.png. Which of the following style rules should be used to define the use of this image as a bullet for the unordered lists? a. uli { image-style-rule: (grocery.png); } b. ul { list-style-image: url(grocery.png); } c.

ul { list-style-type: image(grocery.png); } d. <uli/> { list-style-type: (grocery.png)<image/>; Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 54

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 4: Designing Webpages with CSS } ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

b a. The following style rule defines the image in the grocery.png file as the bullet for unordered lists: ul { list-style-image: url(grocery.png); }. b. The following style rule defines the image in the grocery.png file as the bullet for unordered lists: ul { list-style-image: url(grocery.png); }. c. The following style rule defines the image in the grocery.png file as the bullet for unordered lists: ul { list-style-image: url(grocery.png); }. d. The following style rule defines the image in the grocery.png file as the bullet for unordered lists: ul { list-style-image: url(grocery.png); }.

Page 55

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 5: Responsive Design Part 1: Designing for Mobile Devices 1. _____ is a website development strategy that strives to provide an optimal user experience of a website regardless of the device or browser used. a. Adaptive design b. Meta design c. Hotspot design d. Responsive design ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. Responsive design is a website development strategy that strives to provide an optimal user experience of a website regardless of the device used. b. Responsive design is a website development strategy that strives to provide an optimal user experience of a website regardless of the device used. c. Responsive design is a website development strategy that strives to provide an optimal user experience of a website regardless of the device used. d. Responsive design is a website development strategy that strives to provide an optimal user experience of a website regardless of the device used.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Introduction QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.01 - Explain the principles of responsive design NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introduction KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 9:05 PM 2. A _____ applies proportional size measurements to a webpage wireframe and content so that the content stretches, shrinks, and grows as the size of the viewport changes. a. hotspot layout b. fluid layout c. fixed layout d. grid layout ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. A fluid layout or grid applies proportional size measurements to the webpage wireframe and content so that the content stretches, shrinks, and grows as the size of the viewport changes. b. A fluid layout or grid applies proportional size measurements to the webpage wireframe and content so that the content stretches, shrinks, and grows as the size of the viewport changes. c. A fluid layout or grid applies proportional size measurements to the webpage wireframe and content so that the content stretches, shrinks, and grows as the size of the viewport changes. d. A fluid layout or grid applies proportional size measurements to the webpage wireframe and content so that the content stretches, shrinks, and grows as the size of the viewport changes. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 5: Responsive Design Part 1: Designing for Mobile Devices POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring Responsive Design QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.01 - Explain the principles of responsive design NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Responsive Design KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 9:07 PM 3. A _____ is the viewing area for a webpage, which is much smaller on a phone than on a traditional desktop. a. viewport b. viewbox c. hotspot d. slide ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. The viewport is the viewing area for the webpage, which is much smaller on a smartphone than on a traditional desktop. b. The viewport is the viewing area for the webpage, which is much smaller on a smartphone than on a traditional desktop. c. The viewport is the viewing area for the webpage, which is much smaller on a smartphone than on a traditional desktop. d. The viewport is the viewing area for the webpage, which is much smaller on a smartphone than on a traditional desktop.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring Responsive Design QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.05 - Define a viewport NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Responsive Design KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 9:08 PM 4. A _____ refers to the portion of a webpage that a user sees at any one time, regardless of device, browser, screen size, screen resolution, window size, or orientation. a. wireframe b. viewport c. slide d. hotspot Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 5: Responsive Design Part 1: Designing for Mobile Devices ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

b a. A viewport refers to the area of the webpage that a user sees at any one time, regardless of device, browser, screen size, screen resolution, window size, or orientation. b. A viewport refers to the area of the webpage that a user sees at any one time, regardless of device, browser, screen size, screen resolution, window size, or orientation. c. A viewport refers to the area of the webpage that a user sees at any one time, regardless of device, browser, screen size, screen resolution, window size, or orientation. d. A viewport refers to the area of the webpage that a user sees at any one time, regardless of device, browser, screen size, screen resolution, window size, or orientation.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring Responsive Design QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.05 - Define a viewport NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Responsive Design KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 9:09 PM 5. On a traditional Windows desktop computer, the _____ is usually the window itself. a. dongle b. hotspot c. viewport d. slide ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. On a traditional Windows desktop computer, the viewport is usually the window itself. b. On a traditional Windows desktop computer, the viewport is usually the window itself. c. On a traditional Windows desktop computer, the viewport is usually the window itself. d. On a traditional Windows desktop computer, the viewport is usually the window itself.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring Responsive Design QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.05 - Define a viewport Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 5: Responsive Design Part 1: Designing for Mobile Devices NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Exploring Responsive Design Bloom’s: Remember 10/8/2019 3:07 PM 12/19/2019 9:10 PM

6. _____ allow a webpage developer to detect the approximate pixel size of the current viewport. a. Media hotspots b. System viewports c. Media queries d. Meta ports ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. Media queries allow the webpage developer to detect the approximate pixel size of the current viewport. b. Media queries allow the webpage developer to detect the approximate pixel size of the current viewport. c. Media queries allow the webpage developer to detect the approximate pixel size of the current viewport. d. Media queries allow the webpage developer to detect the approximate pixel size of the current viewport.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring Responsive Design QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.01 - Explain the principles of responsive design NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Responsive Design KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 9:12 PM 7. _____ shrink and grow based on the size of a viewport. a. Flexible images b. Stable images c. Closed images d. Indexed images ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. Responsive, or flexible, images shrink and grow based on the size of the viewport. b. Responsive, or flexible, images shrink and grow based on the size of the viewport. c. Responsive, or flexible, images shrink and grow based on the size of the viewport. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 5: Responsive Design Part 1: Designing for Mobile Devices d. Responsive, or flexible, images shrink and grow based on the size of the viewport.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring Responsive Design QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 05.01 - Explain the principles of responsive design NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Responsive Design KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 9:14 PM 8. _____ use Cascading Style Sheet (CSS) rules to resize an image relative to the wireframe and viewport. a. Closed images b. Stable images c. Indexed images d. Flexible images ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. Flexible images use Cascading Style Sheet (CSS) rules to resize an image relative to the wireframe and viewport. b. Flexible images use Cascading Style Sheet (CSS) rules to resize an image relative to the wireframe and viewport. c. Flexible images use Cascading Style Sheet (CSS) rules to resize an image relative to the wireframe and viewport. d. Flexible images use Cascading Style Sheet (CSS) rules to resize an image relative to the wireframe and viewport.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring Responsive Design QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 05.01 - Explain the principles of responsive design NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Responsive Design KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 9:16 PM 9. Mobile websites are often identified with a(n) _____ prefix in the Uniform Resource Locator (URL). a. m.obi. b. e.m. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 5: Responsive Design Part 1: Designing for Mobile Devices c. cell. d. m. ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

d a. Mobile websites are often identified with an m. or mo. prefix in the URL. b. Mobile websites are often identified with an m. or mo. prefix in the URL. c. Mobile websites are often identified with an m. or mo. prefix in the URL. d. Mobile websites are often identified with an m. or mo. prefix in the URL.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Designing for Mobile Devices QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.03 - Explain the design principles of a mobile website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Designing for Mobile Devices KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/10/2020 1:52 PM 10. Identify a mobile website from the given Uniform Resource Locators (URLs). a. http://phsc.edu.mo/ b. http://m.phsc.edu/ c. http://im.phsc.edu/ d. http://phsc.edu.mobi/ ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. Mobile websites are often identified with an m. or mo. prefix in the URL such as http://m.phsc.edu/, Pasco-Hernando State College’s mobile website. b. Mobile websites are often identified with an m. or mo. prefix in the URL such as http://m.phsc.edu/, Pasco-Hernando State College’s mobile website. c. Mobile websites are often identified with an m. or mo. prefix in the URL such as http://m.phsc.edu/, Pasco-Hernando State College’s mobile website. d. Mobile websites are often identified with an m. or mo. prefix in the URL such as http://m.phsc.edu/, Pasco-Hernando State College’s mobile website.

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 5: Responsive Design Part 1: Designing for Mobile Devices DATE MODIFIED:

1/10/2020 1:54 PM

11. _____ seeks to optimize the viewing experience for a wide range of devices using one website. a. Responsive design b. Hotspot design c. Indexed design d. Coordinated design ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. Responsive design seeks to optimize the viewing experience for a wide range of devices using one website. b. Responsive design seeks to optimize the viewing experience for a wide range of devices using one website. c. Responsive design seeks to optimize the viewing experience for a wide range of devices using one website. d. Responsive design seeks to optimize the viewing experience for a wide range of devices using one website.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Designing for Mobile Devices QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.01 - Explain the principles of responsive design NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Designing for Mobile Devices KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 9:23 PM 12. A(n) _____ is considered by some to be a more productive and effective way to build a website from scratch because it forces a web developer to focus on the core, essential content first for the smallest viewport. a. app-first strategy b. mobile-first strategy c. view-first strategy d. information-first strategy ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. A mobile-first strategy is considered by some to be a more productive and effective way to build a website from scratch because it forces the web developer to focus on the core, essential content first for the smallest viewport. b. A mobile-first strategy is considered by some to be a more productive and effective way to build a website from scratch because it forces the web developer to focus on the core, essential content first for the smallest viewport. c. A mobile-first strategy is considered by some to be a more productive and effective way to build a website from scratch because it forces the web developer to focus on the core, essential content first for the smallest viewport. d. A mobile-first strategy is considered by some to be a more productive and Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 7

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 5: Responsive Design Part 1: Designing for Mobile Devices effective way to build a website from scratch because it forces the web developer to focus on the core, essential content first for the smallest viewport.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Designing for Mobile Devices QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.04 - Describe a mobile-first strategy NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Designing for Mobile Devices KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 9:31 PM 13. The term _____ refers to the ever-expanding number of devices that connect to the Internet to share information. a. Cloud Computing b. Internet of Things (IoT) c. Big Data d. Mobile-to-Mail (M2M) ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. The term Internet of Things (IoT) refers to the ever-expanding number of devices that connect to the Internet to share information. b. The term Internet of Things (IoT) refers to the ever-expanding number of devices that connect to the Internet to share information. c. The term Internet of Things (IoT) refers to the ever-expanding number of devices that connect to the Internet to share information. d. The term Internet of Things (IoT) refers to the ever-expanding number of devices that connect to the Internet to share information.

Page 8

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 5: Responsive Design Part 1: Designing for Mobile Devices c. Web scutter d. Web proxy ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

a a. Web analytics is the study of how users interact with a website. b. Web analytics is the study of how users interact with a website. c. Web analytics is the study of how users interact with a website. d. Web analytics is the study of how users interact with a website.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Responsive Design QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 05.01 - Explain the principles of responsive design NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Working with Flex Items KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 9:34 PM 15. _____ provide statistics on how many people visit a website as well as what browsers and devices were used and what choices the user made while at a website. a. Web proxies b. Web synchronizers c. Web crawlers d. Web analytics ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. Web analytics provide statistics on how many people visit a website as well as what browsers, devices, and choices the user made while at a website. b. Web analytics provide statistics on how many people visit a website as well as what browsers, devices, and choices the user made while at a website. c. Web analytics provide statistics on how many people visit a website as well as what browsers, devices, and choices the user made while at a website. d. Web analytics provide statistics on how many people visit a website as well as what browsers, devices, and choices the user made while at a website.

Page 9

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 5: Responsive Design Part 1: Designing for Mobile Devices DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

10/8/2019 3:07 PM 1/10/2020 2:05 PM

16. To create a(n) _____ grid, you design a webpage that uses a grid or columns. a. fluid b. indexed c. coded d. cast ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. To create a fluid grid, you design a webpage that uses a grid or columns. b. To create a fluid grid, you design a webpage that uses a grid or columns. c. To create a fluid grid, you design a webpage that uses a grid or columns. d. To create a fluid grid, you design a webpage that uses a grid or columns. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating a Fluid Layout QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 05.01 - Explain the principles of responsive design NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Fluid Layouts KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/8/2020 9:54 PM 17. Responsive designs are based on _____. a. fixed layouts b. fluid layouts c. closed layouts d. static layouts ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. Responsive designs are based on fluid layouts. b. Responsive designs are based on fluid layouts. c. Responsive designs are based on fluid layouts. d. Responsive designs are based on fluid layouts. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Responsive Design QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 05.01 - Explain the principles of responsive design NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 10

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 5: Responsive Design Part 1: Designing for Mobile Devices TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Using Fluid Layouts Bloom’s: Remember 10/8/2019 3:07 PM 12/19/2019 9:41 PM

18. _____ possess the same width even if the size of the viewport changes. a. Fixed layouts b. Fluid layouts c. Liquid layouts d. Adaptive layouts ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. Fixed layouts do not change in width based on the size of the viewport. b. Fixed layouts do not change in width based on the size of the viewport. c. Fixed layouts do not change in width based on the size of the viewport. d. Fixed layouts do not change in width based on the size of the viewport. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Responsive Design QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.01 - Explain the principles of responsive design NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Fluid Layouts KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 9:43 PM 19. _____ can involve a tremendous amount of horizontal scrolling and require much zooming on small viewports. a. Open layouts b. Liquid layouts c. Fixed layouts d. Fluid layouts ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. Fixed layouts can involve a tremendous amount of horizontal scrolling and require much zooming on small viewports. b. Fixed layouts can involve a tremendous amount of horizontal scrolling and require much zooming on small viewports. c. Fixed layouts can involve a tremendous amount of horizontal scrolling and require much zooming on small viewports. d. Fixed layouts can involve a tremendous amount of horizontal scrolling and require much zooming on small viewports.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY:

1 Easy

Page 11

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 5: Responsive Design Part 1: Designing for Mobile Devices REFERENCES: Using Responsive Design QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.01 - Explain the principles of responsive design NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Fluid Layouts KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 9:45 PM 20. You implement fluid layouts by measuring the widths of the wireframe elements and content in relative units such as percentages and _____. a. ems b. pts c. cms d. pcs ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. You implement fluid layouts by measuring the widths of the wireframe elements and content in relative units such as percentages and ems. b. You implement fluid layouts by measuring the widths of the wireframe elements and content in relative units such as percentages and ems. c. You implement fluid layouts by measuring the widths of the wireframe elements and content in relative units such as percentages and ems. d. You implement fluid layouts by measuring the widths of the wireframe elements and content in relative units such as percentages and ems.

Page 12

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 5: Responsive Design Part 1: Designing for Mobile Devices FEEDBACK:

a. One pixel is equal to one dot on the screen. b. One pixel is equal to one dot on the screen. c. One pixel is equal to one dot on the screen. d. One pixel is equal to one dot on the screen.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Responsive Design QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 05.01 - Explain the principles of responsive design NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Fluid Layouts KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 12/19/2019 9:49 PM 22. Developers use _____ to measure the widths of the wireframe elements and flexible images. a. percentages b. points c. picas d. pixels ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. Developers use percentage to measure the widths of the wireframe elements and flexible images. b. Developers use percentage to measure the widths of the wireframe elements and flexible images. c. Developers use percentage to measure the widths of the wireframe elements and flexible images. d. Developers use percentage to measure the widths of the wireframe elements and flexible images.

Page 13

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 5: Responsive Design Part 1: Designing for Mobile Devices a. favicon b. logo c. hamburger d. cart ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

c a. Many mobile viewport designs use a hamburger button or icon to display or toggle a navigation system. b. Many mobile viewport designs use a hamburger button or icon to display or toggle a navigation system. c. Many mobile viewport designs use a hamburger button or icon to display or toggle a navigation system. d. Many mobile viewport designs use a hamburger button or icon to display or toggle a navigation system.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Following a Mobile-First Strategy QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.11 - Create a mobile-friendly navigation system NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Fluid Layout KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/3/2020 2:34 PM 24. The CSS property to round corners is ______. a. list-style-type b. border-radius c. border-style-type d. list-radius ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

b a. The CSS property to round corners is border-radius. b. The CSS property to round corners is border-radius. c. The CSS property to round corners is border-radius. d. The CSS property to round corners is border-radius.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Following a Mobile-First Strategy QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 05.13 - Make rounded corners NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Following a Mobile-First Strategy Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 14

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 5: Responsive Design Part 1: Designing for Mobile Devices KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Bloom’s: Remember 10/8/2019 3:07 PM 1/3/2020 2:41 PM

25. Displaying desktop content in a mobile viewport can be prevented by setting the value of the display property to _____. a. none b. only_mobile c. no_desk d. hide ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

a a. Displaying desktop content in a mobile viewport can be prevented by setting the value of the display property to none. b. Displaying desktop content in a mobile viewport can be prevented by setting the value of the display property to none. c. Displaying desktop content in a mobile viewport can be prevented by setting the value of the display property to none. d. Displaying desktop content in a mobile viewport can be prevented by setting the value of the display property to none.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Following a Mobile-First Strategy QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.05 - Define a viewport NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Following a Mobile-First Strategy KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/8/2020 12:18 PM 26. The _____ viewport element provides the browser with information about the page’s dimensions and how to adjust scaling on the webpage. a. span b. meta c. length d. label ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

b a. The meta viewport element provides the browser with information about the page’s dimensions and how to adjust scaling on the webpage. b. The meta viewport element provides the browser with information about the page’s dimensions and how to adjust scaling on the webpage. c. The meta viewport element provides the browser with information about the page’s dimensions and how to adjust scaling on the webpage.

Page 15

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 5: Responsive Design Part 1: Designing for Mobile Devices d. The meta viewport element provides the browser with information about the page’s dimensions and how to adjust scaling on the webpage.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Following a Mobile-First Strategy QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.06 - Insert a meta viewport element NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using the Span Element KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/8/2020 12:27 PM 27. Hiding nonessential content in the mobile viewport minimizes _____. a. scrolling b. clicking c. hashing d. indexing ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. Hiding nonessential content in the mobile viewport minimizes scrolling. b. Hiding nonessential content in the mobile viewport minimizes scrolling. c. Hiding nonessential content in the mobile viewport minimizes scrolling. d. Hiding nonessential content in the mobile viewport minimizes scrolling. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Following a Mobile-First Strategy QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.04 - Describe a mobile-first strategy NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Following a Mobile-First Strategy KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/8/2020 12:22 PM 28. Identify the meta tag that must be added to the head section of each responsive webpage to ensure that the page initially loads in a layout width that matches the viewport of the device. a. <meta name="viewport" content="width=device-width, initial-scale=1"> b. <meta section="viewport" page="width=device-width, Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 16

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 5: Responsive Design Part 1: Designing for Mobile Devices initial-scale=1"> c. <meta resp="viewport" width="width=device-width, initial-scale=1"> d. <meta wframe="viewport" view="width=device-width, initial-scale=1"> ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. The meta tag that must be added to the head section of each responsive webpage to ensure that the page initially loads in a layout width that matches the viewport of the device is < meta name="viewport" content="width=device-width, initial-scale=1" >. b. The meta tag that must be added to the head section of each responsive webpage to ensure that the page initially loads in a layout width that matches the viewport of the device is < meta name="viewport" content="width=device-width, initial-scale=1" >. c. The meta tag that must be added to the head section of each responsive webpage to ensure that the page initially loads in a layout width that matches the viewport of the device is < meta name="viewport" content="width=device-width, initial-scale=1" >. d. The meta tag that must be added to the head section of each responsive webpage to ensure that the page initially loads in a layout width that matches the viewport of the device is < meta name="viewport" content="width=device-width, initial-scale=1" >.

Page 17

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 5: Responsive Design Part 1: Designing for Mobile Devices quickly created serious problems for webpage developers because smaller viewports often required excessive zooming. c. The explosive growth of mobile browsers, including those on phones and tablets, quickly created serious problems for webpage developers because smaller viewports often required excessive zooming. d. The explosive growth of mobile browsers, including those on phones and tablets, quickly created serious problems for webpage developers because smaller viewports often required excessive zooming.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Designing for Mobile Devices QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.03 - Explain the design principles of a mobile website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Adding Meta Tags KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/8/2020 12:34 PM 30. A device _____ is used to test a mobile application on a mobile device. a. modulator b. emulator c. adapter d. synchronizer ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. Device emulators are used to emulate mobile applications on mobile devices. b. Device emulators are used to emulate mobile applications on mobile devices. c. Device emulators are used to emulate mobile applications on mobile devices. d. Device emulators are used to emulate mobile applications on mobile devices. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Following a Mobile-First Strategy QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.11 - Create a mobile-friendly navigation system NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Testing Webpages in Viewports of Different Sizes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/8/2020 12:38 PM 31. If a document has any errors, _____ gives one a chance to identify and correct them. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 18

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 5: Responsive Design Part 1: Designing for Mobile Devices a. validating b. hyperlinking c. emulating d. viewporting ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

a a. If a document has any errors, validating gives you a chance to identify and correct them. b. If a document has any errors, validating gives you a chance to identify and correct them. c. If a document has any errors, validating gives you a chance to identify and correct them. d. If a document has any errors, validating gives you a chance to identify and correct them.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Mobile-Friendly Test QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.11 - Create a mobile-friendly navigation system NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Testing Webpages in Viewports of Different Sizes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/10/2020 2:33 PM 32. _____ is an effective troubleshooting tool during the development process and adds a valuable level of professionalism to one’s work. a. Stacking b. Validation c. Synchronization d. Indexing ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. Validation is an effective troubleshooting tool during the development process and adds a valuable level of professionalism to your work. b. Validation is an effective troubleshooting tool during the development process and adds a valuable level of professionalism to your work. c. Validation is an effective troubleshooting tool during the development process and adds a valuable level of professionalism to your work. d. Validation is an effective troubleshooting tool during the development process and adds a valuable level of professionalism to your work.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE:

1 Easy Mobile-Friendly Test Multiple Choice

Page 19

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 5: Responsive Design Part 1: Designing for Mobile Devices HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.11 - Create a mobile-friendly navigation system NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Testing Webpages in Viewports of Different Sizes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/8/2020 12:42 PM 33. Smaller viewports often require excessive _____ by users. a. scrolling b. zooming c. editing d. indexing ANSWER: a, b FEEDBACK: a. Smaller viewports often required excessive zooming and scrolling. b. Smaller viewports often required excessive zooming and scrolling. c. Smaller viewports often required excessive zooming and scrolling. d. Smaller viewports often required excessive zooming and scrolling. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Designing for Mobile Devices QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Response HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.03 - Explain the design principles of a mobile website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Designing for Mobile Devices KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/8/2020 12:43 PM 34. A webpage with a _____ layout adjusts the webpage design and content based on the size of the viewport. a. static b. fixed c. fluid d. volatile ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. A webpage with a fluid layout adjusts the webpage design and content based on the size of the viewport.

b. A webpage with a fluid layout adjusts the webpage design and content based on the size of the viewport. c. A webpage with a fluid layout adjusts the webpage design and content based on the size of the viewport. d. A webpage with a fluid layout adjusts the webpage design and content based on Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 20

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 5: Responsive Design Part 1: Designing for Mobile Devices the size of the viewport.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Responsive Design QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Response HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 05.01 - Explain the principles of responsive design NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Fluid Layouts KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/8/2020 12:47 PM 35. Which best practices must be considered when designing a website for mobile viewports? a. 100% percent of the screen space must be used. b. All page content must be displayed. c. The load times must be kept minimal. d. The layout must be simple. ANSWER: a, c, d FEEDBACK: a. Best practices include: make use of 100% of the screen space, design the navigation to be easy and intuitive, keep load times minimal, enhance load times by removing bandwidth-intensive content and streamlining your HTML code, display essential page content and hide nonessential page content, make the content easy to access and read, and design a simple layout. b. Best practices include: make use of 100% of the screen space, design the navigation to be easy and intuitive, keep load times minimal, enhance load times by removing bandwidth-intensive content and streamlining your HTML code, display essential page content and hide nonessential page content, make the content easy to access and read, and design a simple layout. c. Best practices include: make use of 100% of the screen space, design the navigation to be easy and intuitive, keep load times minimal, enhance load times by removing bandwidth-intensive content and streamlining your HTML code, display essential page content and hide nonessential page content, make the content easy to access and read, and design a simple layout. d. Best practices include: make use of 100% of the screen space, design the navigation to be easy and intuitive, keep load times minimal, enhance load times by removing bandwidth-intensive content and streamlining your HTML code, display essential page content and hide nonessential page content, make the content easy to access and read, and design a simple layout.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Following a Mobile-First Strategy QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Response HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.04 - Describe a mobile-first strategy NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 21

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 5: Responsive Design Part 1: Designing for Mobile Devices TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Following a Mobile-First Strategy Bloom’s: Remember 10/8/2019 3:07 PM 1/9/2020 1:23 PM

36. By applying adaptive design principles, a webpage and its content respond to the screen size of a user’s device to minimize unnecessary scrolling and zooming. ANSWER: False - responsive design FEEDBACK: Correct By applying responsive design principles, the webpage and content respond to the screen size of the user’s device to minimize unnecessary scrolling and zooming, Incorrect By applying responsive design principles, the webpage and content respond to the screen size of the user’s device to minimize unnecessary scrolling and zooming,

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Introduction QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 05.01 - Explain the principles of responsive design NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introduction KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/8/2020 12:56 PM 37. Bootstrap queries allow a webpage developer to selectively apply Cascading Style Sheet (CSS) rules that work best for a given viewport size. ANSWER: False - Media queries FEEDBACK: Correct Media queries allow a webpage developer to selectively apply Cascading Style Sheet (CSS) rules that work best for a given viewport size. Incorrect Media queries allow a webpage developer to selectively apply Cascading Style Sheet (CSS) rules that work best for a given viewport size.

Page 22

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 5: Responsive Design Part 1: Designing for Mobile Devices 38. Fixed images do not have height and width attributes or values in a Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) document. ANSWER: False - Flexible images FEEDBACK: Correct Flexible images do not have height and width attributes or values in the HTML document. Incorrect Flexible images do not have height and width attributes or values in the HTML document.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring Responsive Design QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 05.01 - Explain the principles of responsive design NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Fluid Layouts KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/10/2020 2:47 PM 40. Following a mobile-first strategy, a web developer designs the flexible wireframe and essential content for the smallest viewport first, progressively adding more content as the viewport grows. ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct Following a mobile-first strategy, a web developer designs the flexible wireframe and essential content for the smallest viewport first, progressively adding more content as the viewport grows. Incorrect Following a mobile-first strategy, a web developer designs the flexible wireframe Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 23

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 5: Responsive Design Part 1: Designing for Mobile Devices and essential content for the smallest viewport first, progressively adding more content as the viewport grows.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Designing for Mobile Devices QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.04 - Describe a mobile-first strategy NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Making Images Flexible KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/8/2020 1:02 PM 41. When creating styles that include units of measurement, do not put a space between the value and the unit of measure. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct When creating styles that include units of measurement, do not put a space between the value and the unit of measure. Incorrect When creating styles that include units of measurement, do not put a space between the value and the unit of measure.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Responsive Design QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 05.01 - Explain the principles of responsive design KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 1/8/2020 9:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/10/2020 4:49 PM 42. Webpages that require users to zoom and scroll to read and navigate the website attract more visitors. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct Webpages that require users to zoom and scroll to read and navigate the website drive visitors away. Incorrect Webpages that require users to zoom and scroll to read and navigate the website drive visitors away.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY:

1 Easy

Page 24

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 5: Responsive Design Part 1: Designing for Mobile Devices REFERENCES: Introduction QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 05.01 - Explain the principles of responsive design NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introduction KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/8/2020 1:03 PM 43. On a traditional Windows desktop computer, a viewport is usually the window itself. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct On a traditional Windows desktop computer, a viewport is usually the window itself. Incorrect On a traditional Windows desktop computer, a viewport is usually the window itself.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring Responsive Design QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.05 - Define a viewport NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Responsive Design KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/8/2020 8:43 PM 44. A website developed with responsive design principles from the very beginning is more work to maintain down the road. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct A website developed with responsive design principles from the very beginning is less work to maintain down the road. Incorrect A website developed with responsive design principles from the very beginning is less work to maintain down the road.

Page 25

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 5: Responsive Design Part 1: Designing for Mobile Devices NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Designing for Mobile Devices Bloom’s: Remember 10/8/2019 3:07 PM 1/8/2020 8:44 PM

45. The mobile website approach means that developers revamp an existing website to suit small mobile viewports instead of building a new and parallel website from scratch. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct The mobile website approach means that developers build a new, parallel website from scratch, specifically designing it for small mobile viewports. Incorrect The mobile website approach means that developers build a new, parallel website from scratch, specifically designing it for small mobile viewports.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Designing for Mobile Devices QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.03 - Explain the design principles of a mobile website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Designing for Mobile Devices KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/8/2020 8:46 PM 46. A mobile-first strategy employs responsive design principles. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct A mobile-first strategy employs responsive design principles. Incorrect A mobile-first strategy employs responsive design principles.

Page 26

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 5: Responsive Design Part 1: Designing for Mobile Devices DATE MODIFIED:

1/8/2020 8:47 PM

47. Following a mobile-first strategy, a web developer designs the flexible wireframe and essential content for the largest viewport first. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct Following a mobile-first strategy, a web developer designs the flexible wireframe and essential content for the smallest viewport first, progressively adding more content as the viewport grows. Incorrect Following a mobile-first strategy, a web developer designs the flexible wireframe and essential content for the smallest viewport first, progressively adding more content as the viewport grows.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Designing for Mobile Devices QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.04 - Describe a mobile-first strategy NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Designing for Mobile Devices KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/8/2020 8:51 PM 48. Fluid layouts can involve a tremendous amount of horizontal scrolling and require a lot of zooming on small viewports. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct Fixed layouts can involve a tremendous amount of horizontal scrolling and require much zooming on small viewports. Incorrect Fixed layouts can involve a tremendous amount of horizontal scrolling and require much zooming on small viewports.

Page 27

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 5: Responsive Design Part 1: Designing for Mobile Devices DATE MODIFIED:

1/10/2020 4:55 PM

49. The data from web analytics helps a web developer design a site to meet the needs of their desired audience. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct The data from web analytics helps a web developer design a site to meet the needs of their desired audience. Incorrect The data from web analytics helps a web developer design a site to meet the needs of their desired audience.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Responsive Design QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 05.01 - Explain the principles of responsive design NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Fluid Layouts KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/8/2020 9:00 PM 50. Fixed layouts are appropriate for webpages used in controlled environments such as those created for a specific purpose within an internal company intranet. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct Although fixed layouts do not work well for smaller viewports, they may still be appropriate for webpages used in controlled environments such as those created for a specific purpose within an internal company intranet. Incorrect Although fixed layouts do not work well for smaller viewports, they may still be appropriate for webpages used in controlled environments such as those created for a specific purpose within an internal company intranet.

Page 28

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 5: Responsive Design Part 1: Designing for Mobile Devices 51. Responsive sites use pc as their unit of measurement. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct Responsive sites use relative units of measurement such as percentages and ems. Incorrect Responsive sites use relative units of measurement such as percentages and ems.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Responsive Design QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 05.01 - Explain the principles of responsive design NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Fluid Layouts KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/9/2020 1:02 PM 52. Developers use percentages to measure the widths of the wireframe elements and flexible images. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct Developers use percentages to measure the widths of the wireframe elements and flexible images. Incorrect Developers use percentages to measure the widths of the wireframe elements and flexible images.

Page 29

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 5: Responsive Design Part 1: Designing for Mobile Devices FEEDBACK:

Correct

A media query detects the media type (such as screen or print) and capabilities of the device that the browser is running on (such as the size of the viewport in pixels or its orientation of portrait versus landscape). Incorrect A media query detects the media type (such as screen or print) and capabilities of the device that the browser is running on (such as the size of the viewport in pixels or its orientation of portrait versus landscape).

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating a Fluid Layout QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.03 - Explain the design principles of a mobile website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Fluid Layout KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/8/2020 9:16 PM 54. The viewport refers to the area of the webpage that a user sees at any one time, regardless of device, browser, screen size, screen resolution, window size, or orientation. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct The viewport refers to the area of the webpage that a user sees at any one time, regardless of device, browser, screen size, screen resolution, window size, or orientation. Incorrect The viewport refers to the area of the webpage that a user sees at any one time, regardless of device, browser, screen size, screen resolution, window size, or orientation.

Page 30

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 5: Responsive Design Part 1: Designing for Mobile Devices ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

False Correct

It is a best practice to use a single-column layout for a mobile display, as this prevents scrolling horizontally. Incorrect It is a best practice to use a single-column layout for a mobile display, as this prevents scrolling horizontally.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Following a Mobile-First Strategy QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.04 - Describe a mobile-first strategy NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Following a Mobile-First Strategy KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/8/2020 9:21 PM 56. Displaying what mobile device users need and want on a single screen with extensive scrolling and zooming creates a more enjoyable experience. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct Displaying what mobile device users need and want on a single screen with minimal scrolling creates a more enjoyable experience. Incorrect Displaying what mobile device users need and want on a single screen with minimal scrolling creates a more enjoyable experience.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Following a Mobile-First Strategy QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.04 - Describe a mobile-first strategy NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Following a Mobile-First Strategy KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/8/2020 9:22 PM 57. Styling content for mobile devices is the same as styling content for a desktop display. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct Styling content for mobile devices is different from styling content for a desktop Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 31

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 5: Responsive Design Part 1: Designing for Mobile Devices display. Incorrect Styling content for mobile devices is different from styling content for a desktop display.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Following a Mobile-First Strategy QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.04 - Describe a mobile-first strategy NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Following a Mobile-First Strategy KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/8/2020 9:23 PM 58. If you already have page content, you may need to hide some content for a mobile viewport. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct If you already have page content, you may need to hide some content for a mobile viewport. Incorrect If you already have page content, you may need to hide some content for a mobile viewport.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Following a Mobile-First Strategy QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.04 - Describe a mobile-first strategy NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Following a Mobile-First Strategy KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/8/2020 9:24 PM 59. Load times may be enhanced by adding bandwidth-intensive content. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct Enhance load times by removing bandwidth-intensive content and streamlining your HTML code. Incorrect Enhance load times by removing bandwidth-intensive content and streamlining your HTML code. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 32

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 5: Responsive Design Part 1: Designing for Mobile Devices POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Following a Mobile-First Strategy QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.04 - Describe a mobile-first strategy NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Following a Mobile-First Strategy KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/8/2020 9:26 PM 60. A top property can never have a value of zero. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct You can specify a top property with a value of zero. Incorrect You can specify a top property with a value of zero.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Following a Mobile-First Strategy QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.04 - Describe a mobile-first strategy NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Following a Mobile-First Strategy KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/8/2020 9:29 PM 61. By default, element borders use a 90-degree angle at each corner. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct By default, element borders use a 90-degree angle at each corner. Incorrect By default, element borders use a 90-degree angle at each corner.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Following a Mobile-First Strategy QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 05.13 - Make rounded corners Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 33

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 5: Responsive Design Part 1: Designing for Mobile Devices NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Following a Mobile-First Strategy Bloom’s: Remember 10/8/2019 3:07 PM 1/8/2020 9:38 PM

62. When following a mobile-first strategy, a mobile user must be presented with desktop content also. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct When following a mobile-first strategy, provide the mobile user with the most important, essential page content and remove or hide the desktop content. Incorrect When following a mobile-first strategy, provide the mobile user with the most important, essential page content and remove or hide the desktop content.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Following a Mobile-First Strategy QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.04 - Describe a mobile-first strategy NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Following a Mobile-First Strategy KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/8/2020 9:37 PM 63. The appropriate meta viewport element helps the webpage initially load in a size that matches the viewport size. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct The appropriate meta viewport element helps the webpage initially load in a size that matches the viewport size. Incorrect The appropriate meta viewport element helps the webpage initially load in a size that matches the viewport size.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Following a Mobile-First Strategy QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.06 - Insert a meta viewport element NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Following a Mobile-First Strategy KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 34

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 5: Responsive Design Part 1: Designing for Mobile Devices DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

10/8/2019 3:07 PM 1/8/2020 9:44 PM

64. Traditionally, for a browser to use a specified font, it had to be stored on the local client machine. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct Traditionally, for a browser to use a specified font, it had to be stored on the local client machine. Incorrect Traditionally, for a browser to use a specified font, it had to be stored on the local client machine.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Following a Mobile-First Strategy QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.09 - Integrate custom fonts NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using the Span Element KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/9/2020 12:23 PM 65. Fixed layouts do not work well for smaller viewports. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct Fixed layouts do not work well for smaller viewports. Incorrect Fixed layouts do not work well for smaller viewports.

Page 35

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 5: Responsive Design Part 1: Designing for Mobile Devices b. False ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

True Correct

Validating a Hypertext Markup Language document will check the document for any errors. Incorrect Validating a Hypertext Markup Language document will check the document for any errors.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Mobile-Friendly Test QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.11 - Create a mobile-friendly navigation system NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Testing Webpages in Viewports of Different Sizes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/8/2020 9:49 PM 67. The term _________ is preferred over “window” because windows are generally not displayed in the browsers of mobile devices. ANSWER: viewport POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring Responsive Design QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.05 - Define a viewport NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Responsive Design KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/9/2020 11:25 AM 68. A completely separate, parallel website optimized for mobile users is called a(n) _________ website. ANSWER: mobile POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Designing for Mobile Devices QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.03 - Explain the design principles of a mobile website Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 36

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 5: Responsive Design Part 1: Designing for Mobile Devices NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Designing for Mobile Devices Bloom’s: Remember 10/8/2019 3:07 PM 1/9/2020 11:26 AM

69. A(n) _________ layout applies proportional size measurements to a webpage wireframe and content so that the content stretches, shrinks, and grows as the size of the viewport changes. ANSWER: fluid POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring Responsive Design QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 05.01 - Explain the principles of responsive design NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Responsive Design KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/9/2020 11:28 AM 70. Before creating mobile style rules in a CSS file, begin with a(n) _____ to signify where the style rules begin. ANSWER: comment POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Following a Mobile-First Strategy QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.04 - Describe a mobile-first strategy NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Designing for Mobile Devices KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/9/2020 1:03 PM 71. The _________ strategy makes the most sense when mobile users are a very high priority for a website and when there is the luxury of building the website from scratch. ANSWER: mobile-first POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Designing for Mobile Devices Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 37

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 5: Responsive Design Part 1: Designing for Mobile Devices QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.04 - Describe a mobile-first strategy NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Designing for Mobile Devices KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/9/2020 11:33 AM 72. Fixed layouts can involve a tremendous amount of horizontal _________ and require much zooming on small viewports. ANSWER: scrolling POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Responsive Design QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 05.01 - Explain the principles of responsive design NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Fluid Layouts KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/9/2020 11:34 AM 73. _________ layouts use well-defined measurement units such as pixels to describe the width of the areas of a wireframe that set the width of the content regardless of the size of the viewport. ANSWER: Fixed POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Responsive Design QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 05.01 - Explain the principles of responsive design NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Designing for Mobile Devices KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/9/2020 11:36 AM 74. According to statista.com, nearly 50 percent of websites were visited between 2017 and 2018 worldwide using Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 38

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 5: Responsive Design Part 1: Designing for Mobile Devices a(n) ______. ANSWER: mobile device POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Introduction QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 05.01 - Explain the principles of responsive design NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Fluid Layouts KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/9/2020 11:38 AM 75. _________ layouts do not work well for smaller viewports. ANSWER: Fixed POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Responsive Design QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 05.01 - Explain the principles of responsive design NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Fluid Layouts KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/9/2020 11:39 AM 76. Points are used to measure font and line sizes in _________ media. ANSWER: print POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Responsive Design QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 05.01 - Explain the principles of responsive design NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Fluid Layouts KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 39

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 5: Responsive Design Part 1: Designing for Mobile Devices DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

10/8/2019 3:07 PM 1/9/2020 11:40 AM

77. The _________ measurement should not be used for width measurements, as this creates a fixed, unresponsive layout. ANSWER: px pixel POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Responsive Design QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 05.01 - Explain the principles of responsive design NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Fluid Layouts KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/9/2020 11:42 AM 78. When you use _____ images, you allow them to grow and shrink with the viewport. ANSWER: responsive POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating a Fluid Layout QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.01 - Explain the principles of responsive design NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating a Fluid Layout KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/9/2020 11:45 AM 79. The _____ button consists of three horizontal, parallel lines. ANSWER: hamburger POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Following a Mobile-First Strategy QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.04 - Describe a mobile-first strategy Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 40

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 5: Responsive Design Part 1: Designing for Mobile Devices NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Creating a Fluid Layout Bloom’s: Remember 10/8/2019 3:07 PM 1/9/2020 11:48 AM

80. In Google Chrome Device Mode, the _____ feature allows you to toggle the display between portrait and landscape. ANSWER: rotate POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Following a Mobile-First Strategy QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.07 - Use a mobile simulator NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Making Images Flexible KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/9/2020 11:52 AM 81. In Google Chrome Device Mode, the _____ feature allows you to enter specific dimensions to simulate. ANSWER: device dimensions POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Following a Mobile-First Strategy QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.07 - Use a mobile simulator NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Make images flexible KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/9/2020 11:55 AM 82. To create a(n) _____ element, you specify a position property with a value of sticky. ANSWER: sticky POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Following a Mobile-First Strategy QUESTION TYPE: Completion Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 41

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 5: Responsive Design Part 1: Designing for Mobile Devices HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.08 - Create a sticky element NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Making Images Flexible KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/9/2020 11:57 AM 83. An ideal webpage in a _________ viewport requires little or no scrolling. ANSWER: mobile POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Following a Mobile-First Strategy QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.04 - Describe a mobile-first strategy NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Following a Mobile-First Strategy KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/9/2020 12:09 PM 84. Google _____ includes a large selection of custom fonts that you can integrate within your webpage design. ANSWER: Fonts POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Following a Mobile-First Strategy QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.09 - Integrate custom fonts NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Following a Mobile-First Strategy KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/9/2020 12:12 PM 85. A(n) _____ font uses small lines or embellishments at the ends of letters. ANSWER: serif POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 42

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 5: Responsive Design Part 1: Designing for Mobile Devices DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Following a Mobile-First Strategy QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.09 - Integrate custom fonts NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Following a Mobile-First Strategy KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/10/2020 5:31 PM 86. Every time a new webpage is created, it must be run through W3C’s _________ to check the document for errors. ANSWER: validator POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Mobile-Friendly Test QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.11 - Create a mobile-friendly navigation system NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Testing Webpages in Viewports of Different Sizes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/9/2020 12:29 PM Identify the letter of the choice that best matches the phrase or definition. a. Responsive design b. Fixed layouts c. Fluid layout d. Emulator e. Viewport f. Internet of Things g. Media queries h. Flexible images DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring Responsive Design Introduction Using Responsive Design Following a Mobile-First Strategy Designing for Mobile Devices QUESTION TYPE: Matching HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.01 - Explain the principles of responsive design LO:05.03 - Explain the design principles of a mobile website LO:05.05 - Define a viewport Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 43

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 5: Responsive Design Part 1: Designing for Mobile Devices LO:05.07 - Use a mobile simulator LO:05.11 - Create a mobile-friendly navigation system NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Designing for Mobile Devices Exploring Responsive Design Introduction Making Images Flexible Testing Webpages in Viewports of Different Sizes Using Fluid Layouts KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/10/2020 5:35 PM 87. In this layout, content is not resized based on the size of viewport. ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 88. It enables one to test a website across multiple types of devices. ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 89. It refers to the ever-expanding number of devices that connect to the Internet to share information. ANSWER: f POINTS: 1 90. They do not have height and width attributes or values in a Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) document. ANSWER: h POINTS: 1 91. It allows a webpage developer to detect the approximate pixel size of the current viewport. ANSWER: g POINTS: 1 92. It is a website development strategy that strives to provide an optimal user experience of a website regardless of the device or browser used. ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 93. It applies proportional size measurements to a webpage wireframe and content so that the content stretches, shrinks, and grows as the size of the viewport changes. ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 94. It refers to the portion of the webpage that a user sees at any one time, regardless of the device. ANSWER: e POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 44

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 5: Responsive Design Part 1: Designing for Mobile Devices 95. Discuss responsive design. Include the terms fluid layout, media queries, and responsive images in your response. ANSWER: Answers will vary. Responsive design is a website development strategy that strives to provide an optimal user experience of a website regardless of the device or browser used. By applying responsive design principles, the webpage and content respond to the screen size of the user’s device to minimize unnecessary scrolling and zooming, making reading and interacting with the site as convenient and intuitive as possible. Most discussions of responsive design highlight the following three concepts: •

•

Fluid layout: A fluid layout or grid applies proportional size measurements to the webpage wireframe and content so that the content stretches, shrinks, and grows as the size of the viewport changes. The viewport is the viewing area for the webpage, which is much smaller on a smartphone than on a traditional desktop. On a traditional Windows desktop computer, the viewport is usually the window itself, but the term “viewport” is preferred over “window” because a window on a traditional desktop display might not be maximized to fill the entire screen. Just keep in mind that the viewport refers to the area of the webpage that a user sees at any one time, regardless of device, browser, screen size, screen resolution, window size, or orientation. Responsive or flexible images: As previously discussed in Chapter 3, responsive images shrink and grow based on the size of the viewport. Responsive images do not have height and width attributes or values in the HTML document. Rather, responsive images use CSS rules to resize the image relative to the wireframe and viewport. Media queries: Media queries allow the webpage developer to detect the approximate pixel size of the current viewport. The developer can then selectively apply CSS rules that work best for that viewport size. CSS3 standards expanded the capabilities of media queries.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring Responsive Design QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.01 - Explain the principles of responsive design NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Responsive Design KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/10/2020 5:38 PM 96. Describe in detail the mobile-first strategy. ANSWER: Answers will vary. The mobile-first approach focuses on styling content as appropriate for smaller mobile devices. One goal in designing for mobile devices is to prominently display the content accessed most by users. It is also a best practice to use a singlecolumn layout for a mobile display, as this prevents scrolling horizontally. Displaying what mobile device users need and want on a single screen with minimal scrolling Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 45

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 5: Responsive Design Part 1: Designing for Mobile Devices creates a more enjoyable experience. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: Following a Mobile-First Strategy QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.04 - Describe a mobile-first strategy NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Designing for Mobile Devices KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/9/2020 12:44 PM 97. Explain in one’s own words the best practices to be considered when designing for mobile viewports. ANSWER: Answers will vary. A website developer must optimize the site’s interface to maximize the mobile user experience. The following are some key best practices when designing for mobile viewports. 1. Make use of 100% of the screen space. 2. Design the navigation to be easy and intuitive. 3. Keep load times minimal. Enhance load times by removing bandwidth-intensive content and streamlining your HTML code. 4. Display essential page content and hide nonessential page content. 5. Make the content easy to access and read. 6. Design a simple layout. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Following a Mobile-First Strategy QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.04 - Describe a mobile-first strategy NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Following a Mobile-First Strategy KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/9/2020 12:45 PM Critical Thinking Questions Zach, a consultant, has recently launched a website for his business. His audience includes people who use both desktops and smartphones. 98. Zach wants to present his content in such a way that the site content shrinks and expands according to the type of device used to access the site. Which of the following layouts should Zach use for this purpose? Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 46

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 5: Responsive Design Part 1: Designing for Mobile Devices a. static layout b. fluid layout c. fixed layout d. grid layout ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

b a. A fluid layout or grid applies proportional size measurements to the webpage wireframe and content so that the content stretches, shrinks, and grows as the size of the viewport changes. b. A fluid layout or grid applies proportional size measurements to the webpage wireframe and content so that the content stretches, shrinks, and grows as the size of the viewport changes. c. A fluid layout or grid applies proportional size measurements to the webpage wireframe and content so that the content stretches, shrinks, and grows as the size of the viewport changes. d. A fluid layout or grid applies proportional size measurements to the webpage wireframe and content so that the content stretches, shrinks, and grows as the size of the viewport changes.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring Responsive Design QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 5-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.01 - Explain the principles of responsive design NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Responsive Design KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/11/2020 7:10 AM 99. Zach wants to detect the approximate pixel size of the current viewport so that it will help him selectively apply Cascading Style Sheet (CSS) rules that work best for that viewport size. Identify the concept of responsive design will help Zach get the required information. a. media hotspots b. system viewports c. media queries d. meta ports ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. Media queries allow the webpage developer to detect the approximate pixel size of the current viewport. The developer can then selectively apply CSS rules that work best for that viewport size. b. Media queries allow the webpage developer to detect the approximate pixel size of the current viewport. The developer can then selectively apply CSS rules that work best for that viewport size. c. Media queries allow the webpage developer to detect the approximate pixel size of the current viewport. The developer can then selectively apply CSS rules that Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 47

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 5: Responsive Design Part 1: Designing for Mobile Devices work best for that viewport size. d. Media queries allow the webpage developer to detect the approximate pixel size of the current viewport. The developer can then selectively apply CSS rules that work best for that viewport size.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring Responsive Design QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 5-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 05.01 - Explain the principles of responsive design NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Exploring Responsive Design KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/11/2020 7:12 AM Critical Thinking Questions Aslina, a wildlife photographer, has started her own website that showcases her work. 100. While developing her website, she wants to follow a mobile-first strategy. What viewport should she focus on first? a. hybrid b. smallest c. laptop d. desktop ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. Following a mobile-first strategy, a web developer designs the flexible wireframe and essential content for the smallest viewport first, progressively adding more content as the viewport grows. b. Following a mobile-first strategy, a web developer designs the flexible wireframe and essential content for the smallest viewport first, progressively adding more content as the viewport grows. c. Following a mobile-first strategy, a web developer designs the flexible wireframe and essential content for the smallest viewport first, progressively adding more content as the viewport grows. d. Following a mobile-first strategy, a web developer designs the flexible wireframe and essential content for the smallest viewport first, progressively adding more content as the viewport grows.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Designing for Mobile Devices QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 5-2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.04 - Describe a mobile-first strategy Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 48

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 5: Responsive Design Part 1: Designing for Mobile Devices NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Using Fluid Layouts Bloom’s: Remember 10/8/2019 3:07 PM 1/9/2020 12:54 PM

101. Identify the cascading Style Sheet (CSS) unit Aslina should use to measure the width of the wireframe elements in her website. a. % b. px c. pc d. in ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

a a. You implement fluid layouts by measuring the widths of the wireframe elements and content in relative units such as percentages and ems.

b. You implement fluid layouts by measuring the widths of the wireframe elements and content in relative units such as percentages and ems. c. You implement fluid layouts by measuring the widths of the wireframe elements and content in relative units such as percentages and ems. d. You implement fluid layouts by measuring the widths of the wireframe elements and content in relative units such as percentages and ems.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Responsive Design QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 5-2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:05.01 - Explain the principles of responsive design NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Fluid Layouts KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/9/2020 12:55 PM

Page 49

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 6: Responsive Design Part 2: Designing for Tablet and Desktop Devices 1. Which layout is used by the mobile-first approach to prevent horizontal scrolling and minimize vertical scrolling? a. single-column layout b. two-column layout c. single-row layout d. two-row layout ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. The mobile-first approach uses a single-column layout to prevent horizontal scrolling and minimize vertical scrolling.

b. The mobile-first approach uses a single-column layout to prevent horizontal scrolling and minimize vertical scrolling. c. The mobile-first approach uses a single-column layout to prevent horizontal scrolling and minimize vertical scrolling. d. The mobile-first approach uses a single-column layout to prevent horizontal scrolling and minimize vertical scrolling.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Introduction QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.04 - Create style rules for tablet viewports NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Introduction KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/11/2020 9:19 AM 2. The _____ attribute is used to determine which stylesheet should be applied. a. class b. coords c. media d. shape ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

c a. The media attribute is used to determine which stylesheet should be applied. b. The media attribute is used to determine which stylesheet should be applied. c. The media attribute is used to determine which stylesheet should be applied. d. The media attribute is used to determine which stylesheet should be applied.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 6: Responsive Design Part 2: Designing for Tablet and Desktop Devices NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Media Queries KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/10/2020 5:07 PM 3. Media queries can be embedded in the _____ tag that connects an external style sheet to a Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) file, or they can be inserted in the external style sheet itself. a. link b. coords c. datalist d. embed ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

a a. Media queries can be embedded in the link tag that connects an external style sheet to an HTML file, or they can be inserted in the external style sheet itself.

b. Media queries can be embedded in the link tag that connects an external style sheet to an HTML file, or they can be inserted in the external style sheet itself. c. Media queries can be embedded in the link tag that connects an external style sheet to an HTML file, or they can be inserted in the external style sheet itself. d. Media queries can be embedded in the link tag that connects an external style sheet to an HTML file, or they can be inserted in the external style sheet itself.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Media Queries QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.01 - Identify and use media query expressions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Media Queries KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/10/2020 5:07 PM 4. Identify the minimum viewport width for small smartphones. a. 320px b. 480px c. 768px d. 481px ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. The minimum viewport width for small smartphones is 320px. b. The minimum viewport width for small smartphones is 320px. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 6: Responsive Design Part 2: Designing for Tablet and Desktop Devices c. The minimum viewport width for small smartphones is 320px. d. The minimum viewport width for small smartphones is 320px. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Media Queries QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.04 - Create style rules for tablet viewports NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Media Queries KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/10/2020 5:08 PM 5. Identify the maximum viewport width for tablets and larger smartphones. a. 320px b. 481px c. 768px d. 1279px ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. The maximum viewport width for tablets and larger smartphones is 768px. b. The maximum viewport width for tablets and larger smartphones is 768px. c. The maximum viewport width for tablets and larger smartphones is 768px. d. The maximum viewport width for tablets and larger smartphones is 768px. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Media Queries QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.04 - Create style rules for tablet viewports NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Media Queries KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/10/2020 10:54 PM 6. Which is the minimum viewport width for large desktop monitors? a. 320px b. 481px c. 768px Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 6: Responsive Design Part 2: Designing for Tablet and Desktop Devices d. 1280px ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

d a. The minimum viewport width for large desktop monitors is 1280px. b. The minimum viewport width for large desktop monitors is 1280px. c. The minimum viewport width for large desktop monitors is 1280px. d. The minimum viewport width for large desktop monitors is 1280px.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Media Queries QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.06 - Insert a media query to target desktop viewports NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Media Queries KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/13/2020 7:37 AM 7. Media queries can be implemented by coding them directly into a single Cascading Style Sheet (CSS) file using the _____ rule. a. @import b. @query c. @media d. @display ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

c a. One way to implement media queries is to code them directly into a single CSS file using the @media rule. b. One way to implement media queries is to code them directly into a single CSS file using the @media rule. c. One way to implement media queries is to code them directly into a single CSS file using the @media rule. d. One way to implement media queries is to code them directly into a single CSS file using the @media rule.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 6: Responsive Design Part 2: Designing for Tablet and Desktop Devices KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Bloom’s: Understand 10/8/2019 3:10 PM 1/10/2020 10:56 PM

8. The logical expressions to media queries in an external Cascading Style Sheet (CSS) file are as follows: @media screen and (min-width: 481px) { .mobile { display: none; } } In this case, _____ is the feature of the screen that is tested. a. @media screen b. .mobile c. min-width d. display ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

c a. In this case, min-width is the feature of the screen that is tested. b. In this case, min-width is the feature of the screen that is tested. c. In this case, min-width is the feature of the screen that is tested. d. In this case, min-width is the feature of the screen that is tested.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Media Queries QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.01 - Identify and use media query expressions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Media Queries KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/10/2020 10:56 PM 9. Which describes the height of a viewport in pixels? a. max-height b. min-width c. max-resolution d. orientation ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

POINTS: DIFFICULTY:

1 Easy

a. The height of a viewport in pixels is described as max-height. b. The height of a viewport in pixels is described as max-height. c. The height of a viewport in pixels is described as max-height. d. The height of a viewport in pixels is described as max-height.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 6: Responsive Design Part 2: Designing for Tablet and Desktop Devices REFERENCES: Using Media Queries QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.01 - Identify and use media query expressions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Media Queries KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/13/2020 7:43 AM 10. Which describes the width of a screen in pixels? a. max-width b. min-resolution c. max-height d. orientation ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

a a. The width of a screen in pixels is described with max-width. b. The width of a screen in pixels is described with max-width. c. The width of a screen in pixels is described with max-width. d. The width of a screen in pixels is described with max-width.

c a. When you write a media query that specifies @media only screen, the only

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 6: Responsive Design Part 2: Designing for Tablet and Desktop Devices keyword indicates that older browsers should ignore the media query’s style rules. b. When you write a media query that specifies @media only screen, the only keyword indicates that older browsers should ignore the media query’s style rules. c. When you write a media query that specifies @media only screen, the only keyword indicates that older browsers should ignore the media query’s style rules. d. When you write a media query that specifies @media only screen, the only keyword indicates that older browsers should ignore the media query’s style rules.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Media Queries QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.01 - Identify and use media query expressions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Media Queries KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/13/2020 7:44 AM 12. The _____ is where you apply different styles to the webpage to cause it to change in a way that makes it easier to read and navigate for a particular viewport, such as a user viewing the webpage on a smart phone. a. kernel b. anchor c. breakpoint d. orientation ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. The breakpoint is where you apply different styles to the webpage to cause it to change in a way that makes it easier to read and navigate for a particular viewport, such as a user viewing the webpage on a smart phone. b. The breakpoint is where you apply different styles to the webpage to cause it to change in a way that makes it easier to read and navigate for a particular viewport, such as a user viewing the webpage on a smart phone. c. The breakpoint is where you apply different styles to the webpage to cause it to change in a way that makes it easier to read and navigate for a particular viewport, such as a user viewing the webpage on a smart phone. d. The breakpoint is where you apply different styles to the webpage to cause it to change in a way that makes it easier to read and navigate for a particular viewport, such as a user viewing the webpage on a smart phone.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES:

1 Easy Using Media Queries

Page 7

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 6: Responsive Design Part 2: Designing for Tablet and Desktop Devices QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.01 - Identify and use media query expressions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Media Queries KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/11/2020 9:20 AM 13. If a particular tablet device has a viewport smaller than the minimum size specified in the media query, the layout will default to the _____ viewport layout. a. mobile b. original c. desktop d. largest ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. If a particular tablet device has a viewport smaller than the minimum size specified in the media query, the layout will default to the mobile viewport layout. b. If a particular tablet device has a viewport smaller than the minimum size specified in the media query, the layout will default to the mobile viewport layout. c. If a particular tablet device has a viewport smaller than the minimum size specified in the media query, the layout will default to the mobile viewport layout. d. If a particular tablet device has a viewport smaller than the minimum size specified in the media query, the layout will default to the mobile viewport layout.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Designing for Tablet Viewports QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.04 - Create style rules for tablet viewports NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Media Queries KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/11/2020 9:21 AM 14. Which is true of tablet viewports? a. Tablet devices vary by operating system, manufacturer, and screen size. b. It is easy to design a “one size fits all” layout for a tablet device. c. One layout to target tablet viewports cannot be created. d. When responsive web design and media queries are used, multiple tablet layouts must be designed to accommodate the growing tablet market. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 8

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 6: Responsive Design Part 2: Designing for Tablet and Desktop Devices ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

a a. Tablet devices vary by operating system, manufacturer, and screen size. b. Tablet devices vary by operating system, manufacturer, and screen size. c. Tablet devices vary by operating system, manufacturer, and screen size. d. Tablet devices vary by operating system, manufacturer, and screen size.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Designing for Tablet Viewports QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.02 - Explain the design principles of a tablet website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Designing for Tablet Viewports KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/13/2020 8:07 AM 15. Which is true of page design for a tablet viewport? a. The larger screen provides an opportunity for websites to display more content and use a single-column layout. b. The appearance of the website should look different from viewport to viewport. c. The layout and placement of content on a website should be the same in all viewports. d. A tablet viewport is larger than a mobile viewport but smaller than a desktop viewport. ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. A tablet viewport is larger than a mobile viewport but smaller than a laptop or desktop viewport. b. A tablet viewport is larger than a mobile viewport but smaller than a laptop or desktop viewport. c. A tablet viewport is larger than a mobile viewport but smaller than a laptop or desktop viewport. d. A tablet viewport is larger than a mobile viewport but smaller than a laptop or desktop viewport.

Page 9

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 6: Responsive Design Part 2: Designing for Tablet and Desktop Devices DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

10/8/2019 3:10 PM 1/10/2020 11:04 PM

16. To understand the code and syntax of how a media query detects viewport size, you set a _____ (sometimes called threshold), the point at which you want the webpage to change. a. media point b. checkpoint c. breakpoint d. tracepoint ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. To understand the code and syntax of how a media query detects viewport size, you set a breakpoint (sometimes called threshold), the point at which you want the webpage to change. b. To understand the code and syntax of how a media query detects viewport size, you set a breakpoint (sometimes called threshold), the point at which you want the webpage to change. c. To understand the code and syntax of how a media query detects viewport size, you set a breakpoint (sometimes called threshold), the point at which you want the webpage to change. d. To understand the code and syntax of how a media query detects viewport size, you set a breakpoint (sometimes called threshold), the point at which you want the webpage to change.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Media Queries QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:06.09 - Identify and modify breakpoints NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Modifying Breakpoints KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/9/2020 10:10 PM 17. Identify the pseudo-class used to style an unvisited link. a. :link b. :active c. :hover d. :visited ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. The pseudo-class used to style an unvisited link is :link. b. The pseudo-class used to style an unvisited link is :link. c. The pseudo-class used to style an unvisited link is :link. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 10

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 6: Responsive Design Part 2: Designing for Tablet and Desktop Devices d. The pseudo-class used to style an unvisited link is :link. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Dynamic Pseudo-Classes QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.10 - Describe and add dynamic pseudo-classes to a website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Pseudo-Classes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/10/2020 11:01 PM 18. Which pseudo-class is used to style a link that is being clicked at the moment? a. :link b. :active c. :hover d. :visited ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. The :active pseudo-class is used to style a link that is being clicked at the moment. b. The :active pseudo-class is used to style a link that is being clicked at the moment. c. The :active pseudo-class is used to style a link that is being clicked at the moment. d. The :active pseudo-class is used to style a link that is being clicked at the moment.

Page 11

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 6: Responsive Design Part 2: Designing for Tablet and Desktop Devices c. :hover d. :visited ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

c a. The pseudo-class used to style a link when the mouse is moving over it is :hover. b. The pseudo-class used to style a link when the mouse is moving over it is :hover. c. The pseudo-class used to style a link when the mouse is moving over it is :hover. d. The pseudo-class used to style a link when the mouse is moving over it is :hover.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Dynamic Pseudo-Classes QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.10 - Describe and add dynamic pseudo-classes to a website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Pseudo-Classes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/10/2020 11:02 PM 20. A _____ is attached to a selector with a colon to specify a state or relation to the selector to give the web developer more control over that selector. a. pseudo-class b. gradient c. breakpoint d. media query ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. A pseudo-class is attached to a selector with a colon to specify a state or relation to the selector to give the web developer more control over that selector. b. A pseudo-class is attached to a selector with a colon to specify a state or relation to the selector to give the web developer more control over that selector. c. A pseudo-class is attached to a selector with a colon to specify a state or relation to the selector to give the web developer more control over that selector. d. A pseudo-class is attached to a selector with a colon to specify a state or relation to the selector to give the web developer more control over that selector.

Page 12

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 6: Responsive Design Part 2: Designing for Tablet and Desktop Devices TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Using Pseudo-Classes Bloom’s: Remember 10/8/2019 3:10 PM 1/10/2020 11:06 PM

21. Which character is placed between a selector and the pseudo-class? a. ; b. c. : d. / ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

c a. A colon (:) is placed between a selector and the pseudo-class. b. A colon (:) is placed between a selector and the pseudo-class. c. A colon (:) is placed between a selector and the pseudo-class. d. A colon (:) is placed between a selector and the pseudo-class.

a a. The selector nav a:link identifies the color to apply to a navigation link that has not yet been visited or clicked. b. The selector nav a:link identifies the color to apply to a navigation link that has not yet been visited or clicked. c. The selector nav a:link identifies the color to apply to a navigation link that has not yet been visited or clicked. d. The selector nav a:link identifies the color to apply to a navigation link that has not yet been visited or clicked.

POINTS:

Page 13

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 6: Responsive Design Part 2: Designing for Tablet and Desktop Devices DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Dynamic Pseudo-Classes QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.10 - Describe and add dynamic pseudo-classes to a website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Pseudo-Classes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/10/2020 11:07 PM 23. The selector _____ identifies the color to apply to a navigation link that has been clicked. a. nav a:link b. nav a:active c. nav a:hover d. nav a:visited ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

d a. The selector nav a:visited identifies the color to apply to a navigation link that has been visited or clicked. b. The selector nav a:visited identifies the color to apply to a navigation link that has been visited or clicked. c. The selector nav a:visited identifies the color to apply to a navigation link that has been visited or clicked. d. The selector nav a:visited identifies the color to apply to a navigation link that has been visited or clicked.

Page 14

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 6: Responsive Design Part 2: Designing for Tablet and Desktop Devices ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

c a. The selector nav a:hover identifies the color to apply to a navigation link while the pointer is hovering over the link. b. The selector nav a:hover identifies the color to apply to a navigation link while the pointer is hovering over the link. c. The selector nav a:hover identifies the color to apply to a navigation link while the pointer is hovering over the link. d. The selector nav a:hover identifies the color to apply to a navigation link while the pointer is hovering over the link.

b a. The selector nav a:active identifies the color to apply to a navigation link when the link is being clicked or when it gains focus. b. The selector nav a:active identifies the color to apply to a navigation link when the link is being clicked or when it gains focus. c. The selector nav a:active identifies the color to apply to a navigation link when the link is being clicked or when it gains focus. d. The selector nav a:active identifies the color to apply to a navigation link when the link is being clicked or when it gains focus.

Page 15

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 6: Responsive Design Part 2: Designing for Tablet and Desktop Devices TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Using Pseudo-Classes Bloom’s: Understand 10/8/2019 3:10 PM 1/10/2020 11:09 PM

26. Which is the correct order for using pseudo-classes? a. link, visited, hover, active b. active, hover, visited, link c. link, visited, active, hover d. active, link, visited, hover ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. Pseudo-classes must be used in the following order: link, visited, hover, active. b. Pseudo-classes must be used in the following order: link, visited, hover, active. c. Pseudo-classes must be used in the following order: link, visited, hover, active. d. Pseudo-classes must be used in the following order: link, visited, hover, active. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Dynamic Pseudo-Classes QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.10 - Describe and add dynamic pseudo-classes to a website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Pseudo-Classes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/11/2020 12:46 PM 27. One of the Cascading Style Sheet (CSS) properties is a _____, which is a gradual transition from one color to another. a. breakpoint b. gradient c. media query d. viewport ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. A gradient is a gradual transition from one color to another. b. A gradient is a gradual transition from one color to another. c. A gradient is a gradual transition from one color to another. d. A gradient is a gradual transition from one color to another. POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE:

1 Easy Using Gradients Multiple Choice

Page 16

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 6: Responsive Design Part 2: Designing for Tablet and Desktop Devices HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:06.11 - Explain linear and radial gradients NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Gradients KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/10/2020 11:10 PM 28. A(n) _____ gradient can transition from several different angles. a. linear b. axial c. radial d. binary ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. Linear gradients can transition from several different angles. b. Linear gradients can transition from several different angles. c. Linear gradients can transition from several different angles. d. Linear gradients can transition from several different angles. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Gradients QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:06.11 - Explain linear and radial gradients NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Gradients KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/10/2020 11:10 PM 29. The default transition of a(n) _____ gradient is from the top to the bottom. a. axial b. core c. linear d. radial ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. The default transition of a linear gradient is from the top to the bottom. b. The default transition of a linear gradient is from the top to the bottom. c. The default transition of a linear gradient is from the top to the bottom. d. The default transition of a linear gradient is from the top to the bottom. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 17

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 6: Responsive Design Part 2: Designing for Tablet and Desktop Devices POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Gradients QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.12 - Apply a linear gradient to a webpage for a desktop viewport NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Gradients KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/11/2020 12:59 PM 30. Which gradients are specified by their center? a. horizontal b. linear c. radial d. diagonal ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. Radial gradients are specified by their center. b. Radial gradients are specified by their center. c. Radial gradients are specified by their center. d. Radial gradients are specified by their center. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Gradients QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:06.11 - Explain linear and radial gradients NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Gradients KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/10/2020 11:11 PM 31. To create a radial gradient, what is the least amount of colors that must be specified? a. none b. one c. two d. three ANSWER:

Page 18

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 6: Responsive Design Part 2: Designing for Tablet and Desktop Devices FEEDBACK:

a. To create a radial gradient, you must specify at least two colors. b. To create a radial gradient, you must specify at least two colors. c. To create a radial gradient, you must specify at least two colors. d. To create a radial gradient, you must specify at least two colors.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Gradients QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:06.11 - Explain linear and radial gradients NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Gradients KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 1/10/2020 1:28 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/13/2020 4:47 PM 32. Which tool is effective at troubleshooting during the development process and adds a valuable level of professionalism to one’s work? a. abstraction b. encapsulation c. normalization d. validation ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. Validation is an effective troubleshooting tool during the development process and adds a valuable level of professionalism to your work.

b. Validation is an effective troubleshooting tool during the development process and adds a valuable level of professionalism to your work. c. Validation is an effective troubleshooting tool during the development process and adds a valuable level of professionalism to your work. d. Validation is an effective troubleshooting tool during the development process and adds a valuable level of professionalism to your work.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Gradients QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:06.02 - Explain the design principles of a tablet website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Gradients KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 19

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 6: Responsive Design Part 2: Designing for Tablet and Desktop Devices DATE MODIFIED:

1/10/2020 11:12 PM

33. Which gradient has color beginning in the center and transitions to another color or colors? a. horizontal b. linear c. radial d. diagonal ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. Radial gradients are specified by their center. The color begins in the center and transitions in a radial direction to another color or colors. b. Radial gradients are specified by their center. The color begins in the center and transitions in a radial direction to another color or colors. c. Radial gradients are specified by their center. The color begins in the center and transitions in a radial direction to another color or colors. d. Radial gradients are specified by their center. The color begins in the center and transitions in a radial direction to another color or colors.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Gradients QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:06.11 - Explain linear and radial gradients NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Gradients KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 1/10/2020 1:26 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/11/2020 9:19 AM 34. When designing for a tablet viewport, which website component(s) should remain the same? a. typography b. general look c. color scheme d. description lists ANSWER: a, b, c FEEDBACK: a. When designing for a tablet viewport, maintain the same color scheme, typography, and general look of the website. b. When designing for a tablet viewport, maintain the same color scheme, typography, and general look of the website. c. When designing for a tablet viewport, maintain the same color scheme, typography, and general look of the website. d. When designing for a tablet viewport, maintain the same color scheme, typography, and general look of the website.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY:

1 Moderate

Page 20

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 6: Responsive Design Part 2: Designing for Tablet and Desktop Devices REFERENCES: Designing for Tablet Viewports QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Response HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.04 - Create style rules for tablet viewports NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Designing for Tablet Viewports KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/13/2020 4:53 PM 35. Dynamic pseudo-classes allow you to change the style of a link based on which link states? a. :active b. :hover c. :link d. :construct ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

a, b, c a. Dynamic pseudo-classes allow you to change the style of a link based on four link states: link, visited, hover, and active. b. Dynamic pseudo-classes allow you to change the style of a link based on four link states: link, visited, hover, and active. c. Dynamic pseudo-classes allow you to change the style of a link based on four link states: link, visited, hover, and active. d. Dynamic pseudo-classes allow you to change the style of a link based on four link states: link, visited, hover, and active.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Dynamic Pseudo-Classes QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Response HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.10 - Describe and add dynamic pseudo-classes to a website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Pseudo-Classes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/10/2020 1:44 PM 36. A threshold is the point at which one wants a webpage to change. ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct A breakpoint (sometimes called threshold), is the point at which you want the webpage to change. Incorrect A breakpoint (sometimes called threshold), is the point at which you want the webpage to change. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 21

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 6: Responsive Design Part 2: Designing for Tablet and Desktop Devices POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Media Queries QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.01 - Identify and use media query expressions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Media Queries KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/11/2020 9:22 AM 37. To understand the code and syntax of how a media query detects viewport size, a breakpoint is set. ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct To understand the code and syntax of how a media query detects viewport size, you set a breakpoint (sometimes called threshold). Incorrect To understand the code and syntax of how a media query detects viewport size, you set a breakpoint (sometimes called threshold).

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Media Queries QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.01 - Identify and use media query expressions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Media Queries KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/10/2020 11:13 PM 38. The pseudo-class :link is used to style a link that has been clicked. ANSWER: False - :visited FEEDBACK:

Correct The pseudo-class :visited is used to style a link that has been clicked. Incorrect The pseudo-class :visited is used to style a link that has been clicked.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE: HAS VARIABLES:

1 Easy Using Dynamic Pseudo-Classes Modified True / False False

Page 22

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 6: Responsive Design Part 2: Designing for Tablet and Desktop Devices STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.10 - Describe and add dynamic pseudo-classes to a website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Pseudo-Classes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/10/2020 11:13 PM 39. The pseudo-class :hover is used to style an unvisited link. ANSWER: False - :link FEEDBACK:

Correct The pseudo-class :link is used to style an unvisited link. Incorrect The pseudo-class :link is used to style an unvisited link.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Dynamic Pseudo-Classes QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.10 - Describe and add dynamic pseudo-classes to a website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Bloom’s: Remember KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/10/2020 11:13 PM 40. The color of links in a website changes due to the use of pseudo-classes in the website’s style sheet. ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Dynamic Pseudo-Classes QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:06.10 - Describe and add dynamic pseudo-classes to a website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Pseudo-Classes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/10/2020 11:14 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 23

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 6: Responsive Design Part 2: Designing for Tablet and Desktop Devices 41. The dynamic pseudo-classes are more often used in a desktop viewport because mobile and tablet devices are touch devices and do not have a hover option nor an option to click. ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct The dynamic pseudo-classes are more often used in a desktop viewport because mobile and tablet devices are touch devices and do not have a hover option nor an option to click. Incorrect The dynamic pseudo-classes are more often used in a desktop viewport because mobile and tablet devices are touch devices and do not have a hover option nor an option to click.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Gradients QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.11 - Explain linear and radial gradients NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Gradients KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/10/2020 11:17 PM 43. Linear gradients can transition up, left, right, or diagonally. ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct Linear gradients can transition up, left, right, or diagonally. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 24

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 6: Responsive Design Part 2: Designing for Tablet and Desktop Devices Incorrect Linear gradients can transition up, left, right, or diagonally.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Gradients QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.11 - Explain linear and radial gradients NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Gradients KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/10/2020 11:16 PM 44. The default transition for radial gradients is from the top to the bottom. ANSWER: False - linear gradients FEEDBACK: Correct The default transition for linear gradients is from the top to the bottom. Incorrect The default transition for linear gradients is from the top to the bottom.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Gradients QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.11 - Explain linear and radial gradients NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Gradients KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/10/2020 11:20 PM 45. In linear gradients, the color begins in the center and transitions in a radial direction to another color or colors. ANSWER: False - radial gradients FEEDBACK: Correct In radial gradients, the color begins in the center and transitions in a radial direction to another color or colors. Incorrect In radial gradients, the color begins in the center and transitions in a radial direction to another color or colors.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE:

1 Easy Using Gradients Modified True / False

Page 25

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 6: Responsive Design Part 2: Designing for Tablet and Desktop Devices HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.11 - Explain linear and radial gradients NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Gradients KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/10/2020 11:21 PM 46. Media queries cannot determine the size of a viewport. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct A media query detects the media type (such as screen or print) and the capabilities of the device that the browser is running on (such as the size of the viewport in pixels or its orientation of portrait versus landscape). Incorrect A media query detects the media type (such as screen or print) and the capabilities of the device that the browser is running on (such as the size of the viewport in pixels or its orientation of portrait versus landscape).

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Media Queries QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.01 - Identify and use media query expressions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Media Queries KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/13/2020 5:05 PM 47. Media queries can apply styles to move, hide, or display content on a webpage, change text or colors, or add any other styles to make the page easier to read in a particular situation. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct Media queries can apply styles to move, hide, or display content on the page, change text or colors, or add any other styles to make the page easier to read in a particular situation. Incorrect Media queries can apply styles to move, hide, or display content on the page, change text or colors, or add any other styles to make the page easier to read in a particular situation.

POINTS:

Page 26

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 6: Responsive Design Part 2: Designing for Tablet and Desktop Devices DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Media Queries QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.01 - Identify and use media query expressions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Media Queries KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/10/2020 11:25 PM 48. A breakpoint is where different styles are applied to a webpage to cause it to change in a way that makes it easier to read and navigate for a particular situation. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct A breakpoint is where different styles are applied to a webpage to cause it to change in a way that makes it easier to read and navigate for a particular situation. Incorrect A breakpoint is where different styles are applied to a webpage to cause it to change in a way that makes it easier to read and navigate for a particular situation.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Media Queries QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.01 - Identify and use media query expressions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Media Queries KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/10/2020 11:27 PM 49. If a logical expression evaluates to “false,” the media query applies the styles that follow. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct If the logical expression evaluates to “true,” the media query applies the styles that follow. Incorrect If the logical expression evaluates to “true,” the media query applies the styles that follow.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY:

1 Moderate

Page 27

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 6: Responsive Design Part 2: Designing for Tablet and Desktop Devices REFERENCES: Using Media Queries QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.01 - Identify and use media query expressions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Media Queries KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/10/2020 11:28 PM 50. When testing for minimum and maximum widths, the word “and” separates each part of the media attribute value. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct When testing for minimum and maximum widths, the word “and” separates each part of the media attribute value. Incorrect When testing for minimum and maximum widths, the word “and” separates each part of the media attribute value.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Media Queries QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.01 - Identify and use media query expressions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Media Queries KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/13/2020 5:08 PM 51. In a mobile-first strategy, the mobile styles are listed first, because these are the default styles. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct In a mobile-first strategy, the mobile styles are listed first, because these are the default styles. Incorrect In a mobile-first strategy, the mobile styles are listed first, because these are the default styles.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE:

1 Easy Using Media Queries True / False

Page 28

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 6: Responsive Design Part 2: Designing for Tablet and Desktop Devices HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.03 - Insert a media query to target tablet viewports NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using media queries KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/10/2020 11:31 PM 52. Styles created for smaller viewports apply to larger viewports by default. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct Styles created for the smaller viewports apply to larger viewports by default. Incorrect Styles created for the smaller viewports apply to larger viewports by default.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Media Queries QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.04 - Create style rules for tablet viewports NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using media queries KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/10/2020 11:33 PM 53. To add style rules that target tablet or desktop viewports in particular, create a media query for each viewport. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct To add style rules that target tablet or desktop viewports in particular, create a media query for each viewport. Incorrect To add style rules that target tablet or desktop viewports in particular, create a media query for each viewport.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Media Queries QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.01 - Identify and use media query expressions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 29

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 6: Responsive Design Part 2: Designing for Tablet and Desktop Devices TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Technology Using Media Queries Bloom’s: Remember 10/8/2019 3:10 PM 1/10/2020 11:36 PM

54. If a particular tablet device has a viewport smaller than the minimum size specified in the media query, the layout will default to the desktop viewport layout. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct If a particular tablet device has a viewport smaller than the minimum size specified in the media query, the layout will default to the mobile viewport layout. Incorrect If a particular tablet device has a viewport smaller than the minimum size specified in the media query, the layout will default to the mobile viewport layout.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Designing for Tablet Viewports QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.04 - Create style rules for tablet viewports NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Designing for Tablet Viewports KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/10/2020 11:37 PM 55. When you use responsive web design and media queries, you do not need to design multiple tablet layouts to accommodate tablet devices. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct When you use responsive web design and media queries, you do not need to design multiple tablet layouts to accommodate tablet devices. Incorrect When you use responsive web design and media queries, you do not need to design multiple tablet layouts to accommodate tablet devices.

Page 30

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 6: Responsive Design Part 2: Designing for Tablet and Desktop Devices TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Technology Designing for Tablet Viewports Bloom’s: Remember 10/8/2019 3:10 PM 1/10/2020 11:39 PM

56. A tablet viewport is larger than a mobile viewport but smaller than a desktop viewport. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct A tablet viewport is larger than a mobile viewport but smaller than a desktop viewport. Incorrect A tablet viewport is larger than a mobile viewport but smaller than a desktop viewport.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Designing for Tablet Viewports QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.03 - Insert a media query to target tablet viewports NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Designing for Tablet Viewports KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/10/2020 11:40 PM 57. When designing for a tablet viewport, layout and placement of content should remain the same from viewport to viewport. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct The appearance of the website should look the same from viewport to viewport. The only changes should be layout and placement of content. Incorrect The appearance of the website should look the same from viewport to viewport. The only changes should be layout and placement of content.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Designing for Tablet Viewports QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.03 - Insert a media query to target tablet viewports NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 31

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 6: Responsive Design Part 2: Designing for Tablet and Desktop Devices TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Designing for Tablet Viewports Bloom’s: Remember 10/8/2019 3:10 PM 1/10/2020 11:41 PM

58. To determine the ideal layout for a website’s tablet viewport, review the current website in Google Chrome's device mode at 481px to determine where content should be added and whether any content should be hidden. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct To determine the ideal layout for a website’s tablet viewport, review the current website in Google Chrome's device mode at 481px to determine where content should be added and whether any content should be hidden. Incorrect To determine the ideal layout for a website’s tablet viewport, review the current website in Google Chrome's device mode at 481px to determine where content should be added and whether any content should be hidden.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Designing for Tablet Viewports QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.04 - Create style rules for tablet viewports NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Designing for Tablet Viewports KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/10/2020 11:43 PM 59. The only thing that should change while designing a tablet viewport is the appearance of the website. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct The only changes should be layout and placement of content. Incorrect The only changes should be layout and placement of content.

Page 32

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 6: Responsive Design Part 2: Designing for Tablet and Desktop Devices KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Bloom’s: Remember 10/8/2019 3:10 PM 1/10/2020 11:44 PM

60. Since desktop screens are often wider than those for other devices, a design for a desktop viewport can only use single-column layout. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct Because desktop screens are often wider than those for other devices, designing for a desktop viewport also provides an opportunity for a multiple-column layout. Incorrect Because desktop screens are often wider than those for other devices, designing for a desktop viewport also provides an opportunity for a multiple-column layout.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Designing for Desktop Viewports QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.05 - Explain the design principles of a desktop website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Designing for Desktop Viewports KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/13/2020 5:31 PM 61. The default style rule for the navigation list items displays them as vertical links with a border between each link. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct The default style rule for the navigation list items displays them as vertical links with a border between each link. Incorrect The default style rule for the navigation list items displays them as vertical links with a border between each link.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Designing for Tablet Viewports QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.04 - Create style rules for tablet viewports NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Pseudo-Classes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 33

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 6: Responsive Design Part 2: Designing for Tablet and Desktop Devices DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

10/8/2019 3:10 PM 1/10/2020 11:51 PM

62. The tablet market took off in 2010; however, as the size of smartphones increased, the tablet market started to decline. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct The tablet market took off in 2010; however, as the size of smartphones increased, the tablet market started to decline. Incorrect The tablet market took off in 2010; however, as the size of smartphones increased, the tablet market started to decline.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Designing for Tablet Viewports QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.02 - Explain the design principles of a tablet website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Gradients KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/10/2020 11:53 PM 63. With so many tablet sizes, it can seem difficult to design a “one size fits all” layout for a tablet device. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct With so many tablet sizes, it can seem difficult to design a “one size fits all” layout for a tablet device. Incorrect With so many tablet sizes, it can seem difficult to design a “one size fits all” layout for a tablet device.

Page 34

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 6: Responsive Design Part 2: Designing for Tablet and Desktop Devices 64. You can add as many colors as desired to the gradient. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct You can add as many colors as desired to the gradient. Incorrect You can add as many colors as desired to the gradient.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Gradients QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.11 - Explain linear and radial gradients NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Gradients KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/10/2020 11:56 PM 65. A webpage’s files should be run through W3C’s validator to check the documents for errors. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct A webpage’s files should be run through W3C’s validator to check the documents for errors. Incorrect A webpage’s files should be run through W3C’s validator to check the documents for errors.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Gradients QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.02 - Explain the design principles of a tablet website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Gradients KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/17/2020 8:10 AM 66. A(n) _____ detects the media type and the capabilities of the device that the browser is running on. ANSWER: media query Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 35

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 6: Responsive Design Part 2: Designing for Tablet and Desktop Devices POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Media Queries QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.01 - Identify and use media query expressions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Media Queries KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/11/2020 1:13 PM 67. Media queries can be embedded in the _____ tag that connects an external style sheet to an HTML file, or they can be inserted in the external style sheet itself. ANSWER: link POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Media Queries QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.01 - Identify and use media query expressions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Media Queries KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/17/2020 8:11 AM 68. The _____ attribute is used to determine which stylesheet should be applied. ANSWER: media POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Media Queries QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.01 - Identify and use media query expressions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Media Queries Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 36

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 6: Responsive Design Part 2: Designing for Tablet and Desktop Devices KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Bloom’s: Remember 10/8/2019 3:10 PM 1/11/2020 12:03 AM

69. Media queries allow the application of different Cascading Style Sheet (CSS) styles in response to the _____, such as the media on which a webpage is being viewed (screen or print) or the size of the viewport. ANSWER: environment POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Media Queries QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.01 - Identify and use media query expressions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Media Queries KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/11/2020 12:05 AM 70. To add interactivity and visual appeal to webpages displayed in the desktop viewport, you will add _____ to the style sheet to further style links within the navigation area. ANSWER: pseudo-classes POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Project — Use Media Queries to Design for Tablet and Desktop Viewports QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.10 - Describe and add dynamic pseudo-classes to a website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Media Queries KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/11/2020 12:09 AM 71. A logical expression includes the name of a(n) _____, a characteristic of the environment, and a breakpoint value to be tested. ANSWER: media query feature POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 37

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 6: Responsive Design Part 2: Designing for Tablet and Desktop Devices REFERENCES: Using Media Queries QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.01 - Identify and use media query expressions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Media Queries KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/17/2020 8:15 AM 72. If a logical expression evaluates to “true,” a(n) _____ applies the styles that follow. ANSWER: media query POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Media Queries QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.03 - Insert a media query to target tablet viewports NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Media Queries KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/11/2020 9:23 AM 73. The minimum viewport width for _____ is 1280px. ANSWER: large desktop monitors POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Media Queries QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.07 - Create style rules for desktop viewports NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Pseudo-Classes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/11/2020 7:56 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 38

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 6: Responsive Design Part 2: Designing for Tablet and Desktop Devices 74. Resolution is represented as _____ per inch. ANSWER: dots POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Media Queries QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.01 - Identify and use media query expressions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Gradients KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/11/2020 8:03 AM 75. The height of a viewport is measured in _____. ANSWER: pixels POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Media Queries QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.01 - Identify and use media query expressions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Gradients KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/11/2020 8:06 AM Identify the letter of the choice that best matches the phrase or definition. a. validator b. mobile-first c. gradient d. device mode e. hover f. media g. link h. mobile DIFFICULTY: Moderate Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 39

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 6: Responsive Design Part 2: Designing for Tablet and Desktop Devices REFERENCES:

Introduction Using Gradients Using Dynamic Pseudo-Classes Designing for Tablet Viewports Using Media Queries QUESTION TYPE: Matching HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.01 - Identify and use media query expressions LO: 06.02 - Explain the design principles of a tablet website LO: 06.04 - Create style rules for tablet viewports LO: 06.10 - Describe and add dynamic pseudo-classes to a website LO: 06.11 - Explain linear and radial gradients NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Gradients Using Media Queries Using Pseudo-Classes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/17/2020 8:21 AM 76. Feature in Google Chrome used to view and test the website for each viewport. ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 77. Enhances the appearance of the webpage for tablet and desktop displays. ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 78. Approach that focuses on styling content appropriately for smaller, mobile devices. ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 79. Gives a chance to identify and correct errors in a document. ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 80. Default layout used if a device has a viewport smaller than the minimum size specified. ANSWER: h POINTS: 1 81. Tag used to connect an external style sheet to an HTML file. ANSWER: g POINTS: 1 82. Attribute used to determine which stylesheet should be applied. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 40

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 6: Responsive Design Part 2: Designing for Tablet and Desktop Devices ANSWER: f POINTS: 1 83. Pseudo-class that provides an interactive experience for the desktop user. ANSWER: e POINTS: 1 84. Discuss media query expressions with relevant examples. ANSWER: Answers will vary. A media query can use a logical expression to test whether a viewport has reached a particular breakpoint. The logical expression includes the name of a media query feature, a characteristic of the environment, and a breakpoint value to be tested. If the logical expression evaluates to “true,” the media query applies the styles that follow. Following is an example of a media query that includes a media type and a logical expression: <link rel="stylesheet" href="css/styles-mobile.css" media="screen and (max-width: 480px)"> This code directs browsers to use the styles-mobile.css stylesheet in the css folder when screens have a viewport width smaller than or equal to 480px (which is a common maximum viewport size for a phone and thus a common breakpoint for changing styles). In this case, max-width is the feature and 480px is the breakpoint value being tested in the logical condition. A media query can also test for both minimum and maximum breakpoints, as in the following example: <link rel="stylesheet" href="css/styles-tablet.css" media="screen and (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 768px)"> In this case, the code directs browsers to apply the styles-tablet.css stylesheet in the css folder when screens have a viewport width between 481px and 768px (common breakpoint sizes for tablet devices). When testing for minimum and maximum widths, the word “and” separates each part of the media attribute value. This means that each part must be true to apply the associated styles. The syntax also requires you to surround the logical expression with parentheses and use a colon to separate the media query feature from the value being tested. When writing the CSS code, follow the requirements of the syntax carefully to make sure the media query works correctly. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: Using Media Queries QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.01 - Identify and use media query expressions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Media Queries KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/11/2020 8:34 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 41

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 6: Responsive Design Part 2: Designing for Tablet and Desktop Devices 85. Explain how pseudo-classes are used to style links. ANSWER: Answers vary. A link color changes due to the use of pseudo-classes in a style sheet. Dynamic pseudo-classes change the style of a link based on four link states: link, visited, hover, and active. A unique style for normal, visited, hover, and active links is defined by creating four separate style rules with a:link, a:visited, a:hover, and a:active as the selectors. A pseudo-class is attached to a selector with a colon to specify a state or relation to the selector to give the web developer more control over that selector. The colon (:) is part of the pseudo-class and is placed between the selector and the pseudoclass. The following is an example of a navigation :link pseudo-class: nav a:link { color: #FFFFFF; } The selector nav a:link identifies the color to apply to a navigation link that has not yet been visited or clicked. In this case, the initial link color is white. The following is an example of a navigation :visited pseudo-class: nav a:visited { color: #000000; } The selector nav a:visited identifies the color to apply to a navigation link that has been visited or clicked. In this case, the link color is black. The following is an example of a navigation :hover pseudo-class: nav a:hover { color: #FFFF00; } The selector nav a:hover identifies the color to apply to a navigation link while the pointer is hovering over the link. In this case, the link color is yellow. The :hover pseudoclass enhances the interactivity between the user and the webpage. The following is an example of a navigation :active pseudo-class: nav a:active { color: #0066CC; } The selector nav a:active identifies the color to apply to a navigation link when the link is being clicked or when it gains focus. In this case, the link color is blue. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: Using Dynamic Pseudo-Classes QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:06.10 - Describe and add dynamic pseudo-classes to a website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Pseudo-Classes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 42

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 6: Responsive Design Part 2: Designing for Tablet and Desktop Devices DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

10/8/2019 3:10 PM 1/11/2020 8:37 AM

86. Define and discuss the types of gradients in Cascading Style Sheets (CSS). ANSWER: A gradient is a gradual transition from one color to another. CSS has two types of gradients: linear and radial. Linear gradients can transition from several different angles. The default transition is from the top to the bottom. Linear gradients can also transition up, left, right, or diagonally. Radial gradients are specified by their center. The color begins in the center and transitions in a radial direction to another color or colors. To create a radial gradient, at least two colors must be specified. Gradients create interest on a webpage, especially when used as a background. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: Using Gradients QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.11 - Explain linear and radial gradients NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Gradients KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/11/2020 8:40 AM Samantha is an entrepreneur and her company website has the following links: Home, About Us, Careers, and Contact Us. She wishes to vary their appearance whenever they are visited or clicked. 87. Samantha wants the color of the Home link to turn yellow when she moves the pointer over it. Identify the pseudoclass that should be used to perform this function. a. :link b. :hover c. :active d. :visited ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

b a. The :hover dynamic pseudo-classes is used to identify a link when the mouse is hovering over it. b. The :hover dynamic pseudo-classes is used to identify a link when the mouse is hovering over it. c. The :hover dynamic pseudo-classes is used to identify a link when the mouse is hovering over it. d. The :hover dynamic pseudo-classes is used to identify a link when the mouse is hovering over it.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY:

1 Moderate

Page 43

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 6: Responsive Design Part 2: Designing for Tablet and Desktop Devices REFERENCES: Using Dynamic Pseudo-Classes QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: CASE 6-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.10 - Describe and add dynamic pseudo-classes to a website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Pseudo-Classes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/17/2020 8:27 AM 88. Samantha wants the color of unvisited links to remain white. Which pseudo-class should she use? a. :link b. :hover c. :active d. :visited ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

a a. The :link dynamic pseudo-class identifies the color to apply to a navigation link that has not yet been visited or clicked. b. The :link dynamic pseudo-class identifies the color to apply to a navigation link that has not yet been visited or clicked. c. The :link dynamic pseudo-class identifies the color to apply to a navigation link that has not yet been visited or clicked. d. The :link dynamic pseudo-class identifies the color to apply to a navigation link that has not yet been visited or clicked.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Dynamic Pseudo-Classes QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: CASE 6-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.10 - Describe and add dynamic pseudo-classes to a website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Pseudo-Classes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/11/2020 8:48 AM 89. Samantha wants the color of visited links to turn purple. Which pseudo-class should she use? a. :link b. :hover c. :active Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 44

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 6: Responsive Design Part 2: Designing for Tablet and Desktop Devices d. :visited ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

d a. The :visited dynamic pseudo-class identifies the color to apply to a navigation link that has been visited or clicked. b. The :visited dynamic pseudo-class identifies the color to apply to a navigation link that has been visited or clicked. c. The :visited dynamic pseudo-class identifies the color to apply to a navigation link that has been visited or clicked. d. The :visited dynamic pseudo-class identifies the color to apply to a navigation link that has been visited or clicked.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Dynamic Pseudo-Classes QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: CASE 6-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.10 - Describe and add dynamic pseudo-classes to a website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Pseudo-Classes KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 1/11/2020 8:48 AM DATE MODIFIED: 1/11/2020 8:51 AM 90. To gain focus, Samantha would like to modify the color of active links. Which dynamic pseudo-class should she use? a. :link b. :hover c. :active d. :visited ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

c a. The :active dynamic pseudo-class is used to modify the color of active links. b. The :active dynamic pseudo-class is used to modify the color of active links. c. The :active dynamic pseudo-class is used to modify the color of active links. d. The :active dynamic pseudo-class is used to modify the color of active links.

Page 45

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 6: Responsive Design Part 2: Designing for Tablet and Desktop Devices TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Using Pseudo-Classes Bloom’s: Remember 1/11/2020 8:52 AM 1/17/2020 8:29 AM

Kevin, a manager at FitPlus fitness club, owns a website that updates information regarding his fitness club. He created background gradients by tiling gradient images across a page or element. Now, he wishes to modify these and add gradients supported by Cascading Style Sheet (CSS). 91. Kevin would like to apply a gradient that transitions from blue for the top portion of the page to white for the bottom portion of the page. Which function should he use? a. background: linear-gradient(blue, white); b. background: linear-gradient(bottom white, top blue); c. background: linear-gradient(white, blue); d. background: linear-gradient(to top blue, to bottom white); ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

a a. He should use the "background: linear-gradient(blue, white);" function. b. He should use the "background: linear-gradient(blue, white);" function. c. He should use the "background: linear-gradient(blue, white);" function. d. He should use the "background: linear-gradient(blue, white);" function.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Gradients QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: CASE 6-2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.12 - Apply a linear gradient to a webpage for a desktop viewport NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Gradients KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/11/2020 9:03 AM 92. To verify the website appearance across multiple types of devices, Kevin would like to view the website from each viewport. Using Google Chrome, which mode may he use to accomplish this task? a. modulate b. validate c. device d. function ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. You can use Google Chrome’s device mode to view and test the website for each viewport. b. You can use Google Chrome’s device mode to view and test the website for each Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 46

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 6: Responsive Design Part 2: Designing for Tablet and Desktop Devices viewport. c. You can use Google Chrome’s device mode to view and test the website for each viewport. d. You can use Google Chrome’s device mode to view and test the website for each viewport.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: Using Gradients QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: CASE 6-2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 06.12 - Apply a linear gradient to a webpage for a desktop viewport NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG Technology TOPICS: Using Gradients KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/11/2020 9:07 AM

Page 47

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 7: Improving Web Design with New Page Layouts 1. The <article> … </article> tags are referred to as HTML 5 _____ elements. a. syntax b. semantic c. logical d. lexical ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. The < article > … < /article > tags are referred to as HTML 5 semantic elements. b. The < article > … < /article > tags are referred to as HTML 5 semantic elements. c. The < article > … < /article > tags are referred to as HTML 5 semantic elements. d. The < article > … < /article > tags are referred to as HTML 5 semantic elements. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.01 - Describe and use article, aside, and section elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/17/2020 1:44 PM 2. The _____ HTML 5 semantic element contains information about nearby content and is typically displayed as a sidebar. a. <contents> … </contents> b. <details> … </details> c. <summary> … </summary> d. <aside> … </aside> ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

d a. The < aside > … < /aside > HTML 5 semantic element contains information about nearby content and is typically displayed as a sidebar. b. The < aside > … < /aside > HTML 5 semantic element contains information about nearby content and is typically displayed as a sidebar. c. The < aside > … < /aside > HTML 5 semantic element contains information about nearby content and is typically displayed as a sidebar. d. The < aside > … < /aside > HTML 5 semantic element contains information about nearby content and is typically displayed as a sidebar.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 7: Improving Web Design with New Page Layouts NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Using HTML5 Semantic Elements Bloom’s: Remember 10/8/2019 3:10 PM 1/11/2020 1:38 PM

3. The _____ HTML 5 semantic element contains a visible heading for the details element on a webpage. a. <section> … </section> b. <details> … </details> c. <summary> … </summary> d. <aside> … </aside> ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

c a. The < summary > … < /summary > HTML 5 semantic element contains a visible heading for the details element on a webpage. b. The < summary > … < /summary > HTML 5 semantic element contains a visible heading for the details element on a webpage. c. The < summary > … < /summary > HTML 5 semantic element contains a visible heading for the details element on a webpage. d. The < summary > … < /summary > HTML 5 semantic element contains a visible heading for the details element on a webpage.

a a. The < section > … < /section > HTML 5 semantic element contains a specific grouping of content on a webpage. b. The < section > … < /section > HTML 5 semantic element contains a specific grouping of content on a webpage. c. The < section > … < /section > HTML 5 semantic element contains a specific grouping of content on a webpage.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 7: Improving Web Design with New Page Layouts d. The < section > … < /section > HTML 5 semantic element contains a specific grouping of content on a webpage.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.01 - Describe and use article, aside, and section elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/11/2020 1:42 PM 5. A(n) _____ element is a composition that is independently distributable, such as a forum post, a magazine or newspaper report, a blog entry, a user-submitted comment, an interactive widget or gadget, or any other independent item of content. a. article b. aside c. summary d. section ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. An article element is an independently distributable composition such as a forum post, a magazine or newspaper report, a blog entry, a user-submitted comment, an interactive widget or gadget, or any other independent item of content. b. An article element is an independently distributable composition such as a forum post, a magazine or newspaper report, a blog entry, a user-submitted comment, an interactive widget or gadget, or any other independent item of content. c. An article element is an independently distributable composition such as a forum post, a magazine or newspaper report, a blog entry, a user-submitted comment, an interactive widget or gadget, or any other independent item of content. d. An article element is an independently distributable composition such as a forum post, a magazine or newspaper report, a blog entry, a user-submitted comment, an interactive widget or gadget, or any other independent item of content.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 7: Improving Web Design with New Page Layouts 6. A(n) _____ element, as described by the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C), is an element that “represents a section of a page that consists of content that is tangentially related to the content around that element, and which could be considered separate from that content.” a. article b. aside c. section d. content ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

b a. The aside element, as described by the W3C, is an element that “represents a section of a page that consists of content that is tangentially related to the content around the aside element, and which could be considered separate from that content.” b. The aside element, as described by the W3C, is an element that “represents a section of a page that consists of content that is tangentially related to the content around the aside element, and which could be considered separate from that content.” c. The aside element, as described by the W3C, is an element that “represents a section of a page that consists of content that is tangentially related to the content around the aside element, and which could be considered separate from that content.” d. The aside element, as described by the W3C, is an element that “represents a section of a page that consists of content that is tangentially related to the content around the aside element, and which could be considered separate from that content.”

c a. The aside element is used as a sidebar and contains additional information about a particular item mentioned within another element, such as an article or section element.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 7: Improving Web Design with New Page Layouts b. The aside element is used as a sidebar and contains additional information about a particular item mentioned within another element, such as an article or section element. c. The aside element is used as a sidebar and contains additional information about a particular item mentioned within another element, such as an article or section element. d. The aside element is used as a sidebar and contains additional information about a particular item mentioned within another element, such as an article or section element.

a a. The section element defines different parts of a webpage document, such as an introduction, new products, or service information. b. The section element defines different parts of a webpage document, such as an introduction, new products, or service information. c. The section element defines different parts of a webpage document, such as an introduction, new products, or service information. d. The section element defines different parts of a webpage document, such as an introduction, new products, or service information.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 7: Improving Web Design with New Page Layouts DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

10/8/2019 3:10 PM 1/11/2020 2:27 PM

9. A general rule is that a(n) _____ element is appropriate only if the element’s contents would be listed explicitly in the document’s outline. a. aside b. summary c. details d. section ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

d a. A general rule is that the section element is appropriate only if the element’s contents would be listed explicitly in the document’s outline. b. A general rule is that the section element is appropriate only if the element’s contents would be listed explicitly in the document’s outline. c. A general rule is that the section element is appropriate only if the element’s contents would be listed explicitly in the document’s outline. d. A general rule is that the section element is appropriate only if the element’s contents would be listed explicitly in the document’s outline.

c a. According to the W3C, the figure element “represents some flow content, optionally with a caption, that is self-contained and is typically referenced as a single unit from the main flow of the document.” b. According to the W3C, the figure element “represents some flow content, optionally with a caption, that is self-contained and is typically referenced as a single unit from the main flow of the document.” c. According to the W3C, the figure element “represents some flow content, optionally with a caption, that is self-contained and is typically referenced as a

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 7: Improving Web Design with New Page Layouts single unit from the main flow of the document.” d. According to the W3C, the figure element “represents some flow content, optionally with a caption, that is self-contained and is typically referenced as a single unit from the main flow of the document.”

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.02 - Describe and use figure and figcaption elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/12/2020 8:52 AM 11. The figure element may contain an optional _____ element, which is used to provide a caption for the figure element. a. image caption b. external figure c. embedded figure d. figure caption ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. The figure element may contain an optional figure caption element, which is used to provide a caption for the figure element. b. The figure element may contain an optional figure caption element, which is used to provide a caption for the figure element. c. The figure element may contain an optional figure caption element, which is used to provide a caption for the figure element. d. The figure element may contain an optional figure caption element, which is used to provide a caption for the figure element.

Page 7

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 7: Improving Web Design with New Page Layouts a. <figcaption>... </figcaption> b. <(figcaption)>... <(/figcaption)> c. </figcaption/>... </figcaption/> d. </figcaption>... <figcaption/> ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. The figure caption element uses a < figcaption > tag as the starting tag and a < /figcaption > tag as the ending tag. b. The figure caption element uses a < figcaption > tag as the starting tag and a < /figcaption > tag as the ending tag. c. The figure caption element uses a < figcaption > tag as the starting tag and a < /figcaption > tag as the ending tag. d. The figure caption element uses a < figcaption > tag as the starting tag and a < /figcaption > tag as the ending tag.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.02 - Describe and use figure and figcaption elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/11/2020 2:45 PM 13. The name of an HTML semantic element tag reflects the _____ of the webpage content. a. purpose b. location c. form d. date ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. The name of an HTML semantic element tag reflects the purpose of the webpage content. b. The name of an HTML semantic element tag reflects the purpose of the webpage content. c. The name of an HTML semantic element tag reflects the purpose of the webpage content. d. The name of an HTML semantic element tag reflects the purpose of the webpage content.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE: HAS VARIABLES:

1 Easy Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements Multiple Choice False

Page 8

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 7: Improving Web Design with New Page Layouts LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.01 - Describe and use article, aside, and section elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/12/2020 9:15 AM 14. The Cascading Style Sheet (CSS) _____ property specifies the transparency of an element. a. density b. opacity c. precision d. clarity ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. Opacity refers to the transparency of an element. b. Opacity refers to the transparency of an element. c. Opacity refers to the transparency of an element. d. Opacity refers to the transparency of an element. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Improving Design with CSS QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 07.04 - Explain and use the opacity property NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/12/2020 9:18 AM 15. The default value of the opacity property is _____. a. 1 b. 0 c. 0.5 d. 2 ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. Opacity’s default value is 1, which does not make the element transparent. b. Opacity’s default value is 1, which does not make the element transparent. c. Opacity’s default value is 1, which does not make the element transparent. d. Opacity’s default value is 1, which does not make the element transparent. POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES:

1 Moderate Improving Design with CSS

Page 9

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 7: Improving Web Design with New Page Layouts QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 07.04 - Explain and use the opacity property NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/12/2020 9:19 AM 16. The text-shadow property requires the _____ value, which designates the horizontal position of the shadow. a. ph-shadow b. h(text)-shadow c. h-shadow d. hp-shadow ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. The text-shadow property requires the h-shadow value, which designates the horizontal position of the shadow. b. The text-shadow property requires the h-shadow value, which designates the horizontal position of the shadow. c. The text-shadow property requires the h-shadow value, which designates the horizontal position of the shadow. d. The text-shadow property requires the h-shadow value, which designates the horizontal position of the shadow.

} b. h1 { text-shadow: 2px 2px #292933; } c. h1 { Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 10

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 7: Improving Web Design with New Page Layouts text-shadow(h,v): 0.2em 0.1em #292933; } d. h1 { <text-shadow> h:0.2px v:0.2px #292933; } ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

b a. A text shadow with a horizontal offset of 2px, a vertical offset of 2px, and a dark gray color is applied to an h1 element is represented as " h1 { text-shadow: 2px 2px #292933; }." b. A text shadow with a horizontal offset of 2px, a vertical offset of 2px, and a dark gray color is applied to an h1 element is represented as " h1 { text-shadow: 2px 2px #292933; }." c. A text shadow with a horizontal offset of 2px, a vertical offset of 2px, and a dark gray color is applied to an h1 element is represented as " h1 { text-shadow: 2px 2px #292933; }." d. A text shadow with a horizontal offset of 2px, a vertical offset of 2px, and a dark gray color is applied to an h1 element is represented as " h1 { text-shadow: 2px 2px #292933; }."

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Improving Design with CSS QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.06 - Describe and use the text shadow property NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/12/2020 9:31 AM 18. A _____ analyzes current content, performs in-depth research, and then drafts recommendations for content to attract new clients. a. website analyst b. web researcher c. web content strategist d. webpage planner ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Redesigning the Home Page QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.03 - Describe and use the CSS grid layout NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Redesigning the Home Page Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 11

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 7: Improving Web Design with New Page Layouts KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Bloom’s: Remember 10/8/2019 3:10 PM 1/12/2020 9:33 AM

19. Identify the style rule for an h1 element to center-align its content. a. h1 { <text-align>: center; } b. h1 { text-align: center; } c. h1 { text-align: <center/>; } d. h1 { <text-align/> <center/>; } ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. The style rule used to center-align content is "text-align: center". b. The style rule used to center-align content is "text-align: center". c. The style rule used to center-align content is "text-align: center". d. The style rule used to center-align content is "text-align: center". POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Creating the Nutrition Page QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.03 - Describe and use the CSS grid layout NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Redesigning the Home Page KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/12/2020 9:39 AM 20. The 10px in "text-shadow: 5px 10px 8px #ccc;" indicates the _____. a. horizontal shadow position b. shadow color c. vertical offset d. shadow transparency ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. The 10px in "text-shadow: 5px 10px 8px #ccc;" indicates the vertical offset. b. The 10px in "text-shadow: 5px 10px 8px #ccc;" indicates the vertical offset. c. The 10px in "text-shadow: 5px 10px 8px #ccc;" indicates the vertical offset. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 12

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 7: Improving Web Design with New Page Layouts d. The 10px in "text-shadow: 5px 10px 8px #ccc;" indicates the vertical offset. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Improving Design with CSS QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.06 - Describe and use the text shadow property NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Redesigning the Home Page KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/12/2020 9:47 AM 21. Consider the style rule: main { background-color: #ff0000; opacity: 0.5; } Here, the opacity value will make the images appear _____. a. 25 percent transparent b. at 30 percent opacity c. 50 percent transparent d. completely opaque ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. An opacity value of 0.50 makes an element 50 percent transparent and an opacity value of 0 makes an element completely transparent. b. An opacity value of 0.50 makes an element 50 percent transparent and an opacity value of 0 makes an element completely transparent. c. An opacity value of 0.50 makes an element 50 percent transparent and an opacity value of 0 makes an element completely transparent. d. An opacity value of 0.50 makes an element 50 percent transparent and an opacity value of 0 makes an element completely transparent.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Improving Design with CSS QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.04 - Describe and use the opacity property NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Redesigning the Home Page KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/17/2020 2:16 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 13

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 7: Improving Web Design with New Page Layouts 22. Which code specifies the starting and ending tags for a figure caption element? a. *figcaption* ... */figcaption* b. ^figcaption^ ... ^/figcaption^ c. <figcaption> ... </figcaption> d. <//figcaption> ... <//figcaption> ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

c a. The figure caption element uses a < figcaption > tag as the starting tag and a < /figcaption > tag as the ending tag. b. The figure caption element uses a < figcaption > tag as the starting tag and a < /figcaption > tag as the ending tag. c. The figure caption element uses a < figcaption > tag as the starting tag and a < /figcaption > tag as the ending tag. d. The figure caption element uses a < figcaption > tag as the starting tag and a < /figcaption > tag as the ending tag.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.07 - Insert and style figure and figcaption elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Updating the About Us Page KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/14/2020 1:58 PM 23. Identify the correct style rule to specify a left margin. a. left section <p/> b. align-margin-left: 0; c. margin-left: 0; d. margin(left): 0; ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

c a. The correct style rule to specify a left margin is "margin-left: 0;". b. The correct style rule to specify a left margin is "margin-left: 0;". c. The correct style rule to specify a left margin is "margin-left: 0;". d. The correct style rule to specify a left margin is "margin-left: 0;".

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Creating the Nutrition Page QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.09 - Insert a section element NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 14

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 7: Improving Web Design with New Page Layouts TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Updating the About Us Page Bloom’s: Understand 10/8/2019 3:10 PM 1/12/2020 10:16 AM

24. Identify the appropriate format to indicate the start and end of a time area of a webpage. a. <time> ... </time> b. time:#time; c. time(h2) {time} d. *time* section *time* ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

a a. The appropriate format to indicate the start and end of a time area of a webpage is "< time > ... < /time >". b. The appropriate format to indicate the start and end of a time area of a webpage is "< time > ... < /time >". c. The appropriate format to indicate the start and end of a time area of a webpage is "< time > ... < /time >". d. The appropriate format to indicate the start and end of a time area of a webpage is "< time > ... < /time >".

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.01 - Describe and use article, aside, and section elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Updating the Contact Us Page KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/17/2020 2:38 PM 25. The _____ CSS property can be used to create multiple columns. a. column-add b. column-multiply c. column-type d. column-count ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. The column-count CSS property can be used to create multiple columns. b. The column-count CSS property can be used to create multiple columns. c. The column-count CSS property can be used to create multiple columns. d. The column-count CSS property can be used to create multiple columns. POINTS: DIFFICULTY:

1 Moderate

Page 15

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 7: Improving Web Design with New Page Layouts REFERENCES: Creating the Nutrition Page QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.03 - Describe and use the CSS grid layout NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating the Nutrition Page KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/12/2020 10:25 AM 26. Today, most websites use a(n) _____, a small image that appears on the browser tab that represents the business. a. emoji b. favicon c. hamburger d. emoticon ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. Today, most websites use a favicon, a small image that appears on the browser tab that represents the business. b. Today, most websites use a favicon, a small image that appears on the browser tab that represents the business. c. Today, most websites use a favicon, a small image that appears on the browser tab that represents the business. d. Today, most websites use a favicon, a small image that appears on the browser tab that represents the business.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Adding a Favicon QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.12 - Describe and add a favicon to a webpage NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating the Nutrition Page KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/12/2020 10:39 AM 27. A favicon is most likely to appear next to which webpage element? a. banner b. footer c. bookmark d. style rule ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. When you save a webpage as a bookmark or favorite, the favicon appears near Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 16

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 7: Improving Web Design with New Page Layouts the bookmark or favorite. b. When you save a webpage as a bookmark or favorite, the favicon appears near the bookmark or favorite. c. When you save a webpage as a bookmark or favorite, the favicon appears near the bookmark or favorite. d. When you save a webpage as a bookmark or favorite, the favicon appears near the bookmark or favorite.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Adding a Favicon QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.12 - Describe and add a favicon to a webpage NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating the Nutrition Page KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/12/2020 10:35 AM 28. Identify the correct format for inserting an aside element within an article element. a. <article> … <aside>…</aside> … </article> b. <article/> … <aside/> c. <article> <article/> … <aside>…</aside> … <article> </article> d. <article> … { aside; } … </article> ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

a a. The correct format for inserting an aside element within an article element is "< article > … < aside >…< /aside > … < /article >". b. The correct format for inserting an aside element within an article element is "< article > … < aside >…< /aside > … < /article >". c. The correct format for inserting an aside element within an article element is "< article > … < aside >…< /aside > … < /article >".

Page 17

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 7: Improving Web Design with New Page Layouts d. The correct format for inserting an aside element within an article element is "< article > … < aside >…< /aside > … < /article >".

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 07.10 - Insert and style an article element NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating the Nutrition Page KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/12/2020 10:48 AM 29. Identify the HTML entity used to display ¼ on a webpage. a. *frac14; b. 14&frac; c. 14*frac; d. &frac14; ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

d a. The HTML entity used to display 1⁄4 on a webpage is "& frac14;". b. The HTML entity used to display 1⁄4 on a webpage is "& frac14;". c. The HTML entity used to display 1⁄4 on a webpage is "& frac14;". d. The HTML entity used to display 1⁄4 on a webpage is "& frac14;".

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Creating the Nutrition Page QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.10 - Insert and style an article element NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating the Nutrition Page KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/12/2020 10:43 AM 30. Identify the correct style rule to format the aside elements with an italic font style. a. <aside/> { font-style: italic; } b.

<aside> { font-style: italic;

Page 18

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 7: Improving Web Design with New Page Layouts } <aside/> c. aside {

font-style: italic; }

aside { <font-style>: italic; }

ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

c a. The style rule used to format the aside elements with an italic font style is "aside { font-style: italic; }".

b. The style rule used to format the aside elements with an italic font style is "aside { font-style: italic; }". c. The style rule used to format the aside elements with an italic font style is "aside { font-style: italic; }". d. The style rule used to format the aside elements with an italic font style is "aside { font-style: italic; }".

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Creating the Nutrition Page QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 07.11 - Insert and style an aside element NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating the Nutrition Page KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/12/2020 10:49 AM 31. Using the _____ value allows the column to grow and shrink, depending on the size of the viewport. a. empty b. zero c. void d. auto ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. Using the auto value allows the column to grow and shrink, depending on the size of the viewport. b. Using the auto value allows the column to grow and shrink, depending on the size of the viewport. c. Using the auto value allows the column to grow and shrink, depending on the size of the viewport. d. Using the auto value allows the column to grow and shrink, depending on the size of the viewport.

POINTS:

Page 19

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 7: Improving Web Design with New Page Layouts DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Improving Design with CSS QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.03 - Describe and use the CSS grid layout NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating the Nutrition Page KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/13/2020 12:38 PM 32. The _____ property allows any specified padding or border to be included within the element’s total size. a. figcaption b. text shadow c. box-sizing d. radius ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. The box-sizing property allows any specified padding or border to be included within the element’s total size. b. The box-sizing property allows any specified padding or border to be included within the element’s total size. c. The box-sizing property allows any specified padding or border to be included within the element’s total size. d. The box-sizing property allows any specified padding or border to be included within the element’s total size.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Improving Design with CSS QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO;07.05 - Describe and use the box sizing property NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating the Nutrition Page KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/13/2020 12:51 PM 33. To quickly and easily apply a style rule to all elements, you use the _____ to select all elements. a. * b. # c. & d. / ANSWER: a Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 20

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 7: Improving Web Design with New Page Layouts FEEDBACK:

a. To quickly and easily apply a style rule to all elements, you use the asterisk (*) to select all elements. b. To quickly and easily apply a style rule to all elements, you use the asterisk (*) to select all elements. c. To quickly and easily apply a style rule to all elements, you use the asterisk (*) to select all elements. d. To quickly and easily apply a style rule to all elements, you use the asterisk (*) to select all elements.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Improving Design with CSS QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.05 - Describe and use the box sizing property NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Insert and style an article element KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/13/2020 12:55 PM 34. If a document has any errors, _____ gives you a chance to identify and correct them. a. simulating b. validating c. authenticating d. modulating ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. If the document has any errors, validating gives you a chance to identify and correct them.

b. If the document has any errors, validating gives you a chance to identify and correct them. c. If the document has any errors, validating gives you a chance to identify and correct them. d. If the document has any errors, validating gives you a chance to identify and correct them.

Page 21

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 7: Improving Web Design with New Page Layouts DATE MODIFIED:

1/13/2020 12:57 PM

35. Consider this statement used to add a favicon: <link rel="icon" type="image/png" sizes="32x32" href="images/favicon-32.png"> The rel attribute is the relationship and its value is _____. a. link b. icon c. image d. favicon ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. The rel attribute is the relationship and its value is icon. b. The rel attribute is the relationship and its value is icon. c. The rel attribute is the relationship and its value is icon. d. The rel attribute is the relationship and its value is icon. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Adding a Favicon QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.12 - Describe and add a favicon to a webpage NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating the Nutrition Page KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/14/2020 1:59 PM 36. Which are HTML 5 semantic elements? a. <details> … </details> b. <time> … </time> c. <place> … </place> d. <figure> … </figure> ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

a, b, d a. HTML 5 semantic elements include <details> … </details>, <time> … </time>, and <figure> … </figure>.

b. HTML 5 semantic elements include <details> … </details>, <time> … </time>, and <figure> … </figure>. c. HTML 5 semantic elements include <details> … </details>, <time> … </time>, and <figure> … </figure>. d. HTML 5 semantic elements include <details> … </details>, <time> … </time>, and <figure> … </figure>.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES:

1 Moderate Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements

Page 22

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 7: Improving Web Design with New Page Layouts QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Response HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.01 - Describe and use article, aside, and section elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/13/2020 1:26 PM 37. Which elements can be nested within article elements? a. link b. aside c. section d. place ANSWER: b, c FEEDBACK: a. Aside and section elements can be nested within article elements. b. Aside and section elements can be nested within article elements. c. Aside and section elements can be nested within article elements. d. Aside and section elements can be nested within article elements. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Response HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.01 - Describe and use article, aside, and section elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/13/2020 1:28 PM 38. The text-shadow property requires the _____ and _____ values. a. h-shadow b. r-shadow c. l-shadow d. v-shadow ANSWER: a, d FEEDBACK: a. The text-shadow property requires a minimum of two values: the h-shadow value, which designates the horizontal offset of the shadow, and the v-shadow, which designates the vertical offset of the shadow. b. The text-shadow property requires a minimum of two values: the h-shadow value, which designates the horizontal offset of the shadow, and the v-shadow, which designates the vertical offset of the shadow. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 23

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 7: Improving Web Design with New Page Layouts c. The text-shadow property requires a minimum of two values: the h-shadow value, which designates the horizontal offset of the shadow, and the v-shadow, which designates the vertical offset of the shadow. d. The text-shadow property requires a minimum of two values: the h-shadow value, which designates the horizontal offset of the shadow, and the v-shadow, which designates the vertical offset of the shadow.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Improving Design with CSS QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Response HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.06 - Describe and use the text shadow property NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/13/2020 1:31 PM 39. Which properties can be used with the column-count property? a. column-gap b. column-style c. column-width d. column-rule ANSWER: a, c, d FEEDBACK: a. Properties you can use with the column-count property include column-gap, column-width, and column-rule. b. Properties you can use with the column-count property include column-gap, column-width, and column-rule. c. Properties you can use with the column-count property include column-gap, column-width, and column-rule. d. Properties you can use with the column-count property include column-gap, column-width, and column-rule.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Creating the Nutrition Page QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Response HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.03 - Describe and use the CSS grid layout TOPICS: Creating the Nutrition Page KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/14/2020 2:00 PM 40. An aside element is independently distributable or reusable. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 24

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 7: Improving Web Design with New Page Layouts ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

False - article Correct

The article element is, in principle, independently distributable or reusable, e.g. in syndication. Incorrect The article element is, in principle, independently distributable or reusable, e.g. in syndication.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.01 - Describe and use article, aside, and section elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/14/2020 2:01 PM 41. The aside element represents a generic section of a document or application. ANSWER: False - section FEEDBACK: Correct The section element represents a generic section of a document or application. Incorrect The section element represents a generic section of a document or application.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.01 - Describe and use article, aside, and section elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/17/2020 5:18 PM 42. A figure element can contain one or more img elements. ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct A figure element can contain one or more img elements. Incorrect A figure element can contain one or more img elements.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES:

1 Easy Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements

Page 25

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 7: Improving Web Design with New Page Layouts QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.02 - Describe and use figure and figcaption elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/13/2020 1:38 PM 43. The aside element is used as a sidebar and contains additional information about a particular item mentioned within another element, such as an article or section element. ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

True Correct

The aside element is used as a sidebar and contains additional information about a particular item mentioned within another element, such as an article or section element. Incorrect The aside element is used as a sidebar and contains additional information about a particular item mentioned within another element, such as an article or section element.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.01 - Describe and use article, aside, and section elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/17/2020 5:20 PM 44. An opacity property value of 1 makes an element completely transparent. ANSWER: False - 0 FEEDBACK: Correct An opacity property value of 0 makes an element completely transparent. Incorrect An opacity property value of 0 makes an element completely transparent.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Improving Design with CSS QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 07.04 - Explain and use the opacity property Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 26

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 7: Improving Web Design with New Page Layouts NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Using HTML5 Semantic Elements Bloom’s: Remember 10/8/2019 3:10 PM 1/13/2020 1:41 PM

45. Articles may be nested within other HTML elements. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct Articles may be nested within other HTML elements. Incorrect Articles may be nested within other HTML elements.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.01 - Describe and use article, aside, and section elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/13/2020 1:42 PM 46. Article elements can be nested within aside elements. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct Articles may be nested within other HTML elements, such as the main element, or other article elements. Incorrect Articles may be nested within other HTML elements, such as the main element, or other article elements.

Page 27

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 7: Improving Web Design with New Page Layouts 47. The theme of each section for a section element should be identified, typically by including a footer element as a child of the section element. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct The theme of each section should be identified, typically by including a heading. Incorrect The theme of each section should be identified, typically by including a heading.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.01 - Describe and use article, aside, and section elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/13/2020 1:45 PM 48. The World Wide Web Consortium (W3C) states that the section element is not a generic container element. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct The World Wide Web Consortium (W3C) states that the section element is not a generic container element. Incorrect The World Wide Web Consortium (W3C) states that the section element is not a generic container element.

Page 28

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 7: Improving Web Design with New Page Layouts ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

False Correct

Though the figure element is commonly used to contain images, it can also be used to display a chart, graph, or other graphic. Incorrect Though the figure element is commonly used to contain images, it can also be used to display a chart, graph, or other graphic.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.02 - Describe and use figure and figcaption elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/13/2020 1:48 PM 50. The figure element is the same as the img element. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct Do not confuse the figure element with the img element. The figure element is a semantic element with self-contained content. A figure element can contain one or more img elements. Incorrect Do not confuse the figure element with the img element. The figure element is a semantic element with self-contained content. A figure element can contain one or more img elements.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.02 - Describe and use figure and figcaption elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/13/2020 1:49 PM 51. Each image element can be wrapped within separate figure and figure caption elements. a. True b. False ANSWER: True Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 29

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 7: Improving Web Design with New Page Layouts FEEDBACK:

Correct

Each image element can be wrapped within separate figure and figure caption elements. Incorrect Each image element can be wrapped within separate figure and figure caption elements.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.02 - Describe and use figure and figcaption elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/13/2020 1:51 PM 52. Using semantic HTML 5 elements provides a standard naming convention for webpage content. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct Using semantic HTML 5 elements provides a standard naming convention for webpage content. Incorrect Using semantic HTML 5 elements provides a standard naming convention for webpage content.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.01 - Describe and use article, aside, and section elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/13/2020 1:53 PM 53. The CSS grid layout was created by the W3C Working Group to lay out boxes of content into rows and columns, making a more reliable pattern of responsive element-sizing behaviors. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct The CSS grid layout was created by the W3C Working Group to lay out boxes of content into rows and columns, making a more reliable pattern of responsive element-sizing behaviors. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 30

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 7: Improving Web Design with New Page Layouts Incorrect The CSS grid layout was created by the W3C Working Group to lay out boxes of content into rows and columns, making a more reliable pattern of responsive element-sizing behaviors.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Improving Design with CSS QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.03 - Describe and use the CSS grid layout NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/13/2020 1:56 PM 54. The v-shadow value of the text-shadow property designates the horizontal position of the shadow. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct The h-shadow value of the text-shadow property designates the horizontal position of the shadow. Incorrect The h-shadow value of the text-shadow property designates the horizontal position of the shadow.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Improving Design with CSS QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.06 - Describe and use the text shadow property NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/13/2020 1:58 PM 55. While redesigning the home page of a website, one can modify the wireframes for tablet and desktop viewports because the additional space allows extra content to be included. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct While redesigning the home page of a website, one can modify the wireframes for tablet and desktop viewports because the additional space allows extra content to be included. Incorrect While redesigning the home page of a website, one can modify the wireframes for Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 31

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 7: Improving Web Design with New Page Layouts tablet and desktop viewports because the additional space allows extra content to be included.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Redesigning the Home Page QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.03 - Describe and use the CSS grid layout NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Redesigning the Home Page KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/13/2020 1:59 PM 56. Webpage content should be grouped to improve semantic design and search engine results. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct Webpage content should be grouped to improve semantic design and search engine results. Incorrect Webpage content should be grouped to improve semantic design and search engine results.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Updating the About Us Page QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.01 - Describe and use article, aside, and section elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Updating the About Us Page KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/13/2020 2:02 PM 57. Web developers can use the CSS grid layout to design a multiple-column layout, but it has less accuracy than float, width, and clear properties. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct Web developers can use the CSS grid layout to design a multiple-column layout with better accuracy than float, width, and clear properties. Incorrect Web developers can use the CSS grid layout to design a multiple-column layout with better accuracy than float, width, and clear properties. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 32

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 7: Improving Web Design with New Page Layouts POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Improving Design with CSS QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.03 - Describe and use the CSS grid layout NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 1/14/2020 1:38 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/14/2020 1:41 PM 58. With CSS grid layout, the grid-row-gap property is used to specify the size of rows within a grid. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct With CSS grid layout, grid-row-gap is used to specify the row gap between each box of content. Incorrect With CSS grid layout, grid-row-gap is used to specify the row gap between each box of content.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Improving Design with CSS QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.03 - Describe and use the CSS grid layout NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 1/14/2020 1:38 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/17/2020 5:36 PM 59. The figure element is used to group content. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct The figure element is used to group content. Incorrect The figure element is used to group content.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE: HAS VARIABLES:

1 Easy Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements True / False False

Page 33

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 7: Improving Web Design with New Page Layouts LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.02 - Describe and use figure and figcaption elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Updating the About Us Page KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/14/2020 2:04 PM 60. Major modern browsers support the opacity property. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct Major modern browsers support the opacity property. Incorrect Major modern browsers support the opacity property.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Improving Design with CSS QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.04 - Describe and use the opacity property NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 1/14/2020 1:38 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/14/2020 1:47 PM 61. When you specify opacity for the background of an element, any nested elements will inherit the transparency. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct When you specify opacity for the background of an element, any nested elements will inherit the transparency. Incorrect When you specify opacity for the background of an element, any nested elements will inherit the transparency.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Improving Design with CSS QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.04 - Describe and use the opacity property NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 1/14/2020 1:38 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 34

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 7: Improving Web Design with New Page Layouts DATE MODIFIED:

1/17/2020 5:40 PM

62. The aside element can be formatted differently from the rest of the article so that it stands out. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct The aside element can be formatted differently from the rest of the article so that it stands out. Incorrect The aside element can be formatted differently from the rest of the article so that it stands out.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating the Nutrition Page QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.11 - Insert and style an aside element NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating the Nutrition Page KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/14/2020 10:10 AM 63. A mobile layout usually uses a three-column layout, whereas a one-column layout is usually used for tablet and desktop viewports. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct A single-column layout is best for a mobile viewport design. Incorrect A single-column layout is best for a mobile viewport design.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Improving Design with CSS QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.03 - Describe and use the CSS grid layout NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating the Nutrition Page KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/17/2020 5:45 PM 64. Article elements are commonly used for pull-out quotes, glossary terms, or related links. a. True Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 35

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 7: Improving Web Design with New Page Layouts b. False ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

False Correct

Aside elements are commonly used for pull-out quotes, glossary terms, or related links. Incorrect Aside elements are commonly used for pull-out quotes, glossary terms, or related links.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.01 - Describe and use article, aside, and section elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating the Nutrition Page KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/14/2020 10:17 AM 65. The nth-last-of-type() pseudo-class applies to every specified element within its parent, beginning with the last element. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct The nth-last-of-type() pseudo-class applies to every specified element within its parent, beginning with the last element. Incorrect The nth-last-of-type() pseudo-class applies to every specified element within its parent, beginning with the last element.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Creating the Nutrition Page QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.10 - Insert and style an article element NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating the Nutrition Page KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/14/2020 10:20 AM 66. Sets of starting and ending Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) tags that provide meaning about the content of the tags are referred to as _____. ANSWER: semantic elements HTML 5 semantic elements Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) 5 semantic elements Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 36

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 7: Improving Web Design with New Page Layouts Hypertext Markup Language 5 semantic elements HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) 5 semantic elements POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.01 - Describe and use article, aside, and section elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/17/2020 5:51 PM 67. The _____ element, as described by the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C), is a complete, self-contained composition in a document, page, application, or site and that is, in principle, independently distributable or reusable. ANSWER: article POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.01 - Describe and use article, aside, and section elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/14/2020 10:24 AM 68. The _____ element is commonly used for pull-out quotes, glossary terms, or related links. ANSWER: aside POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.01 - Describe and use article, aside, and section elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 37

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 7: Improving Web Design with New Page Layouts DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

10/8/2019 3:10 PM 1/17/2020 5:52 PM

69. A(n) _____ element should be used for content that naturally contains a heading. ANSWER: section POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.01 - Describe and use article, aside, and section elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/14/2020 10:27 AM 70. The _____ element is a semantic element with self-contained content such as illustrations, diagrams, and photos. figure ANSWER: POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.02 - Describe and use figure and figcaption elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/17/2020 5:57 PM 71. The nth-of-type() selector is used to select specific elements within a(n) _____ element. ANSWER: parent POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Creating the Nutrition Page QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.10 - Insert and style an article element NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 38

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 7: Improving Web Design with New Page Layouts TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Using HTML5 Semantic Elements Bloom’s: Remember 10/8/2019 3:10 PM 1/14/2020 2:07 PM

72. A general rule is that the _____ element is appropriate only if the element’s contents would be listed explicitly in the document’s outline. ANSWER: section POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.01 - Describe and use article, aside, and section elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/14/2020 10:36 AM 73. The _____ property is a CSS property that applies a shadow to text. ANSWER: text-shadow POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Improving Design with CSS QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.06 - Describe and use the text shadow property NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/14/2020 10:38 AM 74. A(n) _____ is responsible for developing strategies for displaying content on a webpage. ANSWER: web content strategist POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Redesigning the Home Page QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 39

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 7: Improving Web Design with New Page Layouts STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.03 - Describe and use the CSS grid layout NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Redesigning the Home Page KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/14/2020 10:40 AM 75. One should add _____ elements to a webpage to group content within an article thematically in order to improve semantic design and search engine results. section ANSWER: POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.09 - Insert a section element NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Updating the About Us Page KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/17/2020 6:04 PM 76. You can use a number in parentheses to specify a specific paragraph out of a group of _____ elements. ANSWER: paragraph POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating the Nutrition Page QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.09 - Insert a section element NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Updating the Contact Us Page KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/14/2020 10:44 AM 77. The position declaration with a value of _____, combined with the bottom declaration with a value of 0, will place the figcaption text at the bottom of the image element since the figure element has a position of relative. ANSWER: absolute POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 40

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 7: Improving Web Design with New Page Layouts DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Redesigning the Home Page QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.02 - Describe and use figure and figcaption elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating the Nutrition Page KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/18/2020 7:11 AM Identify the letter of the choice that best matches the phrase or definition. a. figure b. three-column c. logo d. favicon e. blur radius f. <details> … </details> g. <summary> ... </summary> h. article element DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES:

Moderate Adding a Favicon Creating the Nutrition Page Improving Design with CSS Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements QUESTION TYPE: Matching HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.01 - Describe and use article, aside, and section elements LO:07.02 - Describe and use figure and figcaption elements LO:07.03 - Describe and use the CSS grid layout LO:07.06 - Describe and use the text shadow property LO:07.12 - Describe and add a favicon to a webpage NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating the Nutrition Page Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/18/2020 7:14 AM 78. Commonly used to contain news articles, blog and forum posts, or comments. ANSWER: h POINTS: 1 79. Tag that contains additional information that the user can display or hide. ANSWER: f POINTS: 1 80. Element used to group content, such as illustrations, diagrams, and photos. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 41

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 7: Improving Web Design with New Page Layouts ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 81. Small image that appears on the browser tab that represents the business. ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 82. Optional value for the text-shadow property. ANSWER: e POINTS: 1 83. Graphical representation of a business, used to promote the business brand and market presence. ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 84. Layout used for tablet and desktop viewports. ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 85. Indicates the start and end of a webpage summary area. ANSWER: g POINTS: 1 86. Explain an article element. Also, give an example of three article elements nested within a main element. ANSWER: The article element, as described by the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C), is “a complete, self-contained composition in a document, page, application, or site and that is, in principle, independently distributable or reusable, e.g. in syndication. This could be a forum post, a magazine or newspaper article, a blog entry, a user-submitted comment, an interactive widget or gadget, or any other independent item of content.” The article element starts with an <article> tag and ends with an </article> tag. Content placed between these tags will appear on a webpage as part of the article element. Articles may be nested within other HTML elements, such as the main element, the section element, or other article elements. Articles are commonly used to contain news articles, blog and forum posts, or comments. The article element is supported by the major modern browsers. The following is an example of three article elements nested within a main element. <main> <article> <h1>Article 1 Title</h1> <p>Information about article 1</p> </article> <article> <h1>Article 2 Title</h1> <p>Information about article 2</p> </article> <article> Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 42

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 7: Improving Web Design with New Page Layouts <h1>Article 3 Title</h1> <p>Information about article 3</p> </article> </main> POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.01 - Describe and use article, aside, and section elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/18/2020 7:16 AM 87. Explain a section element. Also, give an example of several section elements nested within an article element. ANSWER: The section element, as described by the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C), is an element that “represents a generic section of a document or application. A section, in this context, is a thematic grouping of content. The theme of each section should be identified, typically by including a heading (h1-h6 element) as a child of the section element.” The section element defines different parts of a webpage document, such as chapters. For example, in a webpage that contains a list of tutorials, Tutorials 1-3, each tutorial can be placed within a section and include a heading element with an appropriate title, Tutorial 1, Tutorial 2, and Tutorial 3, followed by the tutorial content. A section element should be used for content that naturally contains a heading. The W3C encourages designers to use article elements for other types of subdivided content. The W3C also states that the section element “is not a generic container element. When an element is needed only for styling purposes or as a convenience for scripting, authors are encouraged to use the div element instead. A general rule is that the section element is appropriate only if the element’s contents would be listed explicitly in the document’s outline.” The following is an example of several section elements nested within an article element. <article> <h1>Tutorials: Cooking Basics</h1> <p>Watch our tutorials to learn the basics of good cooking.</p> <section> <h1>Tutorial 1</h1> <p>Assembling basic kitchen tools.</p> </section> <section> <h1>Tutorial 2</h1> <p>Cooking with essential spices.</p> </section> Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 43

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 7: Improving Web Design with New Page Layouts <section> <h1>Tutorial 3</h1> <p>Following food prep basics.</p> </section> </article> POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.01 - Describe and use article, aside, and section elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/18/2020 7:17 AM 88. Explain figure and figure caption elements. ANSWER: The figure element is used to group content, such as illustrations, diagrams, and photos. According to the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C), the figure element “represents some flow content, optionally with a caption, that is self-contained (like a complete sentence) and is typically referenced as a single unit from the main flow of the document.” Though the figure element is commonly used to contain images, it can also display a chart, graph, or table. One should not confuse the figure element with the img element. The figure element is a semantic element with self-contained content. A figure element can contain one or more img elements. The figure element may contain an optional figure caption element, which is used to provide a caption for the figure element. The figure caption element uses a <figcaption> tag as the starting tag and a </figcaption> tag as the ending tag. The following is an example of the figure element and the figure caption element. <figure> <figcaption>New York City Highlights</figcaption> <img src="ny1.jpg" alt="Statue of Liberty"> <img src="ny2.jpg" alt="Central Park"> <img src="ny3.jpg" alt="New York at Night"> </figure> POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE:

1 Moderate Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements Essay

Page 44

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 7: Improving Web Design with New Page Layouts HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.02 - Describe and use figure and figcaption elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/18/2020 7:19 AM Critical Thinking Questions James has been assigned the task of creating a website for the Finneray University. The website should focus primarily on delivering the following information to visitors: the various departments, the courses offered by the university, the duration of each course, the expert faculties, the scholarship programs, the fee structure, and the campus housing facilities. 89. James creates an article that describes all the different departments of the university. Along with each department, the webpage lists the courses offered by that particular department. James should use a(n) _____ if he wants to include more information about one of these courses, such as its duration or its fee structure. a. details element b. aside element c. summary element d. section element ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. The aside element is used as a sidebar and contains additional information about a particular item mentioned within another element, such as an article or section element. For example, if an article on a webpage contains a recipe and a list of ingredients, you could include an aside element with more information about one of the key ingredients, such as its origin or where to purchase it. b. The aside element is used as a sidebar and contains additional information about a particular item mentioned within another element, such as an article or section element. For example, if an article on a webpage contains a recipe and a list of ingredients, you could include an aside element with more information about one of the key ingredients, such as its origin or where to purchase it. c. The aside element is used as a sidebar and contains additional information about a particular item mentioned within another element, such as an article or section element. For example, if an article on a webpage contains a recipe and a list of ingredients, you could include an aside element with more information about one of the key ingredients, such as its origin or where to purchase it. d. The aside element is used as a sidebar and contains additional information about a particular item mentioned within another element, such as an article or section element. For example, if an article on a webpage contains a recipe and a list of ingredients, you could include an aside element with more information about one of the key ingredients, such as its origin or where to purchase it.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE: HAS VARIABLES:

1 Challenging Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements Multiple Choice False

Page 45

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 7: Improving Web Design with New Page Layouts PREFACE NAME: Case 7-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.01 - Describe and use article, aside, and section elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/14/2020 1:01 PM 90. James has also been asked to include sample tutorial videos while working on the university’s website. He creates a webpage that contains a list of tutorials. He should use a(n) _____ to place each tutorial within a document, including a heading element and an appropriate title for the tutorial followed by the tutorial content. a. details element b. aside element c. summary element d. section element ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

d a. A section, in this context, is a thematic grouping of content. The theme of each section should be identified, typically by including a heading. b. A section, in this context, is a thematic grouping of content. The theme of each section should be identified, typically by including a heading. c. A section, in this context, is a thematic grouping of content. The theme of each section should be identified, typically by including a heading. d. A section, in this context, is a thematic grouping of content. The theme of each section should be identified, typically by including a heading.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 7-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.01 - Describe and use article, aside, and section elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using HTML5 Semantic Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/18/2020 7:22 AM Critical Thinking Questions Ben has been assigned the task of restyling the website of a leading fashion brand. 91. While restyling the About Us page, Ben notices that it contains groups of content that are not currently wrapped within a semantic element. These groups of content include the Designer Clothing group, the Casual Clothing group, and the Formal Clothing group. Ben should use a(n) _____ to group each of these areas together. a. section element Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 46

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 7: Improving Web Design with New Page Layouts b. summary element c. details element d. aside element ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

a a. The section element defines different parts of a webpage document, such as an introduction, new products, or service information.

b. The section element defines different parts of a webpage document, such as an introduction, new products, or service information. c. The section element defines different parts of a webpage document, such as an introduction, new products, or service information. d. The section element defines different parts of a webpage document, such as an introduction, new products, or service information.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: Using HTML 5 Semantic Elements QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 7-2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.08 - Insert a section element NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Updating the About Us Page KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/14/2020 1:05 PM 92. Ben notices the website has low search results. He decides adding a small image to appear on the browser tab that represents the business might help with search engine optimization. What term is used for the image Ben is adding? a. padding b. favicon c. banner d. emoji ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. Today, most websites use a favicon, a small image that appears on the browser tab that represents the business. The image might be a logo or another graphic that identifies the business brand. Favicons help improve search engine optimization. b. Today, most websites use a favicon, a small image that appears on the browser tab that represents the business. The image might be a logo or another graphic that identifies the business brand. Favicons help improve search engine optimization. c. Today, most websites use a favicon, a small image that appears on the browser tab that represents the business. The image might be a logo or another graphic that identifies the business brand. Favicons help improve search engine optimization. d. Today, most websites use a favicon, a small image that appears on the browser Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 47

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 7: Improving Web Design with New Page Layouts tab that represents the business. The image might be a logo or another graphic that identifies the business brand. Favicons help improve search engine optimization.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: Adding a Favicon QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 7-2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:07.12 - Describe and add a favicon to a webpage NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Updating the About Us Page KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/14/2020 1:19 PM

Page 48

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms 1. Which graphic presents related information in rows and columns, and is especially useful when comparing types of data or listing topics and details? a. graph b. table c. chart d. map ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. A table presents related information in rows and columns, and is especially useful when comparing types of data or listing topics and details. b. A table presents related information in rows and columns, and is especially useful when comparing types of data or listing topics and details. c. A table presents related information in rows and columns, and is especially useful when comparing types of data or listing topics and details. d. A table presents related information in rows and columns, and is especially useful when comparing types of data or listing topics and details.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Introduction QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.01 - Define table elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introduction KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/3/2020 1:26 PM 2. Websites that make visitors create an account or register for an event use _____ to collect information about their customers. a. forms b. scripts c. layouts d. voice recorders ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. Websites provide forms so visitors can create an account, register for an event, or make a purchase. b. Websites provide forms so visitors can create an account, register for an event, or make a purchase. c. Websites provide forms so visitors can create an account, register for an event, or make a purchase. d. Websites provide forms so visitors can create an account, register for an event, or make a purchase.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES:

1 Easy Introduction

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Discovering Tables QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.01 - Define table elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Discovering Tables KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/30/2020 11:22 AM 5. Identify an HTML table element that indicates the start and end of a row within a table. a. <table> … </table> b. <tr> … </tr> c. <tb> … </tb> d. <row> … </row> ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

b a. The HTML table element that indicates the start and end of a row within a table is < tr > ... < /tr >. b. The HTML table element that indicates the start and end of a row within a table is < tr > ... < /tr >. c. The HTML table element that indicates the start and end of a row within a table is < tr > ... < /tr >. d. The HTML table element that indicates the start and end of a row within a table is < tr > ... < /tr >.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms FEEDBACK:

a. The HTML element that indicates the start and end of a table caption is < caption > … < /caption >. b. The HTML element that indicates the start and end of a table caption is < caption > … < /caption >. c. The HTML element that indicates the start and end of a table caption is < caption > … < /caption >. d. The HTML element that indicates the start and end of a table caption is < caption > … < /caption >.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Discovering Tables QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.04 - Insert a table caption NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Discovering Tables KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/30/2020 11:28 AM 7. Identify the code used to create a table with one row and two columns. a. <table> <td> <tr>Semester 1</tr> <tr>Semester 2</tr> </td> </table> b. <table> <tr> <tc>Semester 1</tc> <tc>Semester 2</tc> </tr> </table> c. <table> <tr> <td>Semester 1</td> <td>Semester 2</td> </tr> </table> d. <table> <tc> <td>Semester 1</td> <td>Semester 2</td> </tc> </table> ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

c a. The <table> tag indicates the beginning of the table. Likewise, the </table> tag

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms indicates the end of a table. Each table row is indicated by a starting <tr> tag and an ending </tr> tag. Each table row element contains table data elements, indicated by a starting <td> tag and an ending </td> tag. The number of table data elements in each table row element determines the number of columns in the table. b. The <table> tag indicates the beginning of the table. Likewise, the </table> tag indicates the end of a table. Each table row is indicated by a starting <tr> tag and an ending </tr> tag. Each table row element contains table data elements, indicated by a starting <td> tag and an ending </td> tag. The number of table data elements in each table row element determines the number of columns in the table. c. The <table> tag indicates the beginning of the table. Likewise, the </table> tag indicates the end of a table. Each table row is indicated by a starting <tr> tag and an ending </tr> tag. Each table row element contains table data elements, indicated by a starting <td> tag and an ending </td> tag. The number of table data elements in each table row element determines the number of columns in the table. d. The <table> tag indicates the beginning of the table. Likewise, the </table> tag indicates the end of a table. Each table row is indicated by a starting <tr> tag and an ending </tr> tag. Each table row element contains table data elements, indicated by a starting <td> tag and an ending </td> tag. The number of table data elements in each table row element determines the number of columns in the table.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Discovering Tables QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.02 - Describe the steps used to plan, design, and code a table NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Discovering Tables KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/4/2020 10:22 AM 8. The number of table data elements in each table row element determines the number of _____ in the table. a. captions b. layouts c. columns d. margins ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. The number of table data elements in each table row element determines the number of columns in the table. b. The number of table data elements in each table row element determines the number of columns in the table. c. The number of table data elements in each table row element determines the number of columns in the table. d. The number of table data elements in each table row element determines the Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms number of columns in the table.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Discovering Tables QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.02 - Describe the steps used to plan, design, and code a table NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Discovering Tables KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/30/2020 11:49 AM 9. A table _____ is the line that defines the perimeter of a table. a. ruler b. border c. mark d. frame ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. A table border is the line that defines the perimeter of the table. b. A table border is the line that defines the perimeter of the table. c. A table border is the line that defines the perimeter of the table. d. A table border is the line that defines the perimeter of the table. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Discovering Tables QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.02 - Describe the steps used to plan, design, and code a table NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Discovering Tables KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/30/2020 11:37 AM 10. Which table element is typically used to identify row or column content? a. headers b. titles c. links d. tags ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. Headers are typically used to identify row or column content. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms b. Headers are typically used to identify row or column content. c. Headers are typically used to identify row or column content. d. Headers are typically used to identify row or column content. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Discovering Tables QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.02 - Describe the steps used to plan, design, and code a table NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Discovering Tables KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/30/2020 11:53 AM 11. The table _____ text appears above a table, spans its length, and is center-aligned by default. a. border b. form c. header d. caption ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. The table caption text appears above a table, spans its length, and is centeraligned by default. b. The table caption text appears above a table, spans its length, and is centeraligned by default. c. The table caption text appears above a table, spans its length, and is centeraligned by default. d. The table caption text appears above a table, spans its length, and is centeraligned by default.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Discovering Tables QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.04 - Insert a table caption NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Discovering Tables KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/4/2020 10:26 AM 12. Identify the code that is used to create a table that includes a table caption and table headers. a. <table> Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 7

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms <tr> <th>Semester 1</th> <th>Semester 2</th> </tr> <caption>College Course </caption> </table> b. <table> <caption>College Course </caption> <tr> <th>Semester 1</th> <th>Semester 2</th> </tr> </table> c. <table> <tr> <caption>College Course </caption> <th>Semester 1</th> <th>Semester 2</th> </tr> </table> d. <table> <table_caption>College Course </table_caption> <tr> <th>Semester 1</th> <th>Semester 2</th> </tr> </table> ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. Define a table caption with a starting <caption> tag and an ending </caption> tag. When using a table caption, insert it after the starting <table> tag. Define a table header with a starting <th> tag and an ending </th> tag. b. Define a table caption with a starting <caption> tag and an ending </caption> tag. When using a table caption, insert it after the starting <table> tag. Define a table header with a starting <th> tag and an ending </th> tag. c. Define a table caption with a starting <caption> tag and an ending </caption> tag. When using a table caption, insert it after the starting <table> tag. Define a table header with a starting <th> tag and an ending </th> tag. d. Define a table caption with a starting <caption> tag and an ending </caption> tag. When using a table caption, insert it after the starting <table> tag. Define a table header with a starting <th> tag and an ending </th> tag.

Page 8

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Bloom’s: Understand 10/8/2019 3:11 PM 2/4/2020 10:29 AM

13. Identify a correct format to insert the table header element "Days." a. <thead>Days</thead> b. <th>Days</th> c. <theader>Days</theader> d. <thead_element>Days</th_element> ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

b a. The correct format to insert the table header element "Days" is < th > Days < /th >.

b. The correct format to insert the table header element "Days" is < th > Days < /th >. c. The correct format to insert the table header element "Days" is < th > Days < /th >. d. The correct format to insert the table header element "Days" is < th > Days < /th >.

Page 9

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

c a. There is one row in the table. b. There is one row in the table. c. There is one row in the table. d. There is one row in the table.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Discovering Tables QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.03 - Create a table with rows and data NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Discovering Tables KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/30/2020 12:03 PM 15. In the context of styling table elements, which format is used to specify the background-color property for a table header? a. table, th, td { background-color: #F5F5F0; } b. table { background-color: #F5F5F0; } c. th { background-color: #F5F5F0; } d. theader { background-color: #F5F5F0; } ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. The table headers are th elements, and the background-color property is used to add style rules that specify a background color. b. The table headers are th elements, and the background-color property is used to add style rules that specify a background color. c. The table headers are th elements, and the background-color property is used to add style rules that specify a background color. d. The table headers are th elements, and the background-color property is used to add style rules that specify a background color.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE: HAS VARIABLES:

1 Easy Styling Table Elements Multiple Choice False

Page 10

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.05 - Style a table for tablet and desktop viewports NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Styling Table Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/5/2020 4:26 PM 16. Identify a style rule used to align the table data in the center of the cell. a. th { <text-align/>: center; } b. tdata { text-align: <center/>; } c. td { text-align: center; } d. table_data { text-align: center; } ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. The table data cells are td elements, and the text-align property is used to add style rules that specify text alignment (in this case, center alignment). b. The table data cells are td elements, and the text-align property is used to add style rules that specify text alignment (in this case, center alignment). c. The table data cells are td elements, and the text-align property is used to add style rules that specify text alignment (in this case, center alignment). d. The table data cells are td elements, and the text-align property is used to add style rules that specify text alignment (in this case, center alignment).

Page 11

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms b. tc, th, td { padding: 1em; } c. <caption, th, td> { padding: 1em; }<caption, th, td/> d. caption, th, td { padding: 1em; } ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

d a. The table caption, header, and data cells are caption, th, and td elements, respectively, and the padding property is used to add style rules that specify padding. b. The table caption, header, and data cells are caption, th, and td elements, respectively, and the padding property is used to add style rules that specify padding. c. The table caption, header, and data cells are caption, th, and td elements, respectively, and the padding property is used to add style rules that specify padding. d. The table caption, header, and data cells are caption, th, and td elements, respectively, and the padding property is used to add style rules that specify padding.

Page 12

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

b a. The table data cells are td elements, and the height property is used to add style rules that specify table cell height. b. The table data cells are td elements, and the height property is used to add style rules that specify table cell height. c. The table data cells are td elements, and the height property is used to add style rules that specify table cell height. d. The table data cells are td elements, and the height property is used to add style rules that specify table cell height.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Styling Table Elements QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.05 - Style a table for tablet and desktop viewports NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Styling Table Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/5/2020 4:34 PM 19. The border-collapse property with a value of _____ is used to display a table with single, consolidated borders. a. consolidate b. 0 c. 1 d. collapse ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. If you want to display a table with single, consolidated borders use the bordercollapse property with a value of collapse.

b. If you want to display a table with single, consolidated borders use the bordercollapse property with a value of collapse. c. If you want to display a table with single, consolidated borders use the bordercollapse property with a value of collapse. d. If you want to display a table with single, consolidated borders use the bordercollapse property with a value of collapse.

Page 13

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

10/8/2019 3:11 PM 1/30/2020 1:21 PM

20. While styling a table for a tablet viewport, the table can be centered on the page by setting the left and right margins to a value of _____. a. auto b. 0 c. 1 d. center ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. Specifying left and right margins of auto centers the table on the page. b. Specifying left and right margins of auto centers the table on the page. c. Specifying left and right margins of auto centers the table on the page. d. Specifying left and right margins of auto centers the table on the page. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Styling Table Elements QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.05 - Style a table for tablet and desktop viewports NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Styling Table Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/5/2020 4:57 PM 21. Identify a style rule that applies a thin (0.1em) solid black (#000000) border and 1em of padding to all sides of a table header and table data elements. a. th, td { border: 0.1em solid #000000; padding: 1em; } b. th, td { <border/>: 0.1em solid #000000; <padding/>: 1em; } c. <th, td/> { border: (0.1em solid #000000); padding: (1em); } d. <th>, <td> { border: 0.1em solid #000000; padding: 1em; }<th/>, <td/> ANSWER: a Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 14

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms FEEDBACK:

a. The border property and padding property are used to add style rules specifying the color and width of borders and padding, respectively b. The border property and padding property are used to add style rules specifying the color and width of borders and padding, respectively c. The border property and padding property are used to add style rules specifying the color and width of borders and padding, respectively d. The border property and padding property are used to add style rules specifying the color and width of borders and padding, respectively

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Styling Table Elements QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.05 - Style a table for tablet and desktop viewports NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Styling Table Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/5/2020 4:44 PM 22. Identify a style rule that applies only to the th element, and not to the td elements, and uniquely formats the table header elements to have a dark gray background and white text. a. <th> { background-color: #1D1D1C; color: #FFFFFF; } <th/> b. th { background-color: #1D1D1C; color: #FFFFFF; td: 0; } c. th, td:0{ background-color: #1D1D1C; color: #FFFFFF; } d. th { background-color: #1D1D1C; color: #FFFFFF; } ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. A style rule beginning with th and including these two properties applies only to the th element and uniquely formats the table header elements to have a dark gray background and white text. b. A style rule beginning with th and including these two properties applies only to the th element and uniquely formats the table header elements to have a dark gray background and white text. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 15

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms c. A style rule beginning with th and including these two properties applies only to the th element and uniquely formats the table header elements to have a dark gray background and white text. d. A style rule beginning with th and including these two properties applies only to the th element and uniquely formats the table header elements to have a dark gray background and white text.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Styling Table Elements QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.05 - Style a table for tablet and desktop viewports NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Styling Table Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/5/2020 4:49 PM 23. A webpage visitor uses a(n) _____ to make a selection or perform a command. a. information collector window b. selection panel c. data input control d. command regulator ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. A webpage visitor uses a data input control to make a selection or perform a command. b. A webpage visitor uses a data input control to make a selection or perform a command. c. A webpage visitor uses a data input control to make a selection or perform a command. d. A webpage visitor uses a data input control to make a selection or perform a command.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating Webpage Forms QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.06 - Describe form controls and their uses NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Webpage Forms KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/30/2020 1:35 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 16

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms 24. Identify the code used to create a 25-character text box for a user’s last name. a. <p>Last Name: <input name="lastname" type="text" size="25"></p> b. <p>Last Name: <input name="lastname" type="text(25)"></p> c. <p>Last Name: <input name/>"lastname" size="25"></p> d. <p>Last Name(TEXT): <input name="lastname" size="25"></p> ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. The code used to create a 25-character text box for a user’s last name is<p>Last Name: <input name="lastname" type="text" size="25"></p>. b. The code used to create a 25-character text box for a user’s last name is<p>Last Name: <input name="lastname" type="text" size="25"></p>. c. The code used to create a 25-character text box for a user’s last name is<p>Last Name: <input name="lastname" type="text" size="25"></p>. d. The code used to create a 25-character text box for a user’s last name is<p>Last Name: <input name="lastname" type="text" size="25"></p>.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating Webpage Forms QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.08 - Create text input controls, labels, and check boxes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Webpage Forms KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/5/2020 4:55 PM 25. To create a textarea control, one needs to use the _____ instead of the input element. a. output element b. control element c. textarea element d. label element ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. To create a textarea control, you use the textarea element instead of the input element. b. To create a textarea control, you use the textarea element instead of the input element. c. To create a textarea control, you use the textarea element instead of the input element. d. To create a textarea control, you use the textarea element instead of the input element.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY:

1 Easy

Page 17

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms REFERENCES: Creating Webpage Forms QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.10 - Use the textarea element NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Webpage Forms KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/30/2020 1:38 PM 26. Which control limits the webpage visitor to only one choice from a list of choices? a. select b. radio c. checkbox d. textarea ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. A radio control limits the webpage visitor to only one choice from a list of choices. b. A radio control limits the webpage visitor to only one choice from a list of choices. c. A radio control limits the webpage visitor to only one choice from a list of choices. d. A radio control limits the webpage visitor to only one choice from a list of choices. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating Webpage Forms QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.08 - Create text input controls, labels, and check boxes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Webpage Forms KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/30/2020 1:40 PM 27. Which control creates an option menu from which a visitor makes one or more choices? a. select b. radio c. reset d. textarea ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. A select control creates a selection menu from which the visitor makes one or more choices. b. A select control creates a selection menu from which the visitor makes one or more choices. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 18

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms c. A select control creates a selection menu from which the visitor makes one or more choices. d. A select control creates a selection menu from which the visitor makes one or more choices.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating Webpage Forms QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.09 - Create a selection menu with multiple options NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Webpage Forms KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/30/2020 1:43 PM 28. Which button sends the form information to the appropriate location for processing? a. Select b. Radio c. Submit d. Reset ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. The Submit button sends the form information to the appropriate location for processing.

b. The Submit button sends the form information to the appropriate location for processing. c. The Submit button sends the form information to the appropriate location for processing. d. The Submit button sends the form information to the appropriate location for processing.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating Webpage Forms QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.11 - Create a Submit button NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Webpage Forms KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 1/30/2020 1:44 PM 29. Identify the code used to create submit controls. a. <input type="submit" value="Submit"> Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 19

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms b. <input type=submit value=Submit> c. <input type:"submit" value:"Submit"> d. <input type:submit value:Submit> ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. The code used to create submit controls is <input type="submit" value="Submit">. b. The code used to create submit controls is <input type="submit" value="Submit">. c. The code used to create submit controls is <input type="submit" value="Submit">. d. The code used to create submit controls is <input type="submit" value="Submit">. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating Webpage Forms QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.11 - Create a Submit button NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Webpage Forms KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/5/2020 4:59 PM 30. Form _____ identify the type of information to enter into or select from an input control. a. actions b. layouts c. scripts d. labels ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. Form labels identify the type of information to enter into or select from an input control. b. Form labels identify the type of information to enter into or select from an input control. c. Form labels identify the type of information to enter into or select from an input control. d. Form labels identify the type of information to enter into or select from an input control.

Page 20

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

10/8/2019 3:11 PM 1/30/2020 1:49 PM

31. Identify the code that creates a label and a text box for a visitor’s first name. a. <label/> for="fName">First Name <input type="text" name="fName" id="fName"> b. <label for="fName">First Name:</label> <input type="text" name="fName" id="fName"> c. <label/> for="fName">First Name:<id> <input type="text" id="fName"> d. <label_id_for="fName">First Name:</label_id_for> <input type="text" name="fName" id="fName"> ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

b a. The code <label for="fName">First Name:</label> <input type="text" name="fName" id="fName"> displays the code that creates a label and a text box for a visitor’s first name. b. The code <label for="fName">First Name:</label> <input type="text" name="fName" id="fName"> displays the code that creates a label and a text box for a visitor’s first name. c. The code <label for="fName">First Name:</label> <input type="text" name="fName" id="fName"> displays the code that creates a label and a text box for a visitor’s first name. d. The code <label for="fName">First Name:</label> <input type="text" name="fName" id="fName"> displays the code that creates a label and a text box for a visitor’s first name.

c a. Use the action attribute of the < form > tag to specify the action the browser takes when submitting the form.

Page 21

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms b. Use the action attribute of the < form > tag to specify the action the browser takes when submitting the form. c. Use the action attribute of the < form > tag to specify the action the browser takes when submitting the form. d. Use the action attribute of the < form > tag to specify the action the browser takes when submitting the form.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating Webpage Forms QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.07 - Use the form and input elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Webpage Forms KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/3/2020 1:28 PM 33. While processing a form, the _____ attribute of the <form> tag specifies how to send the data entered in the form to the server to be processed. a. required b. pattern c. action d. method ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

d a. The method attribute of the < form > tag specifies how to send the data entered in the form to the server to be processed. b. The method attribute of the < form > tag specifies how to send the data entered in the form to the server to be processed. c. The method attribute of the < form > tag specifies how to send the data entered in the form to the server to be processed. d. The method attribute of the < form > tag specifies how to send the data entered in the form to the server to be processed.

Page 22

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms 34. While processing a form, the _____ method sends a separate data file with the name-value pairs to the URL (or email address) indicated in the action attribute. a. get b. link c. post d. send ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. The post method sends a separate data file with the name-value pairs to the URL (or email address) indicated in the action attribute. b. The post method sends a separate data file with the name-value pairs to the URL (or email address) indicated in the action attribute. c. The post method sends a separate data file with the name-value pairs to the URL (or email address) indicated in the action attribute. d. The post method sends a separate data file with the name-value pairs to the URL (or email address) indicated in the action attribute.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating Webpage Forms QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.07 - Use the form and input elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Webpage Forms KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/1/2020 12:55 PM 35. Identify a correctly formatted form tag with the post method and a specified action. a. <form/> method="POST" <action/>="formInfo.php" b. <form method="POST" action="formInfo.php"> c. <form method>="POST" <action="formInfo.php"> d. <form> method="POST" </form> action="formInfo.php"> ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

b a. The correct format of a form tag with the post method and specified action is < form method="POST" action="formInfo.php" >. b. The correct format of a form tag with the post method and specified action is < form method="POST" action="formInfo.php" >. c. The correct format of a form tag with the post method and specified action is < form method="POST" action="formInfo.php" >. d. The correct format of a form tag with the post method and specified action is < form method="POST" action="formInfo.php" >.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES:

1 Easy Creating Webpage Forms

Page 23

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.07 - Use the form and input elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Webpage Forms KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/5/2020 5:07 PM 36. Identify the code that adds a label and a textarea element to a form to provide an opportunity for customers to ask questions. a. <label_id="questions"> Questions?</label_id> <textarea for id="questions" name="questions" rows="3" cols="25"></textarea> b. <label="questions"> Questions?</label> <textarea ="questions" name="questions" rows="3" cols="25"></textarea> c. <label for="questions"> Questions?</label> <textarea id="questions" name="questions" rows="3" cols="25"></textarea> d. <label/>="questions" Questions? <textarea id="questions" name="questions" rows="3" cols="25"></textarea id> ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. To connect a label to its control, include the for attribute with the same value as the input control’s id value. To create a textarea control, you use the textarea element instead of the input element. The textarea element has two primary attributes, which set the size of the textarea control: rows, which specifies the number of rows, or lines, in the textarea control; and cols, which sets the width of the textarea control as the number of columns, with each column containing one character. b. To connect a label to its control, include the for attribute with the same value as the input control’s id value. To create a textarea control, you use the textarea element instead of the input element. The textarea element has two primary attributes, which set the size of the textarea control: rows, which specifies the number of rows, or lines, in the textarea control; and cols, which sets the width of the textarea control as the number of columns, with each column containing one character. c. To connect a label to its control, include the for attribute with the same value as the input control’s id value. To create a textarea control, you use the textarea element instead of the input element. The textarea element has two primary attributes, which set the size of the textarea control: rows, which specifies the number of rows, or lines, in the textarea control; and cols, which sets the width of the textarea control as the number of columns, with each column containing one

Page 24

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms character. d. To connect a label to its control, include the for attribute with the same value as the input control’s id value. To create a textarea control, you use the textarea element instead of the input element. The textarea element has two primary attributes, which set the size of the textarea control: rows, which specifies the number of rows, or lines, in the textarea control; and cols, which sets the width of the textarea control as the number of columns, with each column containing one character.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating Webpage Forms QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.10 - Use the textarea element NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Webpage Forms KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/5/2020 5:15 PM 37. To avoid horizontal scrolling, display the form elements as _____ so that each element appears on its own line. a. charts b. tables c. grids d. blocks ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. To avoid horizontal scrolling, display the form elements as blocks so that each element appears on its own line. b. To avoid horizontal scrolling, display the form elements as blocks so that each element appears on its own line. c. To avoid horizontal scrolling, display the form elements as blocks so that each element appears on its own line. d. To avoid horizontal scrolling, display the form elements as blocks so that each element appears on its own line.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Styling Forms QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.07 - Use the form and input elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Styling Forms KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 25

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms DATE MODIFIED:

2/1/2020 1:07 PM

38. Identify a style rule that specifies a block display for label elements. a. <label/> { display: block; } b. label { <display/>: block; } c. label { display: block; } d. <label> { display: block; }</label> ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

c a. The style rule label {display: block;} specifies a block display for label elements. b. The style rule label {display: block;} specifies a block display for label elements. c. The style rule label {display: block;} specifies a block display for label elements. d. The style rule label {display: block;} specifies a block display for label elements.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Styling Forms QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.08 - Create text input controls, labels, and check boxes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Styling Forms KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/5/2020 5:21 PM 39. A table consists of _____. a. rows b. columns c. contour lines d. cells ANSWER: a, b, d FEEDBACK: a. A table consists of rows, columns, and cells, much like a spreadsheet. b. A table consists of rows, columns, and cells, much like a spreadsheet. c. A table consists of rows, columns, and cells, much like a spreadsheet. d. A table consists of rows, columns, and cells, much like a spreadsheet. POINTS:

Page 26

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Discovering Tables QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Response HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.01 - Define table elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Discovering Tables KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/1/2020 1:22 PM 40. A table includes features such as _____. a. zones b. captions c. headers d. borders ANSWER: b, c, d FEEDBACK: a. In addition to columns and rows, tables also include features such as borders, headers, and captions. b. In addition to columns and rows, tables also include features such as borders, headers, and captions. c. In addition to columns and rows, tables also include features such as borders, headers, and captions. d. In addition to columns and rows, tables also include features such as borders, headers, and captions.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Discovering Tables QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Response HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.01 - Define table elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Discovering Tables KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/1/2020 1:31 PM 41. A data input control can be a _____. a. radio button b. Reset button c. Submit button d. link button ANSWER: a, b, c Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 27

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms FEEDBACK:

a. A data input control can be a radio button (input type="radio"), a check box (input type="checkbox"), a Submit button (input type="submit"), a Reset button (input type="reset"), or a selection menu (select element). b. A data input control can be a radio button (input type="radio"), a check box (input type="checkbox"), a Submit button (input type="submit"), a Reset button (input type="reset"), or a selection menu (select element). c. A data input control can be a radio button (input type="radio"), a check box (input type="checkbox"), a Submit button (input type="submit"), a Reset button (input type="reset"), or a selection menu (select element). d. A data input control can be a radio button (input type="radio"), a check box (input type="checkbox"), a Submit button (input type="submit"), a Reset button (input type="reset"), or a selection menu (select element).

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating Webpage Forms QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Response HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.06 - Describe form controls and their uses NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Webpage Forms KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/5/2020 5:24 PM 42. The attributes frequently used with text input controls such as text, password, email, tel, and date controls are _____. a. size b. widthadjustment c. writeonly d. maxlength ANSWER: a, d FEEDBACK: a. The attributes frequently used with text input controls such as text, password, email, tel, and date controls are size and maxlength. b. The attributes frequently used with text input controls such as text, password, email, tel, and date controls are size and maxlength. c. The attributes frequently used with text input controls such as text, password, email, tel, and date controls are size and maxlength. d. The attributes frequently used with text input controls such as text, password, email, tel, and date controls are size and maxlength.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating Webpage Forms QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Response HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.08 - Create text input controls, labels, and check boxes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 28

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Creating Webpage Forms Bloom’s: Understand 10/8/2019 3:11 PM 2/1/2020 1:37 PM

43. Content that can be organized into categories and items is often best presented in a hierarchical format. ANSWER: False - table FEEDBACK: Correct Content you can organize into categories is often best presented in a table format. Incorrect Content you can organize into categories is often best presented in a table format.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Introduction QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.01 - Define table elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introduction KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/1/2020 2:01 PM 44. A footnote is a vertical line of information in a table. ANSWER: False - column FEEDBACK: Correct A column is a vertical line of information. Incorrect A column is a vertical line of information.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Discovering Tables QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.01 - Define table elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Discovering Tables KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/1/2020 2:31 PM 45. A table can have only one caption. ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct A table can have only one caption. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 29

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms Incorrect A table can have only one caption.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Discovering Tables QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.04 - Insert a table caption NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Discovering Tables KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/1/2020 2:32 PM 46. A label accepts text, such as names, dates, and passwords, and is often called an input field. ANSWER: False - text input control FEEDBACK: Correct A text input control accepts text, such as names, dates, and passwords, and is often called an input field. Incorrect A text input control accepts text, such as names, dates, and passwords, and is often called an input field.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating Webpage Forms QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.08 - Create text input controls, labels, and check boxes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Webpage Forms KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/1/2020 2:40 PM 47. A script is a program that runs in a browser to add functionality to a webpage. ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct A script is a program that runs in a browser to add functionality to a webpage. Incorrect A script is a program that runs in a browser to add functionality to a webpage.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE: HAS VARIABLES:

1 Easy Creating Webpage Forms Modified True / False False

Page 30

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.06 - Describe form controls and their uses NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Webpage Forms KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/1/2020 2:41 PM 48. Businesses are not permitted to use forms to collect information about their customers. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct Many businesses use forms to collect information about their customers. Incorrect Many businesses use forms to collect information about their customers.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Introduction QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.07 - Use the form and input elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introduction KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/1/2020 2:44 PM 49. A user input form is used to provide information to website visitors. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct A user input form is used to collect information from website visitors. Incorrect A user input form is used to collect information from website visitors.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Project—Create a Table and a Form QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.07 - Use the form and input elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Project — Create a Table and a Form KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 31

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms DATE MODIFIED:

2/1/2020 2:48 PM

50. Heading cells are used to display column headings that identify the information in each column. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct Heading cells are used to display column headings that identify the information in each column. Incorrect Heading cells are used to display column headings that identify the information in each column.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Discovering Tables QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.01 - Define table elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Discovering Tables KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/1/2020 2:50 PM 51. Table formatting attributes, such as borders and spacing, are set by default while creating a table in HTML. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct Typical table formatting, such as borders and spacing, is not included by default. Incorrect Typical table formatting, such as borders and spacing, is not included by default.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Discovering Tables QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.03 - Create a table with rows and data NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Discovering Tables KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/2/2020 1:53 PM 52. The HTML element <theader> … </theader> is used to indicate the start and end of a table header area. a. True b. False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 32

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

False Correct Define a table header with a starting < th > tag and an ending < /th > tag. Incorrect Define a table header with a starting < th > tag and an ending < /th > tag.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Discovering Tables QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.03 - Create a table with rows and data NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Discovering Tables KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 2/2/2020 1:48 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/2/2020 1:49 PM 53. Only visual browsers can use headers to identify table content. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct Nonvisual browsers also use headers to identify table content. Incorrect Nonvisual browsers also use headers to identify table content.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Discovering Tables QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.02 - Describe the steps used to plan, design, and code a table NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Discovering Tables KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/2/2020 1:54 PM 54. While defining a table, the <caption> tag should be inserted after the starting <tr> tag. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct Define a table caption with a starting < caption > tag and an ending < /caption > tag. When using a table caption, insert it after the starting <table> tag. Incorrect Define a table caption with a starting < caption > tag and an ending < /caption > tag. When using a table caption, insert it after the starting <table> tag.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY:

1 Moderate

Page 33

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms REFERENCES: Discovering Tables QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.04 - Insert a table caption NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Discovering Tables KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/5/2020 5:34 PM 55. Tables can include headers and captions individually or in combination. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct Tables can include headers and captions individually or in combination. Incorrect Tables can include headers and captions individually or in combination.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Discovering Tables QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.02 - Describe the steps used to plan, design, and code a table NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Discovering Tables KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/2/2020 2:12 PM 56. Many HTML 5 attributes are not supported by all major browsers. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct Many HTML 5 attributes are not supported by major browsers. Incorrect Many HTML 5 attributes are not supported by major browsers.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating Webpage Forms QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.02 - Describe the steps used to plan, design, and code a table NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Discovering Tables Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 34

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Bloom’s: Remember 10/8/2019 3:11 PM 2/2/2020 2:15 PM

57. Tables should only be used to design a layout for a webpage. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct Tables are meant to display data in rows and columns and should not be used to design a layout for a webpage. Incorrect Tables are meant to display data in rows and columns and should not be used to design a layout for a webpage.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Discovering Tables QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.02 - Describe the steps used to plan, design, and code a table NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Discovering Tables KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/2/2020 2:17 PM 58. A bulleted list can be used instead of a table to present complex tabular information such as a class schedule clearly. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct Tables present information more clearly. Incorrect Tables present information more clearly.

Page 35

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms a. True b. False ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

True Correct Without styles applied to a table, all the columns appear to run together. Incorrect Without styles applied to a table, all the columns appear to run together.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Discovering Tables QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.05 - Style a table for tablet and desktop viewports NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Discovering Tables KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/2/2020 2:21 PM 60. When a border is applied to table elements, by default, every adjacent cell has a common border. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct When a border is applied to table elements, by default, each cell has its own border, making the table appear to use double lines between each table data cell. Incorrect When a border is applied to table elements, by default, each cell has its own border, making the table appear to use double lines between each table data cell.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Styling Table Elements QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.05 - Style a table for tablet and desktop viewports NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Styling Table Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/2/2020 2:24 PM 61. A table containing numeric information can be converted to a chart for the mobile viewport. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct A table containing numeric information can be converted to a chart for the mobile viewport. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 36

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms Incorrect A table containing numeric information can be converted to a chart for the mobile viewport.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Styling Table Elements QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.05 - Style a table for tablet and desktop viewports NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Styling Table Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/2/2020 2:28 PM 62. The image input type creates the default button instead of a graphical button. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct The image input type creates a graphical button instead of a default button. Incorrect The image input type creates a graphical button instead of a default button.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating Webpage Forms QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.07 - Use the form and input elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Webpage Forms KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/2/2020 2:31 PM 63. For button, reset, and submit controls, the value attribute specifies the data submitted with the form when the control is selected. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct For checkbox, radio, and image controls, the value attribute specifies the data submitted with the form when the control is selected. Incorrect For checkbox, radio, and image controls, the value attribute specifies the data submitted with the form when the control is selected.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY:

1 Moderate

Page 37

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms REFERENCES: Creating Webpage Forms QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.07 - Use the form and input elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Webpage Forms KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/3/2020 12:34 PM 64. To set a particular check box to be preselected as the default, the checked attribute and value should be used within the <input> tag. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct To set a particular check box to be preselected as the default, the checked attribute and value should be used within the < input > tag. Incorrect To set a particular check box to be preselected as the default, the checked attribute and value should be used within the < input > tag.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Creating Webpage Forms QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.08 - Create text input controls, labels, and check boxes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Webpage Forms KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/3/2020 1:32 PM 65. When the webpage visitor is limited to only one choice from a list by a radio control, each form control choice has a radio button, or option button, which typically appears as an open circle. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct Each choice has a radio button, or option button, which typically appears as an open circle. Incorrect Each choice has a radio button, or option button, which typically appears as an open circle.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES:

1 Easy Creating Webpage Forms

Page 38

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.09 - Create a selection menu with multiple options NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Webpage Forms KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/5/2020 5:44 PM 66. A webpage form must include a submit control, but not necessarily a reset control. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct A webpage form must include a submit control, and must also include a reset control. Incorrect A webpage form must include a submit control, and must also include a reset control.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating Webpage Forms QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.11 - Create a Submit button NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Webpage Forms KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/3/2020 12:38 PM 67. The get method is the more common method in form processing because it can be used to send sensitive form data and does not have a size limitation. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct The post method is the more common method because it can be used to send sensitive form data and does not have a size limitation. Incorrect The post method is the more common method because it can be used to send sensitive form data and does not have a size limitation.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE: HAS VARIABLES:

1 Easy Creating Webpage Forms True / False False

Page 39

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.07 - Use the form and input elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Webpage Forms KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/3/2020 12:39 PM 68. To identify categories or topics, _____ can use column headings or row headings. ANSWER: tables POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Introduction QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.01 - Define table elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introduction KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/5/2020 5:47 PM 69. A(n) _____ displays normal, left-aligned text and contains information appropriate for the column and row. ANSWER: data cell table data cell POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Discovering Tables QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.01 - Define table elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Discovering Tables KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/3/2020 12:42 PM 70. In <td>World History</td>, ''td'' indicates the _____. ANSWER: table data element table data data element data tag Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 40

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms table data tag POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Discovering Tables QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.02 - Describe the steps used to plan, design, and code a table NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Discovering Tables KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/6/2020 7:10 AM 71. The descriptive text that serves as a table's title or identifies its purpose is called a(n) _____. ANSWER: table caption caption POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Discovering Tables QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.04 - Insert a table caption NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Discovering Tables KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/6/2020 7:14 AM 72. The _____ property, a Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) table styling property, aligns the table data vertically in the middle of a cell. vertical-align ANSWER: POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Styling Table Elements QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.05 - Style a table for tablet and desktop viewports NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Styling Table Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 41

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

10/8/2019 3:11 PM 2/3/2020 12:47 PM

73. The _____ property, a Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) table styling property, collapses borders in a table so that adjacent cells share borders. border-collapse ANSWER: POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Styling Table Elements QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.05 - Style a table for tablet and desktop viewports NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Styling Table Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/3/2020 12:48 PM 74. A(n) _____ is a type of table border that appears as a single, consolidated border. ANSWER: collapsed border POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Styling Table Elements QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.05 - Style a table for tablet and desktop viewports NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Styling Table Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/6/2020 7:16 AM 75. A(n) _____ is an interactive mechanism in which users enter text or make selections on a form. ANSWER: input control POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating Webpage Forms QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.06 - Describe form controls and their uses Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 42

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Creating Webpage Forms Bloom’s: Remember 10/8/2019 3:11 PM 2/3/2020 12:50 PM

76. The _____ controls are useful in collecting more than a single line of text from a webpage visitor, such as a product review. ANSWER: textarea POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating Webpage Forms QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.08 - Create text input controls, labels, and check boxes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Webpage Forms KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/3/2020 12:53 PM 77. The _____ has two primary attributes, rows and cols, which set the size of the textarea control. ANSWER: textarea element POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating Webpage Forms QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.10 - Use the textarea element NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Webpage Forms KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/3/2020 12:54 PM 78. When a webpage visitor taps or clicks the _____ on the form, the name of each control and the value of its data are sent to the server to be processed. ANSWER: Submit button POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating Webpage Forms Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 43

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.11 - Create a Submit button NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Webpage Forms KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/3/2020 12:55 PM 79. A(n) _____ clears any input entered in the form, resetting the input controls to their defaults. ANSWER: Reset button POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Creating Webpage Forms QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.06 - Describe form controls and their uses NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Webpage Forms KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/3/2020 12:57 PM Identify the letter of the choice that best matches the sentence or definition. a. Mobile viewport b. Table c. Ampersand (&) d. Checkbox control e. Table header f. Separated border g. Cell h. Form i. Password control j. Label DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Introduction Discovering Tables Styling Table Elements Creating Webpage Forms QUESTION TYPE: Matching HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.01 - Define table elements LO: 08.02 - Describe the steps used to plan, design, and code a table LO: 08.03 - Create a table with rows and data LO: 08.05 - Style a table for tablet and desktop viewports LO: 08.06 - Describe form controls and their uses LO: 08.07 - Use the form and input elements Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 44

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms LO: 08.08 - Create text input controls, labels, and check boxes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Webpage Forms Discovering tables Introduction Styling Table Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/3/2020 1:05 PM 80. It is helpful when one needs to provide a lot of content in a compact form. ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 81. It is the intersection of a row and a column and usually contains data. ANSWER: g POINTS: 1 82. It is formatted with bold, centered text that indicates the purpose of the row or column. ANSWER: e POINTS: 1 83. It displays only the most important table content in a form such as a list. ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 84. It is used to save space in tables. ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 85. When this is applied, it makes the table appear to be using double lines between each table data cell. ANSWER: f POINTS: 1 86. It provides a structured way to collect information from webpage visitors. ANSWER: h POINTS: 1 87. It is the text that describes the type of information to enter with an input control. ANSWER: j POINTS: 1 88. It is like a text control because it provides a text box for a single line of input. ANSWER: i POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 45

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms 89. It allows a webpage visitor to select items from a list of one or more choices. ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 90. Explain the difference between the <th> and the <thead> tags. ANSWER: The table header element uses the <th> and </th> tags to create table header cells. A header cell contains a header title, such as a column or row title, which describes the column or row content. The table head element uses the <thead> and </thead> tags to group table header content within a table and is used with the table body and table footer elements to identify each part of a table. When you use the table head, table body, and table footer elements, users can scroll the table body content separate from the table head and table footer. For a large table that spans more than one page, users can also print the table head at the top of the page and the table footer at the bottom. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Discovering Tables QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.02 - Describe the steps used to plan, design, and code a table NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Discovering tables KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/3/2020 1:05 PM 91. Explain the appropriate method to plan the creation of effective tables. ANSWER: To create effective tables, one must plan the information that will appear in columns and rows and then create a design that presents the information clearly. Before any HTML code is written, the table should be sketched on paper or in an electronic document to see how many rows and columns need to be created and to determine whether the table needs headers or a caption. Conceptualizing the table first saves time when one is determining which HTML table elements to use to create the table. Because one enters the content of a table row by row in an HTML document, one also needs a sketch of the finished table to create the table accurately while coding. When one is planning a table for responsive web design, careful consideration needs to be given to the mobile viewport. Because the screen on a mobile viewport is much smaller than on a tablet or desktop viewport, tables with several columns are not conducive for mobile viewports. For mobile viewports, it might be necessary to display only the most important table content in another form, such as a list. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Discovering Tables QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.02 - Describe the steps used to plan, design, and code a table Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 46

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Discovering tables Bloom’s: Understand 10/8/2019 3:11 PM 2/6/2020 7:28 AM

92. Briefly explain the method to submit and process a form. ANSWER: After creating a form on a webpage, one needs to identify how to process the form and when to submit it. The action attribute of the <form> tag is used to specify the action the browser takes when submitting the form. Browsers can send information entered in forms to a database on a web server or to an email address by email. Many websites use form processing software tools available from the web server. The method attribute of the <form> tag specifies how to send the data entered in the form to the server to be processed. HTML provides two primary ways to send form data: the get method and the post method. The get method appends the name-value pairs to the URL indicated in the action attribute. The following is an example of a form tag with the get method and specified action: <form method="GET" action="formInfo.php"> The post method sends a separate data file with the name-value pairs to the URL (or email address) indicated in the action attribute. The post method is the more common method because it can be used to send sensitive form data and does not have a size limitation. The following is an example of a form tag with the post method and specified action: <form method="POST" action="formInfo.php"> POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Creating Webpage Forms QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.06 - Describe form controls and their uses NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Creating Webpage Forms KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/6/2020 7:31 AM Critical Thinking Questions Case 8-1 Mark is a fitness trainer and uses a webpage that maintains his list of client information and training schedules. The developer who maintains Mark's webpage, Jenny, has been asked to use tables instead of bulleted lists to keep track of all the data in an organized and clear manner. 93. Identify the format used by Jenny to insert a table along with a caption element that reads "Mark's Fitness Schedule." Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 47

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms a. <table/> <caption>Mark's Fitness Schedule</caption> . . . b. <table> <caption>Mark's Fitness Schedule</caption> . . . c.

<tcaption>Mark's Fitness Schedule</tcaption> . . . d. <table> <caption/>Mark's Fitness Schedule . . . ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. To create a table on a webpage, start with the <table> and </table> tags and then add table rows and table data within those tags. Define a table caption with a starting <caption> tag and an ending </caption> tag. When using a table caption, insert it after the starting <table> tag. b. To create a table on a webpage, start with the <table> and </table> tags and then add table rows and table data within those tags. Define a table caption with a starting <caption> tag and an ending </caption> tag. When using a table caption, insert it after the starting <table> tag. c. To create a table on a webpage, start with the <table> and </table> tags and then add table rows and table data within those tags. Define a table caption with a starting <caption> tag and an ending </caption> tag. When using a table caption, insert it after the starting <table> tag. d. To create a table on a webpage, start with the <table> and </table> tags and then add table rows and table data within those tags. Define a table caption with a starting <caption> tag and an ending </caption> tag. When using a table caption, insert it after the starting <table> tag.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: Discovering Tables QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: case 08-01 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.02 - Describe the steps used to plan, design, and code a table NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Discovering tables KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 48

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms DATE MODIFIED:

2/6/2020 9:52 AM

94. Jenny has to create a table that contains one header row and three columns, one each for balance exercise, strength exercise, and endurance exercise. Identify the format that Jenny uses to create this type of a table. a. <tr> <th>Balance exercise</th> <th>Strength exercise</th> <th>Endurance exercise</th> </tr> b. </tr/> <th>Balance exercise</th> <th>Strength exercise</th> <th>Endurance exercise</th> </tr/> c. <th> <tr>Balance exercise</tr> <tr>Strength exercise</tr> <tr>Endurance exercise</tr> </th> d. <tr> <th>Balance exercise</tr> <th>Strength exercise</tr> <th>Endurance exercise</tr> </th> ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

a a. Each table row is indicated by a starting <tr> tag and an ending </tr> tag. Each table row element contains table header and/or table data elements. Define a table header with a starting <th> tag and an ending </th> tag. b. Each table row is indicated by a starting <tr> tag and an ending </tr> tag. Each table row element contains table header and/or table data elements. Define a table header with a starting <th> tag and an ending </th> tag. c. Each table row is indicated by a starting <tr> tag and an ending </tr> tag. Each table row element contains table header and/or table data elements. Define a table header with a starting <th> tag and an ending </th> tag. d. Each table row is indicated by a starting <tr> tag and an ending </tr> tag. Each table row element contains table header and/or table data elements. Define a table header with a starting <th> tag and an ending </th> tag.

Page 49

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms DATE MODIFIED:

2/6/2020 9:58 AM

95. Identify the format used by Jenny to enter starting and ending table row tags with the following table data elements: "Monday," "Ben," and "Cardio." a. <tr> <td>Monday</td> <td>Ben</td> <td>Cardio</td> </tr> b. <tr> <Monday/> <Ben/> <Cardio/> </tr> c. <tr> <data>Monday</data> <data>Ben</data> <data>Cardio</data> </tr> d. <tr> <tdata>Monday</tdata> <tdata>Ben</tdata> <tdata>Cardio</tdata> </tr> ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

a a. Each table row is indicated by a starting <tr> tag and an ending </tr> tag. Each table row element contains table data elements, indicated by a starting <td> tag and an ending </td> tag. b. Each table row is indicated by a starting <tr> tag and an ending </tr> tag. Each table row element contains table data elements, indicated by a starting <td> tag and an ending </td> tag. c. Each table row is indicated by a starting <tr> tag and an ending </tr> tag. Each table row element contains table data elements, indicated by a starting <td> tag and an ending </td> tag. d. Each table row is indicated by a starting <tr> tag and an ending </tr> tag. Each table row element contains table data elements, indicated by a starting <td> tag and an ending </td> tag.

Page 50

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms DATE MODIFIED:

2/6/2020 10:01 AM

Critical Thinking Questions Case 8-2 Jerema, the CEO of a leading garment manufacturing outlet, has assigned her assistant, Ann, the task of utilizing tables and their styling features to create an organized information store that contains all of Jerema's meeting schedules. Ann creates a table that has four rows and three columns that lists all the required information. 96. Ann has used table styling properties to give the table a neat look. Although Ann has applied a border to the table element, each cell has its own border, making the table appear to have double lines between each table data cell. Which styling property should Ann use in this case to display the table with single, consolidated borders? a. border-collapse property b. border-width property c. text-align property d. text-compress property ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. To display a table with single, consolidated borders use the border-collapse property with a value of collapse; this type of border is called a collapsed border. b. To display a table with single, consolidated borders use the border-collapse property with a value of collapse; this type of border is called a collapsed border. c. To display a table with single, consolidated borders use the border-collapse property with a value of collapse; this type of border is called a collapsed border. d. To display a table with single, consolidated borders use the border-collapse property with a value of collapse; this type of border is called a collapsed border.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: Styling Table Elements QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: case 08-02 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 08.05 - Style a table for tablet and desktop viewports NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Styling Table Elements KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:11 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/6/2020 10:04 AM 97. Apart from the table on meeting schedules, Ann has been asked by Jerema to incorporate financial updates as well. Since the financial data contain numeric information, styling the data table so it is easy to read using a mobile viewport might be a problem. To overcome this problem, Ann can consider converting the table to a _____ for the mobile viewport. a. chart b. matrix c. grid d. map ANSWER: a Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 51

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 8: Creating Tables and Forms FEEDBACK:

a. If your table contains numeric information such as financial data or compares information among categories, consider converting your table to a chart for the mobile viewport. b. If your table contains numeric information such as financial data or compares information among categories, consider converting your table to a chart for the mobile viewport. c. If your table contains numeric information such as financial data or compares information among categories, consider converting your table to a chart for the mobile viewport. d. If your table contains numeric information such as financial data or compares information among categories, consider converting your table to a chart for the mobile viewport.

Page 52

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 9: Integrating Audio and Video 1. Many websites use _____ to enrich the user experience and provide interactivity. a. disk operating systems b. multimedia c. embedded processors d. a command line interface ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. Many websites use multimedia (digital media such as audio, video, and animation) to enrich the user experience and provide interactivity.

b. Many websites use multimedia (digital media such as audio, video, and animation) to enrich the user experience and provide interactivity. c. Many websites use multimedia (digital media such as audio, video, and animation) to enrich the user experience and provide interactivity. d. Many websites use multimedia (digital media such as audio, video, and animation) to enrich the user experience and provide interactivity.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Introduction QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.01 - Describe the benefits and limitations of multimedia in websites NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introduction KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/6/2020 10:15 AM 2. The _____ on webpages can set a mood or tone and entice a user to make a purchase. a. multiple language descriptions b. reference c. discount codes d. audio ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. Audio on webpages can set a mood or tone and further entice a user to make a purchase. b. Audio on webpages can set a mood or tone and further entice a user to make a purchase. c. Audio on webpages can set a mood or tone and further entice a user to make a purchase. d. Audio on webpages can set a mood or tone and further entice a user to make a purchase.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE:

1 Moderate Introduction Multiple Choice

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 9: Integrating Audio and Video HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.01 - Describe the benefits and limitations of multimedia in websites NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introduction KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/3/2020 1:46 PM 3. Which term is used for a combination of text, images, sound, and video that expresses an idea or conveys a message? a. multimedia b. command interface c. window d. form application ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. Multimedia is the combination of text, images, sound, and video to express an idea or convey a message. b. Multimedia is the combination of text, images, sound, and video to express an idea or convey a message. c. Multimedia is the combination of text, images, sound, and video to express an idea or convey a message. d. Multimedia is the combination of text, images, sound, and video to express an idea or convey a message.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Multimedia QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.01 - Describe the benefits and limitations of multimedia in websites NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Multimedia KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/3/2020 1:48 PM 4. A series of audio or video clips released in a sequence that is popular in home, academic, and corporate settings is called a(n) _____. a. add-on b. codec c. plug-in d. podcast ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. Podcasts, a series of audio or video clips that are released in a sequence, are popular in home, academic, and corporate settings. b. Podcasts, a series of audio or video clips that are released in a sequence, are Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 9: Integrating Audio and Video popular in home, academic, and corporate settings. c. Podcasts, a series of audio or video clips that are released in a sequence, are popular in home, academic, and corporate settings. d. Podcasts, a series of audio or video clips that are released in a sequence, are popular in home, academic, and corporate settings.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Multimedia QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.01 - Describe the benefits and limitations of multimedia in websites NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Multimedia KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/6/2020 10:20 AM 5. Which software is a video editor for Mac that offers professional-level editing? a. Final Cut Pro X b. Corel VideoStudio Pro c. MAGIX Movie Edit Pro d. CyberLink PowerDirector ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. Final Cut Pro X is a video editor for the macOS that offers professional-level editing. b. Final Cut Pro X is a video editor for the macOS that offers professional-level editing. c. Final Cut Pro X is a video editor for the macOS that offers professional-level editing. d. Final Cut Pro X is a video editor for the macOS that offers professional-level editing.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Multimedia QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.07 - Understand and create video elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Multimedia KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/3/2020 1:51 PM 6. Before HTML 5, the _____ element was used to insert embedded content, including multimedia. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 9: Integrating Audio and Video a. media b. content c. object d. swing ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

c a. Before HTML 5, the object element was used to insert embedded content, including multimedia. b. Before HTML 5, the object element was used to insert embedded content, including multimedia. c. Before HTML 5, the object element was used to insert embedded content, including multimedia. d. Before HTML 5, the object element was used to insert embedded content, including multimedia.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Multimedia QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.01 - Describe the benefits and limitations of multimedia in websites NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Multimedia KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/4/2020 12:58 PM 7. Grammarly, AdBlocker Ultimate, McAfee SiteAdvisor, HTTPS Everywhere, and Adobe Acrobat are types of common _____. a. swing components b. operating systems c. browser extensions d. java applets ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. Popular browser extensions include Grammarly, AdBlocker Ultimate, McAfee SiteAdvisor, HTTPS Everywhere, and Adobe Acrobat. b. Popular browser extensions include Grammarly, AdBlocker Ultimate, McAfee SiteAdvisor, HTTPS Everywhere, and Adobe Acrobat. c. Popular browser extensions include Grammarly, AdBlocker Ultimate, McAfee SiteAdvisor, HTTPS Everywhere, and Adobe Acrobat. d. Popular browser extensions include Grammarly, AdBlocker Ultimate, McAfee SiteAdvisor, HTTPS Everywhere, and Adobe Acrobat.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE:

1 Moderate Using Multimedia Multiple Choice

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 9: Integrating Audio and Video HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.04 - Describe a plug-in NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Multimedia KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/4/2020 1:04 PM 8. Which browser supports MP4 video file format, but does not support Ogg or WebM? a. Opera b. Mozilla Firefox c. Google Chrome d. Internet Explorer ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. Internet Explorer supports MP4 video file format, but does not support Ogg or WebM. b. Internet Explorer supports MP4 video file format, but does not support Ogg or WebM. c. Internet Explorer supports MP4 video file format, but does not support Ogg or WebM. d. Internet Explorer supports MP4 video file format, but does not support Ogg or WebM.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Integrating Video QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.04 - Describe a plug-in NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Multimedia KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/4/2020 1:10 PM 9. Flash files have the _____ file extension. a. .ff b. .fwf c. .mf d. .swf ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. Flash files have the .swf file extension. b. Flash files have the .swf file extension. c. Flash files have the .swf file extension. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 9: Integrating Audio and Video d. Flash files have the .swf file extension. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Multimedia QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.01 - Describe the benefits and limitations of multimedia in websites NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Multimedia KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/4/2020 1:16 PM 10. A Java _____ is a small program created with Java, a programming language. a. codec b. flash c. browser d. applet ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. A Java applet is a small program created with Java, a programming language. b. A Java applet is a small program created with Java, a programming language. c. A Java applet is a small program created with Java, a programming language. d. A Java applet is a small program created with Java, a programming language. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Multimedia QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.01 - Describe the benefits and limitations of multimedia in websites NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Multimedia KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/4/2020 1:19 PM 11. You can use the _____ element to embed plug-ins on a webpage, including Flash Players, PDF readers, and Java applets. a. swing b. definition c. object d. create ANSWER:

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 9: Integrating Audio and Video FEEDBACK:

a. You can use the object element to embed plug-ins on a webpage, including Flash Players, PDF readers, and Java applets. b. You can use the object element to embed plug-ins on a webpage, including Flash Players, PDF readers, and Java applets. c. You can use the object element to embed plug-ins on a webpage, including Flash Players, PDF readers, and Java applets. d. You can use the object element to embed plug-ins on a webpage, including Flash Players, PDF readers, and Java applets.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Multimedia QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.01 - Describe the benefits and limitations of multimedia in websites NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Multimedia KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/4/2020 1:21 PM 12. Which is the correct code to use the HTML object element to embed an audio file named audio.wav on a webpage? a. <object data="audio.wav"> <param name="autoplay" value="true"> </object> b. <object data="audio.wav"> <create_audio name="autoplay" value="true"> </object> c. <object="audio.wav"> <param data="autoplay" value="true"> </object> d. <object audio_data="audio.wav"> <create name="autoplay" value="true"> </object> ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

a a. Use the param element to define parameters for plug-ins embedded with an object element. When the autoplay parameter is set to true, the audio starts playing when the webpage opens. b. Use the param element to define parameters for plug-ins embedded with an object element. When the autoplay parameter is set to true, the audio starts playing when the webpage opens. c. Use the param element to define parameters for plug-ins embedded with an object element. When the autoplay parameter is set to true, the audio starts playing when the webpage opens. d. Use the param element to define parameters for plug-ins embedded with an object element. When the autoplay parameter is set to true, the audio starts playing when the webpage opens.

POINTS:

Page 7

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 9: Integrating Audio and Video DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Multimedia QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.06 - Understand and create audio elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Multimedia KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/6/2020 10:31 AM 13. Consider the code: <object data="audio.wav"> <param name="autoplay" value="true"> </object> In this, the autoplay parameter is set to true, meaning _____. a. the audio stops playing when the webpage opens b. all the audio files on the webpage get listed c. the autoplay mode for the audio remains blocked d. the audio starts playing when the webpage opens ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. The autoplay parameter is set to true, meaning the audio starts playing when the webpage opens. b. The autoplay parameter is set to true, meaning the audio starts playing when the webpage opens. c. The autoplay parameter is set to true, meaning the audio starts playing when the webpage opens. d. The autoplay parameter is set to true, meaning the audio starts playing when the webpage opens.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Multimedia QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.06 - Understand and create audio elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Multimedia KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/6/2020 10:33 AM 14. Using audio or video files from the web on a mobile device requires a _____ if the device is not connected to a wireless network. a. data plan Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 8

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 9: Integrating Audio and Video b. codec c. plug-in d. flash memory ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

a a. Using audio or video on a mobile device requires a data plan if the device is not connected to a wireless network.

b. Using audio or video on a mobile device requires a data plan if the device is not connected to a wireless network. c. Using audio or video on a mobile device requires a data plan if the device is not connected to a wireless network. d. Using audio or video on a mobile device requires a data plan if the device is not connected to a wireless network.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Integrating Audio QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.06 - Understand and create audio elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Integrating Audio KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/4/2020 1:30 PM 15. Audio files for the web often use file _____ techniques to reduce the size of the file, though they can also diminish the sound quality. a. validation b. compression c. amplification d. merging ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. Audio files for the web often use file compression techniques to reduce the size of the file, though they can also diminish the sound quality. b. Audio files for the web often use file compression techniques to reduce the size of the file, though they can also diminish the sound quality. c. Audio files for the web often use file compression techniques to reduce the size of the file, though they can also diminish the sound quality. d. Audio files for the web often use file compression techniques to reduce the size of the file, though they can also diminish the sound quality.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE: HAS VARIABLES:

1 Easy Integrating Audio Multiple Choice False

Page 9

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 9: Integrating Audio and Video LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.06 - Understand and create audio elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Integrating Audio KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/4/2020 1:32 PM 16. Identify the file extension designed for streaming audio on low bandwidths. a. .mp3 b. .rm c. .ogg d. .wav ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. The file extension designed for streaming audio on low bandwidths is .rm. b. The file extension designed for streaming audio on low bandwidths is .rm. c. The file extension designed for streaming audio on low bandwidths is .rm. d. The file extension designed for streaming audio on low bandwidths is .rm. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Integrating Audio QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.02 - Identify audio formats NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Integrating Audio KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/4/2020 1:44 PM 17. The _____ video file format can be highly compressed and is supported by all browsers. a. .mp4 b. .swf c. .rm d. .mov ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. The .mp4 video file format can be highly compressed and is supported by all browsers. b. The .mp4 video file format can be highly compressed and is supported by all browsers. c. The .mp4 video file format can be highly compressed and is supported by all browsers. d. The .mp4 video file format can be highly compressed and is supported by all browsers. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 10

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 9: Integrating Audio and Video POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Integrating Video QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.03 - Identify video formats NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Integrating Audio KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/6/2020 10:39 AM 18. Which compression technology consists of an encoder, which compresses the file, and a decoder, which decompresses the file? a. compretech b. endecode c. codec d. techcode ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. The word codec is short for code /decode because it consists of an encoder, which compresses the file, and a decoder, which decompresses the file. b. The word codec is short for code /decode because it consists of an encoder, which compresses the file, and a decoder, which decompresses the file. c. The word codec is short for code /decode because it consists of an encoder, which compresses the file, and a decoder, which decompresses the file. d. The word codec is short for code /decode because it consists of an encoder, which compresses the file, and a decoder, which decompresses the file.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Integrating Audio QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.05 - Understand codecs NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Integrating Audio KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/4/2020 1:54 PM 19. Identify the correct code to embed an audio file named music.mp3 on the webpage. a. <audio_autoplay="autoplay"> <source src="music.mp3" type="audio/mp3"> <p>Your browser does not support the HTML5 audio element.</p> </audio> Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 11

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 9: Integrating Audio and Video b. <audio/> <controls/>="controls" autoplay="autoplay"> <source src="music.mp3" type="audio/mp3"> <p>Your browser does not support the HTML5 audio element.</p> c. <audio controls="controls" autoplay="autoplay"> <source src="music.mp3" type="audio/mp3"> <p>Your browser does not support the HTML5 audio element.</p> </audio> d. <audio controls="controls" autoplay=<autoplay/> <source src="music.mp3" type="audio/mp3"> <p>Your browser does not support the HTML5 audio element.</p> </audio> ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. You can use the audio element to insert an audio file named music.mp3. Because browsers that do not support the audio element ignore the <audio> tag, you should insert text content within the audio element to alert users with the paragraph element. The controls attribute adds audio controls, such as play, pause, and volume. It can be set up in any of three ways, one of which is <audio controls="controls">. The autoplay attribute can be set up similarly. b. You can use the audio element to insert an audio file named music.mp3. Because browsers that do not support the audio element ignore the <audio> tag, you should insert text content within the audio element to alert users with the paragraph element. The controls attribute adds audio controls, such as play, pause, and volume. It can be set up in any of three ways, one of which is <audio controls="controls">. The autoplay attribute can be set up similarly. c. You can use the audio element to insert an audio file named music.mp3. Because browsers that do not support the audio element ignore the <audio> tag, you should insert text content within the audio element to alert users with the paragraph element. The controls attribute adds audio controls, such as play, pause, and volume. It can be set up in any of three ways, one of which is <audio controls="controls">. The autoplay attribute can be set up similarly. d. You can use the audio element to insert an audio file named music.mp3. Because browsers that do not support the audio element ignore the <audio> tag, you should insert text content within the audio element to alert users with the paragraph element. The controls attribute adds audio controls, such as play, pause, and volume. It can be set up in any of three ways, one of which is <audio controls="controls">. The autoplay attribute can be set up similarly.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Integrating Audio QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.06 - Understand and create audio elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Integrating Audio KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/6/2020 4:00 PM 20. Consider the following code: Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 12

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 9: Integrating Audio and Video <audio controls="controls" autoplay="autoplay"> Here the autoplay attribute specifies _____. a. the location of the audio file b. to start playing the audio file once the page is loaded in the browser c. the automatic pause and play feature of the audio file d. to pause the audio file once it is interrupted by another multimedia ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. The autoplay attribute specifies to start playing the audio file once the page is loaded in the browser. b. The autoplay attribute specifies to start playing the audio file once the page is loaded in the browser. c. The autoplay attribute specifies to start playing the audio file once the page is loaded in the browser. d. The autoplay attribute specifies to start playing the audio file once the page is loaded in the browser.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Integrating Audio QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.08 - Identify common audio attributes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Integrating Audio KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/4/2020 1:59 PM 21. The audio element attribute src specifies _____. a. the location of the audio file b. all the available audio controls c. the type of audio file d. that the audio will start replaying every time it is finished ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. The src attribute specifies the location of the audio file. b. The src attribute specifies the location of the audio file. c. The src attribute specifies the location of the audio file. d. The src attribute specifies the location of the audio file. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Integrating Audio QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.08 - Identify common audio attributes Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 13

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 9: Integrating Audio and Video NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Integrating Audio Bloom’s: Remember 10/8/2019 3:12 PM 2/6/2020 4:06 PM

22. Identify an appropriate tag with which to set up an audio control attribute. a. <audio controls="controls"> b. <audio controls="1"> c. <audio controls/>="controls" d. <audio controls>=<"create"> ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

a a. An appropriate tag for setting up an audio control attribute is < audio controls = "controls" >. b. An appropriate tag for setting up an audio control attribute is < audio controls = "controls" >. c. An appropriate tag for setting up an audio control attribute is < audio controls = "controls" >. d. An appropriate tag for setting up an audio control attribute is < audio controls = "controls" >.

c a. An appropriate tag with which to set up an audio autoplay attribute is < audio autoplay="" >. b. An appropriate tag with which to set up an audio autoplay attribute is < audio autoplay="" >. c. An appropriate tag with which to set up an audio autoplay attribute is < audio autoplay="" >.

Page 14

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 9: Integrating Audio and Video d. An appropriate tag with which to set up an audio autoplay attribute is < audio autoplay="" >.

b a. The loop attribute automatically replays the audio file immediately once it has finished playing. b. The loop attribute automatically replays the audio file immediately once it has finished playing. c. The loop attribute automatically replays the audio file immediately once it has finished playing. d. The loop attribute automatically replays the audio file immediately once it has finished playing.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Integrating Audio QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.08 - Identify common audio attributes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Integrating Audio KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/4/2020 2:05 PM 25. The _____ attribute tells the browser to begin downloading the audio file immediately when it encounters the audio element. a. auto b. loop Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 15

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 9: Integrating Audio and Video c. preload d. rewind ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

c a. The preload attribute tells the browser to begin downloading the audio file immediately when it encounters the audio element.

b. The preload attribute tells the browser to begin downloading the audio file immediately when it encounters the audio element. c. The preload attribute tells the browser to begin downloading the audio file immediately when it encounters the audio element. d. The preload attribute tells the browser to begin downloading the audio file immediately when it encounters the audio element.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Integrating Audio QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.11 - Test audio elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Integrating Audio KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/6/2020 4:08 PM 26. Which video file format is supported by the HTML 5 video element? a. .avi b. .swf c. .ogg d. .flv ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. The HTML 5 video element supports only three video file formats: .mp4, .ogg, and .webm.

b. The HTML 5 video element supports only three video file formats: .mp4, .ogg, and .webm. c. The HTML 5 video element supports only three video file formats: .mp4, .ogg, and .webm. d. The HTML 5 video element supports only three video file formats: .mp4, .ogg, and .webm.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Integrating Video QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.03 - Identify video formats NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 16

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 9: Integrating Audio and Video TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Integrating Video Bloom’s: Remember 10/8/2019 3:12 PM 2/4/2020 2:12 PM

27. Which video file format was developed by Google, Mozilla, Adobe, and Opera? a. QuickTime b. Windows Media c. Flash Video d. WebM ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. WebM was developed by Google, Mozilla, Adobe, and Opera. b. WebM was developed by Google, Mozilla, Adobe, and Opera. c. WebM was developed by Google, Mozilla, Adobe, and Opera. d. WebM was developed by Google, Mozilla, Adobe, and Opera. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Integrating Video QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.03 - Identify video formats NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Integrating Video KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/4/2020 2:14 PM 28. Identify the Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) element that can be used to incorporate video. a. embed b. load c. create d. insert ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

a a. You can use three HTML elements to incorporate video: embed, object, and video. b. You can use three HTML elements to incorporate video: embed, object, and video. c. You can use three HTML elements to incorporate video: embed, object, and video. d. You can use three HTML elements to incorporate video: embed, object, and video.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY:

1 Moderate

Page 17

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 9: Integrating Audio and Video REFERENCES: Integrating Video QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.07 - Understand and create video elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Integrating Video KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/4/2020 2:16 PM 29. Which element should be used to specify a movie clip on a webpage? a. media b. movie c. video d. picture ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

c a. Use the video element to specify a video, such as a movie clip or other video stream, on a webpage. b. Use the video element to specify a video, such as a movie clip or other video stream, on a webpage. c. Use the video element to specify a video, such as a movie clip or other video stream, on a webpage. d. Use the video element to specify a video, such as a movie clip or other video stream, on a webpage.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Integrating Video QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.07 - Understand and create video elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Integrating Video KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/4/2020 2:22 PM 30. The _____ attribute of the video element specifies an image to be shown while the video is downloading, or until the user clicks the play button. a. autoplay b. loop c. poster d. preload ANSWER:

Page 18

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 9: Integrating Audio and Video FEEDBACK:

a. The poster attribute of the video element specifies an image to be shown while the video is downloading, or until the user clicks the play button. b. The poster attribute of the video element specifies an image to be shown while the video is downloading, or until the user clicks the play button. c. The poster attribute of the video element specifies an image to be shown while the video is downloading, or until the user clicks the play button. d. The poster attribute of the video element specifies an image to be shown while the video is downloading, or until the user clicks the play button.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Integrating Video QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.09 - Identify common video attributes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Integrating Video KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/4/2020 2:24 PM 31. Since browsers that do not support the video element ignore the <video> tag, one needs to _____. a. insert text content between the <video> and </video> tags to alert users b. insert additional <media>…</media> tags c. avoid using the video elements in a nonsupportive environment d. install supportive plug-ins ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. Because browsers that do not support the video element ignore the < video > tag, you should insert text content within the video element to alert users.

b. Because browsers that do not support the video element ignore the < video > tag, you should insert text content within the video element to alert users. c. Because browsers that do not support the video element ignore the < video > tag, you should insert text content within the video element to alert users. d. Because browsers that do not support the video element ignore the < video > tag, you should insert text content within the video element to alert users.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Integrating Audio QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.12 - Test video elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Integrating Video KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 19

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 9: Integrating Audio and Video DATE MODIFIED:

2/6/2020 4:31 PM

32. Without the _____ attributes, the browser does not know the size of the video and cannot reserve the appropriate space for it. a. loop and control b. width and height c. size and spacing d. base and src ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. Without the width and height attributes, the browser does not know the size of the video and cannot reserve the appropriate space for it. b. Without the width and height attributes, the browser does not know the size of the video and cannot reserve the appropriate space for it. c. Without the width and height attributes, the browser does not know the size of the video and cannot reserve the appropriate space for it. d. Without the width and height attributes, the browser does not know the size of the video and cannot reserve the appropriate space for it.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Integrating Video QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.09 - Identify common video attributes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Integrating Video KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/4/2020 2:30 PM 33. Apple Safari supports the _____ video file format. a. Ogg b. WebM c. VID d. MP4 ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. Apple Safari supports the MP4 video file format. b. Apple Safari supports the MP4 video file format. c. Apple Safari supports the MP4 video file format. d. Apple Safari supports the MP4 video file format. POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE:

1 Moderate Integrating Video Multiple Choice

Page 20

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 9: Integrating Audio and Video HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.03 - Identify video formats NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Integrating Video KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/4/2020 2:32 PM 34. Which of the following products are video creating and editing applications? a. Microsoft Movie Maker b. Corel VideoStudio Ultimate c. CyberLink PowerDirector d. Audacity VideoStudio ANSWER: a, b, c FEEDBACK: a. Microsoft Movie Maker, Corel VideoStudio Ultimate, and CyberLink PowerDirector are video creating and editing applications. b. Microsoft Movie Maker, Corel VideoStudio Ultimate, and CyberLink PowerDirector are video creating and editing applications. c. Microsoft Movie Maker, Corel VideoStudio Ultimate, and CyberLink PowerDirector are video creating and editing applications. d. Microsoft Movie Maker, Corel VideoStudio Ultimate, and CyberLink PowerDirector are video creating and editing applications.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Multimedia QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Response HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.03 - Identify video formats NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Multimedia KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/6/2020 4:36 PM 35. Adobe Premiere Pro is a highly rated application for movie editing that can be used on the _____ operating system. a. Windows b. Linux c. Mac d. Solaris ANSWER: a, c FEEDBACK: a. Adobe Premiere Pro is a highly rated application for movie editing that can be used on either the macOS or Windows operating systems. b. Adobe Premiere Pro is a highly rated application for movie editing that can be used on either the macOS or Windows operating systems. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 21

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 9: Integrating Audio and Video c. Adobe Premiere Pro is a highly rated application for movie editing that can be used on either the macOS or Windows operating systems. d. Adobe Premiere Pro is a highly rated application for movie editing that can be used on either the macOS or Windows operating systems.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Multimedia QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Response HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.03 - Identify video formats NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Multimedia KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/4/2020 2:39 PM 36. A _____ is extra software added to the browser (or other program) to provide a capability that is not inherent to the browser. a. script b. plug-in c. codec d. schema ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. A plug-in is extra software added to the browser (or other program) to provide a capability that is not inherent to the browser. b. A plug-in is extra software added to the browser (or other program) to provide a capability that is not inherent to the browser. c. A plug-in is extra software added to the browser (or other program) to provide a capability that is not inherent to the browser. d. A plug-in is extra software added to the browser (or other program) to provide a capability that is not inherent to the browser.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Multimedia QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Response HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.04 - Describe a plug-in NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Multimedia KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/5/2020 2:06 PM 37. The HTML 5 audio element supports the _____ audio file format. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 22

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 9: Integrating Audio and Video a. .ogg b. .aud c. .mp3 d. .wav ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

a, c, d a. The HTML 5 audio element supports only three audio file formats: .mp3, .ogg, and .wav. b. The HTML 5 audio element supports only three audio file formats: .mp3, .ogg, and .wav. c. The HTML 5 audio element supports only three audio file formats: .mp3, .ogg, and .wav. d. The HTML 5 audio element supports only three audio file formats: .mp3, .ogg, and .wav.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Integrating Audio QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Response HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.06 - Understand and create audio elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Integrating Audio KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/4/2020 3:25 PM 38. Identify the audio file formats that can be compressed. a. OGG b. MP3 c. AIFF d. WAV ANSWER: b, d FEEDBACK: a. MP3 and WAV audio files can be compressed. b. MP3 and WAV audio files can be compressed. c. MP3 and WAV audio files can be compressed. d. MP3 and WAV audio files can be compressed. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Integrating Audio QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Response HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.03 - Identify video formats NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Integrating Audio Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 23

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 9: Integrating Audio and Video KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Bloom’s: Remember 10/8/2019 3:12 PM 2/4/2020 3:37 PM

39. Multimedia files cannot be created by utilizing already available files. ANSWER: False - can FEEDBACK: Correct You can obtain multimedia files by creating them yourself or by finding files that are already available. Incorrect You can obtain multimedia files by creating them yourself or by finding files that are already available.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Multimedia QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.01 - Describe the benefits and limitations of multimedia in websites NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Multimedia KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/4/2020 3:39 PM 40. External multimedia is similar to inline images that have been inserted. ANSWER: False - Embedded FEEDBACK: Correct Embedding media is similar to inserting inline images. Incorrect Embedding media is similar to inserting inline images.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Multimedia QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.01 - Describe the benefits and limitations of multimedia in websites NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Multimedia KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/6/2020 4:49 PM 41. Flash files require the browser to have a(n) Explorer plug-in. ANSWER: False - Flash FEEDBACK: Correct Flash files require the browser to have a Flash plug-in. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 24

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 9: Integrating Audio and Video Incorrect Flash files require the browser to have a Flash plug-in.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Multimedia QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.01 - Describe the benefits and limitations of multimedia in websites NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Multimedia KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/6/2020 4:50 PM 42. Users who have broadband access are most likely to experience a delay while loading large audio files. ANSWER: False - dial-up connections FEEDBACK: Correct Users with dial-up connections will likely experience a delay, especially if the audio files are large. Incorrect Users with dial-up connections will likely experience a delay, especially if the audio files are large.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Integrating Audio QUESTION TYPE: Modified True / False HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.01 - Describe the benefits and limitations of multimedia in websites NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Integrating Audio KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/6/2020 4:53 PM 43. A codec, a compression technology, can improve the page load time. ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct A codec, a compression technology, can improve the page load time. Incorrect A codec, a compression technology, can improve the page load time.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE: HAS VARIABLES:

1 Easy Integrating Audio Modified True / False False

Page 25

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 9: Integrating Audio and Video STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.05 - Understand codecs NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Integrating Audio KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/6/2020 4:56 PM 44. Text can provide information more quickly and effectively than audio. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct Audio can provide information more quickly or effectively than text, such as a guided tour that describes the features of a product or testimonials from customers that support a product or service. Incorrect Audio can provide information more quickly or effectively than text, such as a guided tour that describes the features of a product or testimonials from customers that support a product or service.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Introduction QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.01 - Describe the benefits and limitations of multimedia in websites NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introduction KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/6/2020 4:57 PM 45. Multimedia webpages that include large graphics, audio, and video are accessible only to users of broadband Internet connections. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct If your audience includes users with dial-up connections rather than broadband access, they will likely experience a delay, especially if the audio files are large. Incorrect If your audience includes users with dial-up connections rather than broadband access, they will likely experience a delay, especially if the audio files are large.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE: HAS VARIABLES:

1 Easy Integrating Audio True / False False

Page 26

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 9: Integrating Audio and Video LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.01 - Describe the benefits and limitations of multimedia in websites NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introduction KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/4/2020 3:59 PM 46. The clips of movie trailers that a user views are referred to as podcasts. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct Podcasts area a series of audio or video clips that are released in a sequence. Incorrect Podcasts area a series of audio or video clips that are released in a sequence.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Multimedia QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.01 - Describe the benefits and limitations of multimedia in websites NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Multimedia KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/6/2020 4:59 PM 47. Embedding media is similar to inserting inline images. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct Embedding media is similar to inserting inline images. Incorrect Embedding media is similar to inserting inline images.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Multimedia QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.01 - Describe the benefits and limitations of multimedia in websites NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Multimedia KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/4/2020 4:01 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 27

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 9: Integrating Audio and Video 48. Website visitors need to click a link to access external media files. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct To access external media files, website visitors click a link. Incorrect To access external media files, website visitors click a link.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Multimedia QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.01 - Describe the benefits and limitations of multimedia in websites NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Multimedia KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/4/2020 4:04 PM 49. Embedded media is displayed out of context with the webpage that contains the link. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct Unlike embedded media, the external media is displayed out of context with the webpage that contains the link. Incorrect Unlike embedded media, the external media is displayed out of context with the webpage that contains the link.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Multimedia QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.01 - Describe the benefits and limitations of multimedia in websites NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Multimedia KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/4/2020 4:05 PM 50. iTunes can be downloaded for Windows or macOS to play a variety of media formats. a. True b. False ANSWER: True Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 28

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 9: Integrating Audio and Video FEEDBACK:

Correct

iTunes can be downloaded for Windows or macOS to play a variety of media formats. Incorrect iTunes can be downloaded for Windows or macOS to play a variety of media formats.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Multimedia QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.01 - Describe the benefits and limitations of multimedia in websites NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Multimedia KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/6/2020 5:02 PM 51. For embedded multimedia, a format supported by multiple players should be used. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct For embedded multimedia, a format supported by multiple players should be used. Incorrect For embedded multimedia, a format supported by multiple players should be used.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Multimedia QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.04 - Describe a plug-in NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Multimedia KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/4/2020 4:10 PM 52. Website visitors are prohibited from downloading and installing plug-ins from browser manufacturers. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct More than 1,000 extensions are available for Google Chrome that allow users to customize their Google Chrome browser experience. Incorrect More than 1,000 extensions are available for Google Chrome that allow users to customize their Google Chrome browser experience.

POINTS:

Page 29

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 9: Integrating Audio and Video DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Multimedia QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.04 - Describe a plug-in NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Multimedia KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/5/2020 2:07 PM 53. Only iPhones and iPads, which run the iOS operating system, support Flash. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct The iPhone and iPad, which run the iOS operating system, do not support Flash. Incorrect The iPhone and iPad, which run the iOS operating system, do not support Flash.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Multimedia QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.07 - Understand and create video elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Multimedia KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/5/2020 12:15 PM 54. Photos is a video editor that comes standard with the Windows 10 operating system. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct Photos is a video editor that comes standard with the Windows 10 operating system. Incorrect Photos is a video editor that comes standard with the Windows 10 operating system.

Page 30

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 9: Integrating Audio and Video NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Using Multimedia Bloom’s: Remember 10/8/2019 3:12 PM 2/4/2020 4:14 PM

55. Audio converter software is used to convert files from one audio format to a supported format. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct Audio converter software is used to convert files from one audio format to a supported format. Incorrect Audio converter software is used to convert files from one audio format to a supported format.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Integrating Audio QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.02 - Identify audio formats NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Integrating Audio KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/6/2020 5:07 PM 56. The large file size should always be maintained whenever an audio or video file is embedded onto a webpage. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct When embedding an audio or video file onto a webpage, you should keep the file size small and compress the file when necessary. Incorrect When embedding an audio or video file onto a webpage, you should keep the file size small and compress the file when necessary.

Page 31

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 9: Integrating Audio and Video DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

10/8/2019 3:12 PM 2/5/2020 12:19 PM

57. A codec, a compression technology, can be used only to compress audio files. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct A codec is a compression technology used to compress images, audio, and video files. Incorrect A codec is a compression technology used to compress images, audio, and video files.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Integrating Audio QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.05 - Understand codecs NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Integrating Audio KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/6/2020 5:08 PM 58. Compressing an audio file might result in a loss of sound quality. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct Compressing an audio file might result in a loss of sound quality. Incorrect Compressing an audio file might result in a loss of sound quality.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Integrating Audio QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.05 - Understand codecs NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Integrating Audio KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/5/2020 12:21 PM 59. While embedding an audio file on a webpage, multiple data attributes can be specified within one object element. a. True Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 32

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 9: Integrating Audio and Video b. False ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

False Correct Only one data attribute can be specified within one object element. Incorrect Only one data attribute can be specified within one object element.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Integrating Audio QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.06 - Understand and create audio elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Integrating Audio KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/5/2020 12:22 PM 60. To enable the audio element to work in all browsers, the preload elements are used inside the audio element. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct To enable the audio element to work in all browsers, use source elements inside the audio element. Incorrect To enable the audio element to work in all browsers, use source elements inside the audio element.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Integrating Audio QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.10 - Understand the source element NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Integrating Audio KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/5/2020 12:24 PM 61. The source elements can link to the same or different audio files as appropriate. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct The source elements can link to the same or different audio files as appropriate. Incorrect The source elements can link to the same or different audio files as appropriate. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 33

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 9: Integrating Audio and Video POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Integrating Audio QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.10 - Understand the source element NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Integrating Audio KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/5/2020 12:26 PM 62. The Ogg audio file format is supported by the Internet Explorer browser only. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct The Ogg audio file format is supported by Google Chrome, Mozilla Firefox, and Opera. Incorrect The Ogg audio file format is supported by Google Chrome, Mozilla Firefox, and Opera.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Integrating Audio QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.02 - Identify audio formats NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Integrating Audio KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/5/2020 12:29 PM 63. Videos add visual appeal and can pack a huge amount of information into a few seconds. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct Videos add visual appeal and can pack a huge amount of information into a few seconds. Incorrect Videos add visual appeal and can pack a huge amount of information into a few seconds.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES:

1 Easy Introduction

Page 34

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 9: Integrating Audio and Video QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.01 - Describe the benefits and limitations of multimedia in websites NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Integrating Video KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/5/2020 12:31 PM 64. The HTML 5 video element does not support the .webm file format. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct The HTML 5 video element supports three video file formats: .mp4, .ogg, and .webm. Incorrect The HTML 5 video element supports three video file formats: .mp4, .ogg, and .webm.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Integrating Video QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.03 - Identify video formats NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Integrating Video KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/6/2020 5:14 PM 65. The problem with plug-ins is that browsers may have different plug-ins or only recognize specific video formats. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct The problem with plug-ins is that browsers may have different plug-ins or only recognize specific video formats. Incorrect The problem with plug-ins is that browsers may have different plug-ins or only recognize specific video formats.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Integrating Video QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.07 - Understand and create video elements Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 35

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 9: Integrating Audio and Video NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Integrating Video Bloom’s: Remember 10/8/2019 3:12 PM 2/5/2020 12:34 PM

66. The src video element attribute specifies whether and how the video should be loaded when the page loads. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct The preload video element attribute specifies whether and how the video should be loaded when the page loads. Incorrect The preload video element attribute specifies whether and how the video should be loaded when the page loads.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Integrating Audio QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.09 - Identify common video attributes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Integrating Video KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/5/2020 12:36 PM 67. Digital media such as audio, video, and animation is called _____. ANSWER: multimedia POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Introduction QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.01 - Describe the benefits and limitations of multimedia in websites NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introduction KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/5/2020 12:37 PM 68. The _____ element defines a container for an external application or interactive content. embed ANSWER: Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 36

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 9: Integrating Audio and Video POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Multimedia QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.01 - Describe the benefits and limitations of multimedia in websites NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Multimedia KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/5/2020 12:39 PM 69. Using the audio and video elements, web developers can easily embed media into _____ documents. ANSWER: HTML Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) Hypertext Markup Language HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Multimedia QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.01 - Describe the benefits and limitations of multimedia in websites NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Multimedia KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/6/2020 5:18 PM 70. A(n) _____ is computer software that plays multimedia files. ANSWER: media player POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Multimedia QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.01 - Describe the benefits and limitations of multimedia in websites NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Multimedia KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 37

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 9: Integrating Audio and Video DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

10/8/2019 3:12 PM 2/5/2020 12:40 PM

71. A(n) _____ can be embedded within a webpage, though the browser must have Java installed and enabled. ANSWER: Java applet applet POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Multimedia QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.01 - Describe the benefits and limitations of multimedia in websites NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Multimedia KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/5/2020 2:09 PM 72. The _____ audio file format is limited to electronic musical instruments and other electronic equipment. ANSWER: Musical Instrument Digital Interface (MIDI) Musical Instrument Digital Interface MIDI MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Integrating Audio QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.02 - Identify audio formats NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Integrating Audio KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/6/2020 5:20 PM 73. The _____ attribute adds audio controls, such as play, pause, and volume. controls ANSWER: POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Integrating Audio QUESTION TYPE: Completion Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 38

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 9: Integrating Audio and Video HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.08 - Identify common audio attributes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Integrating Audio KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/5/2020 12:47 PM 74. The _____ audio element attribute specifies whether and how the audio should be loaded when the page loads. preload ANSWER: POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Integrating Audio QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.08 - Identify common audio attributes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Integrating Audio KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/5/2020 12:50 PM 75. Including the _____ elements accommodates visitors who use any of the five major browsers. source ANSWER: POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Integrating Audio QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.10 - Understand the source element NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Integrating Audio KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/5/2020 12:51 PM 76. The _____ element does not work in legacy browsers. video ANSWER: POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 39

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 9: Integrating Audio and Video REFERENCES: Integrating Video QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.07 - Understand and create video elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Integrating Video KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/5/2020 12:52 PM 77. The Mac operating system comes with _____ for playing movies. ANSWER: QuickTime Quick Time QuickTime Player Quick Time Player POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Multimedia QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.03 - Identify video formats NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Integrating Video KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/5/2020 12:55 PM Identify the letter of the choice that best matches the sentence or definition. a. QuickTime Player b. param c. AAC d. Adobe Flash e. data f. Embedded media g. Flash animation h. Codec i. MP4 j. Plug-in DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Integrating Audio Integrating Video Using Multimedia QUESTION TYPE: Matching HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.01 - Describe the benefits and limitations of multimedia in websites Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 40

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 9: Integrating Audio and Video LO: 09.02 - Identify audio formats LO: 09.04 - Describe a plug-in LO: 09.05 - Understand codecs LO: 09.06 - Understand and create audio elements LO: 09.07 - Understand and create video elements LO: 09.08 - Identify common audio attributes NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Integrating Audio Using Multimedia KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/6/2020 5:28 PM 78. These media files appear within the webpage along with the audio or video player controls. ANSWER: f POINTS: 1 79. Extra software added to a browser to provide a capability that is not inherent to the browser. ANSWER: j POINTS: 1 80. The Mac operating system comes with this for playing movies. ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 81. Can be used to create animations or movie files. ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 82. Incorporating this was popular on websites before using smartphones and tablets became widespread. ANSWER: g POINTS: 1 83. Element used to define parameters for plug-ins embedded with an object element. ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 84. Audio file format developed by Apple. ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 85. Standard audio file format that is based on QuickTime format and is used for audio and video. ANSWER: i POINTS: 1 86. Can be used by an audio editor to reduce the size of an audio file, while maintaining enough quality to play the audio Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 41

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 9: Integrating Audio and Video file on a computer. ANSWER: h POINTS: 1 87. Attribute that specifies the resource file. ANSWER: e POINTS: 1 88. Explain embedded vs. external multimedia. ANSWER: Embedding media is similar to inserting inline images. The embedded media files appear within the webpage along with the audio or video player controls. Visitors use the controls to play or stop the media. Because the media file is embedded directly into the webpage, one can complement the audio or video clip resource with surrounding text or graphical images. Before HTML 5, the object element was used to insert embedded content, including multimedia. HTML 5 introduces two new elements, audio and video, to use as an alternative to the object element. To access external media files, website visitors click a link. They can then decide whether to link directly to the external source or download the file. Unlike embedded media, the external media is displayed out of context with the webpage that contains the link. Using external links is a common web development practice. For example, sites that provide many video resources, such as YouTube, use external media files and the embed element, which defines a container for an external application or interactive content (also called a plug-in). POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Multimedia QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.01 - Describe the benefits and limitations of multimedia in websites NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Multimedia KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/6/2020 5:29 PM 89. Briefly explain plug-ins, using a browser as an example. ANSWER: A browser extension (also called a plugin) is extra software added to the browser (or other program) to provide a capability that is not inherent to the browser. More than 1,000 extensions are available for Google Chrome that allow users to customize their Google Chrome browser experience. Popular browser extensions include Grammarly, AdBlocker Ultimate, McAfee SiteAdvisor, HTTPS Everywhere, and Adobe Acrobat. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Multimedia QUESTION TYPE: Essay Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 42

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 9: Integrating Audio and Video HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.04 - Describe a plug-in NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Multimedia KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/6/2020 5:30 PM 90. Explain the factors that should be considered while adding audio to a webpage. ANSWER: Adding audio to a webpage can help set a desired mood or tone. It can also be a distraction to some users, so one must first determine if the audio is appropriate for the webpage and its audience. Audio integrated within a webpage should have a distinct purpose and should provide added value or instruction. One should also consider the time it takes for the browser to load the audio file. If the audience includes users with dial-up connections rather than broadband access, they will likely experience a delay, especially if the audio files are large. One should keep in mind that using audio or video on a mobile device requires a data plan if the device is not connected to a wireless network. One popular way that websites use audio is to provide links to music files that visitors can play or download. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Integrating Audio QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.06 - Understand and create audio elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Integrating Audio KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/5/2020 1:16 PM Critical Thinking Questions Libby, an academic organizer and planner, works for various universities where students can utilize the courseware created by Libby to enhance their verbal and reasoning skills. Libby has assigned James, a website designer, the task of using multimedia to enhance her website so that it provides the students with an easier and more interactive method of learning. 91. To make the courseware subject specific, Libby instructs James to incorporate a series of audio and video clips that can be released to the students in a particular sequence. The purpose of this initiative is to help students watch and listen to these courses as they progress in their skill achievement. Such series of audio and video clips are referred to as _____. a. broadcasts b. podcasts c. applicators Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 43

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 9: Integrating Audio and Video d. plug-ins ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

b a. Podcasts are a series of audio or video clips that are released in a sequence. b. Podcasts are a series of audio or video clips that are released in a sequence. c. Podcasts are a series of audio or video clips that are released in a sequence. d. Podcasts are a series of audio or video clips that are released in a sequence.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: Using Multimedia QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 9-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.01 - Describe the benefits and limitations of multimedia in websites NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Multimedia KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/5/2020 1:18 PM 92. James decides to create his own multimedia files and not use any existing files. Which should James use to create his own audio files? a. digital camera b. digital camcorder c. web camera d. microphone ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. You can create your own audio files using a microphone. b. You can create your own audio files using a microphone. c. You can create your own audio files using a microphone. d. You can create your own audio files using a microphone. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: Using Multimedia QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 9-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.06 - Understand and create audio elements NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Multimedia KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/5/2020 1:21 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 44

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 9: Integrating Audio and Video 93. Libby asks James to incorporate video resources on the website that would allow the students to access a variety of courseware. To do so, James has decided to use external media files and the _____ element, which would define a container for an external application. a. embed b. create c. object d. link ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

a a. The embed element defines a container for an external application. b. The embed element defines a container for an external application. c. The embed element defines a container for an external application. d. The embed element defines a container for an external application.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: Using Multimedia QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 9-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.01 - Describe the benefits and limitations of multimedia in websites NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Multimedia KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/6/2020 5:34 PM Critical Thinking Questions Emma is the supervisor at Rainbow Music. She is responsible for reviewing and editing the audio files before they are made accessible to the audience of the company's music website. 94. As an audio editor, Emma observes that most of the audio files are extremely large in size. Emma should utilize a _____ to reduce the size of an audio file, while maintaining enough quality to play the audio file on a computer. a. endecode b. codec c. enricher d. compressor ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. An audio editor uses a codec to reduce the size of an audio file, while maintaining enough quality to play the audio file on a computer. b. An audio editor uses a codec to reduce the size of an audio file, while maintaining enough quality to play the audio file on a computer. c. An audio editor uses a codec to reduce the size of an audio file, while maintaining enough quality to play the audio file on a computer. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 45

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 9: Integrating Audio and Video d. An audio editor uses a codec to reduce the size of an audio file, while maintaining enough quality to play the audio file on a computer.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: Integrating Audio QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 9-2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.05 - Understand codecs NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Integrating Audio KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/6/2020 5:36 PM 95. Emma embeds an audio file onto the music webpage. Which element should she use inside the audio element to enable it to work in all browsers? a. auto b. source c. loop d. param ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

b a. To enable the audio element to work in all browsers, use source elements inside the audio element. b. To enable the audio element to work in all browsers, use source elements inside the audio element. c. To enable the audio element to work in all browsers, use source elements inside the audio element. d. To enable the audio element to work in all browsers, use source elements inside the audio element.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: Integrating Audio QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 9-2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 09.10 - Understand the source element NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Integrating Audio KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/5/2020 1:28 PM

Page 46

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 10: Creating Interactivity with CSS and JavaScript True / False 1. Web developers use a scripting language to control webpages. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct In a web environment, web developers use a scripting language to control webpages. Incorrect In a web environment, web developers use a scripting language to control webpages.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Incorporating JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.03 - Understand JavaScript NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/7/2020 4:43 PM 2. JavaScript and Java are the same. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct

JavaScript and Java are not the same. Java is a more complex programming language, commonly used to create large business applications and native mobile applications for the Android operating system. Incorrect JavaScript and Java are not the same. Java is a more complex programming language, commonly used to create large business applications and native mobile applications for the Android operating system.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 10: Creating Interactivity with CSS and JavaScript 3. JavaScript withholds interactivity between the webpage and the user. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct JavaScript provides additional interactivity between the webpage and the user. Incorrect JavaScript provides additional interactivity between the webpage and the user.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Incorporating JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.03 - Understand JavaScript NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/7/2020 4:45 PM 4. Efficient use of JavaScript can significantly improve and enrich the user experience. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct Efficient use of JavaScript can significantly improve and enrich the user experience. Incorrect Efficient use of JavaScript can significantly improve and enrich the user experience.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Incorporating JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.03 - Understand JavaScript NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/7/2020 4:46 PM 5. The hamburger icon, used as the menu button in websites, consists of a single horizontal line. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct The hamburger icon consists of three horizontal, parallel lines. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 10: Creating Interactivity with CSS and JavaScript Incorrect The hamburger icon consists of three horizontal, parallel lines.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Incorporating JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.03 - Understand JavaScript NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/7/2020 4:48 PM 6. If you create a variable named foodGroup, JavaScript will recognize this variable if it is written as FoodGroup. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct If you create a variable named foodGroup, JavaScript will not recognize this variable if it is written as FoodGroup. Incorrect If you create a variable named foodGroup, JavaScript will not recognize this variable if it is written as FoodGroup.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Incorporating JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.03 - Understand JavaScript NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/7/2020 4:51 PM 7. CSS began as a simple way to add color and design a webpage. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct CSS began as a simple way to add color and design a webpage. Incorrect CSS began as a simple way to add color and design a webpage.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES:

1 Easy Using CSS to Create Interactivity

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 10: Creating Interactivity with CSS and JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.01 - Use the CSS transform property NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/7/2020 4:53 PM 8. Properties cannot be assigned to JavaScript objects. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct Properties can be assigned to JavaScript objects. Incorrect Properties can be assigned to JavaScript objects.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Incorporating JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.03 - Understand JavaScript NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/20/2020 5:44 PM 9. In JavaScript, methods associated with the document object might be write and open. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct In JavaScript, methods associated with the document object might be write and open. Incorrect In JavaScript, methods associated with the document object might be write and open.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 10: Creating Interactivity with CSS and JavaScript KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Bloom’s: Understand 10/8/2019 3:15 PM 2/7/2020 4:57 PM

10. In CSS, the animation-delay property specifies the direction of an animation: forward or reverse. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct In CSS, the animation-direction property specifies the direction of an animation: forward or reverse. Incorrect In CSS, the animation-direction property specifies the direction of an animation: forward or reverse.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using CSS to Create Interactivity QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.02 - Create animations with CSS keyframes TOPICS: CSS animations KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 2/8/2020 12:44 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/20/2020 5:46 PM 11. In CSS, the animation-iteration-count property specifies the number of times an animation should take place. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct In CSS, the animation-iteration-count property specifies the number of times an animation should take place. Incorrect In CSS, the animation-iteration-count property specifies the number of times an animation should take place.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 10: Creating Interactivity with CSS and JavaScript a. True b. False ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

False Adding animation to a webpage grabs the user’s attention and improves the user experience. Incorrect Adding animation to a webpage grabs the user’s attention and improves the user experience. Correct

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using CSS to Create Interactivity QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.02 - Create animations with CSS keyframes TOPICS: CSS animations KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 2/8/2020 12:50 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/20/2020 5:47 PM 13. GitHub is an online repository used by developers to share code. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct GitHub is an online repository used by developers to share code. Incorrect GitHub is an online repository used by developers to share code.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using CSS to Create Interactivity QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.02 - Create animations with CSS keyframes TOPICS: CSS animations KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 2/8/2020 12:52 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/17/2020 1:34 PM 14. When adding animation to a webpage, a webkit prefix is needed to accommodate older versions of Apple Safari. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct When adding animation to a webpage, a webkit prefix is needed to accommodate older versions of Apple Safari. Incorrect When adding animation to a webpage, a webkit prefix is needed to accommodate older versions of Apple Safari. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 10: Creating Interactivity with CSS and JavaScript POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using CSS to Create Interactivity QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.02 - Create animations with CSS keyframes TOPICS: CSS animations KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 2/10/2020 12:36 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/20/2020 5:52 PM 15. JavaScript was originally known as Mocha and then LiveScript. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct JavaScript was originally known as Mocha and then LiveScript. Incorrect JavaScript was originally known as Mocha and then LiveScript.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Incorporating JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.03 - Understand JavaScript TOPICS: JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 2/10/2020 12:43 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/10/2020 1:14 PM 16. JavaScript is a more complex programming language than Java. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct Java is a more complex programming language, commonly used to create large business applications and native mobile applications for the Android operating system. Incorrect Java is a more complex programming language, commonly used to create large business applications and native mobile applications for the Android operating system.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE: HAS VARIABLES:

1 Easy Incorporating JavaScript True / False False

Page 7

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 10: Creating Interactivity with CSS and JavaScript LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.03 - Understand JavaScript NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 2/10/2020 12:48 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/10/2020 12:49 PM 17. In general, it is not necessary for web developers to remove code. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct As a developer, you should always keep your code clean and remove unnecessary code. Incorrect As a developer, you should always keep your code clean and remove unnecessary code.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Incorporating JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.04 - Describe JavaScript code NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 2/10/2020 12:52 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/10/2020 12:55 PM 18. In JavaScript, a function must include a name and statements that specify a task to be performed. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct In JavaScript, a function must include a name and statements that specify a task to be performed. Incorrect In JavaScript, a function must include a name and statements that specify a task to be performed.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Incorporating JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.08 - Create JavaScript functions NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 8

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 10: Creating Interactivity with CSS and JavaScript KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Bloom’s: Understand 2/10/2020 12:55 PM 2/10/2020 1:16 PM

19. Developers can use JavaScript to validate form information. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct Developers can use JavaScript to validate form information. Incorrect Developers can use JavaScript to validate form information.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Incorporating JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.03 - Understand JavaScript NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 2/10/2020 1:14 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/17/2020 1:34 PM 20. All JavaScript methods require arguments. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct Some methods require arguments, and others do not. Incorrect Some methods require arguments, and others do not.

Page 9

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 10: Creating Interactivity with CSS and JavaScript b. False ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

True Correct Variables can be defined locally or globally in JavaScript. Incorrect Variables can be defined locally or globally in JavaScript.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Incorporating JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.03 - Understand JavaScript NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 2/10/2020 1:29 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/13/2020 2:12 PM 22. JavaScript programming is needed to display and hide the navigation links for a mobile viewport. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct JavaScript programming is needed to display and hide the navigation links for a mobile viewport. Incorrect JavaScript programming is needed to display and hide the navigation links for a mobile viewport.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Incorporating JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.04 - Describe JavaScript code NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 2/13/2020 2:08 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/17/2020 1:07 PM Multiple Choice 23. JavaScript is a(n)_____ language used to provide various types of functionality to webpages, such as the ability to interact with the user. a. scripting b. embedded c. iterative Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 10

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 10: Creating Interactivity with CSS and JavaScript d. procedural ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

a a. JavaScript is scripting language used to provide various types of functionality to webpages, such as the ability to interact with the user. b. JavaScript is scripting language used to provide various types of functionality to webpages, such as the ability to interact with the user. c. JavaScript is scripting language used to provide various types of functionality to webpages, such as the ability to interact with the user. d. JavaScript is scripting language used to provide various types of functionality to webpages, such as the ability to interact with the user.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Incorporating JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.03 - Understand JavaScript NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:14 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/17/2020 1:07 PM 24. JavaScript is a(n) _____ scripting language, which means that the browser interprets and renders the JavaScript. a. server-side b. client-side c. off-side d. rule-based ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. JavaScript is a client-side scripting language, which means that the browser (i.e., the client) interprets and renders the JavaScript. b. JavaScript is a client-side scripting language, which means that the browser (i.e., the client) interprets and renders the JavaScript. c. JavaScript is a client-side scripting language, which means that the browser (i.e., the client) interprets and renders the JavaScript. d. JavaScript is a client-side scripting language, which means that the browser (i.e., the client) interprets and renders the JavaScript.

Page 11

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 10: Creating Interactivity with CSS and JavaScript KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Bloom’s: Remember 10/8/2019 3:14 PM 2/6/2020 1:44 PM

25. Which is a complex programming language, commonly used to create large business applications and native mobile applications for the Android operating system? a. Safari b. Java c. Visual Basic d. Opera ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. Java is a complex programming language, commonly used to create large business applications and native mobile applications for the Android operating system. b. Java is a complex programming language, commonly used to create large business applications and native mobile applications for the Android operating system. c. Java is a complex programming language, commonly used to create large business applications and native mobile applications for the Android operating system. d. Java is a complex programming language, commonly used to create large business applications and native mobile applications for the Android operating system.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Incorporating JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.03 - Understand JavaScript NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:14 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/6/2020 1:50 PM 26. Many mobile websites integrate an icon commonly called the _____ icon for use as a menu button. a. hamburger b. keyframe c. emoji d. favicon ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. Many mobile websites integrate an icon commonly known as the hamburger icon for use as a menu button. b. Many mobile websites integrate an icon commonly known as the hamburger icon for use as a menu button. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 12

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 10: Creating Interactivity with CSS and JavaScript c. Many mobile websites integrate an icon commonly known as the hamburger icon for use as a menu button. d. Many mobile websites integrate an icon commonly known as the hamburger icon for use as a menu button.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Incorporating JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.03 - Understand JavaScript NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:14 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/6/2020 1:58 PM 27. A(n) _____ in JavaScript is programming code and data that can be treated as its own entity. a. object b. section c. kernel d. block ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. An object in JavaScript is anything that can be treated as its own entity. b. An object in JavaScript is anything that can be treated as its own entity. c. An object in JavaScript is anything that can be treated as its own entity. d. An object in JavaScript is anything that can be treated as its own entity. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Incorporating JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.04 - Describe JavaScript code NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:14 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/6/2020 2:02 PM 28. The CSS _____ property allows block elements to be transformed or changed within two-dimensional or threedimensional space. a. transform b. regulate c. navigator Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 13

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 10: Creating Interactivity with CSS and JavaScript d. screen ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

a a. The CSS transform property allows block elements to be transformed or changed within two-dimensional or three-dimensional space. b. The CSS transform property allows block elements to be transformed or changed within two-dimensional or three-dimensional space. c. The CSS transform property allows block elements to be transformed or changed within two-dimensional or three-dimensional space. d. The CSS transform property allows block elements to be transformed or changed within two-dimensional or three-dimensional space.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using CSS to Create Interactivity QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.01 - Use the CSS transform property NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: CSS transform property KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:14 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/20/2020 6:07 PM 29. The _____ of JavaScript objects are attributes that describe an object’s characteristics. a. properties b. elements c. labels d. placeholders ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. Properties are attributes that describe an object’s characteristics. b. Properties are attributes that describe an object’s characteristics. c. Properties are attributes that describe an object’s characteristics. d. Properties are attributes that describe an object’s characteristics. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Incorporating JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.04 - Describe JavaScript code NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:14 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/7/2020 11:42 AM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 14

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 10: Creating Interactivity with CSS and JavaScript 30. Identify the code that shows how an object name and its property are separated. a. browser=chrome.appName b. browser=chrome*appName c. browser=chrome$appName d. browser=chrome#appName ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

a a. An object name and its property are separated by a period. b. An object name and its property are separated by a period. c. An object name and its property are separated by a period. d. An object name and its property are separated by a period.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Incorporating JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.04 - Describe JavaScript code NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:14 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/7/2020 11:48 AM 31. Which term is used for actions that an object can perform? a. properties b. arguments c. methods d. strings ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. Methods are actions that an object can perform. b. Methods are actions that an object can perform. c. Methods are actions that an object can perform. d. Methods are actions that an object can perform. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Incorporating JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.04 - Describe JavaScript code NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 15

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 10: Creating Interactivity with CSS and JavaScript DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

10/8/2019 3:14 PM 2/7/2020 11:50 AM

32. A parameter or _____ is a value given to a method. a. argument b. element c. function d. event ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. An argument or parameter is a value given to a method. b. An argument or parameter is a value given to a method. c. An argument or parameter is a value given to a method. d. An argument or parameter is a value given to a method. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Incorporating JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.04 - Describe JavaScript code NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:14 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/7/2020 11:51 AM 33. A(n) _____ is a set of JavaScript statements that perform a specific task. a. function b. element c. argument d. property ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. A function is a set of JavaScript statements that perform a specific task. b. A function is a set of JavaScript statements that perform a specific task. c. A function is a set of JavaScript statements that perform a specific task. d. A function is a set of JavaScript statements that perform a specific task. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Incorporating JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.04 - Describe JavaScript code NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 16

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 10: Creating Interactivity with CSS and JavaScript TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Incorporating JavaScript Bloom’s: Understand 10/8/2019 3:14 PM 2/17/2020 1:09 PM

34. JavaScript uses _____ to store values temporarily in internal memory. a. arguments b. elements c. functions d. variables ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. JavaScript uses variables to store values temporarily in internal memory. b. JavaScript uses variables to store values temporarily in internal memory. c. JavaScript uses variables to store values temporarily in internal memory. d. JavaScript uses variables to store values temporarily in internal memory. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Incorporating JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.04 - Describe JavaScript code NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:14 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/7/2020 11:55 AM 35. In JavaScript, _____ must have a unique name and must follow the same naming conventions as user-defined functions. a. comments b. arguments c. variables d. elements ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. Variables must have a unique name and must follow the same naming conventions as user-defined functions. b. Variables must have a unique name and must follow the same naming conventions as user-defined functions. c. Variables must have a unique name and must follow the same naming conventions as user-defined functions. d. Variables must have a unique name and must follow the same naming conventions as user-defined functions.

POINTS:

Page 17

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 10: Creating Interactivity with CSS and JavaScript DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Incorporating JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.04 - Describe JavaScript code NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:14 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/7/2020 11:57 AM 36. A(n) _____ is how JavaScript associates an action with a function. a. attribute b. parameter c. anchor element d. event handler ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. An event handler is how JavaScript associates an action with a function. b. An event handler is how JavaScript associates an action with a function. c. An event handler is how JavaScript associates an action with a function. d. An event handler is how JavaScript associates an action with a function. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Incorporating JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.04 - Describe JavaScript code NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:14 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/7/2020 11:58 AM 37. A marketing deal was struck with Sun Microsystems to adopt the Java name and change LiveScript to _____. a. JavaScript b. Windows c. MacOS d. Google ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. A marketing deal was struck with Sun Microsystems to adopt the Java name and change LiveScript to JavaScript. b. A marketing deal was struck with Sun Microsystems to adopt the Java name and Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 18

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 10: Creating Interactivity with CSS and JavaScript change LiveScript to JavaScript. c. A marketing deal was struck with Sun Microsystems to adopt the Java name and change LiveScript to JavaScript. d. A marketing deal was struck with Sun Microsystems to adopt the Java name and change LiveScript to JavaScript.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Incorporating JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.04 - Describe JavaScript code NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:14 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/10/2020 12:47 PM Critical Thinking Questions Case 10-1 Roger has joined WebPort Inc. as a junior JavaScript programmer. He is working with a large team of expert programmers to launch a website. 38. Roger is writing a code and he has been advised by his mentor to provide comments in the code. What is the format that Roger must follow to write comments in JavaScript? a. He must use a slash and asterisk for multiline comments. b. He must use a single slash for a one-line comment. c. He must use double slashes and a period for multiline comments. d. He must use a period and asterisk for a one-line comment. ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. Use the slash and asterisk for multiline comments. b. Use the slash and asterisk for multiline comments. c. Use the slash and asterisk for multiline comments. d. Use the slash and asterisk for multiline comments. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: Incorporating JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: CASE 10-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.06 - Understand where JavaScript code may be written NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 19

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 10: Creating Interactivity with CSS and JavaScript KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Bloom’s: Understand 10/8/2019 3:15 PM 2/21/2020 7:45 AM

39. Roger has created a JavaScript program as an external .js file. What is the format he must follow to specify the file as an external file? a. <script src="scripts/myfunction.js"></script> b. <script src:"myfunction.js"></script> c. <script src:"scripts/myfunction".js></script> d. <script src="scripts.js/myfunction"></script> ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

a a. Specify the external .js file as the file source: < script src="scripts/myfunction.js">. b. Specify the external .js file as the file source: < script src="scripts/myfunction.js">. c. Specify the external .js file as the file source: < script src="scripts/myfunction.js">. d. Specify the external .js file as the file source: < script src="scripts/myfunction.js">.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: Incorporating JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: CASE 10-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.07 - Create an external JavaScript file NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/17/2020 1:12 PM 40. Which DOM method returns the first HTML element with the specified CSS selector? a. querySelector( ) b. querySelectorAll( ) c. getElementsByName( ) d. getElementsByTagName( ) ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. The querySelector( ) returns the first HTML element with the specified CSS selector. b. The querySelector( ) returns the first HTML element with the specified CSS selector. c. The querySelector( ) returns the first HTML element with the specified CSS selector. d. The querySelector( ) returns the first HTML element with the specified CSS selector.

POINTS:

Page 20

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 10: Creating Interactivity with CSS and JavaScript DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Incorporating JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.04 - Describe JavaScript code NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 2/8/2020 11:54 AM DATE MODIFIED: 2/22/2020 3:09 PM 41. Which CSS transform property value rotates an element a specified number of degrees clockwise or counterclockwise? a. matrix( ) b. skew( ) c. translate( ) d. rotate( ) ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. The CSS transform property value that rotates an element a specified number of degrees clockwise or counter-clockwise is rotate( ). b. The CSS transform property value that rotates an element a specified number of degrees clockwise or counter-clockwise is rotate( ). c. The CSS transform property value that rotates an element a specified number of degrees clockwise or counter-clockwise is rotate( ). d. The CSS transform property value that rotates an element a specified number of degrees clockwise or counter-clockwise is rotate( ).

Page 21

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 10: Creating Interactivity with CSS and JavaScript FEEDBACK:

a. The CSS transform property value that is a 2D transformation which accepts six value is matrix( ). b. The CSS transform property value that is a 2D transformation which accepts six value is matrix( ). c. The CSS transform property value that is a 2D transformation which accepts six value is matrix( ). d. The CSS transform property value that is a 2D transformation which accepts six value is matrix( ).

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using CSS to Create Interactivity QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.01 - Use the CSS transform property TOPICS: CSS transform property KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 2/8/2020 12:08 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/8/2020 12:11 PM 43. In CSS, the rotate(30deg) method rotates the element _____. a. 30 degrees clockwise b. 30 degrees counter-clockwise c. 90 degrees clockwise d. 180 degrees counter-clockwise ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. In CSS, the rotate(30deg) method rotates the element 30 degrees clockwise. b. In CSS, the rotate(30deg) method rotates the element 30 degrees clockwise. c. In CSS, the rotate(30deg) method rotates the element 30 degrees clockwise. d. In CSS, the rotate(30deg) method rotates the element 30 degrees clockwise. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using CSS to Create Interactivity QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.01 - Use the CSS transform property TOPICS: CSS transform property KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 2/8/2020 12:12 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/21/2020 7:59 AM 44. Which CSS transform property value is used to resize an element? a. translate( ) b. scale( ) Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 22

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 10: Creating Interactivity with CSS and JavaScript c. trim () d. matrix( ) ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

b a. The CSS transform property value used to resize an element is scale( ). b. The CSS transform property value used to resize an element is scale( ). c. The CSS transform property value used to resize an element is scale( ). d. The CSS transform property value used to resize an element is scale( ).

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using CSS to Create Interactivity QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.01 - Use the CSS transform property TOPICS: CSS transform property KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 2/8/2020 12:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/17/2020 1:35 PM 45. In CSS, the skew method skews the _____ of an element. a. corners b. sides c. opacity d. texture ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. In CSS, the skew method skews the sides of an element. b. In CSS, the skew method skews the sides of an element. c. In CSS, the skew method skews the sides of an element. d. In CSS, the skew method skews the sides of an element. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using CSS to Create Interactivity QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.01 - Use the CSS transform property TOPICS: CSS transform property KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 2/8/2020 12:19 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/17/2020 1:35 PM 46. To add an animation with CSS, you create it with an _____ rule; it specifies the name of the animation as well as the animation parameters. a. @transform Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 23

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 10: Creating Interactivity with CSS and JavaScript b. @validation c. @keyframes d. @specification ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

c a. To add an animation with CSS, you create it with an @keyframes rule; it specifies the name of the animation as well as the animation parameters.

b. To add an animation with CSS, you create it with an @keyframes rule; it specifies the name of the animation as well as the animation parameters. c. To add an animation with CSS, you create it with an @keyframes rule; it specifies the name of the animation as well as the animation parameters. d. To add an animation with CSS, you create it with an @keyframes rule; it specifies the name of the animation as well as the animation parameters.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using CSS to Create Interactivity QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.02 - Create animations with CSS keyframes TOPICS: CSS transform property KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 2/8/2020 12:24 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/8/2020 12:27 PM 47. Which CSS animation property specifies the time it should take for the animation to complete? a. delay b. timing c. fill d. duration ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. The animation-duration property specifies the time it should take for the animation to complete. b. The animation-duration property specifies the time it should take for the animation to complete. c. The animation-duration property specifies the time it should take for the animation to complete. d. The animation-duration property specifies the time it should take for the animation to complete.

Page 24

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 10: Creating Interactivity with CSS and JavaScript KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Bloom's: Remember 2/8/2020 12:28 PM 2/8/2020 12:32 PM

48. Which CSS animation property specifies the speed of the animation? a. iteration-count b. fill-mode c. timing-function d. name ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. The animation-timing-function specifies the speed of the animation. b. The animation-timing-function specifies the speed of the animation. c. The animation-timing-function specifies the speed of the animation. d. The animation-timing-function specifies the speed of the animation. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using CSS to Create Interactivity QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.02 - Create animations with CSS keyframes TOPICS: CSS transform property KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 2/8/2020 12:34 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/8/2020 12:41 PM 49. Which CSS animation property specifies the element style when the animation is not taking place? a. direction b. fill-mode c. play-state d. name ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. The animation-fill-mode property specifies the element style when the animation is not taking place. b. The animation-fill-mode property specifies the element style when the animation is not taking place. c. The animation-fill-mode property specifies the element style when the animation is not taking place. d. The animation-fill-mode property specifies the element style when the animation is not taking place.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE:

1 Moderate Using CSS to Create Interactivity Multiple Choice

Page 25

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 10: Creating Interactivity with CSS and JavaScript HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.02 - Create animations with CSS keyframes TOPICS: CSS transform property KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 2/8/2020 12:37 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/17/2020 1:15 PM 50. Which CSS animation property specifies whether the animation is in progress or paused? a. direction b. play-state c. timing-function d. delay ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. The animation-play-state specifies if the animation is in progress or paused. b. The animation-play-state specifies if the animation is in progress or paused. c. The animation-play-state specifies if the animation is in progress or paused. d. The animation-play-state specifies if the animation is in progress or paused. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using CSS to Create Interactivity QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.02 - Create animations with CSS keyframes TOPICS: CSS transform property KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 2/8/2020 12:41 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/21/2020 9:31 AM 51. Identify the event handler that indicates the user has made an object active. a. onfocus b. onclick c. onselect d. onload ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE:

1 Moderate Incorporating JavaScript Multiple Choice

a. The onfocus event handler indicates that the user has made an object active. b. The onfocus event handler indicates that the user has made an object active. c. The onfocus event handler indicates that the user has made an object active. d. The onfocus event handler indicates that the user has made an object active.

Page 26

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 10: Creating Interactivity with CSS and JavaScript HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.09 - Understand events NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 2/10/2020 12:45 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/17/2020 1:36 PM 52. Identify the correct JavaScript code used when multiple statements appear on the same line. a. foodOne = squash; foodTwo = pepper; b. foodOne...squash, foodTwo...pepper. c. foodOne =+squash//foodTwo =+ pepper. d. foodOnesquash+foodTwopepper; ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

a a. The semicolon is used to separate each statement, similar to how a period separates one sentence from another. b. The semicolon is used to separate each statement, similar to how a period separates one sentence from another. c. The semicolon is used to separate each statement, similar to how a period separates one sentence from another. d. The semicolon is used to separate each statement, similar to how a period separates one sentence from another.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Incorporating JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.04 - Describe JavaScript code NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 2/10/2020 1:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/17/2020 1:23 PM 53. You can use the jQuery _____ method to create animations on a webpage. a. script() b. embed() c. animate() d. translate() ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. You can use the jQuery animate( ) method to create animations on a webpage. b. You can use the jQuery animate( ) method to create animations on a webpage. c. You can use the jQuery animate( ) method to create animations on a webpage. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 27

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 10: Creating Interactivity with CSS and JavaScript d. You can use the jQuery animate( ) method to create animations on a webpage. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Incorporating JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.03 - Understand JavaScript NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 2/10/2020 1:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/10/2020 1:06 PM 54. What do JavaScript statements end with? a. semicolon b. colon c. astericks d. period ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. JavaScript statements end with a semicolon. b. JavaScript statements end with a semicolon. c. JavaScript statements end with a semicolon. d. JavaScript statements end with a semicolon. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Incorporating JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.04 - Describe JavaScript code NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 2/10/2020 1:08 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/10/2020 1:10 PM 55. In JavaScript, an object name and its property are separated by a(n) _____. a. semicolon b. colon c. asterisk d. period ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. In JavaScript, an object name and its property are separated by a period. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 28

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 10: Creating Interactivity with CSS and JavaScript b. In JavaScript, an object name and its property are separated by a period. c. In JavaScript, an object name and its property are separated by a period. d. In JavaScript, an object name and its property are separated by a period. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Incorporating JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.04 - Describe JavaScript code NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 2/10/2020 1:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/21/2020 9:42 AM 56. In JavaScript, methods are followed by _____. a. a semicolon b. parentheses c. an ampersand d. a period ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. Methods are followed by parentheses, which may be empty, or may contain an argument. b. Methods are followed by parentheses, which may be empty, or may contain an argument. c. Methods are followed by parentheses, which may be empty, or may contain an argument. d. Methods are followed by parentheses, which may be empty, or may contain an argument.

Page 29

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 10: Creating Interactivity with CSS and JavaScript b. onclick="hamburger()" c. [onclick*hamburger] d. onclick^to^ hamburger ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. The correct code used to add an onclick event handler to a hamburger icon is onclick="hamburger()".

b. The correct code used to add an onclick event handler to a hamburger icon is onclick="hamburger()". c. The correct code used to add an onclick event handler to a hamburger icon is onclick="hamburger()". d. The correct code used to add an onclick event handler to a hamburger icon is onclick="hamburger()".

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Incorporating JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.10 - Use an onclick event handler NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 2/13/2020 2:21 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/21/2020 9:47 AM Completion 58. The W3C uses _____ to track any issues related to CSS property recommendations. ANSWER: GitHub POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using CSS to Create Interactivity QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.01 - Use the CSS transform property NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/7/2020 6:52 PM 59. JavaScript uses _____ to store values temporarily in internal memory. ANSWER: variables POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 30

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 10: Creating Interactivity with CSS and JavaScript DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Incorporating JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.03 - Understand JavaScript NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/7/2020 6:55 PM 60. In the example person.name="Seth", _____ is the object. ANSWER: person POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Incorporating JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.04 - Describe JavaScript code NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/7/2020 6:58 PM 61. In JavaScript, _____ are followed by parentheses, which may be empty, or may contain an argument. ANSWER: methods functions POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Incorporating JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.04 - Describe JavaScript code NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/7/2020 6:59 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 31

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 10: Creating Interactivity with CSS and JavaScript 62. In JavaScript, a(n) _____ must include a name and statements that specify a task to be performed. ANSWER: function POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Incorporating JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.04 - Describe JavaScript code NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/7/2020 7:00 PM 63. The value of a(n) _____ in JavaScript can change, depending on the results of an expression or data entered by a user in a form. ANSWER: variable POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Incorporating JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.04 - Describe JavaScript code NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/7/2020 7:02 PM 64. Most JavaScript user-defined functions are called or invoked using _____. ANSWER: event handlers POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Incorporating JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.04 - Describe JavaScript code NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 32

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 10: Creating Interactivity with CSS and JavaScript DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

10/8/2019 3:15 PM 2/7/2020 7:04 PM

65. In a web environment, web developers use a(n) _____ language to control webpages. ANSWER: scripting POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Incorporating JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.04 - Describe JavaScript code NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 2/10/2020 12:40 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/21/2020 9:57 AM 66. In JavaScript, _____ variables are created within a function and can only be used by the function in which they are defined. ANSWER: local POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Incorporating JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.04 - Describe JavaScript code NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 2/10/2020 1:24 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/10/2020 1:26 PM 67. In JavaScript, _____ variables are created outside of a function and are typically defined near the top of an external JavaScript file. ANSWER: global POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Incorporating JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 33

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 10: Creating Interactivity with CSS and JavaScript LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.04 - Describe JavaScript code NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 2/10/2020 1:26 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/10/2020 1:27 PM 68. When defining a variable in JavaScript, begin with the keyword _____, followed by the variable name. ANSWER: var POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Incorporating JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.04 - Describe JavaScript code NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 2/10/2020 1:28 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/10/2020 1:28 PM 69. A mouse click or a webpage loading into the browser are examples of JavaScript _____. ANSWER: events POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Incorporating JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.04 - Describe JavaScript code NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 2/10/2020 1:30 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/17/2020 1:28 PM 70. The _____ element directs the HTML file to find the JavaScript file. ANSWER: script POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Incorporating JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: Completion Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 34

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 10: Creating Interactivity with CSS and JavaScript HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 10.05 - Understand and use the script element NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 2/13/2020 1:58 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/21/2020 10:01 AM 71. A developer often needs to use the same code for a project; therefore, it is ideal to group sets of code into a(n) _____. ANSWER: library POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Incorporating JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.04 - Describe JavaScript code NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 2/13/2020 2:35 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/21/2020 10:03 AM Matching Identify the action each event handler indicates. a. onabort b. onblur c. onmouseout d. onunload e. onmouseover f. onsubmit g. onselect h. onclick i. onchange j. onload k. onfocus l. onerror DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES:

Easy Incorporating JavaScript

Page 35

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 10: Creating Interactivity with CSS and JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: Matching HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.04 - Describe JavaScript code NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/23/2020 3:07 PM 72. User submitted a form ANSWER: f POINTS: 1 73. User stopped loading the page. ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 74. User made an object active ANSWER: k POINTS: 1 75. User left the page. ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 76. User selected contents of an object. ANSWER: g POINTS: 1 77. User left the object. ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 78. Mouse moved off an object. ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 79. User changed the object. ANSWER: i POINTS: 1 80. User clicked the object. ANSWER: h POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 36

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 10: Creating Interactivity with CSS and JavaScript 81. Mouse moved over an object. ANSWER: e POINTS: 1 82. Object finished loading ANSWER: j POINTS: 1 83. Script encountered an error ANSWER: l POINTS: 1 Essay 84. Briefly explain how to write JavaScript code. ANSWER: Keep the following syntax rules and guidelines in mind when writing JavaScript code. First, JavaScript is case sensitive, which means that it distinguishes between upper- and lower-case letters. If you create a variable named foodGroup, JavaScript will not recognize this variable if it is written as FoodGroup. As with HTML and CSS, you can incorporate comments in JavaScript code. Use two slashes for a one-line comment and use the slash and asterisk for multiline comments, as follows: // Single line comment syntax /* Multiple line comment syntax */ Using semicolons to end JavaScript statements is a common practice among programmers. Though it is not always necessary, it is a good best practice. The only time the semicolon is necessary is when multiple statements appear on the same line. The semicolon is used to separate each statement, similar to how a period separates one sentence from another. The following statements are all valid: foodOne = squash foodTwo = pepper; foodOne = squash; foodTwo = pepper; You can write JavaScript within an HTML page or as a separate JavaScript file with the filename extension .js. When JavaScript is written within an HTML page, the code may be within the head element or the body element, depending upon the developer and the task at hand. The following is an example of how to write a JavaScript statement within an HTML document using the script tags. <script> JavaScript statement; </script> When you create JavaScript as an external .js file, place a script element in the head element of the HTML file and specify the external .js file as the file source, as follows: POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES:

Page 37

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 10: Creating Interactivity with CSS and JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.04 - Describe JavaScript code NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/21/2020 10:07 AM 85. Explain the evolution of CSS and how it is used today. What is the purpose of the transform property? ANSWER: Answers will vary. CSS began as a simple way to add color and design a webpage, but today, it has evolved to become so much more. CSS can be used to move elements on a webpage, change the color of an element, or change the appearance of an element. The transform property allows block elements to be transformed or changed within two-dimensional or three-dimensional space. You can use a transform to rotate, scale, skew, or translate a block element. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using CSS to Create Interactivity QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.01 - Use the CSS transform property NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/21/2020 10:08 AM 86. Explain why most modern websites use some form of JavaScript within their website. ANSWER: Answers will vary. Most modern websites use some form of JavaScript within their website. JavaScript provides additional interactivity between the webpage and the user. Developers can use JavaScript to validate form information, send an alert to a user, change HTML content, show or hide content, animate elements, and much more. Efficient use of JavaScript can significantly improve and enrich the user experience. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Incorporating JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.04 - Describe JavaScript code NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 38

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 10: Creating Interactivity with CSS and JavaScript TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Incorporating JavaScript Bloom’s: Understand 2/10/2020 12:50 PM 2/10/2020 12:52 PM

87. Explain the use of an if/else statement in JavaScript. ANSWER: Answers will vary. One common JavaScript statement used within a function is the if/else statement. An if/else statement assesses a specified condition. If the condition is true, then a specific block of code is executed. If the condition is false, a different block of code is executed. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Incorporating JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.04 - Describe JavaScript code NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 2/10/2020 1:31 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/17/2020 1:31 PM 88. Briefly describe DOM methods and the DOM tree. ANSWER: Answers will vary. DOM stands for Document Object Model. Recall that every element on an HTML page is an object. The HTML DOM consists of all the HTML elements, attributes, and text. Together, all of these items are objects on the page. Each item in the DOM tree is also known as a node. Any of these objects can be accessed using JavaScript DOM methods. Using a DOM method, you can use JavaScript to manipulate an HTML element. One common DOM method is getElementById( ). POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Incorporating JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.04 - Describe JavaScript code NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 2/13/2020 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/13/2020 3:07 PM 89. Explain how variables are defined in JavaScript. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 39

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 10: Creating Interactivity with CSS and JavaScript ANSWER:

Answers will vary. When defining a variable, begin with the keyword var, followed by the variable name. The equal sign assigns this variable a value. Variables can be defined locally or globally. Local variables are created within a function. These variables can only be used by the function in which they are defined. Global variables are created outside of a function. They are typically defined near the top of an external JavaScript file. Global variables may be used by any function within the JavaScript file. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Incorporating JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.04 - Describe JavaScript code NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 2/13/2020 3:07 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/21/2020 10:12 AM 90. Briefly describe the purpose of jQuery. ANSWER: Answers will vary. A developer often needs to use the same code for a project. In this case, it is ideal to group sets of code into a library. One commonly used library is jQuery, a JavaScript library that can significantly reduce the amount of code (and time) needed to complete a web project. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Incorporating JavaScript QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:10.04 - Describe JavaScript code NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Incorporating JavaScript KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 2/13/2020 3:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/13/2020 3:12 PM

Page 40

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 11: Publish, Promote, and Maintain a Website True / False 1. The more impressions a website has in a search engine results page (SERP), the higher the chances of a user visiting the website. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct The more impressions you have in a SERP, the higher the chances of a user visiting your website. Incorrect The more impressions you have in a SERP, the higher the chances of a user visiting your website.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Finding a Website QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.04 - Explain search engine optimization (SEO) NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Finding a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/18/2020 12:01 PM 2. Optimizing a website involves creating the content and Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) code in the webpage to decrease its relevant keywords and to create barriers to the page indexing functions of search engines. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct Optimizing a website involves editing the content and HTML code in the webpage to increase its relevant keywords and to remove barriers to the page-indexing functions of search engines. Incorrect Optimizing a website involves editing the content and HTML code in the webpage to increase its relevant keywords and to remove barriers to the page-indexing functions of search engines.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 11: Publish, Promote, and Maintain a Website DATE MODIFIED:

2/18/2020 12:05 PM

3. Robots can read text on images, so providing keywords within the alt text of images is not necessary. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct Because robots cannot read text on images, be sure to use meaningful alt text with your images. Incorrect Because robots cannot read text on images, be sure to use meaningful alt text with your images.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 11: Publish, Promote, and Maintain a Website ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

True Correct

Consistent use of keywords throughout a website improves the search engine results page (SERP). Incorrect Consistent use of keywords throughout a website improves the search engine results page (SERP).

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Finding a Website QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.05 - Create description meta tags NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Finding a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/18/2020 12:15 PM 6. The domain name of the server on which webpages are published can be used together with a path to specific pages for webpage addresses. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct The domain name of the server on which webpages are published can be used together with a path to specific pages for webpage addresses. Incorrect The domain name of the server on which webpages are published can be used together with a path to specific pages for webpage addresses.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Publishing a Website QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.07 - Describe a domain name and top-level domains NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Publishing a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/18/2020 12:49 PM 7. The use of hyphens within a domain name makes the domain name easier to pronounce and more memorable. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct Avoid the use of hyphens within a domain name, as this makes the domain name Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 11: Publish, Promote, and Maintain a Website harder to pronounce and less memorable. Incorrect Avoid the use of hyphens within a domain name, as this makes the domain name harder to pronounce and less memorable.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Publishing a Website QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.07 - Describe a domain name and top-level domains NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Publishing a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/21/2020 3:04 PM 8. File Transfer Protocol (FTP) uses three ports to communicate over a network and two ports for control commands. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct FTP uses one port to communicate over a network, typically port 20, and another port, typically 21, for control commands. Incorrect FTP uses one port to communicate over a network, typically port 20, and another port, typically 21, for control commands.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Publishing a Website QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.09 - Describe a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) client NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Publishing a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/18/2020 12:57 PM 9. After testing webpages and correcting any errors, the last step is to hide the website location. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct Once website testing is complete and any required changes have been made, the website can be implemented. Implementation of a website involves publishing the webpages to a web server. Incorrect Once website testing is complete and any required changes have been made, the website can be implemented. Implementation of a website involves publishing the Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 11: Publish, Promote, and Maintain a Website webpages to a web server.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Website Development Life Cycle QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.12 - Describe a website development life cycle NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Marketing a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/18/2020 1:02 PM 10. A website is a passive marketing tool; it serves no purpose if no one knows it is available on the web. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct A website is a passive marketing tool; it serves no purpose if no one knows it is available on the web. Incorrect A website is a passive marketing tool; it serves no purpose if no one knows it is available on the web.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Promoting a Website QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.12 - Describe a website development life cycle NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Marketing a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/18/2020 1:04 PM 11. Businesses leverage Facebook to increase traffic to their website and increase sales. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct Businesses leverage Facebook to increase traffic to their website and increase sales. Incorrect Businesses leverage Facebook to increase traffic to their website and increase sales.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY:

1 Easy

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 11: Publish, Promote, and Maintain a Website REFERENCES: Using Social Media QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.01 - Define, identify, and describe forms of social media NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Social Media KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:14 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/19/2020 10:19 PM 12. The term “blog” is short for a combination of the words web and log. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct The term “blog” is short for a combination of the words web and log. Incorrect The term “blog” is short for a combination of the words web and log.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Social Media QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.02 - Describe a blog NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Social Media KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/18/2020 1:32 PM 13. Businesses that use social media display social media icons and links on their website. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct Businesses that use social media display social media icons and links on their website. Incorrect Businesses that use social media display social media icons and links on their website.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Social Media QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.01 - Define, identify, and describe forms of social media NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 11: Publish, Promote, and Maintain a Website TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Using Social Media Bloom’s: Remember 10/8/2019 3:15 PM 2/18/2020 1:34 PM

14. It is much less expensive to alter webpages that are completed than it is to make corrections to a website in the early phases of project development. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct It is much less expensive to make corrections to a website in the early phases of project development than it is to alter webpages that are completed. Incorrect It is much less expensive to make corrections to a website in the early phases of project development than it is to alter webpages that are completed.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Website Development Life Cycle QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.12 - Describe a website development life cycle NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Website Development Life Cycle KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:19 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/18/2020 1:37 PM 15. According to the webpage organizational standards, usage of bulleted or numbered lists should be avoided to provide organized, easy-to-read text that readers can scan. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct According to the webpage organizational standards, you should use bulleted or numbered lists when appropriate. Incorrect According to the webpage organizational standards, you should use bulleted or numbered lists when appropriate.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Website Development Life Cycle QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.12 - Describe a website development life cycle NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Website Development Life Cycle KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 7

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 11: Publish, Promote, and Maintain a Website DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

10/8/2019 3:19 PM 2/21/2020 3:11 PM

16. To support an international audience, generic icons that can be understood globally should be used while designing and developing a website. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct To support an international audience, generic icons that can be understood globally should be used while designing and developing a website. Incorrect To support an international audience, generic icons that can be understood globally should be used while designing and developing a website.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Website Development Life Cycle QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.12 - Describe a website development life cycle NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Website Development Life Cycle KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:19 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/18/2020 1:47 PM 17. While performing compatibility testing, it is sufficient to test a webpage on the latest available version of a browser. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct You may also want to test the webpages in several versions of the same browser (usually the two most recent versions). Incorrect You may also want to test the webpages in several versions of the same browser (usually the two most recent versions).

Page 8

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 11: Publish, Promote, and Maintain a Website 18. A marketing professional works closely with the content specialist of a project team. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct A marketing professional works closely with the content specialist of a project team. Incorrect A marketing professional works closely with the content specialist of a project team.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Project Management QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.15 - Explain project management for a website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Project Management KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:19 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/19/2020 10:10 AM 19. When a business launches a new product or service, its website content must be updated to reflect the changes. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct When a business launches a new product or service, its website content must be updated to reflect the changes. Incorrect When a business launches a new product or service, its website content must be updated to reflect the changes.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Project Management QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.15 - Explain project management for a website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Project Management KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:19 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/19/2020 10:11 AM 20. After registering the domain name for a website, the next step in publishing the website is to find a hosting service. a. True b. False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 9

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 11: Publish, Promote, and Maintain a Website ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

True Correct

After registering the domain name for a website, the next step in publishing the website is to find a hosting service. Incorrect After registering the domain name for a website, the next step in publishing the website is to find a hosting service.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Publishing a Website QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.08 - Explain the role of a web hosting service NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 2/19/2020 10:13 AM DATE MODIFIED: 2/19/2020 10:16 AM Multiple Choice 21. A search _____ is an online tool that searches for websites based on keywords entered by a user. a. engine b. host c. client d. zone ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. A search engine is an online tool that searches for websites based on keywords entered by a user. b. A search engine is an online tool that searches for websites based on keywords entered by a user. c. A search engine is an online tool that searches for websites based on keywords entered by a user. d. A search engine is an online tool that searches for websites based on keywords entered by a user.

Page 10

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 11: Publish, Promote, and Maintain a Website 22. Which is a popular search engine? a. SoundCloud b. Facebook c. Google d. YouTube ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. Popular search engines include Google.com, Bing.com, Ask.com, and Yahoo.com.

b. Popular search engines include Google.com, Bing.com, Ask.com, and Yahoo.com. c. Popular search engines include Google.com, Bing.com, Ask.com, and Yahoo.com. d. Popular search engines include Google.com, Bing.com, Ask.com, and Yahoo.com.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Finding a Website QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.03 - Describe search engines NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Finding a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/19/2020 10:22 AM 23. How does Google generate its results page? a. analyzing references from search engines b. using algorithms c. sending requests to content providers d. conducting correlation feedback ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. Google uses algorithms to generate its search results page. b. Google uses algorithms to generate its search results page. c. Google uses algorithms to generate its search results page. d. Google uses algorithms to generate its search results page. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Finding a Website QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.04 - Explain search engine optimization (SEO) NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 11

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 11: Publish, Promote, and Maintain a Website TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Finding a Website Bloom’s: Understand 10/8/2019 3:15 PM 2/19/2020 10:26 AM

24. Which is a Google search algorithm? a. Falcon b. Nightingale c. Peacock d. Penguin ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. Some of Google’s named algorithms are Panda, Penguin, Hummingbird, Pigeon, Pirate, and Mobile-Friendly. b. Some of Google’s named algorithms are Panda, Penguin, Hummingbird, Pigeon, Pirate, and Mobile-Friendly. c. Some of Google’s named algorithms are Panda, Penguin, Hummingbird, Pigeon, Pirate, and Mobile-Friendly. d. Some of Google’s named algorithms are Panda, Penguin, Hummingbird, Pigeon, Pirate, and Mobile-Friendly.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Finding a Website QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.04 - Explain search engine optimization (SEO) NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Finding a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/19/2020 10:28 AM 25. Identify the code that declares the character encoding as UTF-8 in an HTML document. a. <meta charset=”utf-8”> b. <meta char=”utf-8”> c. meta charset: utf-8; d. meta char: utf-8; ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

b a. The statement <meta charset="utf-8"> declares the character encoding as UTF-8 in an HTML document. b. The statement <meta charset="utf-8"> declares the character encoding as UTF-8 in an HTML document. c. The statement <meta charset="utf-8"> declares the character encoding as UTF-8 in an HTML document. d. The statement <meta charset="utf-8"> declares the character encoding as UTF-8

Page 12

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 11: Publish, Promote, and Maintain a Website in an HTML document.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Finding a Website QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.05 - Create description meta tags NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Finding a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/21/2020 3:20 PM 26. In a meta tag, the _____ attribute identifies the type of information in the content attribute. a. class b. name c. alt d. src ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

b a. The name attribute identifies the type of information in the content attribute. b. The name attribute identifies the type of information in the content attribute. c. The name attribute identifies the type of information in the content attribute. d. The name attribute identifies the type of information in the content attribute.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Finding a Website QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.05 - Create description meta tags NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Finding a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/19/2020 10:33 AM 27. The following is an example of a meta tag: <meta name="author" content="Jordan Wells"> Which attribute specifies the name of the author? a. name b. content c. meta d. author Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 13

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 11: Publish, Promote, and Maintain a Website ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

b a. The content attribute specifies the name of the author. b. The content attribute specifies the name of the author. c. The content attribute specifies the name of the author. d. The content attribute specifies the name of the author.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Finding a Website QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.05 - Create description meta tags NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Finding a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/19/2020 10:36 AM 28. The following is an example of a meta tag: <meta name="author" content="Jordan Wells"> In this meta tag example, _____ is the value for the name attribute. a. Jordan Wells b. content c. meta d. author ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

d a. In this meta tag example, author is the value for the name attribute. b. In this meta tag example, author is the value for the name attribute. c. In this meta tag example, author is the value for the name attribute. d. In this meta tag example, author is the value for the name attribute.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Finding a Website QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.05 - Create description meta tags NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Finding a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/19/2020 10:38 AM 29. Ellen is developing a website for a dance academy. She wants to increase the search engine optimization (SEO) by Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 14

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 11: Publish, Promote, and Maintain a Website adding the keywords dance, dance classes, jive, salsa, etc. Which attribute of the meta tag should Ellen use to add these keywords? a. name b. content c. desc d. author ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

b a. The content attribute identifies the specific phrases or words that you want to appear as metadata. b. The content attribute identifies the specific phrases or words that you want to appear as metadata. c. The content attribute identifies the specific phrases or words that you want to appear as metadata. d. The content attribute identifies the specific phrases or words that you want to appear as metadata.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: Finding a Website QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.05 - Create description meta tags NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Finding a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/21/2020 3:24 PM 30. Roger is the owner of Mercury Gym. The gym’s website gives several details on health and fitness, schedules, etc. The search results on Google for “Mercury Gym” display only the title of the site and the link to it. Roger wants to add a description of the site that will appear in the search results as well. Roger should place the description meta tag within which element to complete this action? a. head b. table c. link d. div ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. The description meta tag is placed within the head element. b. The description meta tag is placed within the head element. c. The description meta tag is placed within the head element. d. The description meta tag is placed within the head element. POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE:

1 Challenging Finding a Website Multiple Choice

Page 15

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 11: Publish, Promote, and Maintain a Website HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.05 - Create description meta tags NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Finding a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/21/2020 3:28 PM 31. Which is a network-related domain? a. .int b. .biz c. .me d. .net ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. Network-related domains use .net. b. Network-related domains use .net. c. Network-related domains use .net. d. Network-related domains use .net. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Publishing a Website QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.07 - Describe a domain name and top-level domains NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Publishing a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/19/2020 10:49 AM 32. Which a top-level domain (TLD) for schools and colleges? a. .biz b. .edu c. .mil d. .me ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. A top-level domain (TLD) for schools and colleges is .edu. b. A top-level domain (TLD) for schools and colleges is .edu. c. A top-level domain (TLD) for schools and colleges is .edu. d. A top-level domain (TLD) for schools and colleges is .edu. POINTS: DIFFICULTY:

1 Easy

Page 16

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 11: Publish, Promote, and Maintain a Website REFERENCES: Publishing a Website QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.07 - Describe a domain name and top-level domains NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Publishing a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/19/2020 10:50 AM 33. Identify a top-level domain (TLD) used by non-profit organizations. a. .npcom b. .edu c. .npo d. .org ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. A top-level domain (TLD) used by non-profit organizations is .org. b. A top-level domain (TLD) used by non-profit organizations is .org. c. A top-level domain (TLD) used by non-profit organizations is .org. d. A top-level domain (TLD) used by non-profit organizations is .org. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Publishing a Website QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.07 - Describe a domain name and top-level domains NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Publishing a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/19/2020 10:57 AM 34. Which top-level domain (TLD) is used for personal websites? a. .net b. .edu c. .me d. .mil ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. The top-level domain (TLD) used for personal websites is .me. b. The top-level domain (TLD) used for personal websites is .me. c. The top-level domain (TLD) used for personal websites is .me. d. The top-level domain (TLD) used for personal websites is .me. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 17

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 11: Publish, Promote, and Maintain a Website POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Publishing a Website QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.07 - Describe a domain name and top-level domains NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Publishing a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/19/2020 10:53 AM 35. Lack of efficient _____ can delay the time it takes for a webpage to load. a. domain name b. bandwidth c. IP address d. application protocol ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. Lack of efficient bandwidth can delay the time it takes for a page to load. b. Lack of efficient bandwidth can delay the time it takes for a page to load. c. Lack of efficient bandwidth can delay the time it takes for a page to load. d. Lack of efficient bandwidth can delay the time it takes for a page to load. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Publishing a Website QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.08 - Explain the role of a web hosting service NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Publishing a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/21/2020 3:32 PM 36. When a website is _____, its files are transferred to a web server. a. ranked b. published c. indexed d. crawled ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. When you publish your website, you transfer your website files to a web server. b. When you publish your website, you transfer your website files to a web server. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 18

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 11: Publish, Promote, and Maintain a Website c. When you publish your website, you transfer your website files to a web server. d. When you publish your website, you transfer your website files to a web server. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Publishing a Website QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.08 - Explain the role of a web hosting service NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Publishing a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/19/2020 11:05 AM 37. Which File Transfer Protocol (FTP) port is typically used to communicate over a network? a. port 20 b. port 21 c. port 18 d. port 35 ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. FTP uses one port to communicate over a network, typically port 20. b. FTP uses one port to communicate over a network, typically port 20. c. FTP uses one port to communicate over a network, typically port 20. d. FTP uses one port to communicate over a network, typically port 20. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Publishing a Website QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.08 - Explain the role of a web hosting service NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Publishing a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/21/2020 3:33 PM 38. Which File Transfer Protocol (FTP) port is typically used for control commands? a. port 20 b. port 21 c. port 18 d. port 35 ANSWER: b Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 19

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 11: Publish, Promote, and Maintain a Website FEEDBACK:

a. Typically port 21 is used for control commands. b. Typically port 21 is used for control commands. c. Typically port 21 is used for control commands. d. Typically port 21 is used for control commands.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Publishing a Website QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.08 - Explain the role of a web hosting service NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Publishing a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/21/2020 3:34 PM 39. Which technique is an effective troubleshooting tool during the development process and adds a valuable level of professionalism to a work? a. optimization b. normalization c. validation d. encryption ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. Validation is an effective troubleshooting tool during the development process and adds a valuable level of professionalism to your work. b. Validation is an effective troubleshooting tool during the development process and adds a valuable level of professionalism to your work. c. Validation is an effective troubleshooting tool during the development process and adds a valuable level of professionalism to your work. d. Validation is an effective troubleshooting tool during the development process and adds a valuable level of professionalism to your work.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: E-Commerce QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.12 - Describe a website development life cycle NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Marketing a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/22/2020 2:20 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 20

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 11: Publish, Promote, and Maintain a Website CASE Critical Thinking Questions Case 11-1 Edward has developed an online grocery shopping site. He wishes to increase its search engine optimization (SEO). 40. For effective SEO, Edward should _____. a. research the keywords used by competitors b. overuse keywords in meta descriptions c. develop multiple links that lead to pages on other websites d. exceed 200 characters in the description meta tag ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. For effective SEO, Edward should research the keywords used by competitors. b. For effective SEO, Edward should research the keywords used by competitors. c. For effective SEO, Edward should research the keywords used by competitors. d. For effective SEO, Edward should research the keywords used by competitors. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: Finding a Website QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 11-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.04 - Explain search engine optimization (SEO) NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Finding a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/19/2020 11:18 AM 41. Edward wishes to provide a description of the site that will be displayed below the link to the site in the search results. How many characters, at most, is he recommended to use in the description meta tag? a. 180 characters b. 160 characters c. 200 characters d. 1024 characters ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. Your description meta tag should not exceed 160 characters. b. Your description meta tag should not exceed 160 characters. c. Your description meta tag should not exceed 160 characters. d. Your description meta tag should not exceed 160 characters. POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES:

1 Challenging Finding a Website

Page 21

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 11: Publish, Promote, and Maintain a Website QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 11-1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.04 - Explain search engine optimization (SEO) NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Finding a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/21/2020 3:41 PM 42. Which is a social networking site where individuals exchange comments, share personal updates, and post pictures and video? a. Facebook b. Gmail c. YouTube d. Bing ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. Individuals can exchange comments, share personal updates, and post pictures and video on Facebook. b. Individuals can exchange comments, share personal updates, and post pictures and video on Facebook. c. Individuals can exchange comments, share personal updates, and post pictures and video on Facebook. d. Individuals can exchange comments, share personal updates, and post pictures and video on Facebook.

Page 22

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 11: Publish, Promote, and Maintain a Website FEEDBACK:

a. Twitter is a social networking site used to post short comments or updates. b. Twitter is a social networking site used to post short comments or updates. c. Twitter is a social networking site used to post short comments or updates. d. Twitter is a social networking site used to post short comments or updates.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Social Media QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.01 - Define, identify, and describe forms of social media NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Social Media KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:14 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/21/2020 3:42 PM 44. Which is a social media website where members can upload and share original videos? a. Soundcloud b. Google c. YouTube d. Yahoo ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. YouTube is a social media website where members can upload and share original videos. b. YouTube is a social media website where members can upload and share original videos. c. YouTube is a social media website where members can upload and share original videos. d. YouTube is a social media website where members can upload and share original videos.

Page 23

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 11: Publish, Promote, and Maintain a Website commercial that plays before the selected video. a. stock b. embedded c. inline d. banner ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. Business ads can be a banner image that is displayed on the lower part of a video or a full-length commercial that plays before the selected video.

b. Business ads can be a banner image that is displayed on the lower part of a video or a full-length commercial that plays before the selected video. c. Business ads can be a banner image that is displayed on the lower part of a video or a full-length commercial that plays before the selected video. d. Business ads can be a banner image that is displayed on the lower part of a video or a full-length commercial that plays before the selected video.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Social Media QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.01 - Define, identify, and describe forms of social media NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Social Media KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:14 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/21/2020 3:44 PM 46. On Pinterest, users can follow _____ that interest them and “pin” photos, links, and comments for future use. a. boards b. tweets c. blogs d. labels ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. In Pinterest, users can follow boards that interest them and “pin” photos, links, and comments for future use. b. In Pinterest, users can follow boards that interest them and “pin” photos, links, and comments for future use. c. In Pinterest, users can follow boards that interest them and “pin” photos, links, and comments for future use. d. In Pinterest, users can follow boards that interest them and “pin” photos, links, and comments for future use.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE:

1 Moderate Using Social Media Multiple Choice

Page 24

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 11: Publish, Promote, and Maintain a Website HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.01 - Define, identify, and describe forms of social media NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Social Media KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:14 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/21/2020 3:44 PM 47. Which site allows users to apply various filters that enhance photographs, images, and video to make them look more professional? a. Twitter b. Facebook c. LinkedIn d. Instagram ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. Instagram allows users to apply various filters that enhance photographs, images, and video to make them look more professional. b. Instagram allows users to apply various filters that enhance photographs, images, and video to make them look more professional. c. Instagram allows users to apply various filters that enhance photographs, images, and video to make them look more professional. d. Instagram allows users to apply various filters that enhance photographs, images, and video to make them look more professional.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Social Media QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.01 - Define, identify, and describe forms of social media NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Social Media KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:14 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/19/2020 11:37 AM 48. An online journal maintained by an individual, group, or a business is called a _____. a. board b. tweet c. plug-in d. blog ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. A blog is an online journal, maintained by an individual, group, or a business. b. A blog is an online journal, maintained by an individual, group, or a business. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 25

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 11: Publish, Promote, and Maintain a Website c. A blog is an online journal, maintained by an individual, group, or a business. d. A blog is an online journal, maintained by an individual, group, or a business. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Using Social Media QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.02 - Describe a blog NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Social Media KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:14 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/21/2020 3:46 PM Critical Thinking Questions Case 11-2 Robin is interested in sewing clothes for children. Since she received a lot of support and appreciation for her work, she converted her hobby into a small business. 49. Which social networking site should Robin use to help her follow boards of similar interests? a. Facebook b. Pinterest c. Twitter d. Google+ ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. Users can follow boards that interest them most and “pin” photos, links, and comments to their own board for future use on Pinterest. b. Users can follow boards that interest them most and “pin” photos, links, and comments to their own board for future use on Pinterest. c. Users can follow boards that interest them most and “pin” photos, links, and comments to their own board for future use on Pinterest. d. Users can follow boards that interest them most and “pin” photos, links, and comments to their own board for future use on Pinterest.

Page 26

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 11: Publish, Promote, and Maintain a Website DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

10/8/2019 3:15 PM 2/19/2020 11:47 AM

50. Since the business has just started, she plans to start an online journal to share new information and to keep her customers engaged. Which should Robin use for this purpose? a. Instagram b. LinkedIn c. Facebook d. blog ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. A blog is an online journal, maintained by an individual, group, or a business. b. A blog is an online journal, maintained by an individual, group, or a business. c. A blog is an online journal, maintained by an individual, group, or a business. d. A blog is an online journal, maintained by an individual, group, or a business. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: Using Social Media QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: CASE 11-2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.01 - Define, identify, and describe forms of social media NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Social Media KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/21/2020 3:48 PM 51. Robin creates a website for her business and decides to promote the business using social media. What should she include on her website so that users are redirected to the social media page to connect to the business? a. social media icons b. social media elements c. social media objects d. social media classes ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. Businesses that use social media display social media icons and links on their website. The icons let customers know how to connect with the business on social media. b. Businesses that use social media display social media icons and links on their website. The icons let customers know how to connect with the business on social media. c. Businesses that use social media display social media icons and links on their website. The icons let customers know how to connect with the business on social media. d. Businesses that use social media display social media icons and links on their Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 27

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 11: Publish, Promote, and Maintain a Website website. The icons let customers know how to connect with the business on social media.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: Using Social Media QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: CASE 11-2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.01 - Define, identify, and describe forms of social media NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Multimedia KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/21/2020 3:49 PM 52. Which phase of web development begins after a website has been designed, developed, and launched? a. compilation b. maintenance c. debugging d. planning ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. After a website is designed, developed, and launched, the next phase of the website begins: maintenance. b. After a website is designed, developed, and launched, the next phase of the website begins: maintenance. c. After a website is designed, developed, and launched, the next phase of the website begins: maintenance. d. After a website is designed, developed, and launched, the next phase of the website begins: maintenance.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Introduction QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.12 - Describe a website development life cycle NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Introduction KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:19 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/19/2020 12:03 PM 53. The question “What are the users’ computing environments?” should be asked during the _____ phase of web development. a. planning Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 28

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 11: Publish, Promote, and Maintain a Website b. maintenance c. implementation d. accounting ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

a a. “What are the users’ computing environments?” is a question that should be asked during the planning phase of web development.

b. “What are the users’ computing environments?” is a question that should be asked during the planning phase of web development. c. “What are the users’ computing environments?” is a question that should be asked during the planning phase of web development. d. “What are the users’ computing environments?” is a question that should be asked during the planning phase of web development.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Website Development Life Cycle QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.12 - Describe a website development life cycle NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Website development life cycle KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:19 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/21/2020 3:52 PM 54. The question “Does the website function correctly?” should be asked during the _____ phase of web development. a. analysis b. testing c. design d. implementation ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. “Does the website function correctly?” is a question that should be asked during the testing phase of web development. b. “Does the website function correctly?” is a question that should be asked during the testing phase of web development. c. “Does the website function correctly?” is a question that should be asked during the testing phase of web development. d. “Does the website function correctly?” is a question that should be asked during the testing phase of web development.

Page 29

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 11: Publish, Promote, and Maintain a Website NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Website development life cycle Bloom’s: Remember 10/8/2019 3:19 PM 2/21/2020 3:53 PM

55. The question “Will the website be monitored?” should be asked during the _____ phase of web development. a. planning b. analysis c. design d. maintenance ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. “Will the website be monitored?” is a question that should be asked during the maintenance phase of web development. b. “Will the website be monitored?” is a question that should be asked during the maintenance phase of web development. c. “Will the website be monitored?” is a question that should be asked during the maintenance phase of web development. d. “Will the website be monitored?” is a question that should be asked during the maintenance phase of web development.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Website Development Life Cycle QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.12 - Describe a website development life cycle NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Website development life cycle KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:19 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/21/2020 3:54 PM 56. The activity of filling out forms and using other interactive page elements the way that visitors will use them is carried out during the _____ phase of the web development life cycle. a. testing b. design c. analysis d. planning ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. The activity of filling out forms and using other interactive page elements the way that visitors will use them is carried out during the testing phase of the web development life cycle. b. The activity of filling out forms and using other interactive page elements the way that visitors will use them is carried out during the testing phase of the web development life cycle. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 30

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 11: Publish, Promote, and Maintain a Website c. The activity of filling out forms and using other interactive page elements the way that visitors will use them is carried out during the testing phase of the web development life cycle. d. The activity of filling out forms and using other interactive page elements the way that visitors will use them is carried out during the testing phase of the web development life cycle.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Website Development Life Cycle QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.12 - Describe a website development life cycle NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Website development life cycle KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:19 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/19/2020 12:11 PM 57. What term is used for the measure of how well a product, such as a website, allows a person to accomplish his or her goals? a. usability b. competence c. throughput d. resistance ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. Usability is the measure of how well a product, such as a website, allows a user to accomplish his or her goals.

b. Usability is the measure of how well a product, such as a website, allows a user to accomplish his or her goals. c. Usability is the measure of how well a product, such as a website, allows a user to accomplish his or her goals. d. Usability is the measure of how well a product, such as a website, allows a user to accomplish his or her goals.

Page 31

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 11: Publish, Promote, and Maintain a Website 58. Direct observation while conducting usability testing involves _____. a. adding marketing promotions b. rating a user based on his or her web development knowledge c. observing how the end users publish a website d. observing visitors using the website ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. Direct observation while conducting usability testing involves observing visitors using the website.

b. Direct observation while conducting usability testing involves observing visitors using the website. c. Direct observation while conducting usability testing involves observing visitors using the website. d. Direct observation while conducting usability testing involves observing visitors using the website.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Website Development Life Cycle QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.12 - Describe a website development life cycle NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Website development life cycle KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:19 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/19/2020 12:18 PM 59. “What do you like least about the website?” is an example of an open-ended question used to perform _____ testing of a website. a. stress b. compatibility c. usability d. localization ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. “What do you like least about the website?” is an example of an open-ended question to perform usability testing of a website.

b. “What do you like least about the website?” is an example of an open-ended question to perform usability testing of a website. c. “What do you like least about the website?” is an example of an open-ended question to perform usability testing of a website. d. “What do you like least about the website?” is an example of an open-ended question to perform usability testing of a website.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES:

1 Moderate Website Development Life Cycle

Page 32

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 11: Publish, Promote, and Maintain a Website QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.12 - Describe a website development life cycle NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Website development life cycle KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:19 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/21/2020 4:02 PM 60. The process of testing webpages in several browsers to verify that the pages appear correctly is referred to as _____ testing. a. compatibility b. stress c. validity d. usability ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. Compatibility testing is done to verify that the website works with a variety of browsers and browser versions. b. Compatibility testing is done to verify that the website works with a variety of browsers and browser versions. c. Compatibility testing is done to verify that the website works with a variety of browsers and browser versions. d. Compatibility testing is done to verify that the website works with a variety of browsers and browser versions.

Page 33

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 11: Publish, Promote, and Maintain a Website b. Implementation of a website involves publishing the webpages to a web server. c. Implementation of a website involves publishing the webpages to a web server. d. Implementation of a website involves publishing the webpages to a web server. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Website Development Life Cycle QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.12 - Describe a website development life cycle NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Website development life cycle KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:19 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/19/2020 8:56 PM 62. A(n) _____ is a file that lists all of the webpages that have been requested from a website. a. tab b. log c. register d. account ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. A log is the file that lists all of the webpages that have been requested from the website. b. A log is the file that lists all of the webpages that have been requested from the website. c. A log is the file that lists all of the webpages that have been requested from the website. d. A log is the file that lists all of the webpages that have been requested from the website.

Page 34

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 11: Publish, Promote, and Maintain a Website a. recreational use b. non-permissible use c. fair use d. second use ANSWER: c FEEDBACK:

a. Students and educators may use online media for educational purposes, such as an academic project. This is known as fair use. b. Students and educators may use online media for educational purposes, such as an academic project. This is known as fair use. c. Students and educators may use online media for educational purposes, such as an academic project. This is known as fair use. d. Students and educators may use online media for educational purposes, such as an academic project. This is known as fair use.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Project Management QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:12.16 - Define copyright and e-commerce NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Project Management KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:19 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/21/2020 4:14 PM 64. The use of a(n) _____ lets media content authors share their work with others while maintaining ownership of their work. a. Commerce Control license b. Administration Regulation license c. Creative Commons license d. Defense Trade license ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. Use of a Creative Commons license provides media content authors the ability to share their work with others, while maintaining ownership of their work. b. Use of a Creative Commons license provides media content authors the ability to share their work with others, while maintaining ownership of their work. c. Use of a Creative Commons license provides media content authors the ability to share their work with others, while maintaining ownership of their work. d. Use of a Creative Commons license provides media content authors the ability to share their work with others, while maintaining ownership of their work.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE:

1 Easy Project Management Multiple Choice

Page 35

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 11: Publish, Promote, and Maintain a Website HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.16 - Define copyright and e-commerce NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Project Management KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:19 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/21/2020 4:15 PM 65. The term "_____" refers to businesses that conduct transactions online, including large retail websites that sell products to consumers. a. trading scripts b. wholesale label c. electronic commerce d. automated deal ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. The term "electronic commerce," or "e-commerce," describes online businesses that conduct transactions online, including large, retail websites that sell products to consumers. b. The term "electronic commerce," or "e-commerce," describes online businesses that conduct transactions online, including large, retail websites that sell products to consumers. c. The term "electronic commerce," or "e-commerce," describes online businesses that conduct transactions online, including large, retail websites that sell products to consumers. d. The term "electronic commerce," or "e-commerce," describes online businesses that conduct transactions online, including large, retail websites that sell products to consumers.

Page 36

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 11: Publish, Promote, and Maintain a Website ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

a a. For enhanced security, an e-commerce site should implement Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) technology to encrypt sensitive customer information. b. For enhanced security, an e-commerce site should implement Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) technology to encrypt sensitive customer information. c. For enhanced security, an e-commerce site should implement Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) technology to encrypt sensitive customer information. d. For enhanced security, an e-commerce site should implement Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) technology to encrypt sensitive customer information.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: E-Commerce QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.16 - Define copyright and e-commerce NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: E-Commerce KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:19 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/21/2020 4:23 PM 67. What was created to replace Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) and blocks any third party from capturing data as it is transferred from one machine to another? a. Client-Server Layer b. Packet Routing Security c. Bit Mapping Layer d. Transport Layer Security ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. Transport Layer Security (TLS) was created to replace and enhance SSL and block any third party from capturing data as it is transferred from one machine to another, such as a client device to a server. b. Transport Layer Security (TLS) was created to replace and enhance SSL and block any third party from capturing data as it is transferred from one machine to another, such as a client device to a server. c. Transport Layer Security (TLS) was created to replace and enhance SSL and block any third party from capturing data as it is transferred from one machine to another, such as a client device to a server. d. Transport Layer Security (TLS) was created to replace and enhance SSL and block any third party from capturing data as it is transferred from one machine to another, such as a client device to a server.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE: HAS VARIABLES:

1 Moderate E-Commerce Multiple Choice False

Page 37

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 11: Publish, Promote, and Maintain a Website LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.16 - Define copyright and e-commerce NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: E-Commerce KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:19 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/21/2020 4:24 PM 68. Which is an example of the consumer-to-consumer (C2C) business model? a. WordPress b. Jira c. eBay d. Wikipedia ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. Examples of C2C e-commerce websites include eBay and Etsy. b. Examples of C2C e-commerce websites include eBay and Etsy. c. Examples of C2C e-commerce websites include eBay and Etsy. d. Examples of C2C e-commerce websites include eBay and Etsy. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: E-Commerce QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.16 - Define copyright and e-commerce NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: E-Commerce KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:19 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/21/2020 4:25 PM CASE Critical Thinking Questions Case 11-3 Ann is the trainer at a website creation and development company. During the induction session, she explains the web development life cycle phases to all the new employees. Ann has to train the new employees on their first project, which is based on an online retail store. 69. Ann’s training session begins with an explanation of how each web development life cycle phase should be addressed by the employees. She explains that one of the final aspects of a phase is to find out who owns and authors the information on a website. Which phase of the website development life cycle is Ann explaining in this stage? a. website implementation b. website planning c. website analysis d. website maintenance Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 38

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 11: Publish, Promote, and Maintain a Website ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

b a. Who owns and authors the information on a website is assessed during the planning stage. b. Who owns and authors the information on a website is assessed during the planning stage. c. Who owns and authors the information on a website is assessed during the planning stage. d. Who owns and authors the information on a website is assessed during the planning stage.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: Website Development Life Cycle QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 11-3 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.12 - Describe a website development life cycle NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Website development life cycle KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:19 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/21/2020 4:26 PM 70. Ann explains that defining the procedures required to support website features, such as the actions to perform each time an order is submitted, occurs during the _____ phase of the web development life cycle. a. analysis b. implementation c. testing d. maintenance ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. Defining procedures required to support website features, such as the actions to perform each time an order is submitted, occurs during the analysis phase of the web development life cycle. b. Defining procedures required to support website features, such as the actions to perform each time an order is submitted, occurs during the analysis phase of the web development life cycle. c. Defining procedures required to support website features, such as the actions to perform each time an order is submitted, occurs during the analysis phase of the web development life cycle. d. Defining procedures required to support website features, such as the actions to perform each time an order is submitted, occurs during the analysis phase of the web development life cycle.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE:

1 Challenging Website Development Life Cycle Multiple Choice

Page 39

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 11: Publish, Promote, and Maintain a Website HAS VARIABLES: False PREFACE NAME: Case 11-3 LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.12 - Describe a website development life cycle NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Website development life cycle KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:19 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/21/2020 4:29 PM 71. For large websites, a form is created for employees to complete when requesting a change to the website. Such forms are called website _____ request forms. a. design b. implementation c. maintenance d. analysis ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. For large websites, a form is created for employees to complete when requesting a change to the website. Such forms are called website maintenance request forms. b. For large websites, a form is created for employees to complete when requesting a change to the website. Such forms are called website maintenance request forms. c. For large websites, a form is created for employees to complete when requesting a change to the website. Such forms are called website maintenance request forms. d. For large websites, a form is created for employees to complete when requesting a change to the website. Such forms are called website maintenance request forms.

Page 40

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 11: Publish, Promote, and Maintain a Website bots spiders POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Finding a Website QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.03 - Describe search engines NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Finding a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/19/2020 9:35 PM 73. The process of increasing the amount of traffic to a website by improving the ranking of the site in search engine results pages (SERPs) is called _____. ANSWER: search engine optimization (SEO) search engine optimization SEO POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Finding a Website QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.04 - Explain search engine optimization (SEO) NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Finding a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/21/2020 4:32 PM 74. The position of a webpage link, as displayed on the search engine results page (SERP), is called a(n) _____. ANSWER: rank POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Finding a Website QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.04 - Explain search engine optimization (SEO) NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 41

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 11: Publish, Promote, and Maintain a Website TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Finding a Website Bloom’s: Remember 10/8/2019 3:15 PM 2/19/2020 9:39 PM

75. Each time a webpage link appears in a search engine results page (SERP) of a related query, it creates a(n) _____. ANSWER: impression POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Finding a Website QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.04 - Explain search engine optimization (SEO) NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Finding a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/19/2020 9:40 PM 76. The meta tag name derives from the word _____, which is information about data. ANSWER: metadata POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Finding a Website QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.05 - Create description meta tags NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Finding a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/19/2020 9:42 PM 77. The _____ is a compressed format that allows computers to display and manipulate text. ANSWER: Unicode Transformation Format (UTF) Unicode Transformation Format UTF POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Finding a Website QUESTION TYPE: Completion Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 42

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 11: Publish, Promote, and Maintain a Website HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.05 - Create description meta tags NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Finding a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/19/2020 9:44 PM 78. A(n) _____ is the server name portion of a Uniform Resource Locator (URL). ANSWER: domain name POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Publishing a Website QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.07 - Describe a domain name and top-level domains NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Publishing a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/19/2020 9:46 PM 79. The _____ element of a webpage helps users understand the purpose of the page and explains the page in the search engine results lists. ANSWER: titles POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Website Development Life Cycle QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.12 - Describe a website development life cycle NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Website development life cycle KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:19 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/21/2020 4:35 PM 80. The _____ for a website should focus on three parts of the site: content, navigation, and presentation. ANSWER: usability testing POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 43

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 11: Publish, Promote, and Maintain a Website DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Website Development Life Cycle QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.12 - Describe a website development life cycle NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Website development life cycle KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:19 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/19/2020 9:52 PM 81. Testing used to determine what happens to a website when many users access the site is called _____. ANSWER: stress testing POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Website Development Life Cycle QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.12 - Describe a website development life cycle NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Website development life cycle KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:19 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/19/2020 9:54 PM 82. Delegating and supervising website development activities, including the planning, design, development, content testing, and publishing of the site, are all part of _____. ANSWER: project management POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Project Management QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.15 - Explain project management for a website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Project Management KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:19 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/21/2020 4:36 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 44

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 11: Publish, Promote, and Maintain a Website 83. A(n) _____ uses mock-up webpage concepts to create actual webpages. ANSWER: website developer POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Project Management QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.15 - Explain project management for a website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Project Management KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:19 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/19/2020 9:59 PM Matching Identify the correct domain name for each original purpose. a. .com b. .net c. .org d. .edu e. .co f. .me g. .gov h. .mil DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Publishing a Website QUESTION TYPE: Matching HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.07 - Describe a domain name and top-level domains NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Bootstrap navbar KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:19 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/21/2020 7:49 PM 84. Used for nonprofit organizations. ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 85. Used for commercial applications. ANSWER: a Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 45

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 11: Publish, Promote, and Maintain a Website POINTS: 1 86. Restricted for use by the U.S. government. ANSWER: g POINTS: 1 87. Used for business or commercial purposes. ANSWER: e POINTS: 1 88. Used by educational organizations. ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 89. Used for personal websites. ANSWER: f POINTS: 1 90. Restricted for use by the U.S. military. ANSWER: h POINTS: 1 91. Used by network-related domains. ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 Essay 92. Discuss the importance of the following social networking sites for a business: • •

Facebook Instagram

ANSWER:

Facebook Facebook is a social networking site with more than two billion users, the most users of any social networking site. Users include individuals and businesses. Individuals can exchange comments, share personal updates, and post pictures and video. With so many users, Facebook provides advertising opportunities to businesses to promote their products and services. A business can create a Facebook page and use it to advertise its products and services. Individuals can “like” a business by clicking a button to indicate that they use or approve of a product or service. Businesses can engage with people who have “liked” their page by posting a picture of their latest work, create community events, or provide new product updates. Individuals who like the business’s page see the new posts made by the business within their home page feed. Obtaining “likes” is a goal for most businesses, as this increases their presence and positive perception. A business can create a Facebook page at no cost, and the page allows businesses to instantly

Page 46

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 11: Publish, Promote, and Maintain a Website connect and engage with customers. Businesses leverage Facebook to increase traffic to their website and increase sales. For a fee, businesses can also create an ad on Facebook to further drive potential customers to their website. Facebook matches a target audience with a company’s ad and displays the ad on potential customers’ news feed, located on their home page. Facebook provides several tools to measure the success of your ad and your Facebook page. Instagram Instagram is a social networking site where members can upload and share photographs, images, and video. Most users view and use Instagram from a mobile device. Instagram is also a free app available at the Apple App Store and Google Play. The creators of Instagram wanted to provide users a unique way to connect and express ideas with captivating visual photography. The app allows users to apply various filters that enhance photographs, images, and video to make them look more professional. Many businesses also use Instagram to promote brand awareness. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Using Social Media QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.01 - Define, identify, and describe forms of social media NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Using Social Media KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/18/2020 12:39 PM 93. List the ways in which a website can be promoted and marketed to reach its target audience. ANSWER: After you implement SEO for your website, and then publish and test your site, the next step is to promote the website to attract visitors. Develop a comprehensive marketing plan. A website is a passive marketing tool; it serves no purpose if no one knows it is available on the web. To attract customers to your website, take appropriate steps to promote and market it. You can promote and market your website to reach your target audience in the following ways: • • • • • • • •

Register your website with search engines. Add your business website to Google, Bing, and Yahoo to make it easier for online users to find your business. Advertise through various social networking platforms, such as Facebook and Instagram. Post social media on a regular basis and respond to comments. Write a guest blog. Create a Google Ad. Add your website to your business cards, company brochures, stationery, and email signature. Negotiate reciprocal links in which you agree to link to a website if they agree to

Page 47

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 11: Publish, Promote, and Maintain a Website • • •

media. Advertise your website through email marketing. Tell people you meet about your website. Use newsgroups specific to your industry.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Promoting a Website QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.15 - Explain project management for a website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Marketing a Website KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/21/2020 4:48 PM 94. Explain how selecting the right website structure is essential to provide ease of navigation to website users. ANSWER: As a web developer, one must select an appropriate structure for the website and work to balance breadth and depth. Users go to a website looking for information to complete a task. Good design provides ease of navigation, allowing users to find content quickly and easily. In addition to planning the design of a website itself, a web developer should plan the specifics of the file naming and storage conventions early on in the design phase. The file names used tell the developer, as well as future developers maintaining the website, the purpose of the webpages. The same principle applies to the folder structure that is used in the web development. It is a best practice to place images in an images folder, audio/video in a media folder, CSS in a css folder, and so on. Larger, more complex websites might also require a folder for webpages pertaining to specific departments. Where one stores the files will affect how they access those files in their HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) code. Determining a logical folder structure in the planning phase of a web development life cycle simplifies creating and updating the pages. During the design and development phase, one should consider what, if any, types of multimedia could contribute positively to the website experience. However, in general, one should not use advanced multimedia technologies in a website unless they make a positive contribution to the website experience. Adding multimedia can enhance the overall purpose of a website, but it sometimes detracts from the message.

POINTS:

Finally, one should consider accessibility issues and localization, adapting a website to meet the needs of a particular language or culture. A practical approach is to design for viewing by a diverse audience, including physically impaired and global users. To support an international audience, use generic icons that can be understood globally, avoid slang expressions in the content, and build simple pages that can load quickly over lower-speed connections. 1

Page 48

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 11: Publish, Promote, and Maintain a Website DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Website Development Life Cycle QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.12 - Describe a website development life cycle NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Website development life cycle KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:19 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/21/2020 4:54 PM 95. Explain how usability testing can be performed without working directly with the users of a website. ANSWER: Usability testing can be performed without working directly with the users of a website through the use of questionnaires or surveys. Open-ended or scaled survey questions should be written to elicit information. For instance, asking the yes or no question “Is the website visually appealing?” will not gather especially useful information. If a user answers no to that question, the developer will not know how to improve the site to make it more appealing. Even if a user answers yes, the developer will not know how much appeal the website has. If this question is changed to use a scaled response, such as “Rate the visual appeal of this website, using a scale of 1 for low and 5 for high,” one can get more valuable input from the users. However, one should make sure that the scale itself is clear and understandable to the users. If the developer intends that a selection of 1 equates to a “low” rating but the users think 1 means “high,” then the survey results are questionable. Another way to ask for design feedback is to list parts of the site, such as graphics, sidebars, and navigation, and ask users to select the parts that are appealing to them. In addition, the developer can provide space on the usability testing questionnaire where users can write comments. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Website Development Life Cycle QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.12 - Describe a website development life cycle NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Website development life cycle KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:19 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/18/2020 12:45 PM 96. Briefly explain the process of updating website content. ANSWER: Updating website content is an ongoing process. When a business launches a new product or service, its website content must be updated to reflect the changes. Updating a website regularly can help increase search engine results and improve search engine optimization (SEO). The following is a list of tips to keep one’s content updated and fresh. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 49

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 11: Publish, Promote, and Maintain a Website • • • •

When one has a new product or service, an image or video should be added to the website to showcase it. If a company submits press releases on a regular basis, a page should be created for press releases, as this shows that the business is active and busy. One should consider having a page for client testimonials to spur potential sales. Social media should be updated on regular basis.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Project Management QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:11.15 - Explain project management for a website NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Project Management KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:19 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/21/2020 4:59 PM

Page 50

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 12: Getting Started with Bootstrap True / False 1. When using a content management application, a webpage author must know HTML to add, remove, and update content. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct The CMA provides a webpage author the ability to add, remove, and modify content without knowing HTML. Incorrect The CMA provides a webpage author the ability to add, remove, and modify content without knowing HTML.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Content Management Systems QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 12.12 - Describe a content management system NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Content Management Systems KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:19 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/21/2020 5:17 PM 2. With a content management system, locking a webpage design is helpful when novice users update the webpage content. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct With a content management system, locking a webpage design is helpful when novice users update the webpage content. Incorrect With a content management system, locking a webpage design is helpful when novice users update the webpage content.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 12: Getting Started with Bootstrap 3. Clorox is one of the many businesses that use WordPress for their websites. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct Clorox is one of the many businesses that use WordPress for their websites. Incorrect Clorox is one of the many businesses that use WordPress for their websites.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Content Management Systems QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 12.12 - Describe a content management system NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Content Management Systems KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 2/20/2020 1:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/21/2020 5:19 PM 4. According to w3techs.com, the Drupal CMS is used the most by low-traffic websites. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct According to w3techs.com, the Drupal CMS is used the most by high-traffic websites. Incorrect According to w3techs.com, the Drupal CMS is used the most by high-traffic websites.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Content Management Systems QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 12.12 - Describe a content management system NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Content Management Systems KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 2/20/2020 1:16 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/20/2020 1:17 PM 5. Recently, content management systems (CMSs) have become less popular with large, enterprise businesses. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct Content management systems (CMSs) have become increasingly popular with Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 12: Getting Started with Bootstrap many large, enterprise businesses. Incorrect Content management systems (CMSs) have become increasingly popular with many large, enterprise businesses.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Content Management Systems QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 12.12 - Describe a content management system NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Content Management Systems KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 2/20/2020 1:23 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/20/2020 1:24 PM 6. CDN is short for core driver navigation. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct CDN is short for content delivery network. Incorrect CDN is short for content delivery network.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring Bootstrap QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:12.01 - Describe the Bootstrap framework NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Content Management Systems KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 2/20/2020 2:06 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/20/2020 2:10 PM 7. Bootstrap 4 is not supported by Internet Explorer 9 or other legacy versions of Internet Explorer. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct Bootstrap 4 is not supported by Internet Explorer 9 or other legacy versions of Internet Explorer. Incorrect Bootstrap 4 is not supported by Internet Explorer 9 or other legacy versions of Internet Explorer.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY:

1 Easy

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 12: Getting Started with Bootstrap REFERENCES: Exploring Bootstrap QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:12.01 - Describe the Bootstrap framework NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Content Management Systems KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 2/20/2020 2:21 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/20/2020 2:22 PM 8. In Bootstrap, if you want to apply rounded corners to an image, add a class attribute with the value rounded to an img element. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct In Bootstrap, if you want to apply rounded corners to an image, add a class attribute with the value rounded to an img element. Incorrect In Bootstrap, if you want to apply rounded corners to an image, add a class attribute with the value rounded to an img element.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring Bootstrap QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:12.10 - Explain how to style images using Bootstrap NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Content Management Systems KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 2/20/2020 2:26 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/20/2020 2:28 PM 9. Bootstrap has only eight predefined classes within its style sheet. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct Bootstrap has hundreds of predefined classes within its style sheet. Incorrect Bootstrap has hundreds of predefined classes within its style sheet.

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 12: Getting Started with Bootstrap NATIONAL STANDARDS: TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

United States - BUSPROG: Technology Content Management Systems Bloom’s: Understand 2/20/2020 2:28 PM 2/20/2020 2:30 PM

10. To integrate a hamburger menu icon using Bootstrap, you can wrap a span element within a button element that contains several attributes. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct To integrate a hamburger menu icon using Bootstrap, you can wrap a span element within a button element that contains several attributes. Incorrect To integrate a hamburger menu icon using Bootstrap, you can wrap a span element within a button element that contains several attributes.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring Bootstrap QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:12.04 - Integrate a Bootstrap hamburger menu NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Content Management Systems KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 2/20/2020 2:34 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/20/2020 2:36 PM 11. Popper.js is a JavaScript library that helps position elements on a webpage. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct Popper.js is a JavaScript library that helps position elements on a webpage. Incorrect Popper.js is a JavaScript library that helps position elements on a webpage.

Page 5

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 12: Getting Started with Bootstrap DATE MODIFIED:

2/20/2020 2:47 PM

12. Background color and link text color for the navbar cannot be formatted using Bootstrap. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct You can format the background color and link text color for the navbar using Bootstrap. Incorrect You can format the background color and link text color for the navbar using Bootstrap.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring Bootstrap QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:12.01 - Describe the Bootstrap framework NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Bootstrap KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 2/20/2020 2:49 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/20/2020 2:52 PM 13. The navbar-toggler value is used to collapse a navbar when a hamburger menu is displayed. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct The navbar-collapse value is used to collapse a navbar when a hamburger menu is displayed. Incorrect The navbar-collapse value is used to collapse a navbar when a hamburger menu is displayed.

Page 6

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 12: Getting Started with Bootstrap a. True b. False ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

False Correct Jumbotrons are commonly used for hero content near the top of webpage. Incorrect Jumbotrons are commonly used for hero content near the top of webpage.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring Bootstrap QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:12.06 - Define and create a jumbotron NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Bootstrap KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 2/20/2020 3:13 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/20/2020 3:14 PM 15. Sass stands for Syntactically Awesome Style Sheets. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct Sass stands for Syntactically Awesome Style Sheets. Incorrect Sass stands for Syntactically Awesome Style Sheets.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring Bootstrap QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:12.07 - Explain how to style text using Bootstrap NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Bootstrap KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 2/20/2020 3:39 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/20/2020 3:42 PM 16. Using jQuery, you can select HTML page elements and then use jQuery methods to perform some type of action, such as show or hide. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct Using jQuery, you can select HTML page elements and then use jQuery methods to perform some type of action, such as show or hide. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 7

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 12: Getting Started with Bootstrap Incorrect Using jQuery, you can select HTML page elements and then use jQuery methods to perform some type of action, such as show or hide.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring Bootstrap QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:12.08 - Write a jQuery document ready event NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Bootstrap KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 2/20/2020 3:43 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/20/2020 3:44 PM 17. The Bootstrap Starter template includes all basic HTML elements needed to create an HTML 5 webpage. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct The Bootstrap Starter template includes all basic HTML elements needed to create an HTML 5 webpage. Incorrect The Bootstrap Starter template includes all basic HTML elements needed to create an HTML 5 webpage.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring Bootstrap QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:12.02 - Create a webpage using Bootstrap’s starter template NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Bootstrap KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 2/20/2020 9:32 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/20/2020 9:34 PM 18. Nearly 75% of all websites use WordPress. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct Nearly 35% of all websites use WordPress. Incorrect Nearly 35% of all websites use WordPress.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES:

1 Moderate Content Management Systems

Page 8

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 12: Getting Started with Bootstrap QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 12.12 - Describe a content management system NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Content Management Systems KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 2/20/2020 9:41 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/20/2020 9:44 PM 19. You can create media queries with the same breakpoints used for Bootstrap media queries within your custom style sheet in order to style certain elements for specific viewports. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct You can create media queries with these same breakpoints within your custom style sheet in order to style certain elements for specific viewports. Incorrect You can create media queries with these same breakpoints within your custom style sheet in order to style certain elements for specific viewports.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring Bootstrap QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:12.01 - Describe the Bootstrap framework NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Content Management Systems KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 2/20/2020 9:46 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/21/2020 5:41 PM 20. You can apply class selector style rules by adding them as an attribute to HTML elements. a. True b. False ANSWER: True FEEDBACK: Correct You can apply class selector style rules by adding them as an attribute to HTML elements. Incorrect You can apply class selector style rules by adding them as an attribute to HTML elements.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY: REFERENCES: QUESTION TYPE: HAS VARIABLES:

1 Moderate Exploring Bootstrap True / False False

Page 9

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 12: Getting Started with Bootstrap LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:12.01 - Describe the Bootstrap framework NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Content Management Systems KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 2/20/2020 9:49 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/21/2020 12:53 PM 21. The collapse class value specifies sticky content. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct The collapse class value specifies collapsible content. Incorrect The collapse class value specifies collapsible content.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring Bootstrap QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:12.03 - Create a Bootstrap navbar NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Content Management Systems KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 2/20/2020 10:09 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/20/2020 10:11 PM 22. Using an "@" symbol for the href value when a page does not yet exist allows you to click a link without receiving an error that the page could not be found. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct Using an "#" symbol for the href value when a page does not yet exist allows you to click a link without receiving an error that the page could not be found. Incorrect Using an "#" symbol for the href value when a page does not yet exist allows you to click a link without receiving an error that the page could not be found.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring Bootstrap QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:12.03 - Create a Bootstrap navbar NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Content Management Systems KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 10

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 12: Getting Started with Bootstrap DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

2/20/2020 10:11 PM 2/20/2020 10:13 PM

23. To apply a light gray background, use the bg-primary class. a. True b. False ANSWER: False FEEDBACK: Correct To apply a light gray background, use the bg-light class. Incorrect To apply a light gray background, use the bg-light class.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring Bootstrap QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:12.03 - Create a Bootstrap navbar NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Content Management Systems KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 2/22/2020 2:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/22/2020 2:02 PM Multiple Choice 24. Which is an online system used to manage website content? a. content management b. core authentication c. keystone management d. website verification ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. A content management system is an online system used to manage website content. b. A content management system is an online system used to manage website content. c. A content management system is an online system used to manage website content. d. A content management system is an online system used to manage website content.

Page 11

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 12: Getting Started with Bootstrap TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Project Management Bloom’s: Remember 10/8/2019 3:19 PM 2/20/2020 1:25 PM

25. A typical content management system consists of a content management application and a content _____ application. a. disposition b. review c. resource d. delivery ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. A typical CMS consists of a content management application (CMA) and a content delivery application (CDA). b. A typical CMS consists of a content management application (CMA) and a content delivery application (CDA). c. A typical CMS consists of a content management application (CMA) and a content delivery application (CDA). d. A typical CMS consists of a content management application (CMA) and a content delivery application (CDA).

Page 12

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 12: Getting Started with Bootstrap and writes the underlying code.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Content Management Systems QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 12.12 - Describe a content management system NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Project Management KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:19 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/21/2020 5:46 PM 27. WordPress, Joomla, and Drupal are some of the popular _____. a. world wide web browsers b. operating systems c. content management systems d. application software ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. Popular content management systems include WordPress, Joomla, and Drupal. b. Popular content management systems include WordPress, Joomla, and Drupal. c. Popular content management systems include WordPress, Joomla, and Drupal. d. Popular content management systems include WordPress, Joomla, and Drupal. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Content Management Systems QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 12.12 - Describe a content management system NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Project Management KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:19 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/6/2020 2:23 PM 28. Identify an open-source content management system (CMS) distributed under the GNU General Public License. a. Adobe b. Explorer c. SilverStone d. Drupal ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. Drupal is an open-source content management system (CMS) distributed under Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 13

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 12: Getting Started with Bootstrap the GNU General Public License. b. Drupal is an open-source content management system (CMS) distributed under the GNU General Public License. c. Drupal is an open-source content management system (CMS) distributed under the GNU General Public License. d. Drupal is an open-source content management system (CMS) distributed under the GNU General Public License.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Content Management Systems QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 12.12 - Describe a content management system NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Project Management KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:19 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/21/2020 12:54 PM 29. A web _____ is a development tool that provides a standard foundation on which to build a website and simplifies the coding process by providing access to predefined style sheets and script files. a. journal b. validator c. master d. framework ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. A web framework is a development tool that provides a standard foundation on which to build a website and simplifies the coding process by providing access to predefined style sheets and script files. b. A web framework is a development tool that provides a standard foundation on which to build a website and simplifies the coding process by providing access to predefined style sheets and script files. c. A web framework is a development tool that provides a standard foundation on which to build a website and simplifies the coding process by providing access to predefined style sheets and script files. d. A web framework is a development tool that provides a standard foundation on which to build a website and simplifies the coding process by providing access to predefined style sheets and script files.

Page 14

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 12: Getting Started with Bootstrap TOPICS: KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Bootstrap Bloom’s: Remember 10/8/2019 3:19 PM 2/20/2020 1:09 PM

30. Bootstrap is a popular, mobile-first, _____, responsive design web framework. a. front-end b. client-sided c. back-end d. script-sided ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. Bootstrap is a popular, mobile-first, front-end, responsive design web framework. b. Bootstrap is a popular, mobile-first, front-end, responsive design web framework. c. Bootstrap is a popular, mobile-first, front-end, responsive design web framework. d. Bootstrap is a popular, mobile-first, front-end, responsive design web framework. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring Bootstrap QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:12.01 - Describe the Bootstrap framework NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Bootstrap KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Remember DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:19 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/20/2020 1:07 PM 31. A web framework is a development tool that consists of HTML, CSS, and _____. a. Chrome b. JavaScript c. Oberon d. Python ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. A web framework is a development tool that consists of HTML, CSS, and JavaScript. b. A web framework is a development tool that consists of HTML, CSS, and JavaScript. c. A web framework is a development tool that consists of HTML, CSS, and JavaScript. d. A web framework is a development tool that consists of HTML, CSS, and JavaScript.

POINTS: DIFFICULTY:

1 Easy

Page 15

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 12: Getting Started with Bootstrap REFERENCES: Exploring Bootstrap QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:12.01 - Describe the Bootstrap framework NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Bootstrap KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:19 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/20/2020 1:11 PM 32. For whom is Joomla, the open-source CMS, most ideal? a. beginner web developers who prefer not to code b. experienced web developers who enjoy coding c. web clients looking to cut out the middleman d. webmasters looking for short-cuts ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. Joomla is an open-source CMS, ideal for experienced web developers who enjoy coding. b. Joomla is an open-source CMS, ideal for experienced web developers who enjoy coding. c. Joomla is an open-source CMS, ideal for experienced web developers who enjoy coding. d. Joomla is an open-source CMS, ideal for experienced web developers who enjoy coding.

Page 16

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 12: Getting Started with Bootstrap geographic location. b. A CDN is a network of servers that provides web content based on the user’s geographic location. c. A CDN is a network of servers that provides web content based on the user’s geographic location. d. A CDN is a network of servers that provides web content based on the user’s geographic location.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring Bootstrap QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:12.01 - Describe the Bootstrap framework NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Bootstrap KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 2/20/2020 2:10 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/20/2020 2:12 PM 34. Which term is used for attributes that address accessibility for webpage content? a. Content Specific Networks b. Responsive Value Indicators c. Hypertext Markup Modulators d. Accessible Rich Internet Applications ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. Accessible Rich Internet Applications are attributes used to address accessibility for webpage content. b. Accessible Rich Internet Applications are attributes used to address accessibility for webpage content. c. Accessible Rich Internet Applications are attributes used to address accessibility for webpage content. d. Accessible Rich Internet Applications are attributes used to address accessibility for webpage content.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring Bootstrap QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:12.04 - Integrate a Bootstrap hamburger menu NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Bootstrap KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 2/20/2020 2:53 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/20/2020 2:57 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 17

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 12: Getting Started with Bootstrap 35. As you develop a webpage, you might want to include a large box of content on the page to grab the user’s attention; Bootstrap provides this feature with the _____, which is a large, responsive box used to contain webpage information. a. favicon b. jumbotron c. Aria d. jQuery ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. As you develop a webpage, you might want to include a large box of content on the page to grab the user’s attention; Bootstrap provides this feature with the jumbotron, which is a large, responsive box used to contain webpage information. b. As you develop a webpage, you might want to include a large box of content on the page to grab the user’s attention; Bootstrap provides this feature with the jumbotron, which is a large, responsive box used to contain webpage information. c. As you develop a webpage, you might want to include a large box of content on the page to grab the user’s attention; Bootstrap provides this feature with the jumbotron, which is a large, responsive box used to contain webpage information. d. As you develop a webpage, you might want to include a large box of content on the page to grab the user’s attention; Bootstrap provides this feature with the jumbotron, which is a large, responsive box used to contain webpage information.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring Bootstrap QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:12.06 - Define and create a jumbotron NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Bootstrap KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 2/20/2020 3:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/21/2020 12:55 PM 36. When one is creating a new webpage and needs to add links, it is a common practice to use the _____ symbol for the href value when the page does not yet exist. a. * b. @ c. # d. ^ ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. When you are creating a new webpage and need to add links, it is a common practice to use the # symbol for the href value when the page does not yet exist. b. When you are creating a new webpage and need to add links, it is a common practice to use the # symbol for the href value when the page does not yet exist. c. When you are creating a new webpage and need to add links, it is a common practice to use the # symbol for the href value when the page does not yet exist. d. When you are creating a new webpage and need to add links, it is a common Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 18

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 12: Getting Started with Bootstrap practice to use the # symbol for the href value when the page does not yet exist.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring Bootstrap QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:12.03 - Create a Bootstrap navbar NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Bootstrap KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 2/20/2020 3:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/21/2020 5:52 PM 37. Which color in Bootstrap is used to indicate success? a. yellow b. teal c. medium gray d. green ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. In Bootstrap, green is used to indicate success. b. In Bootstrap, green is used to indicate success. c. In Bootstrap, green is used to indicate success. d. In Bootstrap, green is used to indicate success. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring Bootstrap QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:12.07 - Explain how to style text using Bootstrap NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Bootstrap KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 2/20/2020 3:22 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/20/2020 3:33 PM 38. Which Bootstrap class horizontally centers an element? a. mx-auto b. mtc. py-auto d. ptANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. The Bootstrap class that horizontally centers an element is mx-auto. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 19

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 12: Getting Started with Bootstrap b. The Bootstrap class that horizontally centers an element is mx-auto. c. The Bootstrap class that horizontally centers an element is mx-auto. d. The Bootstrap class that horizontally centers an element is mx-auto. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring Bootstrap QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:12.07 - Explain how to style text using Bootstrap NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Bootstrap KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 2/20/2020 3:29 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/20/2020 9:39 PM 39. Which color in Bootstrap is used to indicate secondary information? a. yellow b. teal c. medium gray d. green ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. In Bootstrap, medium gray is used to indicate secondary information. b. In Bootstrap, medium gray is used to indicate secondary information. c. In Bootstrap, medium gray is used to indicate secondary information. d. In Bootstrap, medium gray is used to indicate secondary information. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring Bootstrap QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:12.07 - Explain how to style text using Bootstrap NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Bootstrap KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 2/20/2020 3:32 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/20/2020 3:33 PM 40. Which color in Bootstrap is used for information? a. yellow b. teal c. black d. green Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 20

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 12: Getting Started with Bootstrap ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

b a. In Bootstrap, teal is used for information. b. In Bootstrap, teal is used for information. c. In Bootstrap, teal is used for information. d. In Bootstrap, teal is used for information.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring Bootstrap QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:12.07 - Explain how to style text using Bootstrap NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Bootstrap KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 2/20/2020 3:33 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/20/2020 3:37 PM 41. Which color in Bootstrap is used to indicate a warning? a. orange/yellow b. teal c. light gray d. red ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. In Bootstrap, orange/yellow is used to indicate a warning. b. In Bootstrap, orange/yellow is used to indicate a warning. c. In Bootstrap, orange/yellow is used to indicate a warning. d. In Bootstrap, orange/yellow is used to indicate a warning. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring Bootstrap QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:12.07 - Explain how to style text using Bootstrap NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Bootstrap KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 2/20/2020 3:35 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/20/2020 3:37 PM 42. Which color in Bootstrap is used to indicate danger? a. orange/yellow b. blue Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 21

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 12: Getting Started with Bootstrap c. light gray d. red ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

d a. In Bootstrap, red is used to indicate danger. b. In Bootstrap, red is used to indicate danger. c. In Bootstrap, red is used to indicate danger. d. In Bootstrap, red is used to indicate danger.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring Bootstrap QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:12.07 - Explain how to style text using Bootstrap NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Bootstrap KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 2/20/2020 3:37 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/20/2020 3:46 PM 43. When writing jQuery statements, begin each statement with the _____ symbol. a. $ b. + c. @ d. = ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. When writing jQuery statements, begin each statement with the $ symbol. b. When writing jQuery statements, begin each statement with the $ symbol. c. When writing jQuery statements, begin each statement with the $ symbol. d. When writing jQuery statements, begin each statement with the $ symbol. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring Bootstrap QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:12.08 - Write a jQuery document ready event NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Bootstrap KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 2/20/2020 3:44 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/20/2020 3:46 PM 44. The _____ text class in Bootstrap makes a paragraph stand out. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 22

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 12: Getting Started with Bootstrap a. lead b. font-weight-bold c. text-primary d. text-light ANSWER: FEEDBACK:

a a. The lead text class in Bootstrap makes a paragraph stand out. b. The lead text class in Bootstrap makes a paragraph stand out. c. The lead text class in Bootstrap makes a paragraph stand out. d. The lead text class in Bootstrap makes a paragraph stand out.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring Bootstrap QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:12.07 - Explain how to style text using Bootstrap NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Bootstrap KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 2/20/2020 9:26 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/20/2020 9:30 PM 45. If you want to apply rounded corners to an image, add a class attribute with the value _____ to an img element. a. lead b. rounded c. kern d. corner ANSWER: b FEEDBACK: a. If you want to apply rounded corners to an image, add a class attribute with the value rounded to an img element. b. If you want to apply rounded corners to an image, add a class attribute with the value rounded to an img element. c. If you want to apply rounded corners to an image, add a class attribute with the value rounded to an img element. d. If you want to apply rounded corners to an image, add a class attribute with the value rounded to an img element.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring Bootstrap QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:12.10 - Explain how to style images using Bootstrap NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Bootstrap Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 23

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 12: Getting Started with Bootstrap KEYWORDS: DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

Bloom’s: Understand 2/20/2020 9:51 PM 2/20/2020 9:52 PM

46. The navbar-expand class is followed by -sm, -md, -lg, or -xl to set the size of the _____ navbar. a. header b. horizontal c. vertical d. corner ANSWER: c FEEDBACK: a. The navbar-expand class is followed by -sm, -md, -lg, or -xl to set the size of the vertical navbar. b. The navbar-expand class is followed by -sm, -md, -lg, or -xl to set the size of the vertical navbar. c. The navbar-expand class is followed by -sm, -md, -lg, or -xl to set the size of the vertical navbar. d. The navbar-expand class is followed by -sm, -md, -lg, or -xl to set the size of the vertical navbar.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring Bootstrap QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:12.03 - Create a Bootstrap navbar NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Bootstrap KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 2/20/2020 9:55 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/20/2020 9:59 PM 47. Identify the correct code for an HTML 5 nav tag with a class attribute that uses the navbar and navbar-expand-sm values. a. <nav class="navbarlightnavbar-expand"> b. [navbar navbar-expand-sm"class attribute] c. +navexpand="navclass navbar d. <nav class="navbar navbar-expand-sm"> ANSWER: d FEEDBACK: a. The the correct code for an HTML 5 nav tag with a class attribute that uses the navbar and navbar-expand-sm values is < nav class = "navbar navbar-expandsm " >. b. The the correct code for an HTML 5 nav tag with a class attribute that uses the navbar and navbar-expand-sm values is < nav class = "navbar navbar-expandsm " >. c. The the correct code for an HTML 5 nav tag with a class attribute that uses the navbar and navbar-expand-sm values is < nav class = "navbar navbar-expandCopyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 24

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 12: Getting Started with Bootstrap sm " >. d. The the correct code for an HTML 5 nav tag with a class attribute that uses the navbar and navbar-expand-sm values is < nav class = "navbar navbar-expandsm " >.

POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring Bootstrap QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:12.03 - Create a Bootstrap navbar NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Bootstrap KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 2/20/2020 10:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/20/2020 10:05 PM 48. You can format the navbar to remain at the top of the page as you scroll, or create a “sticky” navbar, by specifying the _____ class. a. fixed-top b. expand c. header d. stop ANSWER: a FEEDBACK: a. You can format the navbar to remain at the top of the page, or create a “sticky” navbar, as you scroll by specifying the fixed-top class. b. You can format the navbar to remain at the top of the page, or create a “sticky” navbar, as you scroll by specifying the fixed-top class. c. You can format the navbar to remain at the top of the page, or create a “sticky” navbar, as you scroll by specifying the fixed-top class. d. You can format the navbar to remain at the top of the page, or create a “sticky” navbar, as you scroll by specifying the fixed-top class.

Page 25

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 12: Getting Started with Bootstrap 49. With a content management system, a web developer can create and preserve, or lock, a design so that _____ can only update content and not the design. ANSWER: webpage authors POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Content Management Systems QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 12.12 - Describe a content management system NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Project Management KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:19 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/20/2020 2:20 PM 50. Using a content management system takes the pressure off a(n) _____ by allowing multiple authors to update their pages as necessary. ANSWER: webmaster POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Content Management Systems QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 12.12 - Describe a content management system NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Content Management Systems KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 2/20/2020 1:26 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/20/2020 1:28 PM 51. When one uses the navbar-collapse class, a(n) _____ replaces the text navigation links. ANSWER: hamburger menu hamburger icon hamburger POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring Bootstrap QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 26

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 12: Getting Started with Bootstrap LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:12.03 - Create a Bootstrap navbar NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Content Management Systems KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 2/20/2020 2:02 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/22/2020 10:56 AM 52. When a user accesses a page that is linked to a CDN, web content from the server _____ to the user is provided. ANSWER: closest POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring Bootstrap QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:12.01 - Describe the Bootstrap framework NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Content Management Systems KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 2/20/2020 2:13 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/20/2020 2:14 PM 53. In Bootstrap, the _____ class uses a fixed width, based on the size of the current viewport. ANSWER: container POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring Bootstrap QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:12.05 - Style navigation links using Bootstrap NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Content Management Systems KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 2/20/2020 2:24 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/20/2020 3:05 PM 54. If you want to format an element to use white text in Bootstrap, add a class attribute with the value _____. ANSWER: text-white POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Easy REFERENCES: Exploring Bootstrap QUESTION TYPE: Completion Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 27

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 12: Getting Started with Bootstrap HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:12.07 - Explain how to style text using Bootstrap NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Content Management Systems KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 2/20/2020 3:03 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/20/2020 9:39 PM 55. In Bootstrap, the _____ class sets the width to 100%, using the complete width of the viewport. ANSWER: container-fluid POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring Bootstrap QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:12.05 - Style navigation links using Bootstrap NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Content Management Systems KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 2/20/2020 3:05 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/20/2020 3:07 PM 56. The jumbotron class includes rounded corners, while the _____ class does not use rounded corners and spans the full width of the viewport. jumbotron-fluid ANSWER: POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring Bootstrap QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:12.06 - Define and create a jumbotron NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Content Management Systems KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 2/20/2020 3:18 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/22/2020 11:02 AM 57. In Bootstrap, the color _____ is used to indicate primary, important information. ANSWER: blue POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 28

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 12: Getting Started with Bootstrap DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring Bootstrap QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:12.07 - Explain how to style text using Bootstrap NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Content Management Systems KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 2/20/2020 3:20 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/22/2020 11:03 AM 58. To use the Bootstrap grid system, you create a row using the _____ class value, and then specify the number of columns needed. ANSWER: row POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring Bootstrap QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:12.09 - Describe and use the Bootstrap grid system NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Content Management Systems KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 2/20/2020 3:47 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/20/2020 9:11 PM 59. The Bootstrap text class used to make text applied grayed out is _____. ANSWER: text-muted muted POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring Bootstrap QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:12.07 - Explain how to style text using Bootstrap NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Content Management Systems KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 2/20/2020 9:13 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/20/2020 9:15 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 29

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 12: Getting Started with Bootstrap 60. The Bootstrap text class used to make a paragraph stand out is _____. ANSWER: lead POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring Bootstrap QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:12.07 - Explain how to style text using Bootstrap NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Content Management Systems KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 2/20/2020 9:15 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/20/2020 9:16 PM 61. The Bootstrap _____ text class used to reduce the cell padding. ANSWER: table-sm POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring Bootstrap QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:12.11 - Style a table using Bootstrap NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Content Management Systems KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 2/20/2020 9:18 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/20/2020 9:24 PM 62. The Bootstrap _____ text class applies a light gray background to a table row when the mouse pointer is over the row. ANSWER: table-hover POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring Bootstrap QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:12.11 - Style a table using Bootstrap NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Content Management Systems KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 30

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 12: Getting Started with Bootstrap DATE CREATED: DATE MODIFIED:

2/20/2020 9:20 PM 2/20/2020 9:25 PM

63. The Bootstrap _____ text class applies a light gray background to alternating table rows (zebra-striping) within the body of the table. ANSWER: table-striped POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring Bootstrap QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:12.11 - Style a table using Bootstrap NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Content Management Systems KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 2/20/2020 9:21 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/20/2020 9:24 PM 64. The Bootstrap _____ text class removes all borders from the table. ANSWER: table-borderless POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring Bootstrap QUESTION TYPE: Completion HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:12.11 - Style a table using Bootstrap NATIONAL STANDARDS: United States - BUSPROG: Technology TOPICS: Content Management Systems KEYWORDS: Bloom’s: Understand DATE CREATED: 2/20/2020 10:00 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/21/2020 12:59 PM Matching Identify the correct class for each Bootstrap background color description. a. bg-warning b. bg-info c. bg-danger d. bg-light e. bg-primary f. bg-secondary Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 31

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 12: Getting Started with Bootstrap g. bg-success DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring Bootstrap QUESTION TYPE: Matching HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:12.03 - Create a Bootstrap navbar TOPICS: Bootstrap KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 2/20/2020 2:37 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/22/2020 2:27 PM 65. Applies a dark blue background color. ANSWER: e POINTS: 1 66. Applies a red background color. ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 67. Applies a dark gray background color. ANSWER: f POINTS: 1 68. Applies a yellow/orange background color. ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 69. Applies a dark green background color. ANSWER: g POINTS: 1 70. Applies a light gray background color. ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 71. Applies a dark teal background color. ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 Identify the correct navigation bar class with the description. a. navbar b. navbar-brand c. navbar-collapse d. navbar-dark e. navbar-expand Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 32

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 12: Getting Started with Bootstrap f. navbar-light g. navbar-nav h. navbar-text i. navbar-toggler DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring Bootstrap QUESTION TYPE: Matching HAS VARIABLES: False LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:12.03 - Create a Bootstrap navbar TOPICS: Bootstrap KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Remember DATE CREATED: 2/21/2020 8:04 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/21/2020 8:12 PM 72. Used to wrap the business name or logo. ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 73. Formats navbar text links white. ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 74. Creates a fluid navbar using Bootstrap. ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 75. Formats navbar text links black. ANSWER: f POINTS: 1 76. Used to format links within the navbar. ANSWER: g POINTS: 1 77. Used to collapse the navbar. ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 78. Used to vertically center text. ANSWER: h POINTS: 1 79. Used to format links vertically for smaller viewports. ANSWER: e POINTS: 1 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 33

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 12: Getting Started with Bootstrap 80. Used to format the hamburger menu icon. ANSWER: i POINTS: 1 Essay 81. Explain the purpose of using Bootstrap, the responsive design web framework. ANSWER: Bootstrap is a popular, mobile-first, front-end, responsive design web framework. A web framework is a development tool that consists of HTML, CSS, and JavaScript. It provides a standard foundation on which to build a website and simplifies the coding process by providing access to predefined style sheets and script files. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring Bootstrap QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:12.01 - Describe the Bootstrap framework TOPICS: Bootstrap KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 2/20/2020 1:30 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/20/2020 1:33 PM 82. Describe the Bootstrap class values container and container-fluid. ANSWER: The Bootstrap framework includes hundreds of predefined style rules for classes. Two important class values are container and container-fluid. Both classes are used to make an HTML element responsive. The container class uses a fixed width, based on the size of the current viewport. The container-fluid class sets the width to 100%, using the complete width of the viewport. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring Bootstrap QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 12.05 - Style navigation links using Bootstrap TOPICS: Bootstrap KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 2/20/2020 1:33 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/20/2020 1:39 PM 83. As you develop a webpage, you might want to include a large box of content on the page to grab the user’s attention. Explain how Bootstrap provides this feature. Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 34

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 12: Getting Started with Bootstrap ANSWER:

As you develop a webpage, you might want to include a large box of content on the page to grab the user’s attention. Bootstrap provides this feature with the jumbotron, which is a large, responsive box used to contain webpage information. Jumbotrons are commonly used for hero content near the top of webpage. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: Exploring Bootstrap QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:12.06 - Define and create a jumbotron TOPICS: Bootstrap KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 2/20/2020 1:37 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/20/2020 1:39 PM 84. Explain the importance of using responsive images and how they are accomplished using Bootstrap. ANSWER: Responsive images allow an image to grow and shrink, depending on the size of the viewport. To make an image responsive, you need a style rule for the img element that sets the max-width to 100%. Bootstrap has already created this style rule with the img-fluid class, which also sets the height to auto. To make an image responsive, add the img-fluid class to an img element. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Moderate REFERENCES: Exploring Bootstrap QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO:12.10 - Explain how to style images using Bootstrap TOPICS: Bootstrap KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 2/20/2020 1:44 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/20/2020 9:40 PM 85. Briefly discuss WordPress, Joomla, and Drupal, three of the most popular content management systems. ANSWER: Many businesses use WordPress for their websites and their blogs. In fact, nearly 35% of all websites use WordPress. It has quickly become one of the top-ranked content management systems with over 60% market share, according to w3techs.com Web Technology Surveys. WordPress offers web developers many tools for building a website. The organization also provides support and functionality for high-traffic e-commerce websites. Joomla is an open-source CMS, ideal for experienced web developers who enjoy coding. It is the second most popular CMS. Joomla offers many of the same tools as WordPress for developing a website. Many types of businesses and organizations use Joomla for Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 35

Name:

Class:

Date:

Chapter 12: Getting Started with Bootstrap their website, including e-commerce websites, nonprofit websites, government websites, and other business websites. Drupal is another open-source CMS, distributed under the GNU General Public License. It is the third most popular CMS used today. Industries that use Drupal for their website include transportation, sports, healthcare, higher education, and nonprofit organizations. According to w3techs.com, the Drupal CMS is used the most by high-traffic websites. POINTS: 1 DIFFICULTY: Challenging REFERENCES: Content Management Systems QUESTION TYPE: Essay HAS VARIABLES: False STUDENT ENTRY MODE: Basic LEARNING OBJECTIVES: LO: 12.12 - Describe a content management system TOPICS: Content Management Systems KEYWORDS: Bloom's: Understand DATE CREATED: 2/20/2020 1:40 PM DATE MODIFIED: 2/20/2020 1:48 PM

Page 36

Name:

Class:

Date:

HTML_Special_Feature_1___Attracting_Visitors_to_Your_Web_Site 1. The ____ is a compressed format that allows computers to display and manipulate text. a. SEO b. W3C c. UTF d. FTP ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: HTML 223 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:22 PM DATE MODIFIED: 10/8/2019 3:22 PM 2. ____ is the process of improving the amount of traffic that you get on your Web site. a. URL management b. Web optimization c. HTMLx d. SEO ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: HTML 224 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:22 PM DATE MODIFIED: 10/8/2019 3:22 PM 3. ____ contains trusted public information regarding Internet domain name registration services. a. The W3C b. InterNIC c. The NSF d. DNS ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: HTML 226 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:22 PM DATE MODIFIED: 10/8/2019 3:22 PM 4. A ____ name is the server name portion of the URL. a. domain b. target c. machine d. path ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: HTML 226 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:22 PM DATE MODIFIED: 10/8/2019 3:22 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

HTML_Special_Feature_1___Attracting_Visitors_to_Your_Web_Site 5. ____ Web hosting is less expensive than other options because you do not have to pay for a dedicated server to host just your Web site. a. SEO b. Optimized c. Virtual d. Indexed ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: HTML 227 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:22 PM DATE MODIFIED: 10/8/2019 3:22 PM 6. A Web site is an active marketing tool. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: HTML 220 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:22 PM DATE MODIFIED: 10/8/2019 3:22 PM 7. UTF-16 is the preferred encoding standard for Web pages, e-mail, and other applications. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: HTML 223 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:22 PM DATE MODIFIED: 10/8/2019 3:22 PM 8. Visitors often look at the description in the meta tag to determine whether they want to click that particular link (or URL) from the list of URLs that the search engine displays. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: HTML 224 QUESTION TYPE: True / False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

HTML_Special_Feature_1___Attracting_Visitors_to_Your_Web_Site HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:22 PM DATE MODIFIED: 10/8/2019 3:22 PM 9. Optimizing a Web site involves editing the content and HTML in the Web page to increase its relevance to specific keywords and to remove barriers to the page indexing functions of search engines. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: HTML 224 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:22 PM DATE MODIFIED: 10/8/2019 3:22 PM 10. Search engines use meta tag descriptions to find your Web pages, while they display meta tag keywords next to the respective Web page URLs. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: HTML 224 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:22 PM DATE MODIFIED: 10/8/2019 3:22 PM 11. The W3C is responsible for managing and coordinating the Domain Name System to ensure that every Internet address is unique, and that all users of the Internet can find all valid addresses. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: HTML 226 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:22 PM DATE MODIFIED: 10/8/2019 3:22 PM 12. There are currently six companies that provide Web hosting services. a. True b. False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

HTML_Special_Feature_1___Attracting_Visitors_to_Your_Web_Site ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: HTML 227 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:22 PM DATE MODIFIED: 10/8/2019 3:22 PM 13. Publishing your Web site means transferring your files to the Web server. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: HTML 227 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:22 PM DATE MODIFIED: 10/8/2019 3:22 PM 14. One way to advertise your Web site is to negotiate reciprocal links in which you agree to link to a Web site if they agree to link to your Web site. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: HTML 228 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:22 PM DATE MODIFIED: 10/8/2019 3:22 PM 15. It is a good idea to register your site with search engines that specialize in subject matter related to your Web site. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: HTML 228 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:22 PM DATE MODIFIED: 10/8/2019 3:22 PM

Page 4

Name:

Class:

Date:

HTML_Special_Feature_2___Converting_Frames_on_Your_Web_Site 1. A(n) ____ is a rectangular area of a Web page in which a separate Web page can be displayed. a. index b. layout c. frame d. applet ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: HTML 394 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:25 PM DATE MODIFIED: 10/8/2019 3:25 PM 2. The ____ standards recommend that frames not be used for Web sites. a. XHTML b. NSF c. HTML 5 d. ADA ANSWER: d POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: HTML 394 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:25 PM DATE MODIFIED: 10/8/2019 3:25 PM 3. The frame ____ file tells the browser what frames to display and structures the frame layout. a. structure b. definition c. skeleton d. layout ANSWER: b POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: HTML 396 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:25 PM DATE MODIFIED: 10/8/2019 3:25 PM 4. Which of the following is NOT an attribute of the <frame> tag? a. cols b. marginwidth c. frameborder d. src ANSWER: a POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: HTML 396 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:25 PM DATE MODIFIED: 10/8/2019 3:25 PM Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 1

Name:

Class:

Date:

HTML_Special_Feature_2___Converting_Frames_on_Your_Web_Site 5. Using the ____ tag, you can lay out a Web page so that a menu remains constant in one section and the content displays in a second section of the Web page. a. <matrix> b. <layout> c. <div> d. <table> ANSWER: c POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: HTML 401-HTML 402 QUESTION TYPE: Multiple Choice HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:25 PM DATE MODIFIED: 10/8/2019 3:25 PM 6. The only problem with the use of frames relates to the recommendations made by the standards of the Americans with Disabilities Act. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: HTML 394 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:25 PM DATE MODIFIED: 10/8/2019 3:25 PM 7. The frameborder attribute of the <frame> tag turns frame orders on or off (with a value of "on" or "off"). a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: HTML 396 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:25 PM DATE MODIFIED: 10/8/2019 3:25 PM 8. The src attribute of the <frame> tag indicates the Web page or other file to be displayed in the frame. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: HTML 396 QUESTION TYPE: True / False Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 2

Name:

Class:

Date:

HTML_Special_Feature_2___Converting_Frames_on_Your_Web_Site HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:25 PM DATE MODIFIED: 10/8/2019 3:25 PM 9. The document type to use with frames is Transitional. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: HTML 397 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:25 PM DATE MODIFIED: 10/8/2019 3:25 PM 10. Each frame in a frameset can contain at most two Web pages at the same time. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: HTML 397 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:25 PM DATE MODIFIED: 10/8/2019 3:25 PM 11. All the frames in a frameset must have the same attributes, such as border, scrolling, the ability to resize, etc. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: HTML 397 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:25 PM DATE MODIFIED: 10/8/2019 3:25 PM 12. Only the topmost Web page in a frameset can be viewed independently in the browser as well as within the frameset. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: HTML 397 Copyright Cengage Learning. Powered by Cognero.

Page 3

Name:

Class:

Date:

HTML_Special_Feature_2___Converting_Frames_on_Your_Web_Site QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:25 PM DATE MODIFIED: 10/8/2019 3:25 PM 13. The only way to be completely sure that a Web site uses frames is to apply the frames filter. a. True b. False ANSWER: False POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: HTML 399 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:25 PM DATE MODIFIED: 10/8/2019 3:25 PM 14. Frame layouts can be designed in a variety of ways. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: HTML 399 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:25 PM DATE MODIFIED: 10/8/2019 3:25 PM 15. One way to convert from a frame structure is to copy the static portion of the Web page to all the pages in the Web site. a. True b. False ANSWER: True POINTS: 1 REFERENCES: HTML 402 QUESTION TYPE: True / False HAS VARIABLES: False DATE CREATED: 10/8/2019 3:25 PM DATE MODIFIED: 10/8/2019 3:25 PM

Page 4